Egyptian Code 203 2006 English

ARAB REPUBLIC OF EGYPT
MINISTRY OF HOUSING, UTILITIES

AND URBAN COMMUNITIES
HOUSING AND BUILDING NATIONAL

RESEARCH CENTER
EGYPTIAN CODE
FOR
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE

STRUCTURES
(ECP 203- 2007)
EGYPTIAN CODE STANDING COMMITTEE

FOR
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
(ECP 203- 2007)
Egyptian Code for Design and Construction of Concrete Structures ECP 203-2007
Preface
Preface
This document is an unofficial translation of the formalized Egyptian Code

for the Design and Construction of Concrete Structures, ECP 203-2007.
The original document is written in Arabic language which is considered to

be the official version of the code. Accordingly, for any differences in the
contents or interpretations of any provisions of the code between the original
and the translated versions, the contents of the Arabic version shall prevail
and govern.
It is noted that the translation of the code was carried out by members of the
Egyptian code committees.
Currently, the English translation of the code was technically reviewed by

representatives of the Egyptian standing committee of the code.
Subsequently, the translated version of the code shall be presented to the

standing committee of the code for an overall review and approval as the
official English translation of the code
i
CONTENTS
EGYPTIAN CODE
FOR
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES
(ECP 203 2007)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 : SCOPE AND DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS... 1-1
1-1 Scope 1-1
1-2 Objectives of the code.. 1-1
1-3 Design fundamentals 1-1
1-4 Limit states design method.. 1-2
CHAPTER 2 : MATERIALS AND MIXTURES FOR REINFORCED

AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 2-1
2-1 General. 2-1
2-2 Properties of materials................................................................. 2-3
2-2-1 Cement......................................................................................... 2-3
2-2-2 Aggregates................................................................................... 2-3
2-2-2-1 General......................................................................................... 2-3
2-2-2-2 Aggregate requirements............................................................... 2-3
2-2-3 Mixing and curing water.............................................................. 2-6
2-2-4 Admixtures................................................................................... 2-7
2-2-5 Steel reinforcement...................................................................... 2-12
2-2-5-1 Reinforcing steel types................................................................. 2-12
2-2-5-2 Nominal bar diameters................................................................. 2-12
2-2-5-3 Mechanical properties of steel reinforcement.............................. 2-12
2-2-5-4 Steel stress-strain curve............................................................... 2-13
2-2-5-5 Steel characteristic strength......................................................... 2-13
2-2-5-6 Welding of steel bars................................................................... 2-13
2-2-6 Steel reinforcement for prestressed concrete............................... 2-13
2-3 Concrete properties...................................................................... 2-14
2-3-1 Fresh concrete properties............................................................. 2-14
2-3-1-1 Bulk density of concrete.............................................................. 2-14
2-3-1-2 Concrete consistency................................................................... 2-14
2-3-1-3 Temperature of fresh concrete..................................................... 2-15
2-3-2 Mechanical properties of hardened concrete............................... 2-15
2-3-2-1 Compressive strength................................................................... 2-15
2-3-2-2 Axial direct tensile strength......................................................... 2-16
2-3-2-3 Bond strength with reinforcing steel............................................ 2-17
2-3-3 Dimensional changes of concrete................................................ 2-17
2-3-3-1 Modulus of elasticity................................................................... 2-17
2-3-3-2 Transverse deformation (Poisson's ratio).................................... 2-17
2-3-3-3 Coefficient of thermal expansion................................................ 2-17
i
CONTENTS
2-3-3-4 Drying shrinkage......................................................................... 2-18

2-3-3-5 Creep............................................................................................ 2-19
2-3-4 Durability of concrete.................................................................. 2-20
2-3-4-1 General......................................................................................... 2-20
2-3-4-2 Maximum water/cement (w/c) ratio............................................ 2-20
2-3-4-3 Minimum and maximum cement content.................................... 2-21
2-3-4-4 Maximum salt and deleterious materials contents in mixing
Water........................................................................................... 2-21
2-3-4-5 Maximum chloride ion content in concrete................................. 2-22
2-3-4-6 Maximum sulfate content in concrete.......................................... 2-22
2-3-4-7 Determination of chloride and sulfate contents in concrete........ 2-22
2-3-4-8 Alkali aggregate reaction............................................................. 2-22
2-3-4-8-1 Alkali-silica reaction.................................................................... 2-22
2-3-4-8-2 Alkali-carbonate reaction............................................................. 2-24
2-3-4-9 Concrete exposed to acidic medium............................................ 2-24
2-3-4-10 Concrete exposed to sulfates........................................................ 2-25
2-3-4-11 Concrete exposed to dual action of chlorides and sulfates.......... 2-26
2-3-4-12 Freezing and thawing................................................................... 2-27
2-3-4-13 Protecting reinforcing steel.......................................................... 2-27
2-4 Fire resistance of concrete........................................................... 2-28
2-5 Concrete exposed to abrasion and wear...................................... 2-30
2-5-1 General........................................................................................ 2-30
2-5-2 Requirements for abrasion and wear resistant concrete.............. 2-30
2-6 Basics of concrete mixture design............................................... 2-31
2-6-1 General......................................................................................... 2-31
2-6-2 Mixture design requirements....................................................... 2-32
2-6-2-1 Compressive strength requirements............................................. 2-32
2-6-2-2 Durability requirements............................................................... 2-33
2-6-2-3 Workability requirements............................................................ 2-33
2-6-3 Assurance trial mixtures.............................................................. 2-34
2-6-3-1 Laboratory trial mixtures............................................................. 2-34
2-6-3-2 Compulsory assurance field mixtures.......................................... 2-34
2-6-3-3 Additional assurance mixtures..................................................... 2-35
2-6-4 Ready mix concrete..................................................................... 2-35
2-6-5 Principles of concrete mix evaluation.......................................... 2-36
2-6-5-1 Fresh concrete evaluation............................................................ 2-36
2-6-5-2 Hardened concrete evaluation during construction..................... 2-36
2-7 Ready mix concrete requirements................................................ 2-37
2-8 Self-compacting concrete requirements....................................... 2-37
2-9 Hot-weather concreting requirements.......................................... 2-37
CHAPTER 3: GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 3-1

3-1 Design methods 3-1
3-1-1 Limit states design method.. 3-1
3-1-1-1 Ultimate strength limit state. 3-1
ii
CONTENTS
3-1-1-2 Stability limit state... 3-1

3-1-1-3 Serviceability limit states. 3-1
3-1-2 Elastic (working stress) design method... 3-2
3-2 Safety provisions.. 3-2
3-2-1 Safety provisions for limit states design method. 3-2
3-2-1-1 Loads and load combinations.. 3-2
3-2-1-2 Material strength reduction factors...... 3-5
3-2-2 Safety provisions for working stress design method... 3-7
3-3 Internal effects. 3-7
CHAPTER 4: LIMIT STATES DESIGN METHOD. 4-1

4-1 General considerations. 4-1
4-2 Ultimate strength limit state. 4-1
4-2-1 Ultimate strength limit state: flexure or eccentric forces. 4-1
4-2-1-1 Basic assumptions and general considerations 4-1
4-2-1-2 Sections subject to flexure... 4-5
4-2-1-2-a Sections with tension reinforcement only 4-5
4-2-1-2-b Balanced sections.... 4-5
4-2-1-2-c Upper limit values for Mumax and max for concrete sections with
tension reinforcement only and subject to bending moment... 4-6
4-2-1-2-d Rectangular sections subject to bending moments with
tension and compression reinforcement ..................... 4-8
4-2-1-2-e T- and L-shaped sections with compression flange having a
depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block exceeding the
flange thickness... 4-9
4-2-1-2-f Sections having shapes other than those listed in sections
(4-2-1-2d & e) and subject to single bending. 4-10
4-2-1-2-g Sections subject to biaxial bending.. 4-10
4-2-1-2-h Minimum longitudinal reinforcement for sections subject to
Flexure...... 4-10
4-2-1-3 Sections subject to combined flexure and axial compression.. 4-11
4-2-1-4 Sections subject to axial tension or combined flexure and axial
tension.. 4-13
4-2-2 Ultimate shear strength limit state.... 4-13
4-2-2-1 Beams 4-13
4-2-2-1-1 Nominal ultimate shear force in beams.... 4-13
4-2-2-1-2 Nominal ultimate shear strength... 4-14
4-2-2-1-3 Ultimate shear strength provided by concrete . 4-16
4-2-2-1-4 Nominal shear strength provided by web reinforcement in
Beams... 4-17
4-2-2-1-5 Web reinforcement in beams.... 4-18
4-2-2-1-6 General requirements for web reinforcement... 4-19
4-2-2-1-7 D-Regions..... 4-21
4-2-2-2 Slabs and footings..... 4-21
iii
CONTENTS
4-2-2-3 Punching shear.. 4-21

4-2-2-4 Shear friction. 4-23
4-2-2-5 Brackets and corbels (short cantilevers)... 4-25
4-2-2-6 Deep beams in shear 4-27
4-2-2-6-1 Web reinforcement in deep beams using the empirical Design
Method 4-27
4-2-2-6-2 Web reinforcement in deep beams analyzed according to the
strut-and-tie model... 4-30
4-2-2-6-3 Deep beams supporting loads resulting in tension at the Loaded
Edges .... 4-31
4-2-3 Ultimate torsion strength limit state.. 4-31
4-2-3-1 Sections subject to torsion 4-31
4-2-3-2 Nominal ultimate shear stresses resulting from torsion 4-31
4-2-3-5 Reinforcing steel for resisting shear stresses resulting from
combined shear and torsion.. 4-33
4-2-3-6 Redistribution of torsion in statically indeterminate structures 4-37
4-2-3-7 Torsional rigidity of concrete sections.. 4-38
4-2-4 Ultimate bearing strength limit state. 4-38
4-2-4-1 Design ultimate bearing strength.. 4-38
4-2-5 Development length, embedment length and splices of
Reinforcement... 4-40
4-2-5-1 Development length.. 4-40
4-2-5-2 Anchorage of shear reinforcement... 4-43
4-2-5-3 Development of flexural reinforcement... 4-44
4-2-5-3-1 Development of positive moment reinforcement. 4-46
4-2-5-3-2 Development of negative moment reinforcement 4-47
4-2-5-4 Reinforcement splices.. 4-47
4-2-5-4-2 Lap splices 4-48
4-2-5-4-3 Welded splices and mechanical connections ... 4-50
4-3 Serviceability limit states. 4-51
4-3-1 Deformation and deflection limit states 4-51
4-3-1-1 Calculation of deflections... 4-51
4-3-1-1-1 Immediate deflections... 4-51
4-3-1-1-2 Long-term deflection 4-52
4-3-1-1-3 Total deflection. 4-52
4-3-1-2 Allowable limits of deflection for beams and slabs. 4-52
4-3-1-3 Clear span-to-thickness ratio unless deflections are Computed.. 4-53
4-3-1-3-1 Beams, solid one-way slabs and cantilevers..... 4-53
4-3-1-3-2 Two-way slabs supported on rigid beams. 4-55
4-3-2 Limit states of cracking. 4-56
4-3-2-3 Selection of the factors affecting the crack width 4-56
4-3-2-4 Cases for which the calculations of cracking limit state can be
waived.. 4-61
4-3-2-7 Tensile stresses in concrete sections. 4-63
iv
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5: WORKING STRESS DESIGN METHOD.. 5-1

5-1 General considerations.. 5-1
5-2 Allowable working stresses. 5-1
5-3 Sections subject to flexure or eccentric axial forces. 5-3
5-3-1 Basic assumptions and general considerations. 5-3
5-3-2 Sections subject to flexure 5-4
5-3-3 Sections subject to flexure combined with axial forces 5-5
5-4 Sections subject to shearing forces... 5-6
5-4-1 Beams 5-6
5-4-2 Slabs and footings. 5-8
5-4-3 Punching shear . 5-8
5-5 Sections subject to torsion 5-10
5-6 Bearing loads 5-13
CHAPTER 6: ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 6-1

6-1 General Considerations. 6-1
6-2 Slabs...... 6-2
6-2-1 Solid slabs..... 6-2
6-2-1-1 General.. 6-2
6-2-1-1-1 Spans. 6-2
6-2-1-1-2 Supports 6-2
6-2-1-1-3 Rectangularity ratio.. 6-2
6-2-1-2 One-way solid slabs.. 6-3
6-2-1-2-1 Minimum thickness.. 6-4
6-2-1-2-2 Bending moments. 6-4
6-2-1-2-3 Reinforcement.. 6-7
6-2-1-3 Two-way rectangular solid slabs.. 6-8
6-2-1-3-1 General..... 6-8
6-2-1-3-2 Minimum thickness.. 6-8
6-2-1-3-3 A simplified method for calculation of bending moments in
two-way solid slabs subject to uniformly distributed loads. 6-9
6-2-1-3-4 Reinforcement of two-way slabs... 6-10
6-2-1-3-5 Load distribution in slabs supported on walls... 6-11
6-2-1-4 Design of slabs by yield line method 6-11
6-2-1-5 Concentrated loads on slabs.. 6-11
6-2-1-5-1 One-way slabs........... 6-12
6-2-1-5-2 Two-way rectangular slabs... 6-14
6-2-2 Hollow block slabs 6-16
6-2-2-1 General.. 6-16
6-2-2-2 One-way hollow block slabs. 6-16
6-2-2-3 Two-way hollow block slabs 6-17
6-2-2-4 General.. 6-17
6-2-3 Waffle slabs....... 6-18
6-2-4 Paneled beams... 6-19
v
CONTENTS
6-2-5 Flat Slabs... 6-19

6-2-5-1 General.. 6-19
6-2-5-2 Limits of concrete dimensions.. 6-20
6-2-5-3 Structural analysis methods.. 6-22
6-2-5-4 Flat slab analysis as continuous frames 6-24
6-2-5-5 Empirical analysis for flat slabs subject to uniformly distributed
loads.. 6-27
6-2-5-6 Bending moments in spans with or without marginal beams... 6-30
6-2-5-7 Design loads acting on marginal beam. 6-30
6-2-5-8 Negative moments transferred from slab to columns... 6-31
6-2-5-9 Arrangement of reinforcement in flat slabs.. 6-36
6-2-5-10 Reinforcement of column heads... 6-36
6-2-5-11 Opening in flat slabs. 6-37
6-3 Beams........................................................................................... 6-39
6-3-1 Ordinary beams............................................................................. 6-39
6-3-1-1 General considerations.................................................................. 6-39
6-3-1-2 Effective span................................................................................ 6-39
6-3-1-3 Load distribution on beams........................................................... 6-40
6-3-1-4 Structural analysis method............................................................ 6-41
6-3-1-5 Flexural rigidity............................................................................. 6-41
6-3-1-6 Bending moments and shearing forces of continuous beams ...... 6-42
6-3-1-7 The critical sections for bending moments and shearing forces.. 6-44
6-3-1-8 Slenderness limits......................................................................... 6-45
6-3-1-9 Effective flange width for T or L sections.................................... 6-45
6-3-1-11 The minimum ratio of main reinforcement................................... 6-46
6-3-2 Deep beams................................................................................... 6-46
6-3-2-2 Empirical design of deep beams................................................... 6-46
6-3-2-3 Design by using strut and tie model.............................................. 6-47
6-3-2-4 Minimum reinforcement for deep beams...................................... 6-47
6-4 Columns........................................................................................ 6-48
6-4-1 Definitions..................................................................................... 6-48
6-4-2 Laterally braced and unbraced buildings...................................... 6-48
6-4-3 Minimum eccentricity for loads.................................................... 6-49
6-4-4 Short columns............................................................................... 6-49
6-4-5 Slender columns............................................................................ 6-50
6-4-5-1 Buckling length............................................................................. 6-50
6-4-5-2 Slender columns in laterally braced buildings.............................. 6-52
6-4-5-3 Slender columns in laterally unbraced buildings.......................... 6-57
6-4-6 Biaxially loaded columns.............................................................. 6-59
6-4-7 Details and notes........................................................................... 6-62
6-4-8 Composite columns....................................................................... 6-64
6-4-8-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-64
6-4-8-2 Composite sections having structural steel sections surrounding
concrete columns.......................................................................... 6-67
vi
CONTENTS
6-4-8-3 Composite sections having structural steel sections inside

reinforced concrete columns......................................................... 6-68
6-5 Walls............................................................................................. 6-69
6-5-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-69
6-5-2 Reinforced concrete walls............................................................. 6-69
6-5-2-1 Design of reinforced concrete walls.............................................. 6-69
6-5-2-1-1 Design of walls as columns subject to bending moments
accompanied by axial compressive forces.................................... 6-70
6-5-2-1-2 Simplified design method of reinforced concrete walls with
solid rectangular section 6-72
6-5-2-2 Minimum and maximum reinforcement ratios............................. 6-73
6-5-2-2-1 Vertical reinforcement.................................................................. 6-73
6-5-2-2-2 Horizontal reinforcement.............................................................. 6-74
6-5-2-3 Horizontal displacement of walls.................................................. 6-74
6-5-2-4 Concrete cover of steel reinforcement.......................................... 6-75
6-5-2-5 Calculation of effect of forces on lateral stiffeners....................... 6-75
6-5-2-6 Concentrated loads on walls......................................................... 6-75
6-5-3 Concrete walls considered as un-reinforced................................. 6-75
6-5-3-1 Design........................................................................................... 6-75
6-5-3-2 Slenderness limits......................................................................... 6-76
6-5-3-3 Minimum eccentricity of loads..................................................... 6-76
6-5-3-4 Eccentricity of loads from slabs and floors................................... 6-76
6-5-3-5 Load eccentricity in plane of walls............................................... 6-76
6-5-3-6 Shear strength ............................................................................... 6-76
6-5-3-7 Minimum reinforcement ratio in concrete walls considered
un-reinforced................................................................................. 6-76
6-6 Monolithic beam-column connections (joints)............................. 6-77
6-6-1 Types of beam-column connections............................................. 6-77
6-6-2 Design of connections................................................................... 6-77
6-7 Foundations................................................................................... 6-81
6-7-1 Isolated footings and pile caps...................................................... 6-81
6-7-1-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-81
6-7-1-2 Design of footings and pile caps for flexure................................. 6-81
6-7-1-4 Space-Truss method for design of pile caps
(strut-tie model).......................................................................... 6-85
6-7-1-5 Development of reinforcement..................................................... 6-85
6-7-2 Combined footings and raft foundations....................................... 6-85
6-7-3 Concrete slabs on grade ............................................................... 6-86
6-7-4 Foundations subject to seismic loads............................................ 6-88
6-7-4-1 Footings, raft foundations and pile caps....................................... 6-88
6-7-4-2 Grade beams and slabs on grade................................................... 6-89
6-7-4-3 Piles............................................................................................... 6-89
6-8 Special provisions for seismic design........................................... 6-90
6-8-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-90
6-8-1-1 Definition of structural members.................................................. 6-90
6-8-1-2 Seismic-load resisting structural systems..................................... 6-91
vii
CONTENTS
6-8-1-3 Design concepts............................................................................ 6-91

6-8-2 Requirements for frames resisting earthquake-induced forces.... 6-93
6-8-2-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-93
6-8-2-2 Requirements for ordinary frames having limited ductility. 6-94
6-8-2-2-1 Flat slabs....................................................................................... 6-94
6-8-2-2-2 Beams in ordinary frames having limited ductility....................... 6-96
6-8-2-2-3 Columns in ordinary frames having limited ductility................... 6-97
6-8-2-3 Requirements for ductile frames having adequate ductility..... 6-97
6-8-2-3-1 Beams in ductile frames having adequate ductility...................... 6-97
6-8-2-3-2 Columns in ductile frames having adequate ductility................... 6-99
6-8-2-3-3 Beam to column connection.......................................................... 6-100
6-8-3 Requirements for shear walls........................................................ 6-100
6-8-3-1 Scope............................................................................................. 6-100
6-8-3-2 Concrete dimensions..................................................................... 6-100
6-8-3-3 Reinforcement of ductile shear walls............................................ 6-101
6-8-3-3-1 Distributed vertical reinforcement................................................ 6-101
6-8-3-3-2 Distributed horizontal reinforcement............................................ 6-101
6-8-3-3-3 Concentrated vertical reinforcement............................................. 6-101
6-8-3-4 Flexural strength of shear walls.................................................... 6-102
6-8-3-5 Shear strength of shear walls........................................................ 6-102
6-8-3-6 Structural members not designated as part of the seismic-load
resisting system............................................................................. 6-103
6-8-3-7 Coupling beams............................................................................. 6-103
6-9 precast concrete............................................................................. 6-105
6-9-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-105
6-9-2 Distribution of forces among members......................................... 6-105
6-9-3 Reinforcement of precast elements............................................... 6-106
6-9-4 Structural integrity........................................................................ 6-106
6-9-5 Design of connections and bearing zones..................................... 6-107
6-9-6 Items embedded after concrete casting......................................... 6-109
6-9-7 Marking and identification............................................................ 6-109
6-9-8 Handling........................................................................................ 6-110
6-9-9 Strength evaluation of precast members....................................... 6-110
6-9-10 Horizontal shear strength of composite members......................... 6-110
6-10 Mathematical modeling and computer-aided structural modeling 6-111
6-10-1 Requirements of the mathematical models................................... 6-111
6-10-1-1 Geometry requirements................................................................. 6-112
6-10-1-2 Structural requirements................................................................. 6-112
6-10-2 Review of input data and output results........................................ 6-113
6-10-2-1 Review of input data..................................................................... 6-113
6-10-2-2 Review of output results............................................................... 6-113
6-10-3 Slabs.............................................................................................. 6-113
6-10-4 Rafts.............................................................................................. 6-114
6-10-5 Beams, columns and frames.......................................................... 6-115
6-10-6 Deep beams, short cantilevers and structural walls...................... 6-115
6-11 Strut-and-tie model....................................................................... 6-115
viii
CONTENTS
6-11-1 Introduction................................................................................... 6-115

6-11-2 Definitions..................................................................................... 6-116
6-11-3 Design of the elements of the strut-and-tie model........................ 6-117
6-11-3-1 General.......................................................................................... 6-117
6-11-3-2 Design of strut............................................................................... 6-117
6-11-3-2-1 Types of stress fields in struts....................................................... 6-117
6-11-3-2-2 Ultimate strength of the strut........................................................ 6-119
6-11-3-3 Design of ties................................................................................ 6-120
6-11-3-4 Design of nodes............................................................................. 6-121
6-11-3-4-1 Types of nodes.............................................................................. 6-121
6-11-3-4-2 Design of singular nodes............................................................... 6-122
CHAPTER 7 : DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT.......................................... 7-1

7-1 General.......................................................................................... 7-1
7-2 Structural drawings and drawing specifications........................... 7-1
7-2-1 Scheme drawings.......................................................................... 7-1
7-2-2 Tender and design drawings......................................................... 7-1
7-2-2-1 Loads............................................................................................. 7-1
7-2-2-2 Properties of materials.................................................................. 7-2
7-2-2-3 Foundations data........................................................................... 7-2
7-2-2-4 Precast concrete............................................................................. 7-2
7-2-3 Workshop drawings...................................................................... 7-3
7-2-4 Detail drawings............................................................................. 7-4
7-2-5 Title and drawing information table.............................................. 7-5
7-3 Special arrangement for reinforcing steel..................................... 7-5
7-3-1 Use of different types of reinforcement in the same structural
element.......................................................................................... 7-5
7-3-2 Stopping of bar ends, development length and splices................. 7-6
7-3-2-1 Lap splices..................................................................................... 7-6
7-3-2-2 Mechanical splices........................................................................ 7-6
7-3-2-3 Welded splices.............................................................................. 7-7
7-3-3 Minimum and maximum bar spacing........................................... 7-8
7-3-3-1 Minimum bar spacing................................................................... 7-8
7-3-3-2 Maximum bar spacing................................................................... 7-9
7-3-4 Bundled bars................................................................................. 7-10
7-3-4-1 General.......................................................................................... 7-10
7-3-4-2 Lap splices and stopping locations of bundled bars...................... 7-10
7-4 Joints in concrete........................................................................... 7-12
7-4-1 Construction joints........................................................................ 7-12
7-4-2 Shrinkage joints............................................................................. 7-12
7-4-3 Movement joints........................................................................... 7-12
7-5 Typical details of reinforcement for structural members.......... 7-13
ix
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 8: QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE OF

REINFORCED AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORKS 8-1
8-1 General considerations.................................................................. 8-1
8-2 Definitions..................................................................................... 8-1
8-2-1 Quality target................................................................................. 8-1
8-2-2 Quality assurance.......................................................................... 8-1
8-2-3 Quality control.............................................................................. 8-1
8-2-4 Quality manual.............................................................................. 8-2
8-2-5 Quality plan................................................................................... 8-2
8-2-6 Quality system............................................................................... 8-2
8-2-7 Elements and requirements of a quality system............................ 8-2
8-2-8 Quality assurance system.............................................................. 8-3
8-2-9 Quality assurance plan.................................................................. 8-4
8-2-10 Quality assurance program............................................................ 8-4
8-2-11 Internal quality control.................................................................. 8-4
8-2-12 External quality control................................................................. 8-4
8-2-13 Quality control requirements........................................................ 8-4
8-3 Technical inspection..................................................................... 8-5
8-3-1 General.......................................................................................... 8-5
8-3-2 Inspector........................................................................................ 8-5
8-3-2-1 External technical inspector.......................................................... 8-5
8-3-2-2 Internal technical Inspector........................................................... 8-5
8-3-3 Material technical inspection........................................................ 8-6
8-3-3-1 Phases of technical inspection....................................................... 8-6
8-3-3-2 Attesting of concrete materials..................................................... 8-7
8-4 Test laboratory.............................................................................. 8-8
8-5 Structural design review................................................................ 8-8
8-6 Quality control procedure............................................................. 8-8
8-6-1 Preparation and handling of materials.......................................... 8-8
8-6-2 Monitoring and quality control for concrete constituents
Materials........................................................................................ 8-10
8-6-2-1 Cement.......................................................................................... 8-10
8-6-2-2 Aggregates.................................................................................... 8-10
8-6-2-3 Water used in concrete manufacturing.......................................... 8-10
8-6-2-4 Admixtures.................................................................................... 8-11
8-6-2-5 Concrete curing materials............................................................. 8-11
8-6-2-6 Reinforcing steel bars................................................................... 8-11
8-6-3 Monitoring and quality control before concrete casting............... 8-12
8-6-4 Monitoring and quality control during concrete casting............... 8-12
8-6-5 Monitoring and quality control after concrete casting.................. 8-13
8-6-6 Levels of quality control............................................................... 8-13
8-7 Traceability and non-conformity.................................................. 8-13
8-7-1 Traceability................................................................................... 8-13
8-7-2 Controlling non-conforming cases................................................ 8-14
8-7-2-1 Isolation and distinction of non-conforming materials................. 8-14
x
CONTENTS
8-7-2-2 Determination of the required corrective actions.......................... 8-14

8-7-2-3 Determination of the possible reasons for non-conformity.......... 8-14
8-7-2-4 Re-inspection................................................................................ 8-14
8-8 Records.......................................................................................... 8-15
8-8-1 General documents........................................................................ 8-15
8-8-2 Documents regarding quality control and assurance.................... 8-15
8-9 Concrete tests................................................................................ 8-16
8-9-1 Test bases...................................................................................... 8-16
8-9-2 Primary tests on concrete.............................................................. 8-16
8-9-3 Concrete tests during construction................................................ 8-16
8-9-4 Non-destructive tests..................................................................... 8-17
8-9-5 Concrete core test.......................................................................... 8-17
8-9-6 Load tests of concrete structures and elements thereof................. 8-22
CHAPTER 9: CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.................................... 9-1

9-1 Handing over and preparation of project site................................ 9-1
9-2 Materials storage........................................................................... 9-2
9-2-1 Cement.......................................................................................... 9-2
9-2-2 Aggregate...................................................................................... 9-3
9-2-3 Reinforcing steel........................................................................... 9-3
9-2-4 Admixtures.................................................................................... 9-3
9-2-5 Water............................................................................................. 9-4
9-3 Materials measurements................................................................ 9-4
9-3-1 Cement.......................................................................................... 9-4
9-3-2 Aggregate...................................................................................... 9-4
9-3-3 Water............................................................................................. 9-4
9-3-4 Admixtures.................................................................................... 9-5
9-4 Scaffolds and forms...................................................................... 9-5
9-4-1 Design, preparation and setup of forms and scaffolds.................. 9-5
9-4-2 Dismantling scaffolds and forms.................................................. 9-7
9-4-3 Special precautions for dismantling scaffolds and forms............. 9-8
9-4-4 Dismantling tunnel and half tunnel forms..................................... 9-8
9-4-5 Concrete breaking after form removal.......................................... 9-8
9-5 Production, manufacturing and curing of concrete....................... 9-8
9-5-1 Preparation for pouring................................................................. 9-8
9-5-2 Mixing concrete ingredients.......................................................... 9-9
9-5-3 Pouring concrete........................................................................... 9-10
9-5-4 Concrete compaction..................................................................... 9-12
9-5-5 Concrete treatment and protection................................................ 9-12
9-5-6 Construction Joints........................................................................ 9-13
9-5-7 Shrinkage joints............................................................................. 9-14
9-5-8 Expansion joints............................................................................ 9-15
9-5-9 Seismic joints................................................................................ 9-15
9-6 Fabrication of steel reinforcement................................................ 9-15
9-7 Minimum concrete cover for steel reinforcement......................... 9-16
xi
CONTENTS
9-8 Allowable tolerances in concrete works....................................... 9-16

9-8-1 Allowable tolerances in the measurement of quantities of
concrete ingredients...................................................................... 9-16
9-8-2 Tolerances in slump test measuring concrete consistency............ 9-17
9-8-3 Allowable tolerances in dimensions............................................. 9-17
9-8-4 Allowable tolerances in the dimensions of ordinary steel
reinforcement................................................................................ 9-19
9-8-5 Allowable tolerance in precast concrete element dimensions...... 9-21
9-8-5-1 Tolerances in the horizontal element length dimensions.............. 9-21
9-8-5-2 Tolerances in the dimensions of the element cross section.......... 9-21
9-8-5-3 Allowable tolerances in straightness relative to the element
Length........................................................................................... 9-21
9-8-5-4 Allowable tolerances in element convexity camber. 9-21
9-9 Project management...................................................................... 9-22
9-9-1 General.......................................................................................... 9-22
9-9-2 Project management tasks............................................................. 9-22
9-9-2-1 Design and tender documents preparation stage........................... 9-22
9-9-2-2 Bidding stage................................................................................. 9-23
9-9-2-3 Construction stage: working plan for project management.......... 9-23
9-9-2-4 Testing, preliminary and final delivery services........................... 9-25
9-10 Security and safety for the construction of concrete Structures 9-25
CHAPTER 10: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 10-1

10-1 General.. 10-1
10-2 Prestressed concrete materials.. 10-1
10-2-1 Concrete 10-1
10-2-1-1 General...... 10-1
10-2-1-2 Properties of prestressed concrete constituents.... 10-2
10-2-1-3 Characteristic strength... 10-2
10-2-1-4 Compressive strength of standard concrete cube at prestress
transfer.. 10-2
10-2-2 Reinforcing steel....... 10-2
10-2-2-1 Prestressing steel....... 10-2
10-2-2-2 Mechanical properties of prestressing steel...... 10-2
10-2-3 Cement grout..... 10-2
10-3 Design of Prestressed concrete members...... 10-3
10-3-1 Design fundamentals..................................................................... 10-3
10-3-2 Serviceability limit state requirements.......................................... 10-4
10-3-2-1 Allowable stresses in concrete...................................................... 10-4
10-3-2-2 Allowable stress in prestressing steel............................................ 10-6
10-3-2-3 Limit state of deflection.............................................................. 10-6
10-3-3 Requirements of ultimate limit state........................................... 10-7
10-3-3-1 Sections subjected to flexure.................................................... 10-7
10-3-3-2 Development length and transfer length for prestressing
steel..................................................................................... 10-12
xii
CONTENTS
10-3-3-3 Shear.............................................................................................. 10-13

10-3-3-3-2 Nominal shear strength.............................................................. 10-13
10-3-3-3-3 Nominal shear strength provided by concrete............................ 10-13
10-3-3-3-4 Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement........................... 10-16
10-3-3-4 Torsion.......................................................................................... 10-16
10-3-3-5 Design of anchorage zone. 10-18
10-3-3-5-1 Anchorage zone..... 10-18
10-3-3-5-2 Design requirements..................................................................... 10-20
10-3-3-5-3 Design methods............................................................................. 10-20
10-3-3-5-3-1 Local zone................................................................................ 10-20
10-3-3-5-3-2 General zone................................................................................. 10-20
10-3-3-6 Post-tensioned tendon anchorage zone......................................... 10-22
10-3-3-7 Sections subject to concentric forces and bending moments 10-22
10-3-4 Prestress Losses............................................................................. 10-22
10-3-4-1 General................................................................................... 10-22
10-3-4-2 Immediate loss of prestress........................................................... 10-23
10-3-4-2-1 Anchorage slip losses................................................................. 10-23
10-3-4-2-2 Elastic shortening losses............................................................. 10-23
10-3-4-2-3 Friction losses............................................................................... 10-24
10-3-4-2-3-1 Jack internal frictional losses........................................................ 10-24
10-3-4-2-3-2 Wobble friction losses................................................................... 10-24
10-3-4-2-3-3 Curvature friction losses............................................................... 10-25
10-3-4-3 Time-dependent losses.................................................................. 10-26
10-3-4-3-1 Residual shrinkage losses.............................................................. 10-26
10-3-4-3-2 Creep losses................................................................................... 10-27
10-3-4-3-3 Steel relaxation losses................................................................... 10-29
10-3-5 External prestressing..................................................................... 10-30
10-4 Analysis of prestressed structures................................................. 10-30
10-4-1 Statically indeterminate structures................................................ 10-30
10-4-2 Moment redistribution................................................................... 10-31
10-4-3 Prestressed slabs............................................................................ 10-31
10-4-3-4 Punching shear strength in prestressed slabs............................... 10-31
10-4-3-6 Slab reinforcement details............................................................. 10-33
10-5 Detailing of prestressing systems.................................................. 10-33
10-5-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-33
10-5-2 Ultimate limit of cable area in concrete section............................ 10-33
10-5-3 Concrete tendon cover.................................................................. 10-33
10-5-3-1 Bonded tendons............................................................................. 10-33
10-5-3-1-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-33
10-5-3-1-2 Concrete cover for rust protection................................................ 10-33
10-5-3-1-3 Concrete cover for fire protection................................................. 10-34
10-5-3-2 Concrete cover of straight ducts (non curved).............................. 10-34
10-5-3-3 External tendons........................................................................... 10-37
10-5-4 Spacing between prestressed cables.............................................. 10-37
10-5-4-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-37
10-5-4-2 Cable spacing in pre-tensioning systems...................................... 10-37
xiii
CONTENTS
10-5-4-3 Cable spacing in post-tensioning systems..................................... 10-37

10-5-5 Curved cables................................................................................ 10-38
10-5-5-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-38
10-5-5-2 Concrete cover.............................................................................. 10-38
10-5-5-3 Spacing between ducts.................................................................. 10-38
10-5-5-4 Decreasing the spacing between ducts.......................................... 10-38
10-5-6 Tendon anchorage zone................................................................ 10-39
10-5-7 Ducts and couplers sizes............................................................... 10-39
10-5-7-1 Duct Sizes..................................................................................... 10-39
10-5-8 Construction documents................................................................ 10-43
10-5-8-1 Presentation of the construction documents.................................. 10-43
10-5-8-2 Documents including the construction documents....................... 10-43
10-6 Inspection and quality control....................................................... 10-47
10-6-1 Concrete quality............................................................................ 10-47
10-6-2 Supervision and quality control of the injection mortar............... 10-48
10-6-3 Inspection and quality control of prestressed steel....................... 10-48
10-6-4 Inspection of ducts and cables...................................................... 10-48
10-6-5 Calibration of equipment for tensioning cables............................ 10-49
10-6-6 Inspection of concrete elements after load and element transfer. 10-49
10-6-7 Concrete tests................................................................................ 10-49
10-6-8 Durability tests for elements and concrete structures................... 10-49
10-7 Construction requirements............................................................ 10-49
10-7-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-49
10-7-2 Prestressing program..................................................................... 10-50
10-7-3 Tendons......................................................................................... 10-51
10-7-4 Fixing tendons and ducts............................................................... 10-52
10-7-5 Tensioning process....................................................................... 10-53
10-7-5-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-53
10-7-5-2 Pre-tensioning............................................................................... 10-54
10-7-5-3 Post-tensioning.............................................................................. 10-54
10-7-5-3-1 Tendons arrangement.................................................................... 10-54
10-7-5-3-2 Anchorages.................................................................................... 10-54
10-7-5-3-3 Deflected tendons for external prestressing.................................. 10-55
10-7-5-3-4 Tendons tensioning....................................................................... 10-55
10-7-6 Protection and bonding of tendons using injection....................... 10-56
10-7-6-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-56
10-7-6-2 Protection of inner tendons........................................................... 10-56
10-7-6-3 Protection of external tendons....................................................... 10-56
10-7-7 Protection of anchorage................................................................ 10-56
10-7-8 Grouting ...................................................................................... 10-56
10-7-8-1 General.......................................................................................... 10-56
10-7-8-2 Inspection of ducts........................................................................ 10-57
10-7-8-3 Injection process........................................................................... 10-57
10-7-9 Quality assurance for prestressing works..................................... 10-57
xiv
CONTENTS
APPENDICES:
APPENDIX I (SI) SYSTEM METRIC SYSTEM (KG.CM) CONVERSIONS

APPENDIX II VALUES OF MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF
PRESTRESSING STEEL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
INTERNATIONAL CODES
APPENDIX III NOTATION
APPENDIX IV STANDING COMMITTEE AND TECHNICAL COMMITTEES
OF THE CODE
xv
Chapter 1
CHAPTER 1
SCOPE AND DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS
1-1 Scope
1 - This code is the formal building code for the design and construction
of concrete structures in Egypt. It provides the minimum acceptable
requirements for the design, construction, review and quality control
for all concrete buildings. For special types of concrete structures such
as bridges, tanks, bins, silos, chimneys, blast resistant structures, shell
structures, as well as, structures that require special or unconventional
construction techniques, the provisions of the code shall govern where
applicable and after taking into consideration the more stringent
requirements for the design and construction of these types of
structures.
2 - The design, supervision and inspection of the construction of concrete
structures shall be performed and approved by an experienced
syndicated engineer.
3 - The code provides the provisions for design, construction, quality
control and inspection of concrete structures, as well as the properties
of concrete constituent materials.
4 - The code does not address the following types of structures:
- Light weight concrete structures
- Ultra- high strength concrete structures
5 - Compliance with the requirements of the design and construction
provisions of this code does not relieve the engineer of record of a
project from any liabilities and legal responsibilities.
1-2 Objectives of the code

The objectives of this code are to present the requirements necessary
to guarantee the integrity and robustness of the structures and parts thereof
that can ensure safety against distress, collapse, and instability, as well as,
shall provide adequate control of deformations and cracking.
1-3 Design fundamentals

Design of concrete members shall be carried out using one of the
following two design methods:
1-1
Chapter 1
1 - Limit states design method

2 - Elastic design method ( Working stress design method)
The design fundamentals of the two design methods are governed by
the following:
1 - The properties and strengths of constituent materials used for plain,
reinforced, and prestressed concrete works and their characteristic
strengths values. The properties, characteristic strengths, and quality
control for these materials are given in Chapters 2 and 8 of the code,
respectively.
2 - Service loads; including dead, live, moving loads, as well as, the
effects of temperature, creep, shrinkage and movements of supports of
the structure. Service loads shall be in accordance with the Egyptian
code for loads on Structures, ECP 201. The structure shall be
designed for adequate performance under the service loads and shall
be proportioned for adequate strength using ultimate loads and
material strength reduction factors specified in Chapter 3 of this code.
3 - The resultant internal forces and moments in the structural elements
(i.e. bending moments, shearing forces, twisting moments and axial
forces), that shall be determined using the theory of elastic analysis.
4 - The structure shall be designed such that robustness and integrity of the
structure are guaranteed while possessing the capability of preventing the
possibility of the occurrence of progressive and total collapses.
1-4 Limit states design method

Limit states design Method comprises the following limit states:
1 - Ultimate strength limit state:

The satisfaction of this limit state will provide the structure and
structural members thereof with adequate strength in compliance with
the safety requirements stipulated in the code.
2 - Stability limit state:

This limit state is intended to safeguard the structure against the
possibility of structural instabilities resulting from sliding, overturning or
floating of the structure, as well as, against bucking of elements thereof.
1-2
Chapter 1
3 - Serviceability limit states

These limit states are intended to ensure adequate performance of the
structure under service loads, as follows:
A- CRACKING LIMIT STATE : This limit state is intended to control
the adverse effects of cracking of concrete.
B- DEFLECTION LIMIT STATE : This limit state is intended to
control the deformation of the structural members.
1-3
Chapter 2
CHAPTER 2
MATERIALS AND MIXTURES FOR REINFORCED AND
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
2-1 General
This chapter deals with the materials and concrete mixtures for
reinforced and pre-stressed concrete with respect to properties, ingredients
proportions according to exposure conditions, and required quality for both
fresh and hardened concrete stages. Laboratory testing shall be performed
in accordance with Appendix (3) and its modification, as well as the
Egyptian Standards. In cases that require testing and specifications not
specified in this Code, relevant standards shall be used with the approval of
all contractual parties.
The following is a list of relevant Egyptian Standards, (ES):
Standard No Standard Title
Cement Part 1: Composition,
ES 47561/ 2007 Specifications and Conformity Criteria
for Common Cements
Cement Physical and Mechanical
ES 24211/ 2005
Testing Part 1: Determination of
ISO 9597/ 1989
Setting Time and Soundness
ES 24212/ 2005 Testing Part 2: Determination of
Fineness
ES 24213/ 2007 Testing Part 3: Determination of
Compressive Strength
ES 24214/ 2005 Testing Part 4: Autoclave Expansion
Cement of Portland Cement
ES 24216/ 2005 Testing Part 6: Heat of Hydration
Solution Method
ES 24217/ 2006
Testing Part 7: Determination of
ISO 679/ 1989
Strength Prism Method
Testing Part 8: Method of Testing Fly
ES 24218/ 2006
Ash Determination of Free Calcium
Oxide Content
Testing Part 9: Heat of Hydration
ES 24219/ 2005 Semi-Adiabatic MethodEN 196-
9/2005
2-1
Chapter 2
Standard No Standard Title

Standard Methods for Chemical
ES 5325/ 2006
Cement Analysis of Cement
ES 583/ 2005 Sulfate Resistant Portland Cement
(cont.)
ES 2149/ 2005 Moderate Heat Portland Cement
Concrete Aggregates from Natural
Aggregate ES 1109/ 2002
Sources
Admixtures for Concrete, Mortar and
Grout Part 1: Concrete Admixtures
ES 18991/ 2006
Definitions, Requirements,
Conformity, Marking and Labeling
Admixtures
Grout Part 2: Reference Concrete
ES 18992/ 2006
and Reference Mortar for Testing
EN480-1/1997
ES 18993/ 2006 Grout Part 3: Reference Masonry
Mortar for Testing Mortar Admixtures
Steel for the Reinforcement of
Steel ES 262/ 2000
Concrete
ES 76/ 2001 Metallic Materials Tensile Testing
Steel for the Reinforcement of
ISO 69353/ 1992
Concrete Part 3: Welded Fabric
ES 16581/ 2006 Testing of Concrete Part 1: Sampling

ISO 19201/ 2004 of Fresh Concrete
ES 16582/ 2006 Testing of Concrete Part 2: Properties

ISO 19202/ 2005 of Fresh Concrete
Concrete
ES 16584/ 2006 Testing of Concrete Part 4: Making
ISO 19203/ 2004 and Curing Test Specimens
Testing of Concrete Part 9:

ES 16589/ 2006
Properties of Hardened Concrete
ISO 19205/ 2004
other than Strength
2-2
Chapter 2
2-2 Properties of materials

2-2-1 Cement
1 - Cement used shall be Portland Cement CEM I (ES 4756-1/2007) or
sulfate resisting Portland cement (ES 583/2005) or moderate heat
Portland cement (ES2149/2005).
2 - Portland cement containing limestone powder (CEM II/A-LL, CEM
II/A-L, CEM II/B-LL, CEM II/B/L) or Portland cement containing
by-pass dust shall not be used in concrete.
3 - In case of using cement types other than those mentioned in item (1),
previous successful experience shall be required, and it shall comply
with the relevant ES and the requirements stated in this Code.
4 - Chloride content in cement shall not exceed 0.06% by weight of cement.
5 - On using different types of Pozzolanic cement as a precaution to
limit alkali aggregate silica reaction or in high sulfate environments
the chemical composition of the pozzolanic portion of these cements
shall comply with ES requirements (ES 4765-1/2007), as well as it
shall be in a glassy form to assure its reactivity with cement.
6 - In case of using active silica aggregate, the cement alkali content,
expressed as equivalent Sodium Oxide, shall not exceed 0.6% by
weight of cement.
2-2-2 Aggregates
2-2-2-1 General
River beds, desert and sea beaches are the most common sources for
natural aggregates. It should be noted that aggregates from sea beaches
shall only be used after passing the salt contamination test or after
controlling its salt contamination. Crushed stones and rocks are other major
sources for natural aggregates with variable properties depending on their
geological origin and properties of parent stone or rock.
2-2-2-2 Aggregate requirements

1 - Aggregate shall comply with the Egyptian Standard ES1109/2002 and
the additional requirements mentioned herein in tables (2-1) and (2-2)
of this code.
2 - Aggregate particles shall be hard and free from any deleterious
materials. Also, aggregate particles shall not contain any materials
harmful to concrete and steel reinforcement such as iron pyrite and
2-3
Chapter 2
coal, and shall not contain any organic impurities that can interfere
with the setting and hardening processes of concrete, or adversely
affects concrete strength, concrete durability, and steel reinforcement.
Previous data and test results for aggregate may be used, and relevant
complementary tests for the type of aggregate used shall be conducted
in accordance with the Egyptian Standards, ES.
3 - Carbonate aggregates shall be free from siliceous or active carbonate
components that have the ability for alkali aggregate reaction causing
expansion and cracking. Quarries shall conduct X-ray diffraction and
petrographic analysis together with testing given in Section (2-3-4-8).
4 - Artificial or recycled aggregates may be used in concrete as long as it
complies with Egyptian Standards and project specifications. The
approval of the consultant shall be required prior to usage.
5 - The fineness modulus of fine aggregate shall not be less than 2.6 when
used in pre-stressed concrete.
6 - In case of unavailability of aggregate grading which complies with the
Egyptian Standards, suitable grading curves, based on previous
laboratory and site data may be used after carrying out trial mixture
designs and strength assurance mixtures and after receiving the
approval of the engineer of record of the project.
6 - The nominal maximum size shall not be more than one fifth the
minimum shuttering dimension, one third slab thickness and three
quarters the clear distance between reinforcing bars.
7 - The nominal maximum size shall not be more than 40mm for
reinforced concrete, and 25mm for pre-stressed concrete applications.
2-4
Chapter 2
Table (2-1) Allowable limits for some physical and mechanical

properties of aggregates
Maximum Allowable Limit

Property*
Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate
1- Weight % of fine Gravel and crushed gravel Natural sand 3%
materials, passing 1% Fine sand from
75m sieve (sieve Crushed stone 3%** crushed stone 5%**
#200)
2- Weight % for clay and Gravel and crushed gravel 3%
friable materials 1%
Crushed stone 3%
3- Los Angeles hardness Gravel and crushed gravel
value (passing % from 20%
1.17mm sieve after Crushed stone 30%
500 revolutions)
4- Flakiness Index 25%***
5- Elongation Index 25%***
6- Natural absorption % Gravel and crushed gravel 2%
(24 hours)**** 1%
Crushed stone 2.5%
7- Crushing value Concrete surface exposed to
abrasion 25%
Concrete surface un-exposed
to abrasion 30%
8- Impact value Concrete surface exposed to
abrasion 30%
Concrete surface un-exposed
to abrasion 45%
* Properties according to Egyptian Standard Specification, testing procedure

appendix, and this code.
** Shall be free from clay, silt and friable materials
*** In case flakiness index and elongation index are high this shall be considered in
mix design
**** In case absorption % is more than 2.5% this shall be taken into consideration in
the mix design
2-5
Chapter 2
Table (2-2) Allowable limits for chloride and sulfate contents and
soundness of aggregates
Maximum Allowable Limit

by Weight % of Aggregate
Property*
Coarse Fine
Aggregate Aggregate
1- Water soluble chloride ion content (Cl-)** 0.04% 0.06%
2- Total sulfate content as SO3 0.4% 0.4%
3- Soundness (expressed as % loss in weight)

a- Exposure to 5 cycles in Na2SO4 12 10
15
b- Exposure to 5 cycles in MgSO4 18
* Properties according to Egyptian Standard Specification and/or testing procedure

appendix.
** For pre-stressed concrete, water soluble chlorides shall not be more than 0.01% by
weight of all-in aggregate (i.e. combined aggregate)
2-2-3 Mixing and curing water

1 - Water used in mixing shall be clean and free from deleterious
materials such as oil, acids, salts, organic materials, silt and clay and
any materials which have detrimental effects on both the concrete and
reinforcing steel. The salt content in mixing water shall not exceed the
values given in item (2).
2 - The maximum allowable salt and harmful materials contents are as
follows:
Total dissolved salts = 2.00 gm/lit
-
Chloride salts as (Cl ) = 0.50 gm/lit
Sulfate salts as (SO3) = 0.30 gm/lit
Carbonate and bicarbonate salts = 1.00 gm/lit
Sodium sulfide salts = 0.10 gm/lit
Organic materials = 0.20 gm/lit
Inorganic materials; clay and suspended materials = 2.00 gm/lit
3 - The pH value of mixing water shall not be less than 7.0. In case of
using water other than drinking water, tests shall be carried out to
know the actual value before using the water.
2-6
Chapter 2
4 - Drinking water excluding bacteriological requirements- is accepted

for mixing and curing concrete. Water from other sources may be used
for mixing and curing concrete as long as it conforms to the previous
requirements in addition to the following requirements:
a - Initial setting time for cement using the water shall not be more
than initial setting time of cement using drinking water by more
than 30 minutes, and shall not be less than 45 minutes.
b - Standard compressive strength, at 7 and 28 days of age, of
standard cement mortar specimens using the used water shall not
be less than 90% of the compressive strength of cement mortar
using drinking water at the same age.
5 - Sea water shall not be used in mixing any type of reinforced concrete.
6 - In case of necessity, sea water may be used in plain concrete which
does not contain any reinforcement. The concrete mixture shall be
designed using the same water content, and the cement content shall
be determined to achieve the required strength. This concrete shall not
be in direct contact with reinforced concrete unless suitable insulating
material is applied in between. Also, previous experience in using sea
water successfully shall be required.
7 - Water suitable for mixing concrete is also suitable for curing concrete.
8 - Used water shall not cause any efflorescence or salt sedimentation or
any unacceptable appearance of concrete surface.
2-2-4 Admixtures
Admixtures are used in concrete mixtures in predetermined dosages to
improve certain concrete properties or to develop new properties. This is
achieved either by their physical or chemical effect. The used admixture
shall not affect the concrete volume except air-entraining and mineral
admixtures. Also, admixtures shall not have an adverse effect on concrete
durability.
Most common admixtures used in concrete mixtures could be
classified as follows (table 2-3):
- Chemical admixtures which include, setting time accelerators, and
retarding admixture, and normal range and high range water reducers.
These admixtures could also be manufactured to have more than one
effect such as retarding and normal range water reducer, retarding and
high range water reducers, and accelerating and water reducers.
2-7
Chapter 2
- Air-entraining admixtures.
- Pozzolanic admixtures such as high blast furnace slag, fly ash, silica
fume, natural pozzolanic ash. All of these admixtures have pozzolanic
action where they react with cement hydration products.
- Other admixtures such as corrosion inhibitor admixtures and coloring
admixtures.
The following requirements shall be considered on using admixtures:
1 - Admixtures shall comply with Egyptian Standards, (ES) for each
admixture type by testing in accredited laboratory.
2 - Admixtures which do not follow an Egyptian or International
Standards may be used based on previous data, experience and test
results in accredited laboratories, and shall fulfill project
specifications.
3 - Manufacturer shall provide recommendations on the procedure of
admixture usage and admixture addition to the mixture, as well as the
possibility of splitting the admixture dosage either during mixing or
before casting according to temperature, haul distance and working
conditions.
4 - Admixtures shall have no adverse effects on concrete and reinforcing
steel, especially durability.
5 - Admixtures used in reinforced concrete, pre-stressed concrete and
concrete containing any embedded metals shall have no chloride
content.
6 - Admixtures shall be used in site trial mixtures to check the
performance of the fresh and hardened concrete using the mixture
constituents, and to avoid any undesirable effects such as prolonged
retardation.
7 - Periodical compatibility and performance checks shall be carried out
using the admixture and the available concrete constituents and shall
be compared with control mixtures with no admixtures.
8 - The compressive, tensile and bond to reinforcement strengths for
concrete mixtures utilizing admixtures shall not be lower than control
mixtures without admixtures. In special circumstances; where certain
properties are required, a reduction not more than 10% in the concrete
strengths will be allowed and with the approval of the designer.
2-8
Chapter 2
9 - Any admixture consignment shall be accepted by conducting

uniformity tests stated in the Egyptian Standards and shall meet those
for the accepted sample.
10 - Concrete mixtures with admixtures shall have air content not more
than 3%, but not more than 2% above that of the control mixture
without admixtures. Concrete mixtures utilizing air-entraining
admixtures are excluded.
11 - It is preferable to use one type of admixture in the mix. If situation
requires the use of more than one admixture in the same mixture, it is
important to have full data about their compatibility which shall be
checked by accredited laboratory testing, as well as the approval of the
engineer of record of the project.
12 - On using more than one admixture in the concrete mixture, they shall
not be mixed together and shall be preferably added to the mixture
separately during mixing.
13 - The temperature of fresh concrete containing the admixture shall not
be more than 5oC above that of the control mixture without the
admixture.
14 - The chemical stability of natural or artificial pozzolanic admixtures
shall be ascertained before using in concrete mixtures.
15 - Cement manufacturers producing cement types containing any form of
admixtures shall announce this information clearly on the cement bag.
These cements shall be tested similar to testing concrete mixtures with
admixtures.
16 - Climate variability, especially temperature, shall be taken into
consideration with all the previous requirements.
2-9
Chapter 2
Table (2-3) ES 1899-1, 2, 3/2006 requirements for concrete admixtures

1- Performance criteria for concrete mixtures with admixtures
Admixture type
Type (A) Type (B) Type (C) Type (D) Type (E) Type (F) Type (G)
Property
NRWR Accelerators Retarding NRWR + NRWR + HRWR HRWR +
Retarding Accelerating Retarding
a- Fresh concrete
- Max. water content as % 95% --- --- 95% 95% 88% 88%
of control mix
- Increase in air content 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2%
- Total air content 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3%
- Initial set (penetration at Within 1 hour More than 1 At least 1 hour At least 1 hour At least 1 hour Within 1 hour At least 1 hour
0.5N/mm2) from control hour from less than more than less than from control more than
mix control mix control mix control mix control mix mix control mix
- Final set (penetration at Within 1 hour More than 1 At least 1 hour ------- At least 1 hour Within 1 hour At least 1 hour
3.5 N/mm2) from control hour from less than less than from control more than
mix control mix control mix control mix mix control mix
b- Hardened concrete
- Min. compressive
strength as % of control
mix:
1 day --- --- 125 --- 125 140 125
3 days 110 90 125 110 125 125 125
7 days 110 90 100 110 110 115 115
28 days 110 90 100 110 110 110 110
6 months 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
- Min. flexural strength as 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
% of control mix at 28
days
2-10
Chapter 2
Table (2-3) ES 1899-1, 2, 3/2006 requirements for concrete admixtures (contd)
2 - Uniformity criteria for performance between tested sample and the sample taken from the consignment and the
values stated by the manufacturer
Property Requirements
- Solid content - Difference shall not be more than 5% by weight for liquid and solid admixtures
- Ash content - Difference shall not be more than 1% by weight
- Relative density - Difference shall not be more than 0.02 for liquid admixtures
- pH value - Comparison between the two numbers shall be made
- Chloride ion content - Difference shall not be more than 5% or 0.2% by weight of the admixture whichever is lerger
- Infra-red spectrometer - Shall be identical to manufacturer data
2-11
Egyptian Code for Design and Construction of Concrete Structures 2007 (ECP 203)
Chapter 2
2-2-5 Steel reinforcement
2-2-5-1 Reinforcing steel types

1 - Concrete is reinforced using steel reinforcement which complies with
the Egyptian Standards (ES 262-2000). In case of using welded steel
mesh it shall comply with ISO 6935-3/1992
2 - Common types of steel reinforcement are:
a - Mild steel grade 240/350 or 280/450 and it is denoted ()
b - High tensile steel and it has two grades:
Grade 360/520 and is denoted ()
Grade 400/600 and is denoted ()
High tensile steel is cold formed or hot drawn steel. High tensile
steel produced from mild steel by cold forming shall not be plain
bars and shall have ribs which comply with the Egyptian
Standards requirements (ES 262/2000), to produce the necessary
bond with concrete.
c- Welded steel mesh from plain or deformed or indented bars with
mild steel grades (240/350) or (280/450) cold formed to produce
steel grade (450/520) denoted as (#). The steel mesh shall be arc
welded.
2 - Egyptian Standards shall be used for bar marking and identification.
2-2-5-2 Nominal bar diameters

Nominal bar diameter shall be determined from weight per unit length
for reinforcing bars with continuous ribs. The smaller diameter shall be
considered in case of reinforcing bars where crossed ribs are used. A
maximum of 5% is allowed as tolerance between the nominal unit weight
and the actual unit weight.
2-2-5-3 Mechanical properties for reinforcing steel to be used in

design
1 - Yield Stress: is the stress at yield plateau for mild steel and high
tensile steel which shows a yield phenomenon.
2 - Proof Stress: is the stress that causes a permanent strain value of 0.2%
on removing the stress and it is used for high tensile steel which does
not show a yield phenomenon.
2- 12
Chapter 2
3 - Ultimate Tensile Strength: is the stress produced in the steel bar by

dividing the maximum tensile load by the bar cross sectional area.
4 - Modulus of Elasticity: is the slope of the linear portion of the stress-
strain relationship in the elastic region.
5 - Elongation Percent at Failure: is the percentage of elongation at failure
load with respect to the gauge length.
The mechanical properties shall be determined according to ES
262/2000. The minimum mechanical properties for reinforcing steel,
confirmed by manufacturers certificate and verified by accredited
laboratory testing, shall not be lower than the values given in table (2-4).
2-2-5-4 Steel stress-strain curve

Stress-strain curve obtained from test shall be used. Idealized stress-
strain curve given in figure (4-1) can be used by designers as a guide.
2-2-5-5 Steel characteristic strength

The minimum values of the mechanical properties shall not be lower
than the values given in table (2-4)
2-2-5-6 Welding of steel bars

Welding of reinforcing steel bars shall comply with specifications set
by project consultant and taking into consideration the requirements
mentioned in Section (4-2-5-4-3).
2-2-6 Steel reinforcement for pre-stressed concrete

Section (10-2-2) gives all the types and properties for steel
reinforcement used in pre-stressed concrete.
2- 13
Chapter 2
Table (2-4) Minimum mechanical properties for different types of steel

reinforcement
Yield Cold Bend Test
Stress or
Tensile Elongatio
Steel 0.2% Bar
Grade Bar Type Strength n% Bending
Type Proof Diameter
(N/mm2) (L=10D)* Radius
Stress (mm)
(N/mm2)
240/350 D25 2D
240 350 20
Mild D>25 3D
Plain bars
steel 280/450 D25 2D
280 450 18
D>25 3D
360/520 D20 4D
360 452 12
High 20<D36 5D
Deformed
tensile 400/600 D25 4D
bars
steel 400 600 10 20< D 25 5D
25<D 36 6D
Cold Plain or
formed deformed
welded 450/520 or 450 520 8
steel indented
mesh** bars
* L = gauge length (mm), D = test specimen diameter (mm)
** Not allowed structurally to use steel mesh with bar diameter less than 5mm
2-3 Concrete Properties
2-3-1 Fresh concrete properties
2-3-1-1 Bulk density of concrete

In case no accurate data is available, guide values for the fresh
concrete bulk density are as follows:
- 22kN/m3 for plain concrete using calcareous aggregate.
- 23 kN/m3 for plain concrete using siliceous aggregate.
- 25 kN/m3 for normal reinforced concrete, it may be increased for heavily
reinforced concrete taking into consideration aggregate type.
2-3-1-2 Concrete consistency

Fresh concrete consistency and workability greatly affect its
compactability which in turn influences its homogeneity, and reduces air
content and tendency for honeycombing. Slump test is the most common
test used on site for determining concrete consistency.
2- 14
Chapter 2
Table (2-5) gives slump values to be used as a guide in determining

the suitable slump value for different structural elements. Project
specifications shall be referred to in case other test is used to measure the
concrete consistency.
Table (2-5) Guide values for concrete slump
Element Slump Compacting Method

(mm)*
Mass concrete 25-50 Mechanical
Foundation, lightly-reinforced concrete 50-75 Mechanical

sections (steel reinforcement <
3
80kg/m )***
Medium to highly reinforced concrete 75-125 Mechanical or Manual

sections (steel reinforcement 80-150
kg/m3)***
Highly reinforced concrete sections (steel 125-150** Light Compaction

reinforcement > 150 kg/m3)***
Deep foundation and pump concrete 125-200** Light Compaction
* Slump decreases gradually with time after mixing, time of test after mixing and
temperature are among the main factors affecting slump loss; the values indicated
in the table are required immediately before casting.
** Slump value is achieved using chemical admixtures
*** Guide values
2-3-1-3 Temperature of fresh concrete

Temperature of fresh concrete shall not exceed 35oC for concrete
mixture with or without admixtures. Necessary precautions shall be
considered to avoid the increase of the concrete temperature over the
required value.
2-3-2 Mechanical properties of hardened concrete
2-3-2-1 Compressive strength

Characteristic Strength (fcu): is the compressive strength at 28 days of
age, below which not more than 5% of site test results shall fall below it. It
is also known as concrete grade.
2- 15
Chapter 2
Standard cube (150x150x150 mm) is used to determine the compressive

strength. Concrete grade for plain concrete shall not be lower than 15
N/mm2, and for pre-stressed concrete not less than 30 N/mm2. Table (2-6)
gives different concrete grades for reinforced and pre-stressed concrete.
Table (2-6) Concrete grade for reinforced and pre-stressed concrete

Reinforced Concrete (N/mm2) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Pre-stressed Concrete (N/mm2) 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
In case of using standard concrete cylinders (150x300 mm) or any

specimens with different dimensions, guide correction factors given in
table (2-7) may be used to obtain the equivalent standard cube compressive
strength.
To have a relation between compressive strength at ages less than 28
days and the characteristic strength, the contractor shall provide sufficient
number of cube specimens before the commencement of project to obtain
the relation between the characteristic strength and early compressive
strength at 3 days or 7 days.
Table (2-7) Guide correction factor to obtain equivalent cube

compressive strength for substandard specimens
Mold Shape Mold Dimensions (mm) Correction Factor
100x100x100 0.97
150x150x150 1.00
Cube
200x200x200 1.05
300x300x300 1.12
100x200 1.20
Cylinder 150x300 1.25
250x500 1.30
* The guide values are for concrete grade less than 40 N/mm2
* Concrete grade greatly influences the correction factor on changing mould shape and
dimensions, thus laboratory tests are required to determine the exact value for the
correction factor
2-3-2-2 Axial direct tensile strength

Axial direct tensile strength value may be considered as one of the
following two values determined experimentally:
- 0.85 from indirect splitting tensile strength.
- 0.60 from tensile strength by pure bending.
2- 16
Chapter 2
2-3-2-3 Bond strength with reinforcing steel

Bond strength between reinforcing steel and concrete increases with
the presence of bar ribs and indentations. Also, it increases by increasing
concrete density, cement content, reducing water content, surface texture of
reinforcing bars, and the cleanliness of their surface from any paints, oil
deposits, bitumen or any other materials that can adversely affect the bond
strength with concrete. Section (4-2-5) gives guide values for bond
strength. In case of using corrosion protective coating for steel
reinforcement, the bond strength shall not be lower than 90% of the bond
strength between the concrete and the same reinforcing steel without the
protective coating, and shall conform to the design requirements as well as
Egyptian standards for the use and application of protective coatings.
2-3-3 Dimensional changes of concrete
2-3-3-1 Modulus of elasticity

Modulus of elasticity shall be determined from equation (2-1):
2
Ec = 4400 fcu N/mm (2-1)
Where;
Ec = modulus of elasticity (N/mm2)
fcu =characteristic concrete strength as given in Section 2-3-2-1
(N/mm2)
2-3-3-2 Transverse deformation (poissons ratio)

It is the ratio between transverse strain and longitudinal strain for
standard specimen. In elastic deformation the ratio () shall be taken as
follows:
= 0.20 for un-cracked concrete (2-2-a)
= 0.00 for cracked concrete (2-2-b)
2-3-3-3 Coefficient of thermal expansion

Coefficient of thermal expansion of plain concrete depends on mixture
composition and aggregate type as follows:
- Concrete using siliceous aggregate varies from 1.20 to 1.30 x 10-5
2- 17
Chapter 2
- Concrete using limestone aggregate varies from 0.60 to 0.90 x 10-5

- Concrete using sandstone aggregate varies from 0.90 to 1.20 x 10-5
- Concrete using granite aggregate varies from 0.70 to 0.95 x 10-5
- Concrete using basalt aggregate varies from 0.80 to 0.95 x 10-5
2-3-3-4 drying shrinkage

It is the shrinkage caused by drying of concrete after hardening. It
depends on many factors such as ambient relative humidity, time, volume
and surface area of concrete element (i.e. nominal dimension B). The
nominal dimension is calculated as follows:
2 Ac
B = (2-3)
Pc
Where;
B = Nominal dimension of section (mm)
Ac = Cross sectional area of the concrete element (mm2)
Pc = Perimeter of the concrete section subjected to drying (mm)
Also, drying shrinkage depends on air temperature, w/c ratio,

aggregate properties, cement content, and ratio between aggregate and
cement mortar contents. Table (2-8-a) gives guide values for drying
shrinkage strain.
Table (2-8-a) Guide values for final drying shrinkage strain (x10-3)
Air Humid Air (relative humidity

Dry Air (relative humidity 55%)*
Condition 75%)*
Age after Nominal Dimension B (mm) Nominal Dimension B (mm)
which
shrinkage
B 600 200<B<600 B200 B 600 200<B<600 B200
starts
(days)
3-7 0.31 0.38 0.43 0.21 0.23 0.26
7-60 0.30 0.31 0.32 0.21 0.22 0.23
> 60 0.28 0.25 0.19 0.20 0.19 0.16
* It is preferred to use the table for relative humidity ranging from 40 to 85%. In case
the relative humidity differs from that in table, shrinkage strain values could be
deduced proportionally.
2- 18
Chapter 2
2-3-3-5 Creep
It is the inelastic strain that occurs under the effect of all or part of the
working loads and depends on time. It depends on many factors such as:
the ratio between applied stress to concrete strength, w/c ratio, and concrete
age at the start of loading, cross section properties, surrounding relative
humidity value, and ratio between aggregate and cement mortar contents.
The total strain value caused by creep and elastic instantaneous strain are as
follows:
t = o (1 + ) (2-4-a)
fo
t = (1 + ) (2-4-b)
Ect
Where;
t = Total strain at time t =
fo
o = Instantaneous strain caused by load =
Ect
o = Creep strain
= Creep coefficient
fo = Concrete stress at the start of loading
Ect = Concrete modulus of elasticity at the start of loading
Table (2-8-b) gives guide values for the creep coefficient () with respect
to the relative humidity, age at the start of loading, and the nominal dimension
of the concrete section (B) (previously described in Article 2-3-3-4).
Table (2-8-b) Guide values for final creep coefficient ()

Air Humid Air (relative humidity
Dry Air (relative humidity 55%)*
Condition 75%)*
Age after Nominal Dimension B (mm) Nominal Dimension B (mm)
which
loading
B 600 200<B<600 B200 B 600 200<B<600 B200
starts
(days)
3-7 2.90 3.20 3.80 2.10 2.40 2.70
7-60 2.50 2.80 3.00 1.90 2.00 2.20
> 60 2.00 1.90 1.70 1.70 1.60 1.40
* It is preferred to use the table for relative humidity ranging from 40 to 85%. In case
the relative humidity differs from that in table, creep coefficient values could be
deduced proportionally.
2- 19
Chapter 2
2-3-4 Durability of concrete
2-3-4-1 General
Concrete structures are affected by chemicals such as oil, fats, sugar
solutions, also some organic materials, acids, sulfate and chloride solutions,
sea water, and underground water, as well as solutions and vapor in coastal
and industrial areas. Concrete properties change due to the exposure to
such materials. Also, concrete structures are adversely affected by alkali
aggregate reaction, in addition to some mechanical processes such as
abrasion and erosion.
Concrete durability for some structures or parts of structures has the
priority before concrete mechanical properties. In these structures several
factors shall be taken into consideration, which are:
- Mixture ingredients
- Cement type and content
- Aggregate type
- Exposure conditions (i.e. type of aggressive material)
- Shape and size of concrete element
- Concrete permeability to water and liquids
- Concrete permeability to gases
- Harmful material in concrete ingredients
- Concrete construction starting from mixing up to the use of the structure
(i.e. a major factor that improves concrete durability is quality control
during construction especially during casting, compaction and curing to
achieve dense, homogeneous concrete with low permeability)
Concrete durability could be improved by considering the following:
2-3-4-2 Maximum water/cement (w/c) ratio

Table (2-9) may be used to determine the maximum w/c ratio for
concrete mixtures using Portland cement and according to exposure
conditions.
2- 20
Chapter 2
Table (2-9) Maximum w/c ratio, minimum cement content, and

minimum characteristic compressive strength for concrete mixtures
exposed to aggressive environments
Minimum Cement Content Minimum

(kg/m3)* Maximum Characteristic
Exposure Condition Aggregate Nominal w/c Compressive
Maximum Size (mm)*** Ratio** Strength
32 20 10 (N/mm2)
Concrete is totally isolated
from the aggressive 350 350 350 0.50 25
surrounding environment
Concrete is exposed to
aggressive environment but
350 350 400 0.45 30
continuously submerged in
water
Concrete is exposed to
aggressive environment or
sea water, or wetting and 350 400 450 0.40 40
drying cycles, or gases,
etc.****
* Values in table are for reinforced concrete and pre-stressed concrete, cement
contents may be reduced by 50kg/m3 for plain unreinforced concrete.
** Normal range and high range water reducers may be used to reduce the w/c ratio
and to obtain the desired consistency.
*** If the aggregate nominal maximum size lies between two values in the table the
cement content for the smaller nominal size shall be considered.
**** Special precautions shall be considered to avoid shrinkage and thermal stresses
cracking.
2-3-4-3 Minimum and maximum cement content

Table (2-9) may be used to determine the minimum cement content
for concrete mixtures using Portland cement according to exposure
conditions. Generally, cement content in concrete mixtures shall not exceed
450 kg/m3. In case of using cement content more than 450 kg/m3, special
considerations shall be taken into the design to avoid shrinkage or thermal
stresses cracking.
2-3-4-4 Maximum salt and deleterious materials contents in mixing

water
In mixing water the salt content and deleterious materials content shall
not exceed the values given in Section (2-2-3).
2- 21
Chapter 2
2-3-4-5 Maximum chloride ion content in concrete

To protect the reinforcing steel from corrosion, the chloride ion
content at age 28 days for the concrete mixture shall not exceed the values
given in table (2-10). The sources of chloride ions are mixing water,
aggregate, cement and admixtures and not the surrounding environment.
Table (2-10) Maximum chloride ion content in concrete mixtures to

protect reinforcing steel from corrosion
Maximum Chloride Ion Content in
Concrete Type Exposure Condition Concrete as Percentage of Cement Weight
Water Soluble Acid Soluble
Exposed to
0.15 0.20
Reinforced Chlorides
Concrete Not Exposed to
0.30 0.40
Chlorides
Pre-stressed
All Conditions 0.06 0.10
Concrete
2-3-4-6 Maximum sulfate content in concrete

Total sulfate content at age 28 days for the concrete mixture,
determined as SO3, shall not exceed 4% of cement weight in the mixture.
The sources of sulfates are mixing water, aggregate, cement and
admixtures and not the surrounding environment.
2-3-4-7 Determination of chloride and sulfate contents in concrete

The chloride and sulfate contents for the concrete mixture shall be
determined using the procedure outlined in the testing manual (Appendix
3). Three standard cubes shall be prepared during concrete casting, and
shall be kept after de-molding away from water or any salt contamination.
The chloride and sulfate contents shall be determined at 28 days of age as
percentage of cement weight in the mixture.
2-3-4-8 Alkali aggregate reaction
2-3-4-8-1 Alkali-silica reaction

Some aggregate contains various forms of active silica such as; Opal
and Cristobalite that can chemically react with the alkalis (such as Sodium
Oxide Na2O, and Potassium Oxide K2O) found in the cement and other
mixture ingredients. The reaction results in a gel-like production (i.e.
alkali-silica gel) around aggregate particles that swell upon water
2- 22
Chapter 2
absorption causing internal stresses which result in cracking and

deterioration of concrete. Table (2-11) gives the sequential testing
procedure that shall be conducted on the aggregate by the quarry before
using.
The following recommendations shall be adopted to mitigate the
effect of alkali-silica reaction in concrete:
- Equivalent Sodium Oxide content of the Portland cement shall not
exceed 0.6% by weight.
- Total alkalis in the concrete mixture expressed as equivalent sodium
oxide shall not exceed 3kg/m3.
- Using supplementary cementing materials (SCM) such as; granulated
ground blast furnace slag, silica fume, fly ash, to replace portion of the
cement content after the approval of the consultant on the type and
replacement level (the effectiveness of the used materials in reducing
ASR effect shall be proven by laboratory tests).
- Take necessary precautions to reduce the water permeability of the
concrete by using suitable isolation or water proofing membranes.
- The nominal maximum size of the used aggregate shall not exceed
25mm
In case of absence of conformity certificate from quarry, suitability of
aggregate for use in reinforced and pre-stressed concrete shall be
confirmed.
Table (2-11) Test procedure to detect aggregate alkali-silica reaction

Test Procedure Analysis & Results Precaution
1- Accelerated Expansion of Aggregate could be - If expansion is
Mortar Bar test mortar bar is used if expansion is between 0.1% and
(Test 2-27)* measured after 14 less than 0.1% 0.2%, test (2) shall
(ASTM C1260-01) days be carried out
- Aggregate shall be
rejected if
expansion is greater
than 0.2%
2- Concrete Prism Expansion is Aggregate could be Aggregate shall be
Test for Alkali measured after 1 used if expansion is rejected if
Reactivity (ASTM year less than 0.04% expansion is greater
C1293-01) than 0.04%
* The test number refers to the test number in the testing manual (Appendix 3)
2- 23
Chapter 2
2-3-4-8-2 Alkali-carbonate reaction

Some carbonate aggregates react with cement alkalis producing
compounds that could cause with time expansion and cracking of concrete
resulting in reducing its durability. When Petrographic and X-ray
diffraction test results show the likelihood of this phenomenon, then the
testing outlined in table (2-12) shall be followed. The testing shall be
conducted by the quarry. The cement shall have alkali content, expressed as
equivalent sodium oxide, not more than 0.4% by cement weight. Since
several factors affect this phenomenon such as aggregate mineral
composition, aggregate texture, calcite to dolomite ratio, clay minerals,
etc., specialists shall be consulted on using carbonate aggregates in
concrete to determine the limits of such factors in affecting the
phenomenon.
In case of absence of conformity certificate from quarry, suitability of
aggregate for use in reinforced and pre-stressed concrete shall be
confirmed.
Table (2-12) Test procedure to determine aggregate alkali-carbonate

reaction
Test Procedure Analysis & Results Precaution
1- Potential Alkali Expansion is Aggregate could be If expansion is
Reactivity of measured after 1 used if expansion is greater than 0.1%
Carbonate Rocks year less than 0.1% Test (2) shall be
Rock Cylinder carried out
Method (Test 2-
26)* (ASTM C586-
99)
2- Alkali Reactivity Expansion is Aggregate could be Aggregate is
Using Concrete measured after 1 used if expansion is rejected if
Prism (ASTM year less than: expansion is greater
C1105-95) 0.015% after 3 months than 0.04%
0.025% after 6 months
0.03% after 1 year
* The test number refers to the test number in the testing manual (Appendix 3)
2-3-4-9 Concrete exposed to acidic medium

Care in selecting concrete ingredients and its production shall be
practiced if the concrete is being exposed to acidic medium (pH value <
7.0). This shall include increasing cement content, reducing w/c ratio,
reducing sand content, full compaction, increasing concrete cover, and
using protective coatings or membranes against acid attack. These
2- 24
Chapter 2
precautions may be used for ordinary Portland cement and sulfate resisting
Portland cement. When the pH value of the acidic medium is equal to or
less than 5.50, the use of high slag cement could improve the resistance to
the acidic medium, and also the use of protective coatings and membranes
is essential.
2-3-4-10 Concrete exposed to sulfates

When concrete is exposed to sulfate salts found in the soil or
underground water (as magnesium, or sodium, or potassium, or calcium
sulfates), the cement type and content shall be considered carefully, as well
as aggregate type, nominal maximum size, w/c ratio, and minimum
characteristic strength. Values given in table (2-13) could be used to
determine these factors.
On using the values in table (2-13), consider the following:
- Values are applicable for concrete using natural aggregate.
- Values are applicable for concrete subjected to underground water with
pH value ranging from 6 to 9.
- For small concrete sections or when concrete is subjected to water
pressure from one side or partially submerged it is necessary to reduce
w/c and/or increase cement content values given in table (2-13) to ensure
the minimum concrete permeability.
2- 25
Chapter 2
Table (2-13) Requirements for concrete subjected to sulfates*
Sulfate Concentration as Minimum

SO3 Cement Content
Aggregate
Groun
Nominal
In Soil d
Maximum Size
Water
(mm)
Minimum
SO3 Maximum
Cement Characteristic
(gm/lit) w/c
Type Strength
in a Ratio**
(N/mm2)
Total mixture
SO3 of ppm 32 20 10
% water
and
soil
(2:1)
< 0.2 < 1.0 < 300 CEM I 350 400 400 0.52
0.2 CEM I or
1.0 to 300
to Moderate 350 400 400 0.50 25
1.50 to 700
0.35 Heat
Sulfate
0.35 700 Resisting
1.5 to
to to or 350 400 400 0.45 30
1.9
0.50 1200 Moderate
Heat
0.50 1200
1.9 to Sulfate
to to 400 450 450 0.43 35
3.1 Resisting
1.0 2500
Sulfate
1.0 2500
3.1 to Resisting
to to 400 450 450 0.40 40
5.6 +Protective
2.0 5000
coating
* Refer to article (2-3-4-11) for dual action of chloride and sulfate salts.
** Dry aggregate.
*** If the aggregate nominal maximum size lies between two values in the table the
cement content for the smaller nominal size shall be considered.
2-3-4-11 Concrete exposed to dual action of chlorides and sulfates

Occasionally, concrete is subjected to high concentration of sulfate
and chloride salts such as sea water or underground water. Concrete
durability is greatly affected by these exposure conditions besides
reinforcing steel corrosion. The exposure condition could be by total
submersion or exposure to cycles of wetting and drying.
2- 26
Chapter 2
The following precautions shall be considered:

- The used aggregate shall be inert and non-reactive with cement alkalis.
- Using cement with C3A content ranging from 5% to 8%. Portland
cement CEM I, or moderate heat Portland cement, or high slag cements,
or pozzolanic cement could be used.
- The water soluble chloride in concrete shall not exceed 0.1% of cement
weight.
- For sea-water structures exposed to freezing and thawing, air-entraining
admixture shall be used.
- The concrete cover shall not be smaller than 50mm for structures
submerged in water or exposed to air.
- The concrete cover shall not be smaller than 70mm for structures
exposed to wetting and drying cycles.
- Using dense concrete. Table (2-9) shall be used to determine minimum
cement content, maximum w/c ratio and minimum characteristic strength
while achieving optimum compaction.
2-3-4-12 Freezing and thawing

The use of air-entraining admixture shall improve the concrete
durability when exposed to freezing and thawing. The air content shall be
determined and accordingly the mixture composition shall be adjusted by
the consultant, and by using guide technical data and laboratory results.
The following are guide values for average air content for fresh concrete at
the time of casting:
- 7% on using aggregate with nominal maximum size of 10mm.
2-3-4-13 protecting reinforcing steel

Protecting reinforcing steel is achieved by the alkaline environment
around bars and by sufficient concrete cover. In addition, all the
precautions and requirements previously mentioned in Section (2-3-47),
especially the minimum cement content and maximum w/c ratio shall be
strictly followed. The concrete cover depends on the exposure conditions of
2- 27
Chapter 2
the concrete tension side. Tables (4-13) (10-6) and (10-7) give the
recommended concrete cover values.
2-4 Fire resistance of concrete

Concrete resistance to fire is the time of exposure to direct fire,
according to standard tests, before disintegration and/or failure of the
concrete element. The Egyptian Code for Design and Construction
Requirements for Structures Exposed to Fire shall be the basis for
designing concrete to resist fire.
Herein in this code, it is important to set the principal limitations that
shall be taken into consideration to increase the concrete resistance to fire.
The most important limitations are:
- Type and dimensions of structural element.
- Concrete cover and reinforcing steel protection.
- Concrete and aggregate type.
- Reinforcement type, steel type and reinforcement arrangement.
- Construction method and structure type.
These limitations shall all be considered in the design to achieve
concrete fire resistance for each concrete element to fulfill its goal. To
achieve concrete resistance to fire for a time period ranging from half an
hour to four hours, the guide values given in tables (2-14-a) and (2-14-b)
could be used.
2- 28
Chapter 2
Table (2-14-a) Minimum concrete dimensions in (mm) for fire

resistance of reinforced concrete
Fire Period (hour) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
Column Smallest
200 200 250 300 400 450
Dimension
Simple Beam Breadth 120 120 150 200 240 280
Minimum Continuous Beam
120 120 120 150 200 240
Concrete Breadth
Dimension Slab Thickness (simple or 80 100 110 130 150 170
(mm) continuous)
*<0.4% 150 150 180 --- --- ---
Concrete
0.4%<<1% 120 120 140 160 200 240
Wall
>1% 120 120 120 120 150 180
Column Cover 20** 20 20 25 25 25
Simple Beam Cover 20** 20 30 45 60 70
Concrete
Continuous Beam Cove 20** 20** 25 40 50 60
Cover
Simple Slab Cover 15 20 25 35 45 55
Beyond
Stirrups Continuous Slab Cover 15 20 20 25 35 45
(mm) Concrete 0.4%<<1% 25 25 25 25 25 25
Wall
Cover >1% 15 15 25 25 25 25
* is the longitudinal steel percentage in the concrete wall

** The concrete cover could be reduced to 15mm if the aggregate nominal maximum
size is smaller than 15mm
The following requirements shall be considered:

a- The minimum concrete cover shall not smaller than neither the values
stated in article (4-3-2-3-b) nor the larger bar diameter used.
b - The concrete cover could spall, if it is more than 40mm. In such case,
extra precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete cover by using
plastering layer above the concrete surface or using extra
reinforcement mesh at a depth of 20mm from concrete surface.
c- On using external plastering layer, it can be used as part of the
concrete cover as follows:
1 - When using gypsum or cement mortar as plastering layer, the
equivalent cover is equal to 0.6 the actual plastering thickness.
2 - When using lightweight plastering such as vermiculite, the
equivalent cover is equal to the complete plastering thickness.
2- 29
Chapter 2
Table (2-14-b) Minimum concrete dimensions in (mm) for fire

resistance of pre-stressed concrete
Fire Period (hour) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
Simple Beam Breadth 120 120 150 200 240 280
Minimum
Continuous Beam Breadth 120 120 120 150 200 240
Concrete
Slab Thickness (Simple or
Dimension (mm) 100 100 110 120 140 150
Continuous)
Simple Beam Cover 25 40 55 70 80 90
Concrete Cover
Continuous Beam Cover 20* 30 40 55 70 80
Beyond Stirrups
Simple Slab Cover 25 35 45 55 65 75
(mm)
Continuous Slab Cover 20* 25 35 45 55 65
* The concrete cover could be reduced to 15mm if the aggregate nominal maximum
size is smaller than 15mm
2-5 Concrete exposed to abrasion and wear
2-5-1 General
Abrasion resistance of concrete is the ability of its surface to resist
frictional wear. Concrete compressive strength could be considered as an
indication to its abrasion resistance.
Abrasion resistance of concrete could be evaluated by determining the
percentage loss in weight or volume or thickness; also visual inspection
may be used to evaluate quality of concrete surface.
2-5-2 Requirements for abrasion and wear resistant concrete

1 - Concrete grade shall not be lower than 30 N/mm2. This is achieved by:
a- Low w/c ratio.
b - Good aggregate grading and nominal maximum size not more
than 25mm.
c- For roads, runways, and coastal structures, the aggregate
hardness shall comply with the limits stated in table (2-1) when
gravel or crushed gravel is used. When using crushed stone the
maximum percent passing from sieve 1.7mm shall not exceed
25% when exposed to 500 revolutions in Loss Angeles machine.
d - Concrete slump shall not be more than 75mm.
e - On using more than one concrete layer, the concrete slump for
the surface layer shall not exceed 25mm.
f- Air content shall not exceed 3%.
2- 30
Chapter 2
2 - For concrete surfaces exposed to highly abrasive load such as heavy

truck loads, erosion in sea water structures, bridge piers, tunnels, the
concrete surface layer shall have a characteristic strength not less than
35 N/mm2, the slump shall not be more 25mm, and the aggregate
nominal maximum shall not be more than 12mm. In addition the
aggregate shall comply with all the requirements stated in table (2-1).
3 - Care in concrete surface finish by delaying compaction and surface
finish until concrete gets rid of all bleed water.
4 - Bleed water on concrete surface could be dewatered by vacuum.
5 - Surface topping could be used in severe exposure conditions;
manufacturer data specifications shall be referred to.
6 - Good curing of concrete surface for a period not less than 7 days,
curing shall start immediately after surface finish.
2-6 Basiscs of concrete mixture design
2-6-1 General
The aim of mixture design is to determine the constituents
proportions in order to fulfill both the fresh concrete and hardened concrete
requirements. That is why mixture design shall principally include the
determination of w/c ratio to achieve the required compressive strength and
durability at the same time. For those mixtures using low w/c ratios for
strength or durability requirements, the use of normal range and high range
water reducers shall be considered to obtain the desired fresh concrete
workability. All precautions during construction shall be implemented to
assure that w/c ratio shall not be increased during concrete manufacture as
it will be a violation of the mixture design principals and will have adverse
effect on both strength and durability.
Concrete mixture design requires initial information such as properties
of ingredient materials, strength requirement, exposure conditions (which
will determine the maximum w/c ratio, minimum cement content and
cement type). Structure dimensions and construction facilities will dictate
required workability level.
Mixture design is highly related to strength evaluation processes, as
mixture adjustment will be implemented during construction based on such
evaluation.
2- 31
Chapter 2
2-6-2 Mixture design requirements

The engineer may use any suitable mixture design method taking into
consideration the following:
2-6-2-1 Compressive strength requirements

Concrete mixtures are designed in order that the mean target
compressive strength (fm) is equal to the characteristic compressive
strength (fcu) (i.e. Section 2-3-2-1) plus the margin of safety (M),
according to the following relationship:
fm = fcu + M (2-5)
Margin of safety is calculated as follows:
M = Ks (2-6)
Where;
M = Margin of safety
K = Factor determined based on percentage defects allowed in
compressive strength test results, equal to 1.64 to achieve
the characteristic compressive strength fcu stated in article
(2-3-2-1)
S = Standard deviation for compressive strength test results
previously carried out by the contractor
In case of availability of more than 40 compressive strength test

results for similar concrete mixtures (i.e. using similar materials and under
similar production circumstances), the standard deviation for these test
results shall be used as long as the following requirements are met:
- s shall not be less than 4N/mm2 for fcu 20N/mm2
- s shall no be less than 20% of the characteristic strength for fcu
<20N/mm2
In case no data is available the standard deviation is calculated as

follows:
- 8N/mm2 for concrete mixtures with fcu 20N/mm2
- 40% of the characteristic strength for concrete mixtures with fcu <
20N/mm2
2- 32
Chapter 2
The mean target compressive strength (fm) shall be adjusted with

work progress and the availability of 40 compressive strength test results or
more from which the standard deviation shall be calculated. The calculated
standard deviation shall not be lower than 3.5N/mm2.
Designer has to determine w/c ratio that will achieve the mean target
compressive strength for preliminary mixture design and accordingly with
every adjustment in the standard deviation afterwards. Consequently this
will result in adjusting all other mixture ingredients proportions.
2-6-2-2 Durability requirements

During concrete mixture design steps, all durability requirements shall
be fulfilled. This includes water tightness, maximum chloride and sulfate
contents in the mixture.
a - Water tightness
Designers shall abide by the maximum w/c ratio and minimum cement
content stated in table (2-10) to achieve the required water tightness and
those which will achieve mean target compressive strength. Concrete
mixtures may contain pozzolanic materials as supplementary cementing
material to help accomplish the needed water tightness level in case of high
performance concrete mixtures.
All curing provisions shall be followed to assure the continuation of
hydration and improve water impermeability and concrete durability.
b - Chloride and sulfate contents

- Chloride ion content in the concrete mixtures shall not exceed the values
stated in table (2-10).
- Sulfate content shall not exceed the values stated in article (2-3-4-6).
- Table (8-4-b) gives the frequency of testing.
2-6-2-3 Workability requirements

Concrete workability shall be suitable to the structure dimensions and
the available compaction method as given in Section (2-3-1-2). Also, other
factors shall be taken into consideration such as mixing, transportation and
casting methods and the time between water addition to the mixture and
final surface finish. Due to high variability in these factors, designers may
2- 33
Chapter 2
have to use admixtures to improve workability or to develop new

properties; article (2-2-4) shall be addressed with respect to this issue.
2-6-3 Assurance trial mixtures

Before the approval of the concrete mixture, it shall be carried out in
the laboratory to confirm the requirements of the concrete mixture and to
make any necessary adjustments to comply with project specifications.
Field trial mixtures shall be carried out to check the performance of site
mixing and the achievement of the required compressive strength with the
mixture proportions undertaken in the laboratory.
2-6-3-1 Laboratory trial mixtures

Laboratory trial mixtures shall be conducted using the same materials
included in the mixture design in order to check out workability, density
and compressive strength which shall not be lower than the mean target
compressive strength (fm) under laboratory conditions, and to make
necessary adjustments to achieve desired properties. Laboratory trial
mixtures are mandatory to concrete mixture design procedure and its
acceptance.
For the approval of the concrete mixture design, the following
information shall be submitted:
1 - Characteristic compressive strength, mean target compressive strength
and margin of safety used in mixture design.
2 - Properties of used materials: cement, admixtures and aggregate.
3 - Ingredients proportions by weight to produce one cubic meter with the
condition that the aggregate is in a saturated surface dry condition,
thus all the mixing water is available for cement hydration.
4 - Slump of trial mixtures.
5 - Average compressive strength results at 28 days of age and its
comparison with the mean target compressive strength (fm).
6 - Chloride and sulfate content in hardened concrete.
2-6-3-2 Compulsory assurance field mixtures

Concrete manufacturer, either in site or in ready mixture plant, has to
perform full scale three separate trial concrete mixtures using the same
materials intended to be used in actual production and which are used in the
mixture design. Each mixture is preferred to be carried out separately.
2- 34
Chapter 2
Concrete workability is measured for each mixture and at least nine

standard cubes shall be prepared for each mixture to be tested in
compression. Three of these cubes could be tested at earlier age such as 3
days or 7 days, while the rest shall be tested at age 28 days. Each set of
cubes represents one test. A test result is the average of the tested standard
cubes taken from one mixture according to the preparation and testing
procedures outlined in the testing manual of this code (Appendix 3) or
according to the requirements of the project specifications.
The test results of all the three mixtures shall comply with the
following requirements:
1 - The average compressive strength of the three mixtures at age 28 days
shall not be lower than 95% of the compressive strength of the
laboratory trial mixture using the same material consignments and
proportions.
2 - The average compressive strength shall not be lower than the
characteristic compressive strength plus 6.5N/mm2.
3 - Not a single cube shall be lower than the characteristic compressive
strength.
4 - The difference between the lowest cube result and the highest cube
result in each test shall not be more than 15% of the average strength
of that test.
2-6-3-3 Additional assurance mixtures

The contractor or the concrete supplier shall make additional trial
mixtures upon the request of the consultant or on making substantial
changes to the used materials or mixture proportions. The request of these
additional trial mixtures shall not be considered in case of adjusting
mixture proportions according to the quality control program with the
intention of changing lower strength limits to achieve the mean target
strength. Also these additional trial mixtures shall not be requested to check
minimum cement content or maximum w/c ratio. As well, the routine
testing according to the quality control program, as outlined in Section (8-
9-3), shall not be a part of these additional trial mixtures.
2-6-4 Ready mixture concrete

Occasionally, long hauls of ready mixture concrete in truck mixers
results in loss of the concrete workability, which dictates the use of set
retarding admixtures. Under all circumstances, ready mixture concrete shall
2- 35
Chapter 2
be handled on its delivery at the job site according to the requested

specifications for fresh and hardened concrete (i.e., consistency - air
content preparation for strength specimens).
2-6-5 Principles of concrete mixture evaluation

Consultants shall perform continuous evaluation for concrete quality
on site using the daily acquired data for concrete workability and strength
at different ages. These evaluations could be used to predict in the future
any divergence in concrete properties and mixture composition than the
approved mixture. In case any divergence in concrete properties or mixture
composition is detected, the causes shall be found out, and re-evaluation of
the produced concrete, both in the fresh and hardened states, shall be as
follows:
2-6-5-1 Fresh concrete evaluation

Upon using slump test values as acceptance criteria for fresh concrete,
the difference between test values and project specifications shall not
exceed the following values:
- 30mm for concrete with slump values > 80mm
- 20mm for concrete with slump values < 80mm
2-6-5-2 Hardened concrete evaluation during construction
a - Preliminary evaluation
This procedure is used to evaluate preliminary compressive strength
values. The test results shall be accepted and considered to fulfill the
characteristic compressive strength if the following two conditions are met:
1 - The test result shall not be lower than the characteristic strength by
more than 10%
2 - The average of the test and the previous three test values shall exceed
the characteristic strength by a minimum of 10%.
b - Final evaluation
When 40 or more test results are available, the final strength
evaluation for the compressive strength shall be conducted. The concrete
shall be accepted and considered to fulfill the characteristic strength if the
percentage of test results falling below the characteristic strength is less
than or equal to 5% of the total number of tested specimens.
2- 36
Chapter 2
In case the conditions in articles (a) and (b) are not fulfilled, the
consultant shall be referred to decide the necessary action.
2-7 Ready mix concrete requirements

The ready mix specifications prepared by the Housing and Building
National Research Center shall be considered when dealing with fresh
concrete delivered to the site. The specifications give details on materials
selection and mixture design according to requested specifications to
accomplish required concrete quality. These specifications do not cover
casting, compaction and curing of concrete after its delivery.
The specifications deal with quality assurance in ready mix batching
plants and its technical requirements, and the evaluation procedure for its
environmental impact and professional safety.
2-8 Self-compacting concrete requirements

The self-compacting concrete (SCC) specifications prepared by the
Housing and Building National Research Center shall be considered when
dealing with this type of concrete. The specifications cover the following
technical points:
- Requirements to produce SCC using local materials.
- Properties of mixture constituent requirements.
- Mixture design fundamentals.
- Concrete production and casting and curing requirements.
- Performance evaluation procedures.
- Quality control and quality assurance
The specifications appendices include guides for designers,
manufacturers, contractors, consultants and testing laboratories.
2-9 Hot-weather concreting requirements

The specifications for hot-weather concreting prepared by the Housing
and Building National Research Center shall be considered when dealing
with concrete in hot weather. The specifications cover the following
technical points:
- Climate in Egypt and definition of hot weather.
2- 37
Chapter 2
- Main problems during hot-weather concreting for fresh and hardened

concrete.
- Ambient factors that affect fresh and hardened concrete properties in
hot-weather.
- Methods of selecting concrete materials and mixture design.
- Special requirements for hot-weather concrete production such as;
materials consignment, mixing, transportation, form-works, casting,
compaction, surface finishing and curing.
- Quality control and quality assurance procedures in hot-weather
concreting to produce concrete which fulfills both required strength and
durability.
- Different cooling systems.
2- 38
Chapter 3
CHAPTER 3
GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
3-1 Design methods

This chapter is intended to present the main principles for the design
of concrete structures and elements thereof that based on statistical
concepts shall ensure adequate performance of structures and shall fulfil all
the serviceability and safety requirements against all probable types of
failures when subjected to all applicable loads. The design can be
performed using one of the following two design methods:
1 - Limit States Design Method
2 - Elastic(Working Stress) Design Method
3-1-1 Limit states design method

In compliance with the requirements of section 3-1, members shall be
proportioned for adequate strength under ultimate loads using material
strength reduction factors that account for all factors that could adversely
affect the strength of concrete members. The ultimate load and material
strength reduction factors are specified in sections 3-2-1-1 and 3-2-1-2 of
this code, respectively. The structure shall also be designed for adequate
performance under service loads.
3-1-1-1 Ultimate strength limit state

It is the limit that based on statistical concepts, shall ensure that the
structure and elements thereof shall be safe against failure. This limit state
shall also control the probable mode of failure (section 4-2)
3-1-1-2 Stability limit state

It is the limit that based on statistical concepts, shall ensure that the
structure and elements thereof shall be safe against buckling (section 6-4),
overturning, uplift and sliding.
3-1-1-3 Serviceability limit states

They are the limits that based on statistical concepts, shall ensure
adequate performance and durability of structures and elements thereof
under service loads by controlling the adverse effects that could hinder the
intended use of the structure. They are classified as follows:
3-1
Chapter 3
a - Deformation and deflection limit state

It is the limit that based on statistical concepts, shall control the
deflection and deformations that could hider the efficient use of the
structure and elements thereof (section 4-3-1).
b - Cracking limit states

It is the limit that based on statistical concepts, shall control the
cracking that could hider efficient use and durability of the structure and
elements thereof (section 4-3-2)
3-1-2 Elastic (working stress) design method

In compliance with the requirements of section 3-1, members shall be
proportioned to satisfy allowable stresses that shall ensure the satisfaction
of the safety requirements of structures against failure, including the
satisfaction of the stability limit state of section 3-1-1-2, as well as, the
serviceability limit states specified in section (3-1-1-3)
3-2 Safety provisions
3-2-1 Safety provisions for limit states design method
3-2-1-1 Loads and load combinations
a - Service loads
Service loads can be defined as those values of the loads which
based on statistical concepts have an accepted probability of not being
exceeded during the life span of the structure by more than 5%. The
probable values of the various types of loads on structures shall be in
accordance with the Egyptian Code for Loads on structures (ECP 201). The
loads include dead, live, wind, seismic, and dynamic loads. The ECP 201
code also specifies provisions for soil and liquid pressures, as well as,
thermal, creep and shrinkage, settlements effects.
b - Ultimate loads
Ultimate loads are evaluated by multiplying the service loads by
appropriate load factors for the following load combinations:
1 - For members subject to live loads:
3-2
Chapter 3
U = 1.4 D + 1.6 L (3-1)
Where,
D = Dead Loads
L = Live Loads
2 - For members subject to live loads where the magnitudes of the live
loads do not exceed 75% of those of dead loads:
U = 1.5 (D + L) (3-2)
3 - For members subject to live loads and lateral pressures resulting from
soil and fluids:
U = 1.4 D + 1.6 (E + L) (3-3)
Where,
E = Lateral pressures
The resulting ultimate load shall be less than that obtained from
Equation 3-1. For water tanks, the term 1.6 E in Equations 3-3 and 3-7
shall be replaced by 1.4 E.
4 - For members subject to either wind load, W or seismic load, S the

ultimate load shall be taken equal to the greater value obtained from
the following two equations:
U = 0.8 (1.4 D + 1.6 L + 1.6 W) (3-4)
U = 1.12 D + L + S (3-5)
The resulting ultimate loads shall be less than that obtained from
Equation 3-1.
Where,
S = Ultimate seismic loads. The load shall be evaluated in
accordance with the provisions of Egyptian Code for Loads on
structures (ECP 201).
3-3
Chapter 3
= A factor that accounts for the effects of the sustained live loads
on the structure during seismic activities.
= 1/4; for residential buildings
= 1/2; for public buildings including, schools, hospitals,
garages, theatre halls, commercial and office buildings
= 1 ; for structures subject to loads acting for a long duration
of time which include but are not limited to, silos, bins,
water tanks, libraries, storage buildings
5 - For the cases of loadings where a higher dead load values would
increase the stability of the structure, and where a reduction of dead load
values would increase the effects of other loads, the ultimate loads given
in items 1, 3 and 4 shall be replaced, respectively, by the following:
U = 0.9 D (3-6)
U = 0.9 D + 1.6 E (3-7)
U = 0.9 D + 1.3 W (3-8)
U = 0.9 D + S (3-9)
6 - For the cases where the temperature effects are taken into consideration:
U = 0.8 (1.4 D + 1.6L + 1.4 T) (3-10)
But shall not be taken less than
U =1.4 (D + L) (3-11)
Temperature effects shall be evaluated in accordance with section 3-3.
7 - Dynamic loads, K can be treated as equivalent static load as follows:
U = 1.4D + 1.6 L + 1.6 K (3-12)
With due consideration of Equation 3-6
3-4
Chapter 3
c- Loads factors for serviceability limit states and working stress

design method
1- The loads for the cases of serviceability limit states (sections 3-1-1-
3) and when the working stress design method is used (section 3-2-1)
shall be taken equal to the service loads ( section 3-2-1-1-A). The
load combinations shall be taken equal to the following:
D+L (3-13- a)
D+L+W (3-13-b)
L S
D+ +
1.2 1.4 (3-13-c)
2 - For the cases of loadings where a higher dead load values would
increase the stability of the structure, and where a reduction of dead
load values would increase the effects of other loads the following
load combinations shall be applied:
0.9 D (3-14-a)
[0.9 D + W] or [0.9 D + (S/1.40)] (3-14-b)
3-2-1-2 Material strength reduction factors

The purpose of the material strength reduction factors, c and s for
concrete and steel, respectively, are to allow for the probability of
understrength members due to variations in material strengths and
dimensions that are considered to be within the allowable tolerances, and to
allow for inaccuracies in design equations and assumptions. Their values
are dependent on the degree of ductility and required reliability of the
member under load effects being considered (such as moment, shear,
eccentric compression, etc). Their values also reflect the importance of the
member in the structure. They are taken as follows:
1 - Ultimate strength limit state
A - Material Strength reduction factors for concrete, c and for steel,
s for applications involving;
3-5
Chapter 3
- Axial tension and eccentric tension

- Bending moments
- Shearing forces and twisting moments
- Bearing
- Bond
shall be taken as follows:
1.5 = c (3-15-a)
1.15 = s (3-15-b)
B - Material Strength reduction factors for concrete, c and for steel,

s for axial and eccentric compression force applications shall be
taken as follows :
7 (e / t )
c = 1.5 1.5 (3-16-a)
6 3
7 (e / t )
= 1.15 1.15 (3-16-b)
s
6 3
Where;
e
( ) 0.05
t
2 - Serviceability limit states

Material Strength reduction factors for concrete, c and for steel, s for
applications involving:
- Deflection
- Deformations
- Cracking
c = s = 1.0 (3-17)
3-6
Chapter 3
3-2-2 Safety provisions for working stress design method

The safety provisions for working stress design method shall be taken
in accordance with the provisions of section 3-2-1-1-C and the provisions
of Chapter 5.
3-3 Internal effects

A - Shrinkage of concrete: shall comply with section 2-3-3-4 of the
Egyptian Code for Loads on Structures, ECP 201.
B - Temperature effects: shall comply with section 2-3-3-3 of the
Egyptian Code for Loads on Structures, ECP 201.
C - Creep of concrete: shall comply with section 2-3-3-5 of this code.
3-7
Chapter 4
CHAPTER 4
LIMIT STATES DESIGN METHOD
4-1 General considerations
This chapter presents the main principles for the design of reinforced
concrete structures in accordance with the limit states design method
introduced in Chapter 3. Satisfying such limit states shall guarantee safety
of the structure against failure (Section 4-2), as well as shall guarantee that
all the serviceability requirements specified in Section 4-3 shall be
satisfied.
4-2 Ultimate strength limit state

This section presents the ultimate strength limit state design of
sections subject to flexure or eccentric forces (Section 4-2-1) , sections
subject to shear forces (Section 4-2-2), and sections subject to torsional
moments (Section 4-2-3), as well as the designs for bearing strength
(Section 4-2-4) and the bond strength (Section 4-2-5).
4-2-1 Ultimate strength limit state: flexure or eccentric forces

The design of the sections subject to flexure or eccentric forces in
compliance with the ultimate strength limit state shall be carried out
according to the provisions of this section.
4-2-1-1 Basic assumptions and general considerations

The strength limit state of the sections subject to flexure or flexure
combined with axial forces shall satisfy the equilibrium conditions and the
compatibility of strains, in addition to the following assumptions and
general considerations:
1 - Strains are linearly distributed over the cross-section and
consequently, the strains in the reinforcement and concrete are directly
proportional to the distance from the neutral axis. This assumption is
valid for all members except deep beams in which strains are
distributed nonlinearly.
2 - The stress-strain relationship of steel is taken according to the
idealized curve shown in Fig. (4-1). The design values of yield
strength shall not exceed the upper limits specified on the yield
strength for crack control, as given in the fourth assumption.
4-1
Chapter 4
Stress
+ ve
fy
fy / s
- ve y Es = 200 kN/mm2 + ve
Strain y Strain
f y / s
fy
fy = yield stress or proof stress
Stress
- ve
Figure (4-1) : Idealized stress strain curve for reinforcing steel
3-a The values of fy for high-tensile steel shall conform with the Egyptian
Standards, (ES). For welded wire fabrics values of yield strength shall
not exceed 400N/mm2.
b - When test result values of smooth bars exceed 240 N/mm2, the
design value of fy shall not be taken higher than 280 N/mm2.
c - The value of the design yield stress fy for smooth cold formed
welded wire fabrics shall be taken not more than 300 N/mm2.
4 - The design stresses for steel shall be governed by the cracking limit
state requirements of section (4-3-2)
5 - The tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected. Accordingly; all

tensile stresses shall be resisted by the reinforcing steel only.
6 - The distribution of stresses in the compression zone of the section
shall be taken according to the stress-strain curve obtained from
standard laboratory tests. It is also permitted to use the idealized curve
shown in Fig. (4-2)
7 - The maximum usable compressive strain in the concrete ( cu ) shall be
taken equal to 0.003 for members subject to flexure or flexure combined

with axial forces resulting in a part of the cross-section in tension. For
4-2
Chapter 4
sections subject to axial compression forces at the plastic centriod of the

section, where the plastic centroid is the point of application of the
ultimate compression force that results in uniform compression on the
section, the maximum usable strain shall be taken cu = 0.002
fc
Parabolic Curve 0.67 f cu

c
Stress
0.002 cu = 0.003 c
Strain
Figure (4-2) : Idealized stress strain curve for concrete in compression
8- Based on the sixth and seventh assumptions, the distribution of the ultimate
compression stresses on the section shall be as shown in Fig.(4-3).
0.67 fcu
cu = 0.003 c
c 0.002
d N.A.
As
s
Ultimate Strain Ultimate Stress
Distribution Distribution
Figure (4-3) : Distribution of strains and ultimate stresses
4-3
Chapter 4
9 - The requirements of assumptions (6, and 7) shall be considered

satisfied for rectangular sections, T-section and trapezoidal sections,
as shown in Fig. (4-4), by assuming uniformly distributed
compressive stress of the concrete having an equivalent zone limited
by the edge of the fibers subjected to the ultimate strain in the
compression zone and by a line parallel to the neutral axis and located
at a distance a = 0.8c from that edge; where c is the distance between
the neutral axis and the edge subjected to the maximum compression.
The value of uniform compression stresses is equal to 0.67 f cu / c . Such
a stress distribution is called an Equivalent rectangular stress block.
B 0.67fcu
cu=0.003 c
tf a=0.80c
c
t t d
N.A.
As As As
s
b b
Figure (4-4) : Equivalent rectangular stress block
10 - For circular sections and other sections that are not previously
mentioned, the ultimate stresses in the section shall be distributed
according to the distribution of ultimate stresses shown in Fig. (4-3).
As an alternate distribution, the depth of the equivalent stress block
can be determined for such cases by satisfying the conditions of
equality of the area of the equivalent stress block and the area of the
ultimate stresses with the condition of their centroids coincide .
11 - For sections subject to biaxial bending moments as well as sections

subject to biaxial bending moments accompanied by axial forces, the
distribution of the ultimate compression stresses shall be according to
Fig. (4-3). As an alternate distribution, the depth of the compression
stress block can be calculated according to sub-clause 10.
4-4
Chapter 4
4-2-1-2 Sections subject to flexure
4-2-1-2-a Sections with tension reinforcement only

For sections with tension reinforcement only in beams and in solid
slabs and for T-sections in which the neutral axis is located inside the
thickness of the slab, the ultimate limit moment shall be determined from
the following equation:
As . f y
M u d a (4-1)

s 2
The depth of the compression stress block shall be calculated from the
relation:
As . f y

s
a (4-2)
0.67f cu
b
c
The ratio a/d shall not be less than 0.1, the lever arm yct shall not be
less than 0.95d, and the minimum reinforcement ratio requirements of
Section (4-2-1-2-h) shall also be satisfied. The ratio a/d shall not exceed the
values given in Section (4-2-1-2-c).
4-2-1-2-b Balanced sections

For sections with tension reinforcement only, there exist a limiting
condition (balanced condition) between brittle failure mode and ductile
failure mode. Such a limit occurs when the ultimate tensile strain in steel
reaches a value that equals to f y y E s and the ultimate strain in concrete cu
reaches a value that equals to 0.003 simultaneously. To ensure providing
sufficient ductility, the amount of the reinforcing steel shall be less than the
value of the balanced condition. Section (4-2-1-2-c) gives the equations and
the limits related to avoiding reaching the balanced condition, namely; the
maximum percentage of tension reinforcement in a reinforced concrete
section max and the corresponding maximum admissible value of ultimate
bending moment in singly reinforced section M u max as well as the maximum
value of the ratio of the distance from the extreme compression fibers to the
effective depth of the section. For compatibility with the nominal stress-
4-5
Chapter 4
strain curve of reinforcing steel shown in Fig. (4-1), a nominal value for the
yield strain of steel is taken equals to:
fy
y (4-3)
s .E s
4-2-1-2-c Upper limits to values of Mumax and max for concrete

sections with tension reinforcement only and subject to
bending moment
R max .f cu .b.d 2
M umax = (4-4)
c
0.67f cu a max

A smax c d
max (4-5)
b.d fy

s
Tables (4-1) and (4-2) give the values of Rmax and max for different
values of steel grades for the case of redistribution of moments. Table (4-1)
gives the maximum limits for the case in which moment redistribution is
not permitted. In other words, the values of the bending moments shall be
taken according to the theory of elasticity in statically indeterminate beams,
slabs and frames that are loaded with various ultimate load cases including
differential settlement with due confirmation of achieving the design value
of fcu after construction, and according to the conditions mentioned in
Chapter 6 of this code. In such a case, it shall be recommended to
determine the values of the bending moments in statically indeterminate
beams and slabs through utilizing an accurate evaluation of the values of
the relative values of the stiffness of the structural elements as well as
through utilizing supporting systems that are compatible with the design
assumptions. It shall be also recommended to satisfy the conditions of
deformation and cracking.
Whenever redistribution of moments shall be permitted by an amount of
10%, the values of Rmax and max shall not exceed those given in table (4-2).
4-6
Chapter 4
Table (4-1) : Values of Rmax, max and cmax/d for sections with Tension
Steel Only
Steel Grade* cmax /d max Rmax

240/350 0.50 8.56x10 -4 f cu 0.214
280/450 0.48 7.00x10 -4 f cu 0.208
360/520 0.44 5.00x10 -4 f cu 0.194
400/600 0.42 4.31x10 -4 f cu 0.187
450/520** 0.40 3.65x10 -4 f cu 0.180
*According to table (2-3) and fcu in N/mm2.

** For steel net and complying with item (4-2-1-1-3)
Table (4-2) : Values of Rmax, max and cmax/d for sections with Tension
Steel Only for the Case of Moment Redistribution by an
amount of 10%
* cmax/d max Rmax

240/350 0.40 6.85x10 -4 f cu 0.180
280/450 0.38 5.58x10 -4 f cu 0.173
360/520 0.34 3.88x10 -4 f cu 0.157
400/600 0.32 3.29x10 -4 f cu 0.150
450/520** 0.30 2.74x10 -4 f cu 0.142
*According to table (2-3) and fcu in N/mm2.

** For steel net and complying with item (4-2-1-1-3)
For carrying out moment redistribution by an amount of 10%

according to Table (4-2), the following additional conditions shall be
satisfied:
1 - Ensuring the satisfaction of the equilibrium conditions after carrying
out the moment redistribution.
2 - Ensuring the satisfaction of the conditions of deformation and
cracking.
3 - Ensuring that the summation of the values of the hogging and sagging
moments in a single span is not less than 1.2 of the value of Mo as
shown in Fig. (4-5) , where, Mo is the maximum moment in a simply
supported beam.
4-7
Chapter 4
Not Less Than 1.2 Mo

Not Less Than 1.2 Mo
Figure (4-5): Moment distribution in beams

In case of using grades of steel different from those given in Tables
(4-1) and (4-2), the values of max and cmax/d shall be determined based on
satisfying the conditions of equilibrium and strain compatibility such that
value of cmax shall not exceed 0.67 cbalanced and with due consideration of
Section (4-2-1-1-3-a).
4-2-1-2-d Rectangular sections subject to bending moments with

tension and compression reinforcement
The strength of sections can be increased more than the values given
in the previous section (4-2-1-2-c) by using compression reinforcement
(Fig. 4-6). In such cases, the ultimate strength of the section is calculated
from the following equations:
d
As'
d
t
As
Figure (4-6) : Section with tension and compression reinforcement
f fy
M u R max cu b.d 2 A s d - d (4-6)

c s
where
4-8
Chapter 4
f y 0.67 a max . b. f cu A s .f y
A s = + (4-7)
s c s
The use of compression reinforcement shall be subject to the
satisfaction of the following conditions;
1 - The value of strain in the concrete at the level of the compression
reinforcement exceeds the yield strain of steel reinforcement. This
condition shall be satisfied for the following cases:
d'/d 0.20 for the case of mild steel
d'/d 0.15 for the case of 360/520 steel
d'/d 0.10 for the case of 400/600 steel
If the strain in the concrete at the level of the compression
reinforcement is less than the yield strain of steel reinforcement the
ultimate strength of the section shall be determined by using the
applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
2 - The use of stirrups at distances not exceeding 15 times the diameter of
compression reinforcement in order to prevent buckling of the
reinforcement.
3 - Satisfying the conditions of deformation and cracking.
4 - It shall be preferred to limit the area of the compression reinforcement,
As' in a section subject to flexure to a value less than 40% of the area of
the tension reinforcement, As .
5 - Generally, the area of compression reinforcement shall not be less
than 10% of that in the tension side, in order to enhance the long term
deflection of flexure members.
4-2-1-2-e T- and L-shaped sections with compression flange
having a depth of the equivalent rectangular stress
block exceeding the flange thickness
The design of such sections shall be based on the satisfaction of applicable
conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains according to Section
(4-2-1-1). Alternatively, the design could be carried out assuming that the
ultimate moment shall be resisted only by the compression flange of the
while neglecting contribution of the web in the ultimate moment
resistance. For such cases, the design shall be carried out using the smaller
value obtained from the use of the following two equations:
4-9
Chapter 4
f tf
M u 0.67 cu B. t f d - 2 (4-8-a)
c
f y t
M u A s d - f (4-8-b)
s 2
Where;
tf = thickness of the flange ;
B= effective width of the compression flange
The effective width of the compression flange of the section, B, shall

be taken according to Section (6-3-1-9).
4-2-1-2-f Sections having shapes other than those listed in sections

(4-2-1-2d & e) and subject to single bending
The design of such sections shall be based on the satisfaction of
applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains according to
Section (4-2-1-1)
4-2-1-2-g Sections subject to biaxial bending

The design of such sections shall be based on the satisfaction of
applicable conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of strains according to
Section (4-2-1-1). Alternatively, for rectangular sections, the simplified
method presented in Section (6-4-6) can be used.
4-2-1-2-h Minimum longitudinal reinforcement for sections subject

to flexure
1 - For control of cracking of singly reinforced beams subject to bending
moments and in order to guarantee sufficient ductility, the minimum
percentage of tension reinforcement in the section shall not be less
than the smaller of the following values:
f cu 1.1
min 0.225 (4-9)
fy fy
Where fuc and fy are in N/mm2. The preceding requirement need not be
applied if at every section the area of tensile reinforcement provided is
at least one-third greater than that required by analysis according to
Section (4-2-1-2-a).
4-10
Chapter 4
In all cases, minimum percentage of tension reinforcement in the

section shall not be less than 0.25% for normal mild steel or 0.15% for
high grade steel. For T- and L-shape sections the value of min is
calculated using the web width.
2 - In case the flange of a T-section is located on the tension side, it is
permitted to distribute part of the reinforcing bars not exceeding one-
third of the area of the main reinforcement in the effective width of
the flange according to Section (6-3-1-9) of this code or a width
equals 0.1 of the clear span of the beam, whichever is smaller.
3 - The minimum percentage of tension reinforcement min in slabs shall
be taken equal to the values given in Sections (6-2-1-2-3) and (6-2-1-
3-4) of this code.
4-2-1-3 Sections subject to combined flexure and axial compression

This section deals with the design of concrete sections subject to
uniaxial bending or biaxial bending combined with axial compression
forces acting at the plastic centroid of the section.
a - The design of concrete section subject to uniaxial bending or biaxial
bending combined with axial compression forces shall be carried out
using the method of strain compatibility that depends on satisfying
the conditions of the equilibrium and the compatibility of the strains
of the section resulting from the axial forces and bending moments
(Section 4-2-1-1).
b - For sections subject to single moments and an ultimate axial
compression load having a value not exceeding either the ultimate
load given in equation 4-10 or the balanced compression load, Pb,
Pu 0.04 f cu A c ; (4-10)
the effect of the axial force shall be neglected and the section shall be
designed to resist the moment only according to section (4-1-2-4).
The balanced compression load of the section, Pb is defined as the

eccentric compression load at which the strain in tension steel reaches
a value equals y f y Es s concurrently with strain in compressed
concrete equals cu 0.003 .
4-11
Chapter 4
c- Concrete section subject to an axial compression force and simple

bending having a value of the moment less than (Pu. emin) shall be
designed for a minimum eccentricity, emin where:
Mu
e min = 0.05 t (4-11)
Pu
or 20 mm whichever is bigger. For such a case, the design of the

section shall conform to Equation 4-12 which is considered to be the
maximum value of the compression strength of the section:
1 - For columns with tie reinforcement:
Pu = 0.35 f cu A c + 0.67 f y A sc (4-12-a)
2 - For columns with spiral reinforcement satisfying the requirements of

Section (6-4-7-i-j-k), the maximum strength is the smaller value of:
Pu = 0.35 f cu A k + 0.67 f y A sc + 1.38 f yp Vsp (4-12-b)
Pu = 1.14 (0.35 f cu A c + 0.67 f y A sc )
= 0.40 f cu A c + 0.76 f y A sc (4-12-c)
Where:
Ac cross sectional area of the concrete section
Ak area of concrete core enclosed by the spiral stirrups
Asc area of longitudinal reinforcement
fy yield stress of longitudinal reinforcement
fyp yield stress of spiral stirrups
Vsp volume of spiral steel reinforcement for unit length of
column and equals to:
A sp D k
Vsp = (4-12-d)
p
Where:
Asp cross sectional area of spiral reinforcing steel
Dk diameter of the concrete core enclosed by the centerline
of spiral stirrups
4-12
Chapter 4
P pitch of spiral stirrups and it ranges from 30mm to 80mm

according to Section (6-4-7-k)
The percentage of the volume of the spiral steel reinforcement sp related
to the volume of the concrete core limited by the diameter of the spiral stirrup
shall not be less than the value determined by the following equation:
f A
sp 0.36 cu c 1 (4-12-c)
f yp A k

Where;
Vsp
sp = (4-12-f)
Ak
4-2-1-4 Sections subject to axial tension or combined flexure and

axial tension
a- Sections subject to axial tension or to tension forces acting inside a
distance equals to (d-d') of the section shall be designed on the bases
that the tensile force shall be resisted by the steel reinforcement only.
b - The design Concrete sections other than those mentioned in the item,
a and subjected to axial tension forces and bending moments shall be
based on the satisfaction of applicable conditions of equilibrium and
compatibility of strains according to Section (4-2-1-1).
c - In all cases the conditions of the cracking limit state requirement shall
be satisfied according to Section (4-3-2).
4-2-2 Ultimate shear strength limit state

4-2-2-1 Beams
4-2-2-1-1 Nominal ultimate shear force in beams
a- For calculating the shear stresses, it shall be generally assumed that the
largest shear force shall be the one calculated at the faces of the supports,
as shown Fig. (4-7-c) and Fig. (6-21) . For the cases of direct supports
underneath the beams, where a normal compression is resulting at the
bottom edge of the beam, (Fig. (4-7-a,b) and Fig. (6-22)) , it shall be
permitted to calculate the shear stress and to design the web
reinforcement based on the shear force acting at a distance equals (d/2)
from the face of the support, where (d) is the effective depth of the beam.
4-13
Chapter 4
b - If a concentrated load Pu is located at a distance (a) from the face of the

support, which is less than or equal to twice the effective depth of the
beam (a 2d), it shall be permitted to calculate the shear stress resulting
from this load using the shear force equals to the original shear force
multiplied by a/2d (Fig. 4-7) provided that the shear stress calculated
according to the original shear force without reduction shall not be more
than the value given by Equation (4-16), but not more than 4.0 N/mm2.
c- Values of the shear force acting at a distance between the location of
the largest shear force and the face of the support for the cases in
which the critical section is located at a distance, d/2 from the face of
the support shall be considered to have a constant value equals to the
largest force calculated according to items (a & b) as shown in Fig. (4-
7).
4-2-2-1-2 Nominal ultimate shear strength

a- For beams and slabs with constant depth, the nominal ultimate shear
stress at any section is calculated from the following relationship:
Qu
qu (4-13)
b.d
Where;
Qu = ultimate shear force
b - For beams and corbels with variable depth in which the thickness of
the section increases with the increase of the bending moment, the
shear force Qu shall be replaced by the value Qur conforming to the
following equation:
M u . tan
Q ur Q u (4-14)
d
Where in the angle of inclination of the variation of the depth
measured from the beam axis, provided that the value tan is not
more than 0.33.
For beams with variable depth in which the thickness of the
cross-section decreases with the increase of the bending moment, the
shear force Qu is replaced by the value Qur conforming to the
following equation:
M u . tan
Q ur Q u (4-15)
d
4-14
Chapter 4
d t
Face of Support
d/2
Critical Section
d/2
q cu Critical Section
wu
q su
qu
Shear Rft.
q cu
a
a) Distributed Load
d/2
Critical Section
Critical Section
d/2 Pu
a
q wu
cu
q su
qu
Shear Rft.
2d
q cu
b) d/2 < a < 2d
d/2
a
Critical Section
Critical Section
d/2
a
q cu Pu wu
q su
qu
Shear Rft.
q cu
c) a < d/2
Figure (4-7) : Shear stress distribution and critical sections in beams
4-15
Chapter 4
c - The nominal shear stress for members subject to shear forces not
accompanied by torsional moments shall not be more than the value
given by the following equation:
f cu
q umax = 0.70 N/mm 2 < 4 N /mm2 (4-16)
c
The values of qumax can be taken from Table (4-3).
table (4-3) : Values of ultimate shear stress permitted for cross-

sections subject to shear force not accompanied by
torsional moments according to equation (4-16)
fcu N/mm2 20 25 30 35 40 50 60
qumax N /mm2 2.56 2.86 3.13 3.38 3.60 4.00 4.00
d - For members subject to shear forces accompanied by ultimate

torsional moments Mtu, the effect of the torsional moments can be
neglected if the value of the shear stresses resulting from such
moments qtu calculated from equation (4-47) is less than qtu calculated
according to equation (4-17) or Table (4-4). Otherwise, the concrete
dimensions for cross-sections subjected to combined shear forces and
torsional moments shall be determined based on the satisfaction of
equation (4-48) for solid sections and equation (4-49) for box-
sections.
f cu
q tu = 0.06 (4-17)
c
Table (4-4) : Values of ultimate shear stresses resulting from torsional

moments below which torsion can be neglected
according to equation (4-17)
fcu N/mm2 20 25 30 35 40 50 60
qtu N/mm 2
0.22 0.25 0.27 0.29 0.31 0.34 0.38
4-2-2-1-3 Ultimate shear strength provided by concrete

a- For sections subject to shear forces or to shear force accompanied by
torsional moments that result in shear stresses having values less than
4-16
Chapter 4
those given by equation (4-17), the value of the concrete ultimate shear
strength shall be calculated using the following equation:
f cu
q cu = 0.24 (4-18)
c
b - For sections subject to compression force, Pu, the value given by

equation (4-18) shall be increased by using the multiplier c given by:
P
c = 1 + 0.07 u (4-19)
Ac
c- For sections subject to axial tension force Pu, the ultimate shear
strength provided by concrete shall be neglected, unless otherwise
calculated by multiplying the concrete contribution of equation (4-18)
by the reduction factor t given by:
P
t = 1 - 0.30 u (4-20)
Ac
4-2-2-1-4 Nominal shear strength provided by web reinforcement in

beams
a- If the value qu calculated according to Section (4-2-2-1-2) is greater
than the value of the concrete ultimate shear strength qcu, shear
reinforcement of one or more of the following types shall be used:
1 - Stirrups normal to the axis of the member.
2 - Inclined stirrups or bent-up bars with an angle not less than 30o
with axis of the member accompanied by stirrups normal to the
axis of the member.
b - The nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement shall be
given by:
q su = q u - 0.5 q cu (4-21)
Figure (4-7) shown the regions that need web reinforcement with due
consideration of the minimum percentage of web reinforcement in the other
regions specified in section (4-2-2-1-6).
4-17
Chapter 4
4-2-2-1-5 Web reinforcement in beams

a- In case of using stirrups normal to the axis of the member without web
reinforcement, the web reinforcement shall be calculated from the
following equation:
A st q
st = = su (4-22)
b.s f y

s
where:
Ast = total cross-sectional area of stirrups resisting the shear
force
st = percentage of stirrups normal to the axis of the member
b = width of the web
s = spacing between stirrups in axis direction
b - In case of using inclined stirrups or bent-up bars inclined to the axis of

the member with an angle, the web reinforcement shall be
calculated according to the following equation:
A sb q sub
= (4-23)
b.s f y
sin + cos

s
Where
q sub = q su - q sus (4-24)
Asb = cross section area of inclined stirrups or bent-up bars that

are inclined with an angle to axis of the member
qsub = nominal ultimate shear strength of bent-up bars
qsus = nominal ultimate shear strength of stirrups normal to the
axis of the member
If the angle = 45o, equation (4-23) can be written in the following

form:
4-18
Chapter 4
A sb q sub
= (4-25)
b.s f y
2
s
b - In case of using one row of bent-up bars that are inclined with an
angle to the axis of the member, the nominal shear strength of the
bent-up bars shall be calculated using the following equation:
A sb q sub
= (4-26)
b.d f y
sin
s
In such a case, the value of qsub shall not exceed the following value:
f cu
q sub 0.24 (4-27)
c
4-2-2-1-6 General requirements for web reinforcement

a- The minimum percentage of web reinforcement in beams shall not be
less than:
0.4
min = (4-28)
fy
In which fy is an N/mm2
The percentage min shall not be less than the following values:
0.15 for normal mild steel 240/350
0.10 for high grade steel
In all cases, the stirrups shall not be less 5 6 mm/m
b - For beams with web width greater than or equal to 400mm, as well as
for beams having width greater than the height, stirrups having four
branches shall be provided such that the distance between the
branches shall not be more than 250mm.
4-19
Chapter 4
c- For beams in which the width is more than the effective depth, the
minimum percentage of web reinforcement given by equation (4-28)
shall be reduced to the value given by:
A stmin 0.40 q u

min = = (4-29)
b.s fy q
cu
Where
qu
1
qcu
d - The following structural members shall be designed and the thickness

their cross-section shall be determined based on the assumption that
shear strength shall be provided by concrete only according to
equation (4-30):
1 - Footings and slabs.
2 - Beams in which the thickness is not more than 250mm or 2.5
times the flange thickness or one-half the web thickness,
whichever is greater. Such a case represents the cases of hidden
beams and hollow-block slabs.
f cu
q cu 0.16 qu (4-30)
c
e- The yield stress of steel used as web reinforcement shall not be taken
more than 400 N/mm2.
f- The horizontal distance between stirrups, measured in the direction of
member axis, shall not be more than 200mm. For bent-up bars, this
distance shall not be more than effective depth, d.
g - The horizontal distance between bent-up bars can be increased to 1.5d
provided that the nominal shear stress is not more than one-and-half
the shear strength of concrete and it can be increased to 2d if the
nominal shear stress is not more than twice the shear strength of
concrete.
h - The web reinforcement shall be considered to be effective in the
case any line inclined at an angle 45o extended from the mid-depth of
the beam to the face of the support crosses one of the bent-up bars
through its effective length as shown in Fig. (4-8).
4-20
Chapter 4
i- Construction joints shall not be made at regions of high shear stresses.

j- In cases where the load is applied near the bottom of the concrete
section, sufficient amount of stirrups shall be provided to transmit the
load to the top surface of the section. Such hanger reinforcement shall
be in addition to the shear reinforcement.
k - In case of providing a construction joints at a section subjected to
shear force, the joint shall be designed according to Section (4-2-2-4).

0. r iv
Ef n
75
fe th ars
Le

Be
ct
g
nt
e
-u
p
B
Stirrups
Effective
Length
0.75 y
d
y
45
Figure (4-8) : Effective web reinforcement
4-2-2-1-7 D-regions
d - Regions in beams such as locations of openings, cross-section change
and locations of concentrated loads shall be designed using the strut-
and-tie method according to Section (6-11).
4-2-2-2 Slabs and footings

1 - Slabs and footings shall be designed and their thicknesses shall be
determined based on having the shear strength provided by concrete
only according to equation (4-30).
2 - The punching shear strength is calculated according to Section (4-2-2-3).
4-2-2-3 Punching shear

a- The critical section for calculating the punching shear stresses around
concentrated loads in slabs and footings is located at a distance d/2
from the perimeter of the concentrated force.
4-21
Chapter 4
b - The punching shear stress shall be calculated from the following

equation:
Q up
q up = (4-31)
b o .d
Where, bo is the length of the perimeter of the critical section as
shown in Fig. (4-9).
c- When calculating the punching shear stress, the effects of the
moments transferred from the flat slabs to the columns shall be
considered according to section (6-2-5-8).
d - The nominal concrete punching shear strength shall be calculated as
the smaller value of the following:
.d f
q cup = 0.8 + 0.2 cu (4-32-a)
bo c
a f
q cup = 0.316 0.5 + cu (4-32-b)
b c
Where a, b are the smaller and bigger dimensions of the

rectangular loaded surface, respectively. For other loading surfaces
that are not rectangular in shape, the values of the dimensions, (a and
b) shall be determined considering an effective loading surface. Such
an effective loading surface shall be taken as the smallest one and the
bigger dimension, b is the longest dimension of the effective loading
surface. The smaller dimension, a shall be the longest dimension
normal to the dimension b from the loading surface, bo is the length of
the perimeter of the critical section and d is the effective depth of the
slab as shown in Fig. (4-9-d) for an L-shaped loading surface. The
factor equals 4 for an interior column, 3 for and exterior column and
2 for a corner column. The value qcup shall not be more than the
following value:
f cu
q cup 0.316 (4-33)
c
With a limiting value of 1.6 N/mm2.
4-22
Chapter 4
b
d /2 b d /2 C ritic a l S e c tio n
F re e e d g e
d/2
a
a+d
a
d/2
d /2
C ritic a l S e c tio n
a + d b + d
F ig . ( 4 .9 .1 .B ) E d g e C o lu m n F ig . ( 4 .9 .1 .A ) In te rio r C o lu m n
d /2 d /2
b d /2
a
a
b
d
d/2
/2
E ffe c tiv e L o a d e d A re a C ritic a l S e c tio n

d/2
A c tu a l L o a d e d A re a
F ig . ( 4 .9 .1 .D ) N o n -R e c ta n g u la r C o lu m n F ig . ( 4 .9 .1 .C ) C o rn e r C o lu m n
Figure (4-9) : Critical sections for punching shear
e- The thickness of a slab or a footing required for resisting the punching

shear shall be determined based on having the punching shear resisted
by concrete only without any contribution provided by reinforcing
steel, as follows:
q cup q up (4-34)
4-2-2-4 Shear friction

a- The provisions of this section shall be applied in the cases where the
shear forces are transmitted by friction such as in the cases of
construction joints.
4-23
Chapter 4
b - Concrete shear strength shall be neglected and the full amount of the
shear force shall be transmitted through reinforcing steel conforming
to the following equation:
1 - In case of placing the reinforcing steel normal to the shear plane:
Qu N
A = + u (4-35)
sf fy fy

f s s

Where f is the coefficient of friction given in the following

subsection (c) and Nu is the force normal to the shear plane taken
positive if tensile and negative if compressive.
2 - In case of placing the reinforcing steel resisting the shear friction
at an angle f with the shear plane:
Qu Nu
A = + (4-36)

sf f f y

y sin
sin + cos
s f f f s f

Where;
0 f 90o
c- The coefficient of shear friction f shall be taken as follows:
- For concrete cast monolithically f = 1.2

- For concrete cast at construction or casting joints provided that
roughening the surface such that the roughening depth is within
5mm f = 0.8
- Similar to the previous condition but the roughening depth is less
than 5mm and also for the case of fixing structural steel elements
on concrete elements f =0.5
d - In addition to the preceding conditions, the stress due to shear friction

Qu Ac shall not be more than the value, 0.225 f cu c ,where Ac in the
area of the concrete section resisting shear with a limiting value of 5.0
N/mm2.
e - The value of fy shall not be taken more than 400 N/mm2.
4-24
Chapter 4
f- In case of sections subject to tension force in addition to the shear

force, the area of the reinforcing steel resisting shear shall be
increased by the value needed to resist the tension force according to
equations (4-35) and (4-36).
4-2-2-5 Brackets and corbels (short cantilevers)
a- Brackets and corbels are cantilevers having shear span-to-depth ratios
(a/d) not greater than unity. The provisions of this section apply to
short cantilevers in which the depth at the end (outside edge of the
bearing area) is not less than one-half its value at the face of the
support.
b - Main reinforcement in short cantilevers shall be taken as the greater
value of:
As = An + Af (4-37-a)
As = An + (2/3) Asf (4-37-b)
The ratio of the main reinforcement As

shall not be less than
bd
f cu
0.03 In which Af = Area of main flexural steel reinforcement of
fy
the cross-section of the corbel at the face of the support that resists a
bending moment having a value of:
M u = Q u . a + N u t + - d (4-38)
Qu
a
Nu
M a in R e in fo rc e m e n t
As
V e rtic a l S tirru p s
d / 2
2 d
3 d t
C lo s e d H o riz o n ta l S tirru p s
Ah
Figure (4-10) Short cantilevers
4-25
Chapter 4
Such an area shall be determined in accordance with Section (4-2-1-2)

for cross-sections subject to bending moments. Qu is the value of the
maximum shear force that shall not exceed the value given in Section
(4-2-2-4-d).
An = Area of reinforcing steel required to resist a tension force Nu and
is calculated from the following relation:
Nu
An = (4-39)
fy

s
The force Nu shall be regarded as a live load and its design value shall
not be less than 0.2Qu. The effect of the breaking force shall be taken
into account in calculating the torsional moment and the bending
moment.
Asf = Area of reinforcing steel required resisting shear force Qu
through friction and its value shall be determined in accordance to
Section (4-2-2-4-b).
c- The horizontal reinforcement ( Ah ) parallel to the main reinforcement:
Horizontal closed stirrups shall be uniformly distributed within the
upper two-thirds of the effective depth (Fig. 4-10). The required area
of such reinforcement shall be given by:
Ah = 0.5 (As An) (4-40)
d - For cases where short cantilevers subject to torsional moments

resulting from eccentric vertical or horizontal loading, vertical stirrups
satisfying the requirements of torsional resistance of the cross-section
shall be provided. In all cases, web reinforcement shall not be less
than the minimum code requirements given in Section (4-2-3).
e- Bearing strength underneath the loading plate shall be checked in
accordance to Section (4-2-4). Bearing area of load on bracket or
corbel shall not project beyond straight portion of main tension bars as
f- Short cantilevers can be designed using the Strut-and-Tie method
according to Section (6-11) with due consideration of the
4-26
Chapter 4
requirements of items (b) and (c) while satisfying equations (4-39) and
(4-40).
4-2-2-6 Deep beams in shear

The provisions of this section shall apply to beams with an effective
span-to-depth ratio equal to or less than four ( L d 4.0 ).
4-2-2-6-1 Web reinforcement in deep beams using the empirical

design method
a- The requirements of this section shall apply to deep beams defined in
Section (6-3-2-2) with L/d 1.25 for simply supported beams and L/d
2.5 for continuous beams and for cases of loading in which loads
are applied on the top of the beam as well as for cases of loading in
which loads are applied on the compression sides.
b - Critical sections for shear are taken at the following distances,
measured from the face of the support,:
1- 0.15Ln for uniform loads where Ln is the clear span of the beam.
2- 0.5a for a concentrated load at a distance (a) from the face of the
support.
In both cases, the distance shall not exceed d/2 where d is the effective
depth.
c- Nominal ultimate shear stress shall be calculated from:
Qu
qu = (4-41)
b. g
Where g is the effective depth or the clear beam span, whichever is
smaller
d - The value of qu shall not be more than the value given by equation (4-
16), multiplied by the coefficient d , which shall be given by:
1 0.4 L n
d = 2 + (4-42)
3 d
4-27
Chapter 4
e- Shear strength of concrete shall be calculated by multiplying the value

given by equation (4-18) for ordinary beams by the coefficient dc
given by:
M
dc = 3.5 - 2.5 u (4-43)
Q u .d
where;
Mu = Value of the maximum moment at the critical section
for shear and 1.0 dc 1.9
The value of qcu in deep beams shall not be more than:
f cu
q cu 0.46 N/mm2 (4-44)
c
f- If the value of the nominal ultimate shear stress is more than the value
of the concrete ultimate shear strength, the shear strength of the web
reinforcement shall be calculated from:
qsu = qu 0.5 qcu (4-45)
The web reinforcement shall be calculated according to equation (4-

46).
g - Web reinforcement shall be designed according to the following

relation:
q su = v . q suv + h . q suh (4-46)
where qsuv and qsuh shall be calculated as follows:
A fy
q suh = h

(4-46-b)
sh b. s
A fy
q suv = v

(4-46-c)
sv b. s
4-28
Chapter 4
The coefficients v and h shall be calculated as follows:
L
11 - n
= d (4-46-d)
h 12
Ln
1+
v =
d
(4-46-e)
12
Where;
Ah = Area of horizontal web reinforcement parallel to the
primary reinforcement
Av = Area of vertical web reinforcement perpendicular to the
primary reinforcement
Sh = Spacing between horizontal web reinforcement
Sv = Spacing between vertical web reinforcement
Ln = Clear span of a deep beam
h - Web reinforcement required for resisting shear stresses shall be

continued uninterrupted along the span of the deep beam.
i- The minimum percentage of web reinforcement in deep beams
satisfying the conditions of this section (4-2-2-6-1) shall not be less
than the following:
1 - Vertical reinforcing steel perpendicular to the beam axis

Av
- Normal-mild steel 240/350 0.0020
b . sv
The value of sv shall not be more than 200mm
Av
- High-tensile steel 0.0015
b . sv
2 - Horizontal reinforcing steel parallel to the beam axis

Ah
b . sh
The value of sh shall not be more than 200mm
4-29
Chapter 4
Ah
b . sh
4-2-2-6-2 Web reinforcement in deep beams analyzed according to

the strut-and-tie model
a- Deep beams having effective span-to-depth ratio less than or equal to
4.0 can be designed using strut-and-tie model according to sections (6-
11) and (3-2-3-6) with due consideration to Sections (4-2-2-6-2) and
(4-2-2-6-3).
b - The minimum percentage of web reinforcement in deep beams
satisfying the conditions of this section (4-2-2-6-1) shall not be less
than the values given in Section (4-2-2-6-1-i).
c- The minimum percentage of web reinforcement in deep beams in
which the effective span-to-depth ratio satisfies the relation
1.25 L d 4.0 for simple beams and the relation 2.5 L d 4.0 for deep
beams shall be as follows:
1 - Vertical reinforcing steel perpendicular to the beam axis
Av
b . sv
Av
b . sv
2 - Horizontal reinforcing steel parallel to the beam axis

Ah
b . sh
Ah
b . sh
d - For deep beams subjected to concentrated loads, the minimum

percentage of web reinforcement in regions having shear span-to-
depth ratio less than two (a/d 2) shall not be less than the values
given in Section c provided that such values are not less than those
given in Section b for regions in which a/d 1.0.
4-30
Chapter 4
4-2-2-6-3 Deep beams supporting loads resulting in tension at the

loaded edges
a- deep beams supporting loads resulting in tension at the loaded edges
shall be provided with vertical web reinforcement sufficient to
transfer the load to a height that is equal at least to one-half of the
span. Such vertical reinforcement shall be added to web reinforcement
needed for top loaded deep beam. The strut-and-tie model can also be
used for the design of such cases.
b - Bottom loaded deep beams subjected to tension at their loaded
edges can be designed for shear as shallow beams according to
Section (4-2-2-1-2).
4-2-3 Ultimate torsion strength limit state
4-2-3-1 Sections subject to torsion

For calculating the ultimate shear stresses resulting from ultimate
torsional moments, critical sections shall be taken at the location of
maximum torsion. For cases in which the maximum torsion is at the
support, the critical section can be considered located at d/2 from the face
of the support.
4-2-3-2 Nominal ultimate shear stresses resulting from torsion

a- The nominal shear stresses developed in a solid section subject to
torsional moment shall be evaluated using the following relation:
M tu
q tu = (4-47)
2 A o . t e
Where Ao is the area enclosed by the shear flow path and te is the wall
thickness of a box-section that is equivalent to the original solid
section. In lieu of the availability of more exact procedures, the value
of Ao can be taken equal to 0.85 Aoh where Aoh is the area enclosed by
the centerlines of the outermost closed stirrups utilized for resisting
the torsional moment and t e Aoh Ph , where Ph is the perimeter of the
centerlines of the outermost closed stirrups utilized for resisting the
torsional moment (Fig. 4-11).
4-31
Chapter 4
b - The value of the nominal ultimate shear stresses for T- or L-sections

can be calculated by neglecting the contribution of the effective part
of the slab and treating the section as a rectangular section.
c- In case of considering the effect of the effective part of the slab when
calculating the nominal ultimate shear stresses for T- or an L-
sections, the following measures shall be taken:
- The effective width of the slab, measured from the face of the web,
shall not be more than three times the slab thickness as shown in
Fig. (4-12).
- The effective part of the slab shall be provided with web
reinforcement to ensure its efficiency in resisting torsion.
b - Box-Section
The nominal ultimate shear stresses shall be calculated for box-
sections using equation (4-47) in which the smaller thickness of
t e Aoh Ph or the actual smallest wall thickness shall be used.
O p e n in g C lo s e d S tir ru p s
A o h - H a tc h e d A r e a
Fig. (4-11) Definition of Aoh
4-32
Chapter 4
t 2 3 tf t 2 3tf t 3 3t f
tf tf
t2 ,t3 3 tf
Fig. (4-12) The effective width of the slab
4-2-3-3 The effect of torsion shall be neglected for cases in which the nominal
ultimate shear stresses resulting from the ultimate torsion are less than the
values given by equation (4-17) or table (4-4).
4-2-3-4 The concrete dimensions of sections subject to combined shear and

torsion provided with web reinforcement as well as longitudinal reinforcement
shall satisfy the following relationship:
For solid sections:
(q u ) 2 (q tu ) 2 q umax (4-48)
For box sections:
q u q tu q umax (4-49)
qu and qtu shall be calculated using equations (4-13) and (4-47),

respectively, and qumax shall be evaluated from equation (4-16) or from
Table (4-3).
4-2-3-5 Reinforcing steel for resisting the shear stresses resulting

from combined shear and torsion
a - If the value of stresses qtu calculated from equation (4-47) of
Section (4-2-3-2) is more than the value evaluated from equation
(4-17) of Section (4-2-2-1-2-d) but not more than the value qumax
evaluated from equation (4-48) or equation (4-49) of Section (4-2-
3-4), reinforcing steel consisting of closed stirrups normal to the
axis of the member and longitudinal steel shall be used for resisting
4-33
Chapter 4
the torsional moment. Such reinforcing steel shall be added to any

other reinforcing steel needed for resisting bending moments, axial
forces and shear forces according to Table (4-5).
table (4-5) Transverse reinforcement for resisting combined shear

and torsion
f cu f cu
qtu 0.06 N/mm2 qtu > 0.06 N/mm2
c c
Min. shear
Reinforcement for
reinforcement according
qu < qcu Resisting qtu
to item (4-2-2-1-6)
Reinforcement for
Reinforcement for
qu > qcu Resisting qtu
Resisting (qu-qcu/2)
and (qu-qcu/2)
b - Transverse reinforcing steel required to resist torsion shall be in the

form of closed stirrups or welded-wire fabrics. The area of one branch
of the stirrup shall be calculated from:
M tu . s
A str = (4-50)
f yst
2 A o

s
Where;
Ao = 0.85 Aoh as previously defined in Section (4-2-3-2) and
Aoh is the area enclosed by the centerline of the outermost
transverse reinforcement used to resist torsion.
For rectangular sections, equation (4-50) shall take the following

form:
M tu . s
A str = (4-51)
f yst
1.7 (x1 .y1 )

s
Where:
Astr = cross-sectional area of one branch of a stirrup needed
to resist torsion (mm2)
fyst = Yield stress of reinforcing steel used for stirrups
resisting torsion with a limiting value of 400 N/mm2.
X1 = Width of a rectangular stirrup measured between its
4-34
Chapter 4
axes (Fig. 4-13)

Y1 = Length of a rectangular stirrup measured between its
axes (Fig. 4-13)
( 2 A s tr + A s t )
y1
x1
Fig. (4-13) : Detailing of Reinforcement Resisting Torsional

Moments and Shear forces (Tow-branch stirrups)
With due consideration of the following:

- The required cross-sectional area of the stirrups, calculated in
accordance with section (4-2-3-5), needed to resist shear and torsion
shall not be less than the area evaluated from the following
equation:
2 A str + A st 0.4 s.b (4-52)

f yst
Where fyst is in N/mm2 and b is the width of the solid section or the
summation of the widths of the webs of box sections.
- The distance, s between the stirrups shall not be more than Ph/8 or
200 mm, whichever is smaller, where Ph is the length of the
perimeter of the transverse reinforcement used for resisting torsion.
- For cross sections having stirrups with more than two branches,
only the outer two-branch stirrup shall be considered effective in
resisting torsion as shown in Fig. (4-14).
For box sections, it is permitted to use transverse and
longitudinal reinforcement on the inner as well as the outer
perimeters as long as the wall thickness tw is less than or equal to
one-sixth the overall width of the cross section. If the wall thickness
is more than one-sixth the overall width of the cross section, torsion
shall be resisted by reinforcement arranged on the outer perimeter
only.
4-35
Chapter 4
(2A str + A st /2 )
1
y
( A st /2 )
x
1
Figure (4-14) Detailing of reinforcement resisting torsional moments

and shear forces (stirrups having more than two branches)
c- Additional longitudinal reinforcement for resisting torsion: The area

of the additional longitudinal reinforcement shall be determined from
equation (4-53-a,b)
A str . p h f yst
A sl = (4-53-a)
s f
y
The area of the longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than:
f cu
0.4 Acp
A f
A = c - str p yst (4-53-b)
slmin f y /s s h f
y
Where ;
Acp is the gross area of the cross section including any
openings and fcu, fy, fyst are in N/mm2.
1 b
The value of Astr/s shall not be less than
6 f yst
The longitudinal reinforcement shall be distributed on the internal

perimeter of the exterior stirrup with due consideration of the
following:
4-36
Chapter 4
- The diameter of the bars used as longitudinal reinforcement shall

not be less than the distance between the bars divided by 15 or
12mm, whichever is smaller.
- The additional longitudinal reinforcement shall be uniformly
distributed inside the perimeter of the exterior stirrups such that the
distance between the bars is not more 300mm.
- A longitudinal bar shall be placed at each corner of the cross-
section.
- The longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be added
to that required for bending moments.
- Both the transverse and the longitudinal reinforcement required to
resist torsion shall be extended beyond the last critical section b a
distance equal to one-half the length of the perimeter of the stirrups.
4-2-3-6 Redistribution of torsion in statically indeterminate structures

The design of the cross sections and the calculation of the reinforcing
steel shall follow the provisions of this chapter with due consideration of
the following:
a- Redistribution of torsion shall not permitted in statically indeterminate
structures in which torsion is necessary for achieving equilibrium.
b - Redistribution of torsion shall be permitted in statically indeterminate
structures in which torsion is not necessary for achieving equilibrium.
In such case, torsion results from compatibility of strains and the
ultimate torsion can be reduced to a value equals to the cracking
torsion according to the following equation:
A2
cp f cu
M tu = 0.316 (4-54)
p cp c

Where;
Acp is the gross area of the cross section including any
openings and Pcp is the outer perimeter of the cross
section. In such a case, bending moments and shear
forces shall be redistributed in the adjacent spans.
4-37
Chapter 4
4-2-3-7 Torsional rigidity of a concrete section

a- The torsional rigidity of a rectangular section (G.C) can be calculated
by considering the value of the shear modulus (G) equals 42% of the
value of the modulus of elasticity of concrete calculated according to
Section (2-3-3-1) and by evaluating the torsion constant (c) according
to equation (4-55-a). The torsion constant (c ) can be evaluated for L- ,
T- and box-sections by dividing them into a number of rectangles
according to equation (4-55-b).
C = b3 t (4-55-a)
C = b3 t (4-55-b)
Where;
= 0.70 for rectangular sections before cracking resulting
from torsional moment not exceeding cracking torsion
calculated according to equation (4-54).
= 0.20 for rectangular sections after cracking
= Coefficient depending on t/b ratio given in Table (4-6)
Table (4-6) : Values of the coefficient for calculating the torsional

rigidity
t/b 1 1.5 2 3 5 >5
0.14 0.20 0.23 0.26 0.29 0.33
b - For cases required more accuracy, torsional rigidity can be calculated

using theories of structural mechanics.
4-2-4 Ultimate bearing strength limit state
4-2-4-1 Design ultimate bearing strength

The design ultimate bearing strength limit state shall not exceed
f
0.67 A1 cu
fy
Where;
A1 is the loaded bearing area
4-38
Chapter 4
Cases mentioned in Sections (4-2-4-2) and (4-2-4-3) shall be

excluded.
4-2-4-2 When the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded
area, the design ultimate bearing strength on the loaded area shall be equal
to the value given in Section (4-2-4-1) multiplied by the factor A2 A1 but
not more than 2.
Where A2 = the maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface
that is geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area.
4-2-4-3 When the supporting surface is sloped or stepped, A2 may be

taken as the area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a right pyramid
or cone having for its upper base the loaded area, and having side slopes of
1 vertical to 2 horizontal contained wholly within the support (Fig. 4-15).
L o a d e d A rea A 1
P la n
A1 L oad
A 2
E le v a tio n
Figure (4-15) Determination of area A2 in stepped or sloped supports
4-39
Chapter 4
4-2-5 Development length, embedment length and splices of

reinforcement
4-2-5-1 Development length

a- The calculated tension or compression in reinforcement at each
section of reinforced concrete members shall be developed on each
side of that section by development length Ld proportional to the force
in the reinforcing bar at that section. The development length shall be
measured from the critical sections of maximum tension or
compression for bent-up bars or for bars that are no longer required as
well as at locations of splices.
b - The development length Ld of reinforcing bars subject to tension or
compression f y s shall be computed from the following equation:
fy
. .
s
L = . (4-56)
d 4f
bu
Where:
fbu = ultimate bond strength of concrete with reinforcing
steel, and can be determined from the following relation:
f cu
f bu = 0.30 N/mm 2 (4-57)
c
= Nominal bar diameter

= Correction coefficient depending on end bar shape
(Table 4-7)
= Correction coefficient depending on bar surface
condition (Table 4-8)
= factor depending on bar location with respect to casting
surface. It is equal 1.3 for tension reinforcement so placed
that more than 300 mm of concrete is cast below the
reinforcement. It equals 1.00 for all other cases.
c- The development length for reinforcing steel bars subject to tension or
compression shall not be less than:
4-40
Chapter 4
35 or 400 mm whichever is bigger- for smooth bars with hooks

40 or 300 mm - whichever is bigger- for deformed bars
d - The distance between the bars and the concrete cover shall be taken in
accordance to chapter (4) and chapter (7) with due consideration of
the requirements of section (4-2-5-1-f) for the case of bundled bars.
e- The development length for individual bars may be from Table (4-9)
with due consideration to the values of .
f- The development length for bundled bars shall be calculated from
equation (4-56) considering the bundle as an individual bar having an
equivalent diameter e . The equivalent diameter of a bundle
consisting of bars of equal diameter shall be calculated as follows:
- In case of using a two-bar bundle e 1 .4
- In case of using a three-bar bundle e 1.7
The equivalent bar diameter e shall be used in the calculations
related to the minimum concrete cover for the bundle according to
Section (4-3-2-3-b) and Table (4-13) and for calculating the clear
distance between adjacent bundles (Section 7-3-3-1) and for satisfying
the limit state of cracking (Section 4-3-2-3-a). The thickness of the
concrete cover of the bundle (c) and the clear distance between the
bars of the adjacent bundles (a and b) shall be calculated according to
the actual arrangement of the bars in the cross-section as shown in
Fig. (7-2-b).
g - For elements subject to bending moments, it shall be permitted to
reduce the development length if the existing area of reinforcing steel
in the cross-section is in excess of that required by the analysis. The
As ,reqired
reduction factor shall be . Such a reduction shall not
As , provided
contradict other sections in this code such as the provisions related to
the bottom reinforcement extended to the supports in solid slabs
(Section 6-2-1-2-3), flat slabs (Section 7-5 and figure 7-4) and the
provisions related to the termination of reinforcing bars used for
negative bending moments (Section 4-2-5-3-2). It shall not also
contradict the provisions related to beams used in moment resisting
frames (Sections (6-8-2-2-1), (6-8-2-2-2) and (6-8-2-3-1)) and the
provisions related to simply supported precast elements (section 6-9-
4-41
Chapter 4
5-4). In all cases, the development length shall not be less than the
minimum value given in section (4-2-5-1-c)
Table (4-7) Values of the correction factor

E nd C ondition of B ar Type
C om p. T ension
1- Straight E nds
1 1
Ld
1- U Shape H ooks
+ D /2 D
1 0.75 D
Ld
Steel Reinforcement
3- L Shape H ooks
D
+ D/2 12
1 0.75
Ld
4- Shape H ooks
7
150
D
1 0.75
Ld
D
1 0.75
Ld
1- Straight E nds w ithout cross bars w ithin L d

1 1
Welded Steel Meshs
Ld
2- Straight E nds w ith one cross bars w ithin Ld

0.70 0.70
Ld
3- Straight E nds w ith tw o cross bars w ithin L d

0.50 0.50
Ld
D =4 for steel 240 / 350

D =6 or for 25 m m > or > 6 mm
for high grade steel
D =8 or for or > 25 m m
4-42
Chapter 4
Table (4-8) Values of the correction factor *
Surface Condition In Tension In Compression

Smooth 1.00 0.7
Deformed 0.75 0.45
* With due consideration of the requirements of section (4-2-5-1-C)
Table (4-9) Development length of individual bars Ld - multiplier of

bar diameter ( = 1.0)
Type of Reinforcement
Charactristic Normal Mild Steel Bars High Strength Bars**

Strength of with kooks *** fy=400 N/mm2
Concrete fy=240 N/mm2 or 360 N/mm2
N/mm2 or
280 N/mm2
In In In In
Compression Tension Compression Tension
20 35 38 40 60
25 35 36 40 55
30 35 35 40 50
35 35 35 40 45
40 35 35 40 42
Greater Than
or equal to 35 35 40 40
45
4-43
Chapter 4
** In the case of High strength deformed bars with hooks multiply the
values in the table by 0.75
*** It shall not be permitted to use smooth bars without end hooks
4-2-5-2 Anchorage of shear reinforcement

a- Bent-up bars shall be anchored using a length that shall be equal to the
development length in tension or compression according to the
location of the straight part following the inclined part of the bar. Such
length shall be calculated in accordance to section (4-2-5-1-b).
b - Stirrups shall be placed in beams to surround reinforcing bars in
tension as well as the compression zone and shall be anchored in the
compression zone as shown in Fig. (4-16).
Figure (4-16) Anchorage of stirrups in beams
4-2-5-3 Development of flexural reinforcement

a- Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it shall be no
longer required to resist flexure for a distance that shall be not less
than (Ld + 0.3d). The anchorage length, defined as the distance
between the end of the bars and the section where these bars shall no
longer be required to resist the bending moments, shall not be less
than d or (Ld + 0.3d) whichever is bigger measured from the original
bending moment diagram (Fig. 4-17).
b - Longitudinal bars shall not be terminated in a tension zone. In case of
terminating flexural reinforcement in a tension zone, the following
conditions shall be satisfied:
4-44
Chapter 4
1 - The ultimate shear stress at the cutoff point does not exceed two-
thirds of ultimate shear strength, including the shear strength of
the provided web reinforcement.
2
q u 0.5 qcu + qsu (4-58)
3
2 - Stirrup area at the section at which longitudinal bars are
terminated are in excess of that required for shear and torsion by
0.40 b . s
a value that shall not be less than Ast . The additional
fy
stirrups shall be provided along each terminated bar over a
distance from the termination point equal to three-fourths of the
effective depth of the member (Fig. 4-18). The spacing between
d
these stirrups shall not exceed where:
8
s = distance between stirrups
= ratio of the area of terminated reinforcement to the total
area of section reinforcement.
4-45
Chapter 4
Figure (4-17) Development of reinforcing bars in elements subjected to

bending moments
Main Top Reinforcement
Additional Stirrups 0.75 d Stirrup Hangers
d d t
0.75 d
Stirrups for combined
Main Bottom Reinforcement Sear and torsion effects
Figure (4-18) Development of bars in tension zone
4-2-5-3-1 Development of positive moment reinforcement

a- At least one-third of the positive moment reinforcement in simply
supported members and continuous members shall extend into the
support. In beams, such reinforcement shall extend into the support at
least 150 mm. All the provisions required for satisfying the anchorage
length shall be checked in accordance to Section (4-2-5-3-1-b).
b - At simple supports and at points of inflection in continuous members,
the development length of tension reinforcement given in Section (4-
2-5-1-b) shall satisfy the following relation (Fig. 4-19):
M
u + L a L d + 0.3 d (4-59)
Qu
Where:
4-46
Chapter 4
Mu = Maximum bending moment for the section reinforced

with steel bars that are extended into the support and
fy
stressed to
s
Qu = Maximum shear force calculated at the section considered
La = Length of bar beyond the centerline of the edge support or
the length of the bar beyond the point of inflection with a
limiting value of d or 12 whichever is bigger.
= 1.3 for simply supported edges when applied loads result
in compression normal to the bottom edge of the support
= 1.0 for all other cases
4-2-5-3-2 Development of negative moment reinforcement

a- One-third of the total tension reinforcement provided for negative
moment at a support shall have an embedment length beyond the point
of inflection of a value (0.3d + 10 ) or (0.3d + L/20) or d whichever
is bigger, measured from the bending moment diagram (Fig. 4-17).
b - All the tension reinforcement provided for negative moment at an
edge support shall extend into the support a distance not less than Ld
measured from the interior face of the support.
c- When calculating the development length of earthquake resistant
structures, the provisions of Section 6-8 shall apply.
L
d
>Ld
> ( L d+ 0.30 d )
Mu
Qu
Mu
La = 12 La Qu
or d
0.30 d 0.30 d
P.I.
Mu
Mu
4-47
0.30 d 0.30 d 0.30 d
Chapter 4
Figure (4-19) Termination of reinforcing bars at inflection points and

at simple supports
4-2-5-4 Reinforcement splices
4-2-5-4-1 Splices of reinforcement shall be made only as required or

permitted on design drawings or as authorized by the Engineer. They shall
be made by lap splices, by welding if permitted according to the type of
steel or by mechanical connections with due consideration of not splicing
bars at locations of maximum stresses.
4-2-5-4-2 Lap splices

a- Bars can be spliced by contact lap splices (Fig. 4-20-a) or by non-
contact lap splices (Fig. 4-20-b). Bars spliced by non-contact lap
splices shall not be spaced transversely farther apart than 1/5 of the
required lap splice length nor 150 mm.
150 mmor
one fi ft h
spl i ce l engt h
b non-contact bars a contact bars
4-48
Chapter 4
Splice Axis
Ld
Ld
> 1.3 Ld > 1.3 Ld
Ld
(c)
Figure (4-20) Lap splices
b - When satisfying the previous conditions a and b, the length of the lap
splice for bars in tension shall be taken equal to the embedment length Ld
provided that the area of the reinforcing bars in the section equal to or
more than twice the required area and that area of the spliced bars is not
more than 25% the total area of the bars at the section. In case the area of
spliced bars is more than 25% of the total area of bars at the section or the
area of bars at the section is less than twice the required area, the splice
length shall be taken equal to 1.3 the development length Ld in tension.
c- It is permitted to splice all the reinforcing bars in compression at a
section. The length of lap splice in compression shall be taken equal to
the development length Ld in compression.
d - Lap splices shall not be permitted in tension tie members. Splices in
such members shall be made with a full welded splice or a full
mechanical connection and splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered
by at least 750 mm. The provisions of Section (4-2-5-4-3) shall be
satisfied.
e- When splicing bars having different diameters, splice length shall be
computed based on the larger diameter.
f- Lap splices of bundled bars shall be based on the lap splice length
required for individual bars within a bundle calculated in accordance
4-49
Chapter 4
to Section (4-2-5-4-2-c), increased by 30%. It shall not be permitted to

splice all the bars in the bundle at a certain section.
g - Lap splices shall not be used for bars having diameter more than 28
mm. For such diameters, welded splices or mechanical connections
shall be used.
h - When splicing welded bars in tension the splice length shall not be
less than the following values:
1 - For deformed bars, the lap splice length shall be equal to 1.3 Ld
but not less than 150 mm (Fig. 4-21).
2 - For smooth bars, the lap splice length shall be equal to 1.5 Ld but
not less than 200 mm (Fig. 4-22).
Not Less than
50 mm
1.7 Ld
or 200 mm which ever is greater
Figure (4-21) Lap splices of deformed fabric
Not Less than

50 mm
1.5 Ld
or 150 mm which ever is greater
Figure (4-22) Lap splices of smooth fabric
4-2-5-4-3 Welded splices and mechanical connections

a- It shall be permitted to splice bars by welding according to the
standard specifications of welding at the points where bars meet each
other with due consideration of having the centerlines of the two bars
lined-up.
4-50
Chapter 4
b - A full welded splice or a full mechanical connection shall develop, in

tension or compression, at least 125% of the specified yield strength
of the spliced bars.
c- Welded splices or mechanical connections not meeting the
requirements of Section (4-2-5-4-3-b) may be used provided that the
distance between splices shall not be less than 600 mm and the splice
strength in tension or in compression is not less than the yield
strength.
d - Only electrical welding shall be permitted.
e- Welding shall not be permitted within a distance less than 100 mm
from the point at which the bar is hooked provided that internal radius
of the hook is not less than 12 times the bar diameter.
f- It shall not be permitted to splice cold-treated bars except after hot-

treating the weld zone.
g - It shall not be permitted to splice bars by welding in structures
subjected to dynamic loads.
4-3 Serviceability limit states
4-3-1 Deformation and deflection limit states

a- Reinforced concrete structural elements shall subjected to flexure shall
be designed to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections or any
deformations that adversely affect strength, serviceability and the
nonstructural elements of the structure such as flooring and partitions.
b - Deformation and Deflection Limit States shall be satisfied through
computing deflections in accordance to Section (4-3-1-1).
c- Cases that satisfy the provisions of Section (4-3-1-3) shall be waived
from deflection calculations.
d - The minimum thickness of one-way solid slabs, two-way slabs and flat
slabs shall not be less than the values given in Section (6-2-1-2),
Section (6-2-1-3) and Section (6-2-5-2), respectively.
4-3-1-1 Calculation of deflections
4-51
Chapter 4
4-3-1-1-1 Immediate deflections

a- Immediate deflection shall be computed by the theory of elasticity
using the modulus of elasticity of concrete according to Equation (2-
1) of Section (2-3-3-1) and calculating the effective moment of inertia
of the section Ie according to Equation (4-60) with due consideration
of the requirements of Section (4-3-1-1-1-b).
M
3 M
3
I e = cr I g + 1 - cr I cr (4-60)
Ma Ma

Where:
Icr = Moment of inertia of cracked concrete section

Ig = Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
Ma = Maximum value of bending moment in member at the
stage of computing deflection.
Mc = Minimum moment resulting in concrete cracking and
computed from:
f ctr . I g
M cr = (4-61a)
yt
Where:
yt = Distance between extreme fiber in tension to neutral axis of
gross section ignoring cracking and presence of
reinforcement
fctr = Cracking-limit tensile stress of concrete subjected to tension
resulting from bending, taken from experimental tests and
can be calculated from:
f ctr = 0.6 f cu (4-61b)
b - For continuous spans, the effective moment of inertia shall be taken as

the average of the values obtained from Equation (4-60) for the
critical positive and negative moment sections.
4-3-1-1-2 Long-term deflections
Creep and shrinkage result in additional deflection of concrete
elements subjected to bending moments. Such additional deflection
4-52
Chapter 4
increases with time and its maximum value is affected by the amount of
compression reinforcement in the section. It can be calculated by the value
of the immediate deflection caused by sustained load by the factor ,
which is taken equal to 2.0 for sections having no compression
reinforcement and for other cases can be calculated from:
A
= 2 - 1.2 s 0.6 (4-62)
As
With due consideration of has been mentioned in Section (4-2-1-2-d).

4-3-1-1-3 Total deflections
The total deflection shall be calculated as the summation of the
immediate deflection calculated according to Section (4-3-1-1-1) and long-
term deflection calculated according to Section (4-3-1-1-2).
4-3-1-2 Allowable limits of deflection for beams and slabs

a- The values of the total deflection of beams and slabs and cantilevers in
ordinary structures under the effect of all loads taking into
consideration the effect of temperature and time-dependent deflection
resulting from shrinkage and creep according to Section 4-3-1-1-2)
shall not exceed the following limits measured from the level of
support provided the satisfaction of the requirements of section (4-3-
1-1-1-a):
1 - Beams, one-way slabs and two-way slabs
L
(4 -63-a)
250
2 - cantilevers
L
(4-63-b)
450
b - For beams and slabs supporting nonstructural elements not likely to be

damaged by deflection, immediate deflection resulting from live loads
shall not be more than the following value:
L/360 (4-63-c)
4-53
Chapter 4
c- For beams and slabs supporting nonstructural elements likely to be

damaged by deflection such as glass curtain walls, the part of the total
additional deflection occurring after attachment of nonstructural
elements and resulting from all loads including the effect of
temperature and shrinkage and creep according to Section (4-3-1-1-2)
shall not be more than the following value:
L/480 (4-63-d)
Where:
L = distance between of inflection in beams and slabs or
cantilever length. It is calculated based on the short span of
two-way slabs and on the long span in beamless flat slabs.
4-3-1-3 Clear span-to-thickness ratio unless deflections are computed

4-3-1-3-1 Beams, solid one-way slabs and cantilevers
a- In ordinary buildings, deflection calculations may be waived for
beams with rectangular cross sections and spans less than 10.0 m, one-
way slabs having spans less than 10.0 m and cantilevers lengths less
than 2.0 m if the clear span-to-thickness ratios (Ln/t) will not exceed
the values stipulated in Table (4-10).
Table (4-10) Clear span-to-thickness ratio (Ln/t) above which

deflections must be computed for beams with rectangular cross
sections and one-way slabs of spans less than 10.0m and
cantilevers of lengths less than 2.0m
Both end One end Simply

member
Cantilever continuous Continuous supported
10 36 30 25 Solid Slab
Ribbed slabs and
8 28 25 20
embedded beams
5 21 18 16 Beams
b - Values given in Table (4-10) shall be used directly for Grade 400/600
reinforcement. For other grades of steel, the values given in the table
shall be divided by the factor given by Equation (4-64):
4-54
Chapter 4
fy
0.40 (4-64)
650
c- The values given in Table (4-10) shall not apply to beams and ribbed
slabs supporting or attached to elements likely to be damaged by large
deflections.
d - The values given in Table (4-10) shall not be applied to spans more
than 10.0m and cantilevers of lengths more than 2.0m. They shall also
not be applied for cases of heavy or non-uniform loads and for
unordinary buildings. In such cases, deflections shall be computed and
their values shall be verified in accordance with Section (4-3-1-2).
e- For T-beams, the values given in section (4-3-1-3-1-a) shall be
modified by multiplying by the factor given in Fig. (4-23).
B
1.00
0.95
Reduction factor
0.90
t
0.85
0.80 b
0.75
B = Flange Width
0.70
0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 b = Web Width
Ratio of web width to flange width ( b / B )
Figure (4-23) Modification of (Ln/t) Ratios for T-beams

4-3-1-3-2 Two-way slabs supported on rigid beams
Deflection calculations can be waived for two-way slabs located in
ordinary buildings, not attached to non-structural elements likely to be
damaged by deflection, subjected to uniform but not heavy loads and
having spans less than 10.0m provided that the slab thickness is not less
than 100 mm or the values given by Equation (4-65), whichever is larger.
f
a 0.85 y 1600
t= (4-65)
20
15 10 p
b/a
Where:
a = Short effective span of slab
b = Long effective span of slab
4-55
Chapter 4
p = Ratio of continuous edges of the slab to its overall perimeter

fy = Yield stress of reinforcing steel
4-3-2 limit states of cracking

4-3-2-1 For protecting concrete elements from defective cracking that
might adversely affect the efficiency and the strength of the element against
environmental factors, it is important to select the factors that affect the
width of the cracks such as the concrete cover and the type, the distribution
and the value of stresses in the reinforcing steel subjected to tension. The
proper selection of such factors guarantees the satisfaction of the limit state
of cracking according to this section.
4-3-2-2 For the satisfaction of the limit states of cracking, structural

elements are categorized according to the state of exposure of their tensile
surface to the environmental effects that adversely affects the performance of
the structure as give in Table in (4-11).
4-3-2-3 Selection of the factors affecting the crack width
4-56
Chapter 4
The provisions mentioned in this section shall be satisfied when evaluating

the state of cracking of surface subjected to tension.
a-1 When designing reinforced concrete elements with cracking more or

less normal to the direction of the reinforcing steel, the following
relationship shall be satisfied:
w k = . s rm . sm (4-66)
Where :

s rm = 50 + 0.25 k1 k 2 mm
r
f s f sr
2
sm = 1 - 1 2
E s f s

The values of wk shall be less or equal to the maximum values wk max given
in table ( 4-12 )
4-57
Chapter 4
Table (4-11) Classification of structural elements based on their

tension surface exposure to environmental conditions
Class Level of tension surface exposure to environmental conditions
Elements with protected tension surfaces such as :
a. All internal protected elements in ordinary structures (buildings)
First b. Elements permanently submerged under water not containing injurious
materials. Or elements permanently dry .
c. Roofs well insulated against moisture or rain .

Elements with unprotected tension surfaces such as :
a. All structures in open air such as bridges and roofs not well insulated.
Second
b. Structures of first section above but adjacent to shores.
c. Elements with exposed surfaces to moisture such as parking garages
and open halls.
Elements with tension surfaces exposed to injurious conditions such
as:
a. Elements exposed to high moisture percentages .
Third
b. Elements exposed to repeated moisture saturation .
c. Water tanks .
d. Structures subjected to injurious vapours , gases , and chemical
materials .
Elements with tension surfaces exposed to oxidizing and injurious
conditions causing rusting of reinforcement such as :
Fourth a. Elements exposed to injurious oxidizing conditions causing rusting of

reinforcement including gases and vapors containing chemicals.
b. Other tanks, sewers , and structures exposed to sea water .
Table (4-12) Values of the Coefficient Wkmax (mm)
Category First Second Third Fourth

Wkmax 0.30 0.20 0.15 0.10
Where:
= Bar diameter in mm. In case of using more than one bar
diameter in the cross section, the average bar diameter shall be
4-58
Chapter 4
used. When using bundled bars, the equivalent diameter of the

bundle shall be used according to Section (4-3-7).
= Coefficient that relates the average value to design value of
the crack width and taken as follows:
1.7 for cracks induced due to loading
1.3 for cracks induced due to restraint in sections having
width or depth (whichever is smaller) of less than or
equal to 300mm.
1.7 for cracks induced due to restraint in sections having
width or depth (whichever is smaller) of more than or
equal to 800mm.
For sections having a width or a depth (whichever is
smaller) between 300mm and 800mm, the value of
may be proportionally calculated.
1 = Coefficient reflects the effect of the bond characteristics of
reinforcing steel on the average increase of steel strain relative
to concrete around the steel. Its value shall be taken 0.8 for
ribbed bars and 0.5 for smooth bars.
2 = Coefficient that takes into consideration the effect of the
duration of loading on the average increase of steel strain
relative to concrete around the steel. Its value shall be taken
0.1 for short term loading and 0.5 for permanent loads or
cyclic loads.
k1 = Coefficient that takes into account the effect of bond
characteristics between reinforcing steel and concrete on the
distance between the cracks. Its value shall be taken o.8 for
ribbed bars and 1.6 for smooth bars.
- For the case of imposed deformation, the value of K1 is
modified to Kk1 and shall be taken as follows:
- For case of tensile stresses resulting from restraint in
general: k = 0.8. For rectangular sections, the value of k
Rectangular section with a height less than or equal to
300mm: k=0.8
Rectangular section with a height more than or equal to
800mm: k=0.5
For sections having a depth between 300mm and 800mm,
the value of k may be proportionally calculated.
K2 = Coefficient reflects the effect of the distribution of strains at
a distance from the cracks. Its value shall be taken 0.5 for a
section subjected to bending moment and 1.0 for a section
4-59
Chapter 4
subjected to axial tension. For a section subjected to combined

bending moment and axial force, k2 shall be calculated from
the following relationship:
+ 2
k2 = 1 (4-67)
2 1
Where:
1 , 2 Maximum and minimum tensile strain, respectively,
calculated at the cracking stage.
A
r Effective tension reinforcement ratio r s
Acef
As = Area of reinforcing steel in tension
Acef = Effective concrete area in tension (determined according
to Fig. 4-24) and equals to the width of the section
multiplied by the depth tcef where tcef equals to 2.5 times the
distance from the center of gravity of the tension
reinforcement to the outermost fiber tensile fiber of the
section, but not more than (t-c)/3 for slabs and with due
consideration of the following definitions:
c = Distance from the extreme compression fiber to the
neutral axis
t = Thickness of the structural element
fs = Stress in reinforcing steel at the tension side of the
section after cracking, calculated based on cracked section
analysis under working loads provided that its value does
not exceed that given in Table (5-1).
fsr = Stress in reinforcing steel at the tension side of the
section after cracking, calculated based on cracked section
analysis under the effect of cracking loads
a-2 For cases in which the element is subjected to stresses resulting from
intrinsic imposed deformation such as restraint shrinkage, fs shall be
taken equal to fsr.
a-3 For walls subjected to shrinkage due to early thermal contraction,

where the lower part of the wall is restraint in a previously cast
foundation, the value srm in equation (4-66) shall be substituted by a
value that is equal to the wall height in mm.
4-60
Chapter 4
a-4 In elements having reinforcing steel arranged in directions x and y and

having the angle of crack inclination to the reinforcing steel direction
more than 150, equation (4-66) shall be satisfied by substituting the
1
c s
o r
s m
x
s
i
n r
m
value srm by the value
y
where:
= Inclination angle between reinforcing steel and principal
tensile stresses

srmx srmy = 50 + 0.25 k 1 k 2 calculated in directions x and y,
r
respectively.
b- The concrete cover to the tension reinforcement shall not be less than
the values given in table (4-13) nor shall it be less than the diameter of
the largest bar utilized in the reinforcement. The concrete cover shall
be increased for the cases mentioned in Section (9-7).
c- The minimum and maximum spacing for reinforcing steel shall be
satisfied according to the provisions of chapters 6 and 7 of this code.
d- For elements in structures classified as category three and four, which
should be liquid impermeable, the values of the tensile stresses
calculated according to section (4-3-2-7) shall not exceed the values
given in equation (4-69).
c c C o n c re te c o v e r
C .G . o f s t e e l
d R e in fo rc e m e n t
t
t c e f = 2 .5 ( t - d )
E ffe c tiv e A re a
A -B e a m s A cef
cc
C o n c re te c o v e r
t cef t
L e a s t o f 2 .5 ( C c + /2 ) o r t /2
cef
t
B - S la b s L e a s t o f 2 .5 ( C c + / 2 ) o r ( t - c ) / 3
B - T e n s io n M e m b e r s
Figure (4-24) Area of Effective Concrete Section in Tension
4-61
Chapter 4
Table (4-13) Minimum Limit of Thickness of Concrete Cover
Tension Concrete Cover (mm)

surface For all elements except walls For walls and solid slabs
exposure and solid slabs
section fcu 25 fcu > 25 fcu 25 fcu > 25
First 25 20 20 20
Second 30 25 25 20
Third 35 30 30 25
Fourth 45 40 40 35
4-3-2-4 Cases for which the calculations of cracking limit state can be
waived
The conditions of the cracking. The requirements of the cracking limit
state (Section 4-3-2-3-a) can be considered to be fulfilled if one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
A - For normal buildings included in categories one and two in which live
load is not more than 5.0 kN/m2:
- Solid slabs having thickness of not more than 160 mm.
- T- and L-shaped beams with flanges on the tension side subjected
to the condition that the ratio of the flange width to the web width is
not less than 3.0.
b - Elements subjected to bending moments combined with axial
compression forces having values more than 0.2 fcu Ac at service load
level.
c- When the values of the tensile stresses in the reinforcing steel for
sections subjected to bending moments or eccentric loads at the
service load level are less than the values given in Tables (4-14) and
(4-15). In these tables, the permitted values of tensile stresses are
given for different values of bar diameter and for different types of
structures according to the type environmental exposure of tension
surfaces. The reinforcing steel ratio shall not be more than the values
given in section (4-2-1-2-c).
d - When using the limit states design method to design sections
subjected to bending moments or eccentric forces according to section
(4-2-1), the requirements of cracking limit state for the stresses in the
4-62
Chapter 4
reinforcing steel (Section 4-3-2-3-a) can be considered fulfilled if the

value of the yield stress of steel fy is multiplied by the coefficient cr
given in Tables (4-14) and (4-15). Such a coefficient depends on the
bar diameter and the type of exposure of tension surface (structural
category). The reinforcing steel ratio shall not be more than the values
given in section (4-2-1-2-c) according to the type of reinforcing steel
and taking c = 1.5 and s = 1.15.
e- The requirements related to the tensile stresses in concrete mentioned
in Section (4-3-2-6) for structures classified as category three or
category four, according to Table (4-11) shall be satisfied.
4-3-2-5 For sections subjected to concentric tension force or eccentric

tension force resulting in tension stresses acting on the whole section,
calculation of stresses in the reinforcing steel to satisfy cracking limit shall
be carried out according to Section (4-3-2-3-a). The previous requirement
shall also apply when using smooth welded wire fabric.
Table (4-14) Working Stress of Steel and Coefficients of Reduction of

Yield Stress of Steel ( cr ) that Satisfies Cracking Limit
State for Smooth Bars
Steel Tension surface

Tension surface Tension surface
working of section three
of first section of second section
stress cr and four
N / mm2
bar diameter bar diameter bar diameter
(mm) (mm) (mm)
140 1.00 25 18 12
120 0.84 28 20 18
100 0.69 28
4-63
Chapter 4
Table (4-15) Working Stress of Steel and Coefficients of Reduction of

Yield Stress of Steel ( cr ) that Satisfies Cracking Limit
State for Deformed Bars
Steel Tension surface Tension surface Tension surface
working cr of first section of second section of section three
stress and four
N / mm2 Steel Steel
360/520 400/600 bar diameter bar diameter bar diameter
(mm) (mm) (mm)
220 1.00 0.92 18 12 8
200 0.93 0.83 22 16 10
180 0.85 0.75 25 20 12
160 0.75 0.67 32 22 18
140 0.65 0.58 25 22
120 0.56 0.50 28
4-3-2-6 For elements in structures classified as category three and four,

which should be liquid impermeable, the values of the tensile stresses
calculated according to section (4-3-2-7) shall not exceed the values given
in equation (4-69).
4-3-2-7 Tensile stresses in concrete sections
a- When calculating the tensile stresses in concrete, the entire concrete

section is considered effective under service loads. When taking the
reinforcing steel into consideration, the elastic modulus of steel shall
be taken as follows:
Es
n= = 10 (4-68)
Ec
b- The tensile stresses fct shall be calculated from the following

equation:
4-64
Chapter 4
f
f ct = f ct(N) + f ct(M) ctr

(4-69)
Where:
fctr = Cracking-limit tensile stresses of concrete
fct(N) = Tensile stresses in concrete due to axial forces
fct (M) = tensile stresses due to bending moments
= Coefficient determined from table (4-16) according
to the virtual thickness of the section tv given in the
following equation:
f ct(N)
t v = t 1 + (4-70)
f ct(M)

Where t is the thickness of the section.
Table (4-16) Values of the Coefficient
Virtual thickness of section tv (mm) Coefficient

Less or equal 100 1.00
200 1.30
400 1.60
Greater or equal 600 1.70
c- For T- and L-shaped sections, it is preferable to take the flange width

equals to one-half the value mentioned in Section (6-3-1-9).
d - For structures that are required to be liquid-tied, equation (4-69) shall

be satisfied with due consideration of the values of the working
stresses in steel according to Tables (4-14) and (4-15). As an
alternative solution, it is permitted to calculate the amount of steel
reinforcement using the limit states design method coupled with the
use of the value of cr given in Tables (4-14) and (4-15).
use of the value of cr given in Tables (4-14) and (4-15).
4-65
Chapter 5
CHAPTER 5
WORKING STRESS DESIGN METHOD

This chapter provides minimum requirements for design of reinforced
concrete sections, using the working stress design method (elastic method),
under the effect of working loads and actions (section 3-2-1-1-a). To ensure
safety requirements when using this method, the design shall satisfy the
following:
a- The stresses in concrete and reinforcing steel, resulting from the action
of service loads (without load factors) and computed by the
straight-line theory, must not exceed the allowable stresses given in
Table (5-1). This applies for sections subject to flexure, eccentric axial
forces, shear forces, torsion, or shear forces combined with torsion.
b - Code provisions relating to deformation and deflection limit states
(section 4-3-1) and cracking limit state (4-3-2), as well as the
requirements of elastic stability (buckling) limit states (article 6-4) shall
be satisfied for the stresses in both concrete and reinforcing steel.
c- Design of sections subject to flexure or eccentric axial forces shall
follow the requirements of Section (5-3), while for sections subject to
shear forces, the design shall follow Section (5-4) and for sections
subject to torsion, the design shall follow Section (5-5). Bearing
strength shall be determined according to Section (5-6) whereas bond is
checked following Section (5-2-4).
5-2 Allowable working stresses
5-2-1 Table (5-1) gives the allowable working stresses for concrete with
characteristic strength ranging from 20 to 30 N/mm2 (MPa) and for different
types of reinforcing steel, to be used with the requirements of Sections (5-1-a
& b).
5-2-2 For sections subject to eccentric compression forces, the allowable

working compressive stresses shall be calculated by the following relation:
5-1
Chapter 5
Table (5-1) Allowable working stresses for concrete and reinforcing

steel
Stress Type Symbol Allowable Working Stresses according
to Concrete Characteristic Strength
(N/mm2)
Concrete Characteristic Strength fcu 20 25 30
Axial compression (e = emin) fco* 5 6 7
Flexure and axial Compression with big

fc** 8.0 9.5 10.5
eccentricity
Shear ***
Concrete shear strength
Without web reinforcement in slabs and foundations qc 0.8 0.9 0.9
Without web reinforcement in other elements qc 0.6 0.7 0.7
With web reinforcement in all elements (shear q2 1.7 1.9 2.1
combined with torsion)
Punching shear qcp 0.8 0.9 1.0
Reinforcing Steel****
1- Milled Steel 240/350 fs 140 140 140
2- Steel 280/450 160 160 160
3- Steel 360/520 200 200 200
4- Steel 400/600 220 220 220
5- Welded wire mesh 450/520 smooth 160 160 160
deformed 220 220 220
*
This is the maximum allowable axial compressive stress under working loads.
**
These allowable stresses are used for beams and for slabs with a thickness of more than
200mm and shall be reduced for thinner slabs by a value of 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, and 3.0 N/mm2
for slab thickness of 200, 120, 100 and 80mm, respectively.
***
The considerations given in articles (5-4) and (5-5) shall also be satisfied.
****
Stresses in steel must be reduced to satisfy the cracking limit state according to
article (4-3-2), if considered necessary.
5-2
Chapter 5
e e
0.23 + 0.32 f cu where 0.05 (5-1)
t t
But shall not exceed the allowable working compressive stresses for flexure
or compressive forces with big eccentricities, fc, listed in Table (5-1).
5-2-3 To satisfy the cracking limit state under working loads, for concrete
elements with exposed tensioned faces in the third and fourth categories
according to Table (4-11) and for other cases that call for this limit state, the
allowable tensile stresses shall be determined in accordance with Sections
(4-3-2-6& 7).
5-3 Sections subject to flexure or eccentric axial forces

5-3-1 Basic assumptions and general considerations
1 - Sections subject to flexure or eccentric axial forces shall be designed,
using the working stress method, according to the following
assumptions and general considerations.
2 - Strains vary linearly as the distance from the neutral axis. As a result,
strains in both concrete and reinforcing steel are proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis. This applies for all structural members
except for deep beams, in which the strain distribution is nonlinear.
3 - For both concrete and reinforcing steel, the stress-strain relationship is
a straight line under service loads within allowable service load
stresses.
4 - In reinforced concrete members, concrete generally resists no tension
while steel resists all tensile stresses.
5 - The modular ratio, n = Es /Ec, shall be taken as follows:
a - For sizing of members and calculation of stresses,
Es
n= = 15 (5-2-a)
Ec
b - For computing elastic deformations and analyzing

statically-indeterminate structures as well as for determining
tensile stresses in concrete for members required to be uncracked
(Sections 4-3-2-6 & 7),
5-3
Chapter 5
E
n = s = 10 (5-2-b)
Ec
The whole concrete section shall be considered effective in the

later case.
6 - The allowable working stresses in steel shall be reduced to satisfy the
cracking limit state conditions ( Section 4-3-2).
7 - If it is proved- by tests in an accredited lab, that the yield strength of
mild steel round bars exceeds 280N/mm2, the allowable steel stress, at
service loads, shall be taken equal to fy but not more than160N/mm2.
8 - When the stresses resulting from actions like wind, shrinkage,
earthquakes, temperature variation, friction at supports, or differential
settlement is more than 15% of the stresses produced by the main loads,
these actions must be considered in the design. In such cases, the
allowable stresses may be increased by 15% for each action but the total
stress increment shall not exceed 25% for all considered actions.
However, the effects of wind and earthquakes shall not be added to the
same combination.
9 - For rectangular sections subject to biaxial flexure, the compressive
stress at the most stressed corner shall be permitted to exceed the
allowable working stresses listed in Table (5-1) by up to 1N/mm2.
5-3-2 Sections subject to flexure

1 - Sections subject to single or double flexure shall be designed according
to the basic assumptions and general considerations stated in Section
(5-3-1). Stresses in concrete and reinforcing steel, resulting from
service loads, must not exceed the allowable stresses given in Table
(5-1). Requirements of Section (5-3-1-5) shall also be satisfied.
2 - The minimum reinforcement ratio for sections subject to flexure shall
be in conformance with Section (4-2-1-2-h).
3 - The reinforcement ratio for rectangular sections with tension
reinforcement only shall not exceed the limits given in Tables (4-1) and
(4-2) according to the type of reinforcement.
4 - In statically indeterminate structures, it shall not be permitted to
redistribute more than 10% of the bending moments calculated by
elastic theory. Conditions necessary for moment redistribution, stated
5-4
Chapter 5
in Section (4-2-1-2-c), shall be fulfilled.

5 - Section flexural strength may be increased by using steel reinforcement
in the compression side but the requirements of Section (4-2-1-2-d)
must be fulfilled in this case.
6 - For T-sections, only two thirds of the values listed in Table (5-1) for the
allowable concrete stresses for flexure and axial compression with big
eccentricity shall be permitted.
5-3-3 Sections subject to flexure combined with axial forces

1 - Sections subject to eccentric axial forces shall be designed according to
the main assumptions stated in Section (5-3-1) and the allowable
stresses given in Table (5-1). It is preferable, however, to design these
sections using the limit state method. In this case, the design of sections
subject to eccentric axial compressive follows the requirements of
Section (4-2-1-3) while the design of sections subject to eccentric axial
tensile forces follows the requirements of Section (4-2-1-4).
2 - Sections subject to centric axial compressive forces combined with
small bending moments (<P.emin) shall be designed assuming a
minimum eccentricity emin where,
M
e min = = 0.05 t (5-3)
P
Furthermore, the effect of eccentricity can be approximately

accounted for by computing the allowable compressive axial force, at
service load level, by Equation (5-4-a) for tied columns and by the
smaller of Equations (5-4-b) and (5-4-c) for spiral columns.
P = f co A c + 0.44 f y A sc (5-4-a)
P = 1.14 f co A c + 0.51 f y A sc
(5-4-b)
P = f co A k + 0.44 f y A sc + 0.92 f yp Vsp

(5-4-c)
where Ac, Asc, Ak, Vsp, and fyp are as defined in Section (4-2-1-3-c-2).
The ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core
confined by the spiral (measured out-to-out of spirals) sp shall not be
taken less than the value given by Equation (4-12-e).
5-5
Chapter 5
3 - Sections subject to uniaxial bending moment combined with centric

axial compressive force that is less smaller than the value given by
Equation (5-5) shall be designed for flexure only following article
(5-3-2).
P 0.026 f cu A c (5-5)
5-4 Sections subject to shearing forces
5-4-1 Beams
5-4-1-1 The critical sections for shear shall be determined by article

(4-2-2-1-1).
5-4-1-2 Calculation of the nominal shear stresses in beams

For beams and slabs with constant depth, the shear stress is calculated
from Equation (5-6).
Q
q=
b.d (5-6)
where:
Q = shear force
b = breadth of rectangular sections, or breadth of the web for T-
and other sections.
For beams with variable depth , the shear force Q is replaced by the
value Qr given by
Qr = Q
(M. tan )
d (5-7)
where tan is the rate of change of beam depth with the distance along
its centerline and tan0.33. The negative sign in Equation (5-7) assumes
that the beam depth and the acting bending moment increase or decrease in
the same sense (direction). For other cases, this sign shall be replaced by a
plus sign.
5-6
Chapter 5
5-4-1-3 For sections subject to shear forces, the shear stress, q, shall
not be permitted to exceed the values of, q2, given in Table (5-1).
Requirements of article (5-5-4) shall be considered for sections subject to
shear forces combined with torsion,.
5-4-1-4 The concrete shear strength shall not be permitted to exceed

the values of, qc, given in Table (5-1). For sections subject to shear
forces combined with axial tensile axial forces, qc may be taken equal
to zero.
5-4-1-5 Where the shear stress, q, exceeds the concrete shear strength, qc,
shear reinforcement consisting of one or more of the following types shall be
used according to Section (5-4-1-7):
1- Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member;
2 - Stirrups or bent bars making an angle of not less than 30 with axis of
member, together with stirrups perpendicular to this axis.
5-4-1-6 The required strength of shear reinforcement is given by
q s = q - 0.5 q c (5-8)
Figure (4-7) shows zones requiring shear reinforcement while

Section (4-2-2-1-6) establishes the minimum shear reinforcement
ratio that shall be provided in other parts.
5-4-1-7 Calculation of web reinforcement

a - The shear strength of stirrups perpendicular to axis of
member shall be determined by Equation (5-9).
A st . f s
q st =
s.b (5-9)
b - Where Ast is the cross sectional area of stirrups and s is the

spacing between stirrups.
When shear reinforcement in the form of inclined stirrups or
bent-up longitudinal bars making an angle with axis of the
member, the web reinforcement shear strength shall be
computed by Equation (5-10).
5-7
Chapter 5
A sb . f s . (sin + cos )
q sb =
s.b (5-10)
In which Asb is the cross sectional area of inclined stirrups or

bent-up bars and,
q s = q st + q sb (5-11)
In case the stirrup inclination or the bar bent-up angle =45o,

Equation (5-10) reduces to
A sb . f s . 2
q sb =
s.b (5-12)
5-4-1-8 General requirements for selection and arrangement of web

reinforcement
Requirements related to minimum web reinforcement ratio and detailing of
the web reinforcement given in Section (4-2-2-1-6) shall be fulfilled.
5-4-2 Slabs and footings

Shear stresses in slabs and footings is governed by the more severe of the
following two conditions:
1 - Beam action, in the longitudinal and transverse directions, according
to Sections (5-4-1-2 ) to (5-4-1-4), but the nominal shear stress calculated
from Equation (5-6) shall not exceed half the values given in Table (5-1)
for qc. Two-way action (punching shear) according to Section (5-4-3).
5-4-3 Punching shear
5-4-3-1 The critical section for computing punching shear stresses in slabs
and footings shall be taken at a distance of (d/2) outside the perimeter of the
concentrated load area (Figure 4-9).
5-4-3-2 Punching shear stress shall be computed from the relation
Qp
qp =
bo . d (5-13)
5-8
Chapter 5
where bo is the perimeter of the critical section.
5-4-3-3 When calculating punching shear, the effect of the moments

transmitted from flat slabs to columns shall be included according to
Section (6-2-5-8).
5-4-3-4 Thickness of slabs and footings required to resist punching shear

shall be determined on the basis that punching shear is resisted by concrete
alone, without any contribution of the reinforcement. Furthermore, the
nominal punching shear strength shall be taken equal to the smaller of the
values computed by Equations (5-14-a) and (5-14-b).
.d
q p = 2.5 + 0.2 q cp q cp
bo (5-14-a)
a
q p = 0.5 + q cp q cp
b (5-14-b)
Values of qcp are given in Table (5-1) while a and b are the length and
width of the rectangular loaded area. For loaded areas of other (non-
rectangular) shapes, b shall be taken equal to the longest dimension of the
effective loaded area while a shall be taken equal to the longest dimension
perpendicular to b of the same area . For this purpose, the effective loaded
area is the area having the least perimeter as shown in Figure (4-9-d) for
an L-shaped loaded area. The factor in Equation (5-14-a) shall be taken
equal to 4, 3 and 2 for interior, edge and corner columns, respectively.
5-9
Chapter 5
5-5 Sections subject to torsion
5-5-1 The critical section for torsion shall be taken according to

Section (4-2-3-1).
5-5-2 Nominal shear stresses due to torsion

a- The nominal shear stress due to torsion for solid
reinforced concrete sections shall be computed by the
following equation:
Mt
qt = (5-15)
(2 A o . t e )
where Ao snd te are as defined in Article (4-2-3-2).

b - For T- and L- sections, the effective part of slab may be
neglected, hence, the section can be treated as a
rectangular using Equation (5-15).
In case the effective part of slab is included, requirements
of Section (4-2-3-2) and Figure (4-11-b) shall be
followed.
c - Box sections shall be treated as is stated in Article (4-2-3-
2-d).
5-5-3 Effect of torsional moments shall be neglected if the nominal shear

f cu
stress due to torsion resulting is less than 0.04 where fcu is in
c
N/mm2.
5-5-4 Concrete dimensions of solid sections subject to shear forces combined

with torsional moments and reinforced by web reinforcement as well as
longitudinal bars shall satisfy the following relation:
For solid sections,
(q)2 + (q t ) 2 q 2
N/mm2 (5-16)
For box sections,
5-10
Chapter 5
q + qt q2
N/mm2 (5-17)
In which, q is determined from Equation (5-6), qt is calculated

using Equation (5-15) and q2 is as in Table (5-1).
5-5-5 Shear reinforcement for sections subject to shear forces combined

with torsion
When the shear stress calculated according to Article (5-5-2) exceeds the
f cu
value 0.04 without violating the limit specified in Article (5-5-4),
c
web as well as longitudinal reinforcement shall be used to resist stresses due
to torsion. This reinforcement shall be added to other reinforcement required
to resist shear forces and bending moments according to Table (5-2) as
follows:
a- Area of transverse reinforcement, in the form of closed stirrups or
welded wire mesh shall be determined by Equation (5-18-a) and Figure (4-
12).
Mt .s
A str =
2 Ao . fs (5-18-a)
For rectangular sections, Equation (5-18-a) reduces to:
Mt . s
A str =
1.7 (x1. y1 ) f s (5-18-b)
In these equations, Astr, s, x1 and y1 are as defined in

Article (4-2-3-5). The cross sectional area of stirrups that
resist shear forces and torsion shall not be less than the
amount determined by Equation (4-52)- Article (4-2-3-5).
b - The area of additional longitudinal reinforcement, Asl,
shall be computed as
5-11
Chapter 5
A str . p h f yst
A sl =
s f
y (5-19)
where ph is as defined in Section (4-2-3-2). This longitudinal

reinforcement shall be distributed around the perimeter of the exterior
closed stirrups. The area of additional longitudinal reinforcement shall
not be taken less than that given in Section (4-53).
The following requirements shall be satisfied:
- The spacing of stirrups shall not exceed the smaller of ph /8 or 200mm.
- For sections with stirrups having more than two branches, exterior
stirrups with two branches shall only be considered to resist torsion as
shown in Figure (4-13).
- Additional longitudinal bars shall have a diameter at least 0.067 times the
stirrup spacing, but not less than 12mm.
- The additional longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be
distributed around the perimeter of the exterior closed stirrups with a
maximum spacing of 300mm. There shall be at least one longitudinal bar
in each corner of the stirrups.
- The additional longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be
added to the longitudinal reinforcement required for resisting bending
moments
- Both transverse and longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall
be provided for a distance of at least half the perimeter of exterior stirrups
beyond the point required by analysis.
- It shall not be allowed to redistribute the torsional moment in statically
indeterminate structures when it is necessary for equilibrium (equilibrium
torsion).
5-12
Chapter 5
Table (5-2) Transverse reinforcement to resist torsion and shearing

forces
f cu f cu
q t 0.04 q t > 0.04
c c
N/mm2 N/mm2
q < qc The minimum percentage of Reinforcement to resist
shear reinforcement qt
according to Article
(4-2-2-1-6)
q > qc Reinforcement to resist Reinforcement to resist
(q qc /2) both of:
qt and (q qc /2)
5-5-6 The torsional rigidity of concrete sections shall be computed

according to Section (4-2-3-7).
5-6 Bearing loads
5-6-1 The bearing load shall not exceed 0.30fcuA1 where A1 is the area of
bearing surface.
5-6-2 When the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area,
then the maximum bearing load given by Section (5-6-1) shall be permitted to
A2
be multiplied by but not more than 2.
A1
Where, A2 =the largest area within the support base that is symmetrical-to
and concentric-with the loaded area A1(Figure 4-14). The thickness of the
supporting surface shall be designed to resist the shear stresses stated in
Section (4-2-2).
5-6-3 When the support area is stepped or has sloped sides, area A2 shall
be taken equal to the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the support and having for its upper base the
loaded area, and having side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal (Figure 4-
14).
5-13
Chapter 6
CHAPTER 6
ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS

a- It shall be permitted to use any structural analysis method that provides
full compliance with the requirements of the conditions of equilibrium
and strain compatibility.
b - Members of the structure shall be designed to resist the maximum
effects of all applicable loads
c- It shall be permitted to analyze ordinary building assuming that the
spans of all elements of the building are subjected to full loads.
d- It shall be permitted when calculating of the reactions for continuous
beams and slabs having approximately equal spans and loads to take
the effects of continuity by increasing the magnitudes of the reaction
and shear forces at the first interior support of the exterior spans by
10%, and 20%, respectively.
e- The effects of continuity of continuous slabs and beams having
unequal span lengths with the longer of two adjacent spans is greater
than the shorter by more than 20% shall be taken into consideration.
For such cases the analysis shall be carried out assuming fully loaded
slabs and beams.
f- The reactions at the external supports of cantilever slabs shall be
evaluated with due consideration of the effects of the cantilever on the
magnitude of reaction.
g- The effects of temperature and shrinkage on the structural response of
ordinary buildings shall be ignored, except for the cases were it can be
demonstrated that such effects are significant. Expansion joints for
long buildings shall be in accordance with provisions 9-5-7 and 9-5-8
of this code.
h- The effects of time dependent stains on the internal forces and
moments in ordinary buildings shall be ignored, except for the cases
were it can be demonstrated that such effects are significant.
i- The design of concrete structures for resisting seismic loads shall be
carried out with due consideration of the effects of inter-story drifts
and the choice of the sizes of the seismic joints in accordance with
provisions 6-8 and 9-5-9 of this code, as well as, the corresponding
provisions of the Egyptian code for loads on the structures ( ECP #
201)
6-1
Chapter 6
6-2 Slabs
Provisions of this section shall apply to the following types of slabs:
1- Solid slabs
2- Hollow block slabs
3- Waffle slabs
4- Paneled beams
5- Flat slabs
6-2-1 Solid slabs

6-2-1-1 General
6-2-1-1-1 Spans
a- Effective span of slabs shall be taken equal to the net span between
supports, plus slab thickness, or 1.05 times the net span whichever is
grater, but it shall not exceed the distance between support centerlines.
b - Continuous slabs monolithically cast with supports having width of
support greater than 20% of net span may be considered as a slab with
both ends fixed.
c- The effective lengths of cantilever slabs shall be taken equal to the least
value of:
- The cantilever slab length measured from support centerlines in
case of overhanging slabs.
- Clear length of cantilever slab plus the greatest thickness of the
cantilever slab.
6-2-1-1-2 Supports
The slab support width shall not be less than three quarts of the slabs
thickness, or 100 mm whichever is greater with due consideration of
section (4-2-3-6). These requirements shall not apply for pre-cast slabs.
For slabs supported by brick walls, the minimum thickness of the wall shall
not be less than 200. For slabs supported by beams the minimum thickness
of the beams shall not be less than three times the thickness of slab, unless
otherwise determined by structural analysis taking into consideration the
stiffness of the supporting beams.
6-2-1-1-3 Rectangularity ratio
Rectangular slab supported on its four edges shall be considered
unidirectional if the rectangularity ratio "r" of the portion of slab enclosed
6-2
Chapter 6
between the lines of inflection in the span exceeds two. Shall be

considered bidirectional if rectangularity ratio is less than or equals two.
Accordingly, the rectangularity ratio "r" shall be determined using with
equation (6-1a), and equation (6-1b);
mb . b
r= (6-1a)
ma . a
and shall be used with table (6-1),
b
r= (6-1b)
a
and shall be used with tables (6-2), (6-3).
Where:
a = short effective span.
b = long effective span.
ma = ratio of length between lines of inflection in a loaded strip of
the slab in direction of span a, to span length a.
mb = ratio of length between lines of inflection in a loaded strip of
the slab in direction of span b, to span length b.
Values of ma and mb are determined based on theory of elasticity. The
following approximate values of both of ma and mb, may be used:
- ma or mb = 0.76 for spans continuous from both sides.
- ma or mb = 0.87 for spans continuous from one side only.
- ma or mb = 1.00 for simple spans
6-2-1-2 One way solid slabs
Definition:
1 - one way solid slabs refer to slabs where loads are transferred in one
direction only to two supports along the opposite sides. Supports may
be either walls or beams.
2 - Rectangular solid slab supported on four sides and having
rectangularity ratio "r" exceeding 2, according to equation (6-1) shall
be considered as one way slab.
6-3
Chapter 6
One way solid slab may be calculated based on using a strip having
unit width in the direction of short effective span between the opposite two
supports.
6-2-1-2-1 Minimum thickness
1 - Slab minimum thickness shall be determined so that deflection limit in
accordance with section (4-3) shall not exceed. Calculation of
deflection shall not be required if slab thickness in ordinary buildings
is not less than the values given in table (4-10).
2 - The minimum slab thickness shall not be less than the following:
L
- Simply supported slab t =
min 30
L
- Continuous slab from one side t =
min 35
L
- Continuous slab from two sides t =
min 40
- Where L is the effective span of one way slabs
3 - Slab thickness, in ordinary buildings, shall not be less than the
following values:
- 80mm for cast in place slabs, subjected to static loads.
- 120 mm for slab subjected to dynamic loads or moving loads.
4 - The preceding minimum thicknesses may be reduced for pre-cost
slabs.
6-2-1-2-2 Bending moments
1 - Continuous slab may be analyzed beam theory as continuous beams
supported by free rotating rigid supports, provided that special care
shall be taken to ensure the exact placement of reinforcing steel for
resisting negative bending moments.
2 - For slabs supported on walls or monotonically cast with supporting
beams, the negative bending moment may be reduced according to
parabolic curve, as shown in figure (6-1), where M1 is the value of the
difference between the moment at support centerline, and moment at
support face.
6-4
Chapter 6
3 - In continuous slabs design positive bending moment shall not be less

than wL2/16, with due consideration of minimum reinforcement ratio,
according to section (6-2-1-2-3).
P a ra b o lic C u rv e
M1
M1 2
M1
2
w a ll o r b e a m
Figure (6-1) Reducing negative bending moment of continuous slabs
4 - Negative bending moment at external supports of slabs fixed in brick,

stone or ordinary concrete walls, making partial fixation at slab edge
- w L2
M= (6-2)
16
Positive moment in outer spans shall be calculated neglecting the

partial fixation at edges.
5 - Negative bending moment at outer supports of monolithically cast
slab with supporting beams that result in partial fixation at slab edge
- w L2
M= (6-3)
24
Positive moment in outer spans shall be calculated neglecting partial

fixation at edges.
6-5
Chapter 6
6 - Slab shall be considered as fully fixed at its edges either when such
edges are effectively connected to other parts of the structure such that
rotation of slab edges under all loading conditions are totally
prevented, or when requirements of section (6-2-1-1-1-b) are fulfilled.
7 - In cases of continuous slabs subject to equal uniformly distributed
loads on all spans, having the magnitude of live load is equal or less
than that of the dead load (p g )and where spans are equal, or
differences between spans do not exceed 20% of the greater span ,
following maximum values of bending moment may be assumed:
a - One span slab, the maximum positive bending moment
+ w L2
M= (6-4-a)
8
b - Continuous two span slab, the maximum positive bending

moment
+ w L2
M= (6-4-b)
10
And the negative bending moment at middle support:
- w L2
M= (6-4-c)
8
c - Multi span continuous slabs, the maximum bending moment
w L2
M= (6-4-d)
K
Where; the values of K are shown in figure (6-2). The values of the
negative bending moment on any support may be taken equal to
arithmetic mean of negative moment calculated on each side of the
common support of t two adjacent spans
-24 -10 -12 -12

K
+10 +12 +12
Figure (6-2) Bending moment in continuous slabs
6-6
Chapter 6
8 - Negative moments shall be calculated at the mid spans when

continuous slab are subjected to heavy live loads (p> 2g). In cases of
monolithically cast slabs and beams, negative moments are permitted
to be reduced at the span centers resulting from live loads only to its
half value, due to the resistance of supporting beams to torsion, and
negative moments may be taken at inner span centers, according to
equation (6-5).
p 2
g - L
2
M min = (6-5)
24
9 - In case of design by limit states method, (gu , pu , and wu) shall

replace g , p , w respectively.
6-2-1-2-3 Reinforcement
1- Reinforcement ratio in main direction shall not be less that 0.6/fy of
the area of effective concrete section , or 0.25 % of actual concrete
section area in case of using mild reinforcement steel , and equivalent
to 0.15 % in case of using high tensile steel.
2 - Reinforcement shall be arranged to cover the entire tension areas, and
extend inside the support a distance equals the anchorage length
according to section (4-2-5).
3 - In continuous slabs having equal span lengths or, span lengths that do
not differ by more than 20 % of the longer span, and subjected to
normal loading conditions and in cases that bars have not been
arranged according to the bending moment curve, half of main
reinforcement may be bent at a distance equals to 1/5 of clear span
from face of interior supports, and extending in adjacent span to a
distance equals to 1/4 of the longer of the two spans.
4 - The maximum spacing between main reinforcement bars in areas of
maximum moments shall not exceed 200 mm.
5 - Cross-sectional area of bottom reinforcement bars extending to
supports shall not be less than one third of the cross-section area of
positive reinforcement used at the mid span.
6 - All requirements of the items shall also apply for the cases of using
reinforcement mesh.
6-7
Chapter 6
7 - Cross-sectional area of distributed bars perpendicular to main

reinforcement shall not be less than one fifth of main reinforcement
area of steel. The minimum number of distributed bars per meter
width of slab shall not be less than four bars.
8 - Minimum diameter of main bars shall be 6 mm for straight bars, and 8
mm for bent-up bars. Bars of smaller diameters may be used in case of
using mesh, or in pre-cast units.
9 - Top mesh reinforcement shall be used in slabs of thickness greater
than 160 mm. The area of the steel mesh in every direction shall not
be less than 20 % of that of main reinforcement with a minimum of
5 8/m, for mild steel or 5 6/m for high grade steel.
6-2-1-3 Two- way rectangular solid slabs

6-2-1-3-1 General
1- Rectangular solid slab supported on four sides and having
rectangularity ratio "r" less than 2, according to equation (6-1) shall be
considered as two-way slab.
2 - Such slabs may be analyzed using theory of elasticity, provided that
special care shall be taken to ensure the exact placement of reinforcing
steel for resisting negative bending moments.
3 - The following methods of design shall be applicable only for the
design of ordinary buildings. Accordingly, it shall not be permitted the
use the method outlined in this section to the design of other types of
structures such as bridges or liquid tanks etc.
6-2-1-3-2 Minimum thickness
- Minimum thickness of two-way slabs shall be taken as follows:
Simply supported slabs:
a
t = (6-6-a)
min 35
Slabs continuous from one side:
a
t = (6-6-b)
min 40
Slabs continuous from two sides:
6-8
Chapter 6
a
t = (6-6-c)
min 45
Where:
a- is the effective short span of the slab in accordance with items 3, 4
of section (62121).
6-2-1-3-3 A simplified method for calculation of bending moments in

two- way solid slabs subjected to uniformly distributed loads
In General, the analysis shall be carried out in accordance with section
(6213-1 clause2). The following simplified method may be used in
calculating bending moment in monolithically cast rectangular slabs with
beams, and supported on its four sides, provided that rectangularity ratio " r "
does not exceed 2. Value of bending moments may be taken in two way
slabs as follows:
- For simply supported spans:
. w. a 2 . w. b 2
Ma = + or M b = + (6-7-a)
8 8
-For continuous spans from one side only:
. w. a 2 . w. b 2
Ma = or M b = (6-7-b)
10 10
- For continuous span from both sides:
. w. a 2 . w. b 2
Ma = or M b = (6-7-c)
12 12
Table (6-1) gives the value of coefficients , used in calculating

of bending moments of slabs in the directions a, b respectively
corresponding to different values of r", and for case of slabs subjected to
live loads not exceeding 5 kN/m2.
6-9
Chapter 6
Table (6-1) Values of coefficients , corresponding to values of

"r" for solid slabs monolithically cast with beams,
subjected to uniform live load does not exceed 5 kN/m2.
2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 r
0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.40 0.35
0.08 0.09 0.11 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.21 0.25 0.29 0.35
Where:
0.35
= 0.5r 0.15 & = (6-8)
2
r
But in case live loads greater than 5 kN/m2, then values of , in

table (6-3) may be used.
In case of diversity between bending moments on both sides of
contact line between two slabs, contact moment MC between them may be
calculated using equation.
M L +M L
Mc = 1 1 2 2 (6-9)
L +L
1 2
Where M1, L1 are negative moment calculated for a slab, and span
used in calculating such moment respectively.
And M2, L2 are negative moment calculated on the adjacent slab and
span used in calculating such moment respectively.
6-2-1-3-4 Reinforcement of two way slabs

a- Maximum distance between main reinforcement bars shall not exceed
at locations of maximum moments 200 mm. Cross-sectional area of
reinforcement in secondary direction shall not be less than one quarter
of main reinforcement cross-section, and the number of bars in areas of
maximum moment shall not be less than five bars per meter. For other
requirements of reinforcement refer to section (6-2-1-2-3).
b - Positive reinforcement adjacent and parallel to the slab continuous
edges may be reduced when slab is continuous in a direction
perpendicular on such edges. The reduction in area of reinforcement
6-10
Chapter 6
shall not be less than one quarter, within a width of slab that does not
exceed one quarter of the shortest dimension of the slab, and with
due consideration of the preceding item , a .
6-2-1-3-5 Load distribution in slabs supported on masonry walls

Uniformly distributed loads in slabs supported on masonry walls shall
be distributed according to table (6-2) in case that the live loads do not
exceed 5 kN/m2. For live loads exceeding 5 kN/m2, values of coefficients in
table (6-3) may be used.
Table (6-2) Values of coefficients , corresponding to values of " r

" for solid slab supported on wall, and (two way) ribbed
slabs, with complete compression flange.
2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 r
0.849 0.830 0.806 0.778 0.746 0.706 0.660 0.606 0.543 0.473 0.396
0.053 0.063 0.077 0.093 0.113 0.140 0.172 0.212 0.262 0.333 0.396
6-2-1-4 Design of slabs by yield line method

The yield line method may be used in design of slabs based on slab
behavior when reaching failure limit. It is conditional when using such a
method the fulfillment of the minimum slab thickness. It should be pointed
out that such method shall not fulfill crack width requirement in slab
tension zones when subjected to aggressive environmental conditions of
third and fourth types specified in sections (4-3-2-4-e). Hence, it shall not
be permitted to use such design method for such cases.
It should be noted that the ratio of section resistance of negative
moments Mu/ to section resistance of positive moments Mu, in the same
direction, may average between 1.00 and 1.50.
M u
= 1.00 1.5 (6-10)
Mu
6-2-1-5 Concentrated loads on slabs

Concentrated loads on slab may be in one of the following cases
1 - Separate (single) concentrated loads, figure (6-3-a), and figure (6-3-b).
6-11
Chapter 6
2 - Linear concentrated loads (such as walls), figure (6-3-c), figure (6-3-d).

Slabs subjected to concentrated loads may be calculated in accordance
with theories of elasticity, but rules shown in items (6-2-1-5-1), (6-2-1-5-2)
may be followed.
2
Thickness of Flooring
t c
S2= t 2 + 2 c + t
M aximum W idth of Distribution
Support
M aximum W idth of Distribution
Free Edge
S 1 = t1 + 2 c + t
S 1 = t1 + 2 c + t
S 1 = t 1+ 2 c + t
t1
Support


Support
c t
B) Concentrated Loads at Free Edge of Slab A) Concentrated Loads at Slab Center
t2
t c
M aximum W idth of Distribution S2 = t 2 + 2 c + t
S 1 = t1 + 2 c + t
S1= t1+ 2 c + t
Support
Support

t1

Support
Support
c t
S2 = t 2 + 2 c + t
D) Line Load Perpendicular to the Line of Support C) Line Load Parallel to the Line of Support
Figure (6-3) Distribution of separated and linear concentrated loads on

one -way slab
6-2-1-5-1 One- way Slabs

1- Maximum distribution width of concentrated load
Primary width of concentrated load distribution on slab shall be
defined according to equations (6-11) and figure (6-3).
6-12
Chapter 6
S1 = t1 + 2c + t (6-11-a)
S2 = t2 + 2c + t (6-11-b)
Where:
t1 =Load width in direction perpendicular to main reinforcement
t2 =Load width in direction parallel to main reinforcement
c= Thickness of flooring cover
t= Slab thickness
S1= Load distribution width in direction perpendicular to main
reinforcement at the support
S2= Load distribution width in direction parallel to main
reinforcement
Distribution width would be equal S1 at the support, gradually
increasing until reaching maximum distribution width stipulated later on.
Increase in width follows lines inclining by angle to main reinforcement
direction, as it shown in the plan.
Where:
tan = 1.00 when calculating bending moments
tan = 0.50 when calculating shear forces
Thus, maximum width of distribution in direction perpendicular to

main reinforcement shall be equal to
A
S1 + s L (6-12)
As
Where L is the effective span in simply supported slab, or the distance

between inflection lines in continuous slabs, provided that the
ratio of secondary reinforcement AS to that of the main
reinforcement AS in such equation shall not exceed 0.67, and
maximum width shall not exceed the following:
a - For calculation of bending moments

- Maximum width given in equation (6- 12) shall not exceed (S1 + 2.0
meters), or slab length in direction perpendicular to main reinforcement,
whichever is smaller.
6-13
Chapter 6
- When concentrated load is close to the slab unsupported edge , or near

the shorter side beams in slab, effective width of distribution ,
perpendicular to main reinforcement shall be taken equals to half the
values stipulated previously plus the distance between load center and
the unsupported edge or the slab shorter side beam edge (figure 6-3).
b - For calculation of shear forces
- Maximum width given in equation (6-12) shall not exceed (S1 + L/3) or
(S1 + 1.00 meter) or slab length in direction perpendicular to main
reinforcement, whichever is smaller.
- When concentrated load is close to line of support, the maximum
allowed width of distribution when calculating shear forces between slab
and carrying beam is ( S1 + 4t).
- When concentrated load is close to the beam throughout the slab short
side, the maximum allowed width of distribution for calculating shear
forces between slab and beam is (S2 + 4t)
2- Bending moment and design

a- The additional torque resulting from concentrated load, shall be
calculated with due consideration that the concentrated load is
distributed on a length of the slab effective span equals S2 and that the
width affected by concentrated load in the direction perpendicular to
main reinforcement is equal to that previously given .
b - Design bending moments of the slab within the maximum width of
distribution shall be equal to the sum of bending moments resulting
from slab dead and live loads, and additional bending moments as a
result of the concentrated load.
c- Main reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with bending
moment previously given, additional secondary reinforcement of
concentrated load shall extend for a length equals at least the width of
distribution considered.
6-2-1-5-2 Two -way rectangular slabs

The following load distribution shall be used in the two directions
for the cases where short and long suspended spans, a1, b1 respectively
conform to b1/a1 1.5, otherwise the slab shall be considered as a one-
way slab.
6-14
Chapter 6
Distribution of isolated concentrated load in two directions

Isolated concentrated load distribution on slab in each of the two
directions shall be taken as the reverse ratio to span length, as follows:
b
Pa1 = P 1 (6-13-a)
(a1 + b1 )
a
Pb1 = P 1 (6-13-b)
(a1 + b1)
The maximum width of distribution in the short suspended span a1

shall be:
S2 + 0.4 a1 (6-14)
The maximum width of distribution in the long suspended span b1

shall be:
a
S1 + 0.4 a 1 2 - 1 (6-15)
b1
Calculation of bending moments resulting from concentrated load in

two directions
For calculating additional bending moment resulting from
concentrated load in direction a1, it shall be taken into consideration that
load Pa1, distributed on length "a" of effective span shall be equal to the
value given by equation (6-14), and that the width affected by concentrated
load in the perpendicular direction to a1 shall be equal to the value given by
equation (6-15). Similarly, for calculating bending moment resulting from
concentrated load in direction of b1, it shall be taken into consideration that
load Pb1 distributed on length "b" of effective span shall be equal to the
value given by equation (6-15), and that the width affected by concentrated
load in the perpendicular direction to b1, shall be equal the value given by
equation (6-14).
Such additional moments shall be added to those resulting from
permanent loads and live loads. The value of the total reinforcement shall
6-15
Chapter 6
be calculated in each direction, and shall be placed within widthes affected

by concentrated load.
6-2-2 Hollow block slabs

6-2-2-1 General
- When calculating hollow block slabs, such blocks shall be considered
statically ineffective.
- The following condition regarding dimensions shall be fulfilled (figure 6-4).
1 - Net distance between ribs "e" shall not exceed 700 mm.
2 - Web width "b" shall not be less than 100 mm or one the third of
depth "t", whichever is greater.
3 - Compression slab thickness "ts" shall not be less than 50 mm or one
tenth of distance "e", whichever is greater
- The slab between ribs shall safely carry concentrated loads acting
directly on it.
ts
main reinforcement
b e b
max 700 mm e
larger of 100 mm or t/3 b
larger of 50 mm or e/10 ts
Figure (6-4) Hollow block slabs section and dimensions.
6-2-2-2 One- way hollow block slabs

- Cross sectional area of distributing bars perpendicular to ribs per meter
shall not be less than the values given in section (6-3-1-10), and the
minimum amount of distributing bars in slab (parallel to ribs) shall be
3 6 mm / m provided that a bar of 6 mm diameter shall be placed
between every two ribs, and a bar at every rib, as shown in figure (6-4).
- If live load is less than or equals 3 kN/m2 and spans are longer than 5.0
meters, the slab shall be provided with at least one cross rib at the span
6-16
Chapter 6
center. Section dimension and bottom reinforcement of cross rib shall

not be less than those of the main ribs, and the top reinforcement of the
cross ribs shall be at least one half of the bottom reinforcement.
- If live load exceeds 3 kN / m 2, and spans range between 4.0 and 7.0
meters, the slab shall be provided with one cross rib. However, for spans
exceeding 7.0 meters, the slab shall be provided with three cross ribs;
such cross ribs shall have the same dimensions and reinforcement as
previously mentioned.
6-2-2-3 Two-way hollow block slabs

There are two cases for the beams supporting such slabs:
a- For the cases of beams having the same thickness as that of the slab
(embedded or hidden beams), the slab shall be designed as a flat slab,
or by the following the of item (b).
b - For the cases of rigid beams of having thicknesses greater than that of
the hollow black slab thickness. Two types of such slabs are
considered, as follows:
1 - The type where ribs have complete compression flanges: For
such cases if the magnitude of the live load does not exceed 5
kN/m2,,, the loads shall be distributed using the coefficients given
in table (6-2). If live load exceeds 5kN/m2, loads shall be
distributed using coefficients given in table (6-3).
2 - The type where ribs have in-complete compression flange, (i.e.
rib in the form of T section with limited compression flange
width, or without compression flange); loads shall be distributed
in both directions using coefficients given in table (6-3).
6-2-2-4 General notes

The following notes shall be applied to both one-way and two- way
hollow block slabs.
- Shear forces in ribs shall be treated according to section (6-3-1-7).
However, in case of design of the two- way hollow block slabs, as flat
slabs, shear forces shall be treated according to section (6-2-5-8).
- Slab parts at supports shall be solid, to resist negative bending moments
and shearing forces.
6-17
Chapter 6
- Effective spans and bending moments in the slabs shall be determines

according to sections (6-2-1-1-1) and (6-2-1-2-2)
- The minimum width of support on brick or stone walls shall be 200 mm.
- In case of simply supported hollow block slabs, the presence of hollow
blocks over supports shall not be allowed; the slabs over support shall be
solid.
Table (6-3). Values of coefficient , corresponding to values of "r"

for hollow block slabs with in completed compression flange.
2.0 1.9 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 r
0.941 0.928 0.914 0.893 0.867 0.834 0.797 0.742 0.672 0.595 0.500
0.059 0.072 0.086 0.107 0.133 0.166 0.203 0.258 0.328 0.405 0.500
6-2-3 Waffle Slabs

Design waffle slabs are similar to that of flat slabs (figure 7-6) with
due consideration of the following points:
1 - Distance between web (rib) centerlines (e + b) in figure (6-5) shall be
increased up to 1.50 meter.
2 - Upper slab (flange) thickness ts shall not be less than e/12 or 50 mm
whichever is greater.
3 - Minimum web (rib) width "b" shall not be less than one quarter of slab
thickness "t" or 100 mm whichever is greater. Concrete cover
requirements, the distance between bars and fire requirements shall be
satisfied.
4 - The requirements for punching shear resistance over columns shall be
fulfilled.
ts
b e b
Figure (6-5) Waffle slab
6-18
Chapter 6
6-2-4 Paneled Beams

a- When total dimensions of two- way slabs are relative big so that it is
impractical to design the slab as solid slab, hollow block slab or
waffle slab, a structural consisting of intersecting beams equal in
depth and form a grid with monolithic slabs shall be more
appropriate to use.
b - Intersected beams are normally arranged in two perpendicular
directions forming rectangular grid. Beams may be also be arranged
diagonally to form skew grid, arranged in three directions to form
triangular grid, or arranged in four directions to form triangular grid.
c - It is structurally recommended to use beams parallel to the edges when
rectangularity ratios of the floor vary between the values of 1.00 and
1.50. In the case that the rectangularity ratio is greater than 1.50 it may
be suitable to use skew grid.
d - Internal forces shall be calculated, and slab between paneled beams
shall be designed in accordance with section (6-2-1-3) and section (6-2-
2).
e - Internal forces in paneled beams shall be analyzed using theory of
elasticity. One of the simplified methods may also be used, provided
that the design shall be in full complaisance with the actual behavior
of the paneled beam system.
f - The design shall also satisfy the requirements of section (6-3)
6-2-5 Flat slabs

6-2-5-1 General
Flat slabs are reinforced concrete slabs with or without drop panels,
supported on columns with or without column heads, as shown in figure (6-
6). It includes solid slabs, slabs with ribs in two directions with or without
hollow blocks.
Symbols:
L1 = span length in the considered direction, measured center to
center of support.
L2 = span width in direction perpendicular to the direction under
consideration, measured center to center of support.
L = longer panel length
Lx = shorter panel length measured from column centerlines
Ly = longer panel length measured from column centerlines
D = Diameter of the greater circle that can be drawn within the
column section ,or column head, if any.
6-19
Chapter 6
W = Total load per unit area of the panel

t = Slab thickness
d = Slab effective depth
Critical Sections for Shear
C r itic a l S e c tio n s fo r S h e a r
Slab Thickness
t/2
S la b T h ic k n e s s
t
t/2
t 90
90
D D
D + d
D+d
B - F la t S la b w ith C o lu m n C a p ita l
A- Flat Slab
C r itic a l S e c tio n s fo r S h e a r
C ritic a l S e c tio n s fo r S h e a r
t
90
t
S la b T h ic k n e s s S la b T h ic k n e s s
< 4t la b T h ic k n e s s S la b T h ic k n e ss
90
< 4t
D
D + S la b T h ic k n e s s + d D
D ro p P a n e l W id th D + D ro p P a n e l W id th
D ro p P a n e l W id th
d + D ro p P a n e l W id th
d + D r o p P a n e l W id th
D - F la t S la b w ith D ro p P a n e l C - F la t S la b w ith d r o p P a n e l a n d C o lu m n C a p ita l
Figure (6 6) Critical sections for shear
6-2-5-2 Limits of concrete dimensions

a- Minimum slab thickness
Slab thickness shall not be less than the greatest of the following
values:
1 - 150 mm.
2 - L/32 for external panels without drop.
3 - L/36 for continuous internal panels without drop, or external panel
with drop.
4 - L/40 for continuous internal panels with drop.
b- Minimum dimension of columns
The diameter of circular column or the length of any of the sides of
rectangular column shall not be less than the greatest of the following
values:
6-20
Chapter 6
1 - 1/20 of panel length in the considered direction.

2 - 1/15 of the total floor height.
3 - 300 mm.
The 300 mm limit may be reduced if the column and slab are designed
to resist forces and moments transferred between them according to section
(6-2-5-8-1).
c- Column heads
For columns provided with column heads, the following requirements
of interior and exterior column heads shall be satisfied:
1 - The maximum head inclination to the vertical shall not exceed 45o.
2 - Effective diameter D considered in design shall not exceed one quarter
of the smaller span of adjacent slabs. For noncircular column or
column heed, the effective diameter D shall be considered as the
diameter of the greatest circle that can be drawn within the column
section or column head, ( if any).
d- Drop panel
Drop panels are thickened slabs above the columns or their column
heads for resisting negative bending moments or punching shear, and
reducing reinforcement steel, the following shall be considered:
1 - Drop panel thickness below slab shall not be less than one quarter of
the slab thickness.
2 - Drop panel shall extend to a distance not less than one sixth of shorter
panel length in the same direction, measured from column centerlines,
so as not to exceed one quarter of length of the panel of the shorter
length.
e- Flat slab design strips

Flat slab panels are divided into the following design strips as shown
in Figure (6-7):
- Column strip: a strip having a width equals to half of the shorter length,
except in case of using drop panel the width shall be taken equal to drop
panel width.
6-21
Chapter 6
- Field strip: a strip having width equals to the difference between panel
width and column strip width.
6-2-5-3 Structural analysis methods
a- Flat slabs may be analyzed according theory of elasticity. Yield lines
method may be also used, provided achieving the ratio of negative
moments to positive moments according to section (6-2-1-4). It is
noted that the requirements of crack limit state in the tension surfaces
of slabs subjected to environmental conditions of third and fourth
sections according to section (4-3-2-4-e) shall not be fulfilled when
using the yield line analysis method. Accordingly, it shall not be used
for the analysis of such cases.
b - Flat slabs with columns on perpendicular straight axes in both
directions may be analyzed according to one of the following two
methods:
1 - As continuous frames, using the method conforming to section (6-
2-5-4)
2 - The empirical method conforming to section (6-2-5-5)
Offset of column locations by not more than 10% of the average
length of the two perpendicular panels shall be permitted.
LX /2 Ly - Lx /2 LX /2
Lx /4 Lx /4 Lx /4 Lx /4
Column Strip
Lx / 4 Lx / 4
Lx / 2
Short Direction , Lx
C o lu m n S trip F ie ld S trip C o lu m n S trip

Lx / 2
Field Strip
Column Strip
Lx / 4 Lx / 4
Lx / 2
L o n g D ire c tio n L y
Figure (6-7-a) Dividing flat slab panels into column strips and field
strips for slab without drop panel
6-22
Chapter 6
< Lx / 3 L y + F ield S trip + D rop P anel W idth

> Lx / 2
Column Strip Field Strip Column Strip

D ro p P anel W idth
Drop Panel
< Lx / 3
> Lx / 2
Width
C olum n S trip F ield S trip C olum n S trip
Width - ( Lx )
D ro p P an el W id th
p
Figure(6-7-b) Dividing flat slab panels into column strips and field
strips for slab with drop panel
Colu mn Axe s
C
Upp er Colu mn
C
L L2
1
C C2
1
/2
L2 L2
/2
L2
C
L
1
Low er Colu mn
Fig (6-8) Equivalent column (columns and torsional elements)
6-23
Chapter 6
6-2-5-4 Analysis of flat slabs as continous frames

As an alternate method of the precise structural analysis of flat slabs
using theory of elasticity, the following analysis may be used:
A - Bending moments and shear forces shall be calculated by analyzing
the structure as continuous frames subject to the following
assumptions:
- The structure shall be divided longitudinally and transversally into
frames onsisting of a row of columns and strips of slabs situated on
both sides of the column row with width equals the distance
between panels centerlines.
- Each continuous frame shall be analyzed as a seperate frame
consisting of a strip of slabs, and row of columns above and below
with ends totally fixed. The full magnitudes of both dead and live
load shall be taken in each direction seperatly, with due
consideration of placing live load at the locations that shall give the
maximum values of internal stresses in the various members of the
frame. Spans used in such analysis shall be taken equals to
distances between column centerlines. Differences in rigidity frame
elements shall be also taken into consideration.
- For vertical load analysis, the flat slab flexure stiffness shall be
calculated using the total width slab, (i.e. distance between column
centerlines).
- For lateral load analysis, effective width shall be taken for
calculation of rigidity equals to column width plus three times the
slab thickness including drop panel, (if any) on both sides of the
column, provided that the effective width shall not exceed one third
of the distance between column centerlines. Internal forces from
lateral loads shall be applied to such effective width.
- When calculating flexure stiffness for equivalent columns, one of
the following two methods may be used:
A-1 By considering the combined effects of both column flexural stiffness
and torsional stiffness of the monolithically connected torsional
elements to the column. Beams and the effective torsional parts of the
slab in direction perpendicular to frame plane represent the torsional
elements monolithically connected torsional element considering that
for beamless torsional element comprises the column width c1 plus
three times the slab thickness according section (4-2-3-2) and figure
6-24
Chapter 6
(4-11-b). The equivalent column flexural stiffness kec shall be

calculated using the following relation and figure (6-8).
Kc
K ec = (6-16-a)
Kc
1 +
Kt
Where KC = sum of the flexural stiffness of the column above and

below slab level, assuming that the columns are totally
fixed at the upper and lower ends. Column flexural
stiffness shall be given by the relation.
4E c I g
K c =
(6-16-b)
h
Where:
h = column height.
Ig = gross moment of inertia outside the connection of the concrete
section of the column about the neutral axis, neglecting
reinforcement steel and effect of cracks.
EC= modulus of elasticity of concrete, conforming to section (2-3-
3-1)
For slabs with drop panel or column heads or non-prismatic column

sections, it is preferable to calculate column stiffness values KC taking
considering the actual stiffness for such cases.
Kt = torsional stiffness of the torsional elements of the equivalent

column, calculated from following relation:

9E c . C
Kt = (6-16-c)
3
c2
L 2 . 1 -

L2
6-25
Chapter 6
Where c2, L2 are column dimension and span length in the direction
perpendicular to analysis direction as shown in figure (6-8).
C is section constant, calculated by following relation:
b b . t
3
C = 1 - 0.63 . (6-16-d)
t 3
Where t, b are the longer and shorter dimensions of torsional

element, respectively. The value of C for a T or L sections
shall be equal to the sum of the values of C obtained for the
various rectangular sections that make up the T or L sections
A2 Calculation of equivalent moment of inertia for column Iec using the

following relation:
I ec = . I g (6-17-a)
Where , is a coefficient conforming to following relation:

2
. L 2a L 2a
= 0.6 + 0.4 For external columns (6-17-b)
L1a L1a
2
. L 2a L 2a
= 0.3 + 0.7 For internal columns (6-17-c)
L1a L1a
2
. L 2a L 2a
For exterior columns = 0.6 + 0.4 (6-17-b)
L1a L1a
2
. L 2a L 2a
For interior columns = 0.3 + 0.7 (6-17-c)
L1a L1a
L2 a
Provided that , 0.30 < < 1.00 , and the ratio shall not exceed 1.00,
L1a
where:
= The ratio of the moment of inertia of the torsion resistant
beam (if any) to the moment of inertia of the slab strip.
L1a = Average of the two span lengths on both column sides in
analysis direction.
6-26
Chapter 6
L2a = Average of the two span lengths on both column sides in

direction perpendicular to the analysis direction.
b - Slab shall be designed at any section, for bending moments calculated
as previously outlined. It shall not be required to consider negative
bending moment values greater than those at the face of the column.
Bending moments calculated by the previous method shall be divided
between both column and field strips by ratios given in table (6-4).
c- When column strip shall be taken equal to drop panel width, and field
strip width shall be increased to a value greater than one half of span
width, accordingly moments that field strip resists shall exceed the
values given in table (6-4) in proportion to the increase in column strip
width. For such cases moments that column strip resists shall be
reduced to values lower than those given in table (6-4) such that
there shall be no reduction in total values of positive moments and the
total negative moments resisted by the column and field strips .
Table (6-4) Distribution of bending moments subject to vertical loads,

between column strips and field strip for flat slab panels designed as
continuous frames
Distribution of bending moments between

column strips and field strips as a percentage of
Type of moment
total positive and negative bending moments
Column strip Field strip
Negative moments in
75 25
internal span
Negative moments in
80 20
external span
Positive moments 55 45
6-2-5-5 Empirical analysis for flat slabs subject to uniformly

distributed loads
a- Limits of using the method
Such method may be used subject to fulfilling the following
conditions:
1 - Flat slabs shall have a number of rectangular panels of almost constant
thickness arranged in at least three rows in two perpendicular
6-27
Chapter 6
directions, provided that the ratio of span length to its width shall not
exceed 1.3.
2 - Length and width of any adjacent panels shall not differ in any group
by more than 10% of the greatest length or width, provided that the
separate spans shall not differ from each other in the group by more
than 20% of the greatest span. End spans may be shorter than interior
spans, and shall not be longer than them. In case of different length
adjacent spans, the greatest span length shall always be used in
calculation of bending moments.
3 - Live load shall not exceed double the slab permanent load.
b- Critical sections of bending moments in flat slabs

In continuous interior panels, critical sections of bending moments
shall be as follows:
1 - For positive moments, critical sections shall be along panel centerline.
2 - For negative moments, critical sections are at panel edges throughout
the line connecting column centers, and around the perimeter of
column heads.
c- Bending moments in flat slab panels

Bending moment M shall be calculated in both directions of the panel
according to the following equation:
2
w L2 2D
M= L1 - (6-18)
8 3
Where L1 is the length in considered direction, and L2 is the length in

the perpendicular direction, and w is the density of total load per square
meter of the slab.
Value of M shall be divided between field strip and column strip in
the considered direction according to the ratios given in table (6-5) and
figure (6-9) the requirement of section (6-2-5-4-c) shall be satisfied.
6-28
Chapter 6
Table (6-5) Distribution of bending moments due to vertical loads in

flat slab panels as a percentage of M
Strip Type of Exterior panel Interior panel

end Exterior Positive Interior Negative Positive
support* negative moments negative moments moments
moments moments
Column a 25 30
50 45 25
strip b 20 30
Field a 5 20
20 15 15
strip b 10 20
* Types of end support
a- No beams.
b- Beams with total depth equal or greater than three times slab thickness t.
Figure (6-9) Total moments in panels for column and field strips in a
flat slab supported on concrete columns
d- Negative bending moments in mid spans in case of heavy live loads

In case of heavy live loads (p > 1.5 g), negative bending moments in
interior mid span shall not be less than the following values:
2
2p L 2
M ve = g - 2 L1 - D (6-19-a)
3 40 3
for column strip in direction L1
6-29
Chapter 6
2
2p L 2
M -ve = g - 2 L1 - D (6-19-b)
3 100 3
for field strip in direction L1
Where p, g shall be the uniform live and permanent (dead) load on unit
area respectively.
e- Bending moments in columns

1 - Internal and external columns shall be designed to resist bending
moments equal 50 % and 90 %, respectively of the negative moment
in column strip according to table (6-5). Such moments shall be
divided between upper and lower columns by the ratio of its stiffness.
In internal columns direct load, acting along with the moment, may be
reduced, considering that the span on one side is free from live load.
2 - In case of external columns carrying parts of the slab and walls as
cantilever loads, bending moments in columns may be reduced as
determined in the pervious clause, by as much as the resulting moment
of dead load on the cantilever part.
6-2-5-6 Bending moments in spans with or without marginal beams

a- For slab supported on marginal beam with a total depth equals or
exceeds three times slab thickness, bending moments acting on the
half column strip parallel to beam shall be equal to one quarter of the
values given in table (6-4) or table (6-5).
b - In normal cases, where no marginal beams are present, bending
moments acting on the half column strip shall be equal to half the
values given in table (6-4) or table (6-5).
6-2-5-7 Design loads acting on marginal beam

1 - Total load that marginal beam carries shall include direct loads on the
beam, in addition to distributed load equals the load acting on one
quarter of total panel, and the torsional moments transferred from the
monolithically connected slab.
6-30
Chapter 6
2 - Marginal beam resistance to torsion shall be calculated according to

equation (4-54) shown in figure (6-10), with moment redistribution
according to figure (6-11).
6-2-5-8 Negative moments transferred from slab to columns

6-2-5-8-1 Total negative moments Mf in external spans (figure 6-12-a) or
the difference of negative moment Mf in internal spans (figure 6-12-b) shall
be transferred to columns according to the following distribution:
a- A part transfers directly to columns by bending moments ( f Mf )
and f shall be taken according to the following equation:
1
f = (6-20)
2 b1
1+
3 b2
Where:
f= Coefficient of moments transferred by bending
b1 = Length of critical section in punching shear, measured in
analysis direction
b2 = Length of critical section in punching shear, measured in the
direction perpendicular to b1.
5
0 .2
M tu T o rs io n R e in fo rc e m e n t Z o n e s
C 1
C2
2
C
2
L
2
2 -C
L
2 f cu
A cp
M tu = 0.316 (section 4-2-3-6)
pcp c

Figure (6-10) Torsion moments acting on marginal beam
6-31
Chapter 6
0 .7 0 M o
0 .3 0 M o
Mo
2 M tu L 2
L2 - C2
Figure (6-11) Redistribution of moments in external panel as a result of

drop in marginal beam section torsional rigidity due to cracking
Steel reinforcement required to resist such moments in effective width

(be) shall be concentrated as shown in figure (6-13).
b That part of the moment transferred to columns by torsion moments
( q Mf), and q shall be taken according to the following equation:
q =1- f (6-21)
Where:
q = Coefficient of moments transferred by torsion causing punching
shear on critical section, shown in figure (6-14) and figure (6-
15) and are calculated in both directions according to following
equations:
Punching shear stress qx resulting from moment Mfx, considering qx is
coefficient of moments transferred by torsion
M fx . qx . CCB
qx = (6-22-a)
J cx
Punching shear stress qy resulting from moment Mfy, considering qy is

coefficient of moments transferred by torsion
M fy . qy . C AB
qy = (6-22-b)
J cy
Such stresses shall be added to punching shear stress resulting from vertical
loads according to equation (4-31) section (4-2-2-3) for design by limit
state method, or section (5-4-3) for design by working stress method.
6-32
Chapter 6
Where:
Jcx , Jcy = constant for critical moment in shear similar to polar
moment of inertia around x, y coordinates respectively.
Figures (6- 14), (6-15) show shear stresses resulting from
moment My Values of Jcy shall be determined as follows:
Moments Transferred
to Column Mf
Bending Moment
Figure (a) Bending moments in case of external edge column
Moments Transferred
to Column M f
Bending Moment
Figure (b) Bending moments in case of internal column.
C ritic a l S e c tio n fo r S h e a r
C ritic a l S e c tio n fo r S h e a r
Figure (c) Shear forces in case of internal column

Figure (6-12) Bending moments and shear forces transferred to
columns
6-33
Chapter 6
c 2
y
T h e le a s t o f = be
c2 + y
c 2 + 3 t
c 2
y
c1
c1
c 2
T h e le a s t o f = be T h e le a s t o f = be
c 2 + c 1 L 2 c 2 + y
c 2 + 3 t 2 c 2 + 3 t
c 2 c 2
T h e le a s t o f = b e T h e le a s t o f = be
y
y
c 2 x
y + y + 2
2 x
y + 1 .5 t
y + 1 .5 t
T h e le a s t o f = be T h e le a s t o f = b e
y y
c 2 + x + 2
2
c + 1 .5 t x + 1 .5 t
2
Figure (6-13) Width of strip (be) transferring bending moments in

different cases
1 - In case of internal columns, figure (6-14), Jcy value shall be as follow:
J cy = d
(c + d )3
1 3 c1 + d d (c1 + d ) (c 2 + d )
+d +
2
( ) (6-23)
6 6 2

C olum n A xis y
y
My = qy M fy
c1 + d
q CD q
AB
D A D A
c1 Q up
c2 + d
My
c2
x x x x
C ritical Section
C B C B
CCD CA B Punching Sear Stresses R esulting
R esulting from
y y Q up My ,
Figure (6 -14)
Distribution of punching shear stresses (internal column)
6-34
Chapter 6
2 - In case of external columns, figure (6-15), Jcy shall be calculated by

equation:
Jcy = d (c2 + d ) C ( ) + 23 d (C ) + 23 d (C ) + 16 (c1 + 0.5d)d

AB
2
CD
3
AB
3 3
(6-24-a)
Where :
(c1 + 0.5d )2
C AB = (6-24-b)
[(c 2 + d ) + 2 (c1 + 0.5d )]
C o lu m n A x is
y
y
M y = q y M fy
c 1 + d /2
q CD q AB
D A A
D Q up
c1
c2 + d
M y
c2
x x x x
C ritica l S ectio n
C B B
C CD CAB C
P u n c h in S h ear S tresses
R esu ltin g fro m
y Q up , M y
y
Figure (6 15) Distribution of punching shear stresses (external

column)
6-2-5-8-2 Conditions of item (6-2-5-8-1), of transferring negative

moments from slabs to columns, may be neglected in the
following cases:
a- For internal columns in case of availability of both conditions:
1 Live loads shall not exceed 4 kN/ m2.
2 Equal adjacent span or difference by a ratio not exceeding 20%.
B For external columns in case of availability of either condition:
6-35
Chapter 6
1 Presence of rigid marginal beam of a depth not less than three times
the slab thickness.
2 Presence of cantilever slab outside the columns by a distance not less
than one quarter of span length measured from column outer face, and
loaded with the same slab load.
6-2-5-8-3 Total shear stresses (including stresses resulting from the

effect of bending moments transferred between flat slab and columns),
under effect of vertical loads may be calculated using the following
simplified method:
Q .
q= (6-25)
bo . d
Where:
Q = Design shear forces transferred to the column when loading
the spans surrounding it with the entire design load.
d = slab effective depth.
bo= Length of the critical perimeter section in punching shear
according to section (4-2-2-3) and figures (6 14), (6 15).
=A coefficient depends on effect of the eccentricity of shear
forces, and taken as follows:
= 1.15 in case of internal columns
= 1.30 in case of external columns
= 1.50 in case of corner columns
6-2-5-9 Arrangement of reinforcement in flat slabs

Flat slabs shall be reinforced, according previous methods, in two
directions, and as shown in figure (7 4), so that each strip shall be
reinforced through its entire width, considering items in section (7 5), and
requirements of section (6 8 2 2) regarding earthquake design.
6-2-5-10 Reinforcement of column heads

Regarding the requirements of distances between bars, column heads
shall be reinforced as shown in figure (6-16) with bars (1), (2) which are
anchored by reinforcement steel (3) (stirrups) as shown in figure (6-16)
that is sufficient to resist maximum bending moments as in section (6-2-5-
4) clause (a), and section (6-2-5-5) clause (e). Total area of such
6-36
Chapter 6
reinforcement shall not be less, in every direction (1), (2) than the
following:
1 - When column head is rectangular, reinforcement steel area shall not
be less, in each direction than (0.04) of the negative reinforcement
steel area per meter for the column strip of the slab in the considered
direction multiplied by the length of perpendicular panel to this
reinforcement.
2 - When column head section in circular, the sum of reinforcement steel
(1), (2) obtained as above shall be distributed as shown in figure (6-
16), along the perimeter of the column head.
R einforcem ent (3)_

Figure (6-16) Reinforcement of column heads for flat slabs
6-2-5-11 Opening in flat slabs

According to figure (6-17) and figure (6-18):
a- Preferably openings within column heads shall be avoided.
b - It shall be permitted to make openings in intersecting areas between
field strips of area A, figure (6-17), provided the fulfillment of the
following:
1 - Greatest dimension of opening shall not exceed 0.40 of span
length in direction parallel to axis.
2 - Positive and negative total design bending moments shall be
redistributed on the rest of the structure based on the change due
to opening presence.
6-37
Chapter 6
c- It shall be permitted to make openings in the intersecting area between

column strip and field strip of area B, figure (6-17), provided the
fulfillment of the following:
1 - Total opening length or width shall not exceed one quarter of
strip width in either directions.
2 - Sections of the two strips in the opening area can resist the
design moments.
Column Strip
0 .1 0 ( L 2 / 2 )
0 .1 0 ( L 1 / 2 ) Z one A
Field Strip
0 .4 0 L 2
0 .4 0 L 1
0 .2 5 ( L 2 / 2 )
Column Strip
0 .2 5 ( L 1- L 2 / 2 )
Z one
L 1
C o lu m n S trip F ie ld S trip C o lu m n S trip

L 2 / 2 L1 - L 2 / 2 L 2 / 2
Figure (6-17) Allowed locations and dimensions of openings in flat slabs
O p e n in g In e ffe c tiv e
d / 2
d / 2
d/2
d/2
(B ) (A )
F re e C o rn e r
C o n s id e re d
d / 2 d / 2
a s a F re e E d g e
d/2
d/2
(D ) (C )
Figure (6-18) Effect of openings in flat slabs on critical section of

punching shear
6-38
Chapter 6
d - It shall be allowed to make openings in the intersecting area between

two column strips area C, figure (6-17), provided the fulfillment of the
following:
1 - Total opening length or width shall not exceed 0.10 of column
strip width in either direction.
2 - Sections of the two strips, in the opening area can resist the
design moments.
3 - Effect of openings in flat slabs on critical section of punching
shear shall be taken according to figure (6-18).
e - In case of the opening dimensions in flat slabs exceeding values in
items a, b, c, d, accurate structural calculations shall be made,
fulfilling conditions of resistance and serviceability limit states.
6-3 Beams
This part includes the following beams:
1 - Ordinary beams
2 - Deep beams
6-3-1 Ordinary beams
6-3-1-1 General considerations
a- This section addresses the ordinary beams having effective span to
depth ratio greater than 4.
b - The deep beams are characterized as beams effective span to depth
ratios greater than 1.25 for the simple beams and 2.5 for the
continuous beams. It is preferable to design deep beams using the
strut and tie design method conforming to sections (4-2-2-6-2) and (6-
3-2-3). Provisions of this section may also be applied to the design of
deep beams.
6-3-1-2 Effective span
1- The effective span of simply supported beams
The effective span of the simply supported beams shall be taken equal
to the least value of:
a - The distance between the supports axes.
b - The clear span between the supports plus the beam depth.
c - 1.05 of the clear span.
6-39
Chapter 6
2- The effective span of continuous beams

a - Monolithically cast beams with supports:
The effective span of the continuous beams shall be taken equal to the
distance between supports centerlines or 1.05of the clear span,
whichever is less.
b - Beams supported on masonry supports:
The effective span shall be taken equal to the distance between
supports centerlines or the clear span plus the beam depth, whichever
is less.
3 - The effective span of the cantilever
The effective span of the cantilever shall be taken equal to the least
value of:
- Cantilever length measured from the support centerline.
- The net length plus the greater depth of the cantilever.
6-3-1-3 Load distribution on beams
a- Distribution of loads on slabs transmitted to the beams using the
areas formed by angle bisectors lines at the corners of any panel as
shown in figure (6-19).
x L-2x x
4 5
4 5
Load on Beam , A 2x
Beam A
Beam B
Load on Beam , B
The equivalent uniform The equivalent uniform

The effective load on
load for shear forces load for bending
beam (B)
calculation moments calculations
Figure (6-19) The effective slabs loads on beams and the equivalent
uniform loads
6-40
Chapter 6
b- The distribution given in, (a) shall be subject to fulfilling the

following conditions:
- Greatest intensity of the load is located at mid span.
- Load distribution covers the entire span of the beam.
- Load distribution is symmetrical around the beam mid span.
Loads satisfying the preceding conditions shall be considered
uniformly distributed along the beams span- except for the cantilever
beams, as follows:
Assuming that: w = uniformly distributed slab load per unit area.
L = beam span length between supports centerlines.
Then: w.x = The uniform equivalent load to original transmitted
loads for calculating bending moments of beams as
shown in figure (6-19).
w.x = The uniform equivalent load to original transmitted loads for
calculating shear forces and reactions of beams as shown in figure (6-
19).
and values are to be taken from table (6-6).
Table (6-6) and coefficients values for estimating equivalent

uniform loads to original loads acting on beams
L/2X 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0
0.667 0.725 0.769 0.803 0.830 0.853 0.870 0.885 0.897 0.908 0.917
0.500 0.554 0.582 0.615 0.642 0.667 0.688 0.706 0.722 0.737 0.750
6-3-1-4 Structural analysis method

It shall be permitted to calculate the internal forces, actions and
moments by any structural analysis methods that satisfy the applicable
conditions of equilibrium.
Linear elastic analysis method shall be used to compute the internal
forces, actions and moments in beams for both working stress and limit state
design methods. Moments may be redistributed according to section (4-2-1-2-
c).
6-3-1-5 Flexural rigidity

It is generally acceptable to compute the relative flexural rigidity of
concrete members using un-reinforced gross concrete section i.e. EcIg,,, and
the modulus of elasticity of Ec confirming to section (2-3-3-1).
6-41
Chapter 6
Other assumptions that consider the effect of cracking may also be

used in which the values of EcIg and 1/2 EcIg are considered for columns
and beams, respectively. In all cases, one base shall be used for estimating
the rigidity of all elements of the structure. In the cases of T or L sections
the flange width shall be equal to half of the flange width specified in
section (6-3-1-9).
6-3-1-6 Bending moments and shearing forces of continuous beams

Bending moments of continuous beams can be calculated assuming
that beams are supported on rigid knife edge supports; in the case of
continuous beams of equal depths and spans that are subjected to uniformly
distributed loads or beams of varying spans or loads where the larger of
two adjacent spans not greater than the shorter span by more than with a
maximum of 20%, the following values may be assumed for bending
moments, provided that moment redistribution is not allowed.
a - Two-span beams
The maximum bending moment: (M= wL2/Km); Km values are to be
taken as shown in figure (6-20-a), where L is the effective span value.
-24 -9 -24
Km
11 11
Figure (6-20-a) Bending moments coefficients Km

for two-span beams
The maximum shear force: (Q= Kq wL); Kq values are to be taken as

shown in figure (6-20-b).
-24 -9 -24
Km
11 11
Figure (6-20-b) Shearing force coefficients Kq

for two-span beams
b - Beams with more than two spans

The maximum bending moment: (M=wL2/Km); Km values are to be
taken as shown in figure (6-20-c), where L is the effective span value.
6-42
Chapter 6
-24 -9 -24
Km
11 11
Figure (6-20-c) Bending moments coefficients Km

for Beams with more than two spans
when calculating negative bending moments over any support,

arithmetic mean (average) values for the two adjacent spans and the
two loads on either sides of this support are to be taken.
The maximum shear force: (Q =Kq wL); Kq values are to be taken as

shown in figure (6-20-d).
0.45 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5
Kq
Figure (6-20-d) Shearing force coefficients Kq for beams with more

than two spans
- Positive bending moments shall not be less than wL2/16 and wL2/24
for exterior and interior spans, respectively.
- Negative bending moments of continuous beams on rigid knife
supports shall be calculated at the mid span when continuous beams
are subjected to heavy live loads (p>1.5 g) using the beam theory,
provided that negative moments are allowed to be reduced for live
loads only at the mid span to two thirds of its value as a result of
columns rigidity or monolithically cast supporting girders. In the
case of equal spans or spans that do not differ by more than 20%
and for beams that are under the effects of heavy live loads (p>1.5
g), negative bending moments can be calculated at the mid span, as
follows:
2 L2
M = g - p (6 26 )
3 24
Where:
L = the greater length of the two adjacent spans.
P = the live uniformly distributed load per unit length
6-43
Chapter 6
G = the permanent (dead) uniformly distributed load per unit

length
6-3-1-7 The critical sections for bending moments and shearing forces
The critical sections in monolithically cast beams shall be taken at the
face of the interior support and at section of the zero shear force, for the
negative moments and the positive moments, respectively.
1 - The critical section for the shearing forces shall be taken at the
supports face (figure 6-21), except for the cases given in section (6-3-
1-7-3).
2 - The critical section for shearing forces shall be taken at a distance d/2
from the support face in the cases when reaction produces
compression in this distance, as shown in figure (6-22).
a
Critical Section a < d /2

Critical Section
Q
Reaction Q
Figure (6-21) Critical section for shear at the support face

a
Critical Section a < d /2

Critical Section
Q
Reaction Q
Figure (6-22) Critical section for shear at a distance of d/2 from the
Support face
6-44
Chapter 6
6-3-1-8 Slenderness limit

The laterally unsupported lengths between points of inflection in the
lateral direction of the beam shall not exceed the following values:
2
a- For simply-supported or continuous beams: 40bc or 200bc /d,
whichever is less.
b - For cantilever beams laterally braced only at the support: 20bc or
2
80bc /d, whichever is less. Where:
bc = the beam width at the face subjected to compression.
d = the effective depth
6-3-1-9 Effective flange width for T or L sections
When determining the maximum resistance of the beams having T or
L, shapes, the effective flange width shall be taken as the smaller value of
the following:
L
(16ts+ b ) or ( 2 + b) for beams with T section (6-27-a)
5
L
(6ts+ b ) or ( 2 + b) for beams with L section (6-27-b)
10
Where L2 is the distance between the points of inflection and shall be
taken equal to 0.70 of the effective span in the continuous beams having
both ends continuous and 0.80 of the effective span for continuous beams
from one end only. The effective width of flange shall not exceed the width
of the web, b plus one half the distances between the two adjacent beams
from both sides. When concrete slabs are monolithically connected to the
beams, the slab thickness shall not be less than 80 mm.
- In order for the beam to be considered in the design as T or L section, the
slab has to be cast monolithically with the beam or they have to be
effectively connected together.
- In order to guarantee the monolithic action between flange and web, the
top reinforcement of the flange in the direction perpendicular to the web
shall not be less than 0.30% of slab section area. Reinforcement shall be
continued at the full width of the flange given in section (6-3-1-9) and
the distance between the bars of this reinforcement shall not be greater
than 200 mm.
- Stirrups shall extend from the web to the ultimate surface of the flange in
order to guarantee the monolithic action between flange and web.
6-45
Chapter 6
- When T section is used for the isolated beams to provide the section with
additional area for compression, the flange thickness shall not be less
than one half of the web width, and the flange effective width shall not
be greater than six times of slab thickness plus web width.
- Beams with depth greater than 600 mm, regardless the slab thickness,
shall be provided with side shrinkage bars. The area of these bars shall
not less than 8% of the tension reinforcement area and the distance
between side bars shall not greater than 300 mm.
6-3-1-11 The minimum ratio of the main reinforcement

The reinforcement ratio shall not be less than the values given in
section (4-2-1-2-h).
6-3-2 Deep beams

a- This section is concerned with beams having effective span to depth
ratio conforming to:
L/d 4.0 (6-28)
Where: d = the effective depth of the section

L = the effective span of the beam
b - Deep beams subject to loads on the top surface or beams subject to
loads on compression surfaces shall be designed using either the
empirical design method given in sections (4-2-2-6-1), and (6-3-2-2)
or by using the strut and tie method given in sections (4-2-2-6-2), (6-
3-2-3), and (6-11) .
C - Nonlinear solution methods that consider cracks effect when
designing deep beams can be used.
d - In cases that deep beam loads result in tension on the loading surface,
the beams can be designed by either method specified in item, b
provided that the requirements of section (4-2-2-6-3) are satisfied .
6-3-2-2 The empirical design method of deep beams
a- This method of design can be applied, for the following cases
1.25 L/d for simply supported beams (6-29-a)
2.50 L/d for continuous beams (6-29-b)
6-46
Chapter 6
b - The moment arm yct for deep beams satisfying the requirements of
item, a, shall be estimated as follows, provided that the moment arm
does not exceed 0.87 of the effective depth d.
1 - For simply supported beams
yct = 0.86 L (6-30-a)
2 - For continuous beams
a- At the mid span
yct = 0.43 L (6-30-b)
b - At the interior support

yct = 0.37 L (6-30-c)
c- The maximum resistance of shear for the deep beams that

fulfill the requirements of section (6-3-2-2-a) shall be
calculated according to section (4-2-2-6-1). The ratio of web
shear reinforcement shall not be less than value given in
section (4-2-2-6-1-k).
6-3-2-3 Design by using Strut and tie model
a- Strut and Tie model may be used to design deep beams defined in
section (6-3-2-1-a) and in accordance with section (6-11).
b - For beams loaded with concentrated loads, the ratio of web shear
reinforcement shall not be less than the values given in section (4-2-2-
6-1-k) or section (4-2-2-6-2-b) according to the beam effective span to
depth ratio and the ratio of shear span to the beam depth.
6-3-2-4 Minimum reinforcement ratio for deep beams
a- The ratio of main longitudinal steel reinforcement in deep beams shall
not be less than the value given in section (4-2-1-2-h).
b - The main reinforcement shall be totally extended to the supports and
adequately anchored either by providing the necessary bond length as
given in section (4-2-5) or by using mechanical anchors.
6-47
Chapter 6
6-4 Columns
6-4-1 Definitions
a- Columns are the compression members having length or height in the
direction of the compression force exceeds five times the smallest
dimension of the section. Columns have various shapes of cross-
sections such as circular, polygonal, rectangular or sections
comprising a number of rectangular sections for which the length to
width ratio for each rectangular portion does not exceed 4. For
members having cross -sections that do not satisfy the preceding
conditions shall be designed as reinforced concrete walls in
accordance with section (6-5).
b - Columns are designed in braced and unbraced buildings according to
section (4-2-1-3) and section (5-3-3), respectively, considering the
moments affecting the column in accordance with section (6-4-5) or
moments resulted from the minimum eccentricity value of loads
according to section (6-4-3), whichever is greater.
6-4-2 Laterally braced and unbraced buildings

a- The building shall be considered braced if it will be provided with
supporting elements taking the form of continuous concrete walls
having the same height as that of the building, symmetrically
distributed in the horizontal projection of the building and fulfilling
the following conditions:
- In case of buildings having four floors or more:
N
= Hb < 0.6 (6-31-a)
EI
- In case of buildings having less than four floors:
N
= Hb < 0.2 + 0.1 n (6-31-b)
EI
Where:
Hb= the total height of building over the top surface of the
foundation.
6-48
Chapter 6
N= the sum of working loads at the foundation level resulting

from all vertical elements of the building
EI = Sum of flexural rigidities of the vertical concrete walls of
the building in the direction under consideration
n= number of floors in the building.
b - Concrete walls referred to in equation (6-31) of item, a, shall be

monolithically connected to the foundation. The connection shall be
capable of safely resisting horizontal forces and moments resulting
from the wall.
6-4-3 Minimum eccentricity

The minimum eccentricity of sections subject to compressive forces
shall not be less than the greater value of the following:
a- 0.05 of the cross section dimension of the column in the direction
under consideration
b - 20 mm
6-4-4 Short columns

a- Columns shall be considered as short if the slenderness ratio of the
column section is less than the values given in table (6-7). For
rectangular columns the slenderness ratios, (b = He/b) and (t = He/t)
shall be calculated in the two directions. For circular columns the
slenderness ratio shall be expressed by (D = He/D). In general,
slenderness ratio can also be evaluated in the form (i = He/i).
Where:
i= Radius of gyration of column section shall be taken
according to the following:
i = (0.30 b) or (0.30 t) for rectangular columns (6-32-a)
i = 0.25 D for circular columns (6-32-b)
and
He= Effective height of the column in the direction under
consideration
b& t = dimensions of rectangular column cross-section.
d= diameter of circular column
6-49
Chapter 6
b - In unbraced buildings, design moments for short columns shall to be

taken according to section (6-4-5-3-a).
Table (6-7) Maximum limits of slenderness ratio for short columns
Building Rectangular columns Circular columns Slenderness
Condition slenderness ratio slenderness ratio coefficient
t or b D i
Braced 15 12 50
Unbraced 10 8 35
6-4-5 Slender columns

Slender columns are those columns having slenderness ratio
exceeding the values specified in table (6-7), provided that slenderness
ratio for any column shall not exceed the values given in table (6-8).
Table (6-7) Maximum limits of slenderness ratio for slender columns

Building Rectangular columns Circular columns Slenderness
Condition slenderness ratio slenderness ratio Coefficient
t or b D i
Braced 30 25 100
Unbraced 23 18 70
6-4-5-1 Buckling length

1 - In the case of laterally braced buildings, the buckling length of column
He shall be taken equal to the least value of the following:
He = Ho [0.7 + 0.05 (1 + 2)] Ho (6-33-a)
or,
He = Ho [0.85 + 0.05 (min )] Ho (6-33-b)
In the case of laterally unbraced buildings, the buckling length of
column He shall be taken equal to the least value of the following:
He = Ho [1.0 + 0.15 (1 + 2)] Ho (6-34-a)
6-50
Chapter 6
or
He = Ho [2.0 + 0.3 (min )] Ho (6-34-b)
, shall conform to the following :
Ec Ic

Ho
= (6-35)
Ec Ib
Lb
Where:
Ho is the clear height of the column,
min is the least value of 1 and 2 at the lower and the upper
ends of the column, respectively, considering that the
maximum value of shall be ten for hinged ends and
the minimum value of shall be one for totally fixed
ends.
2 - EI value shall be calculated according to section (6-3-1-5) considering

that the two ends of column shall be monolithically connected to other
structural elements. The following simplified assumptions can also be
used for the following cases:
a - For flat slabs, EI shall be calculated using an equivalent beam
having a width and thickness equal to the width and thickness of
column strips in the direction of analysis.
b - shall be taken equal to 10 at the connection between columns
and base not designed to resist moments
3 - Values given in tables (6-9) and (6-10) may be used for columns in
braced and unbraced buildings, respectively for the following end
conditions.
Condition (1): End of column or wall is cast monolithically with
beams or slabs having depths not less than the column dimension in
the direction of analysis. This case shall also be applicable for the
cases of column to foundation connections where connection between
the column and foundation is designed to resist bending moments.
6-51
Chapter 6
Condition (2): End of column or wall is cast monolithically with

beams or slabs of having depths smaller than the dimension of the
cross section of the column or wall in the direction of analysis.
Condition (3): End of column or wall is connected with parts that are
not designed to prevent rotation but is capable of providing marginal
resistance.
Condition (4): Column is totally un-braced and is not capable of
preventing horizontal resistance to movement or rotation like in the
case of cantilever columns.
Table (6-9) The ratio of He/Ho for columns in braced buildings

Upper End Lower End Condition
Condition 1 2 3
1 0.75 0.80 0.90
2 0.80 0.85 0.95
3 0.90 0.90 1.00
Table (6-10) The ratio of He/Ho for columns in unbraced buildings

Upper End Lower End Condition
Condition 1 2 3
1 1.20 1.30 1.60
2 1.30 1.50 1.80
3 1.60 1.80 ---
4 2.20 --- ---
6-4-5-2 Slender columns in laterally braced buildings
Additional moments resulted from buckling (Madd)

Buckling effect in slender columns shall be taken into consideration
by designing the column for additional moments shown in figure (6-23).
The magnitude of the additional moment shall be computed by the
following equation:
Madd = P. (6-36)
Where , shall be taken as follows:
6-52
Chapter 6
- In the case of rectangular columns in the direction (t) of the column

( )2 . t
= t
2000 (6-37-a)
- In the case of rectangular columns in the direction (b) of the column
( b )2. b
=
2000 (6-37-b)
- In the case of circular columns with diameter (D)
( D )2. D
=
2000 (6-37-c)
- In the general case
(i )2. t
=
30000 (6-37-d)
Where t' = the side length in the direction of buckling and the dimensions
are measured in millimeters.
Moments for uniaxially loaded slender columns
a- For the uniaxial loaded columns, additional moments Madd about the
main or secondary axes shall be combined with the moments resulting
from the analysis of structure for the cases where both additional
moments and initial moments have the same signs . Their combined
values are shown in Figure 6-23. The column shall be designed for the
greatest value obtained from the following moment combinations:
1- M2 2- Mi + Madd
3- M1 + (Madd /2) 4- P. emin (6-38)
Where, Mi is the initial moment to be estimated at a critical section

near the mid height of the column and shall be obtained from the
following relation:
6-53
Chapter 6
Mi = 0.4 M1 + 0.6 M2 0.4 M2 (6-39)

Mi shall be taken with negative sign in equation (6-39) in the case of
biaxially loaded columns.
b - In the case of columns subjected to bending moments about the main
axis only, the columns shall be designed as biaxially loaded column
having initial moments obtained according to section (6-4-6), and
considering that the initial moment Mi around the secondary axis is
equal zero.
c- In the case of building comprising beams and columns, where the

columns shall not be subjected to moments resulting from side sway,
columns bending moments shall be computed as follows:
1- Bending moments M1, M2 shall be considered equal zero in the case
of interior columns that connected to set of beams having almost
symmetrical configurations and loadings. In the case of flat slab
structure, the bending moments for the interior columns are to be
calculated according section (6-2-5-4) or section (6-2-5-5). In all
cases, design moment shall be taken according to the equation (6-38).
2 - Moments in exterior columns shall be estimated according to the
values given in table (6-11).
Table (6-11): Moments for exterior columns

Position of moments Moments in case of Moments in case of
in columns frames with one frames with two
panel panels or more
Moment at the Ku.Mf Ku.Mf
bottom of the upper K1+Ku+0.50Kb K1+Ku+Kb
column
Moment at the top of K1.Mf K1.Mf
the lower column K1+Ku+0.50Kb K1+Ku+Kb
Where Mf is the exterior connecting bending moment of the beam that

form a frame with the column, assuming that it is totally fixed at its
ends.
6-54
Chapter 6
Equations shown in table (6-11), which give the moments at the top
end of the lower columns, can also be used to compute the moments at the
top end of the upper floor columns by considering that Ku equals zero.
Where
Ku= stiffness of the upper column Ku= 4EIu / hu

K1= stiffness of the lower column K1= 4EI1 / h1
Kb= beam stiffness Kb= 4EIb / Lb
hu, hl = the height of the upper and lower columns, respectively.
Lb= beam length
Iu, Il, Ib=moment of inertia for the upper and lower columns and the beam,
respectively.
Other assumptions may also be used that take into account the effect of
cracking on rigidity by using EIg for columns, and 0.50 EIg for beams.
The approximate values of Table 6-11 were based on the following
assumptions:
a -Constant moment of inertia for all members.
b -Connection points are prevented from vertical or horizontal

movements.
c -All members have the same degree of fixation at far ends.
d -Points of zero bending moment are be considered to be located at one

third the height of columns from the point of total fixation, and at one
fourth the height from the point of partial fixation.
6-55
Chapter 6
E n d c o n d itio n o f c o lu m n In itia l m o m e n t A d d itio n a l m o m e n t

fro m a n a ly s is
+ M add
M add
2
M2
+
M add
Mi
M add
2
M2
+ M add
Mi
M 2> M 1
M1
M add
2
Figure (6-23) Moments of slender columns in laterally braced buildings
6-56
Chapter 6
6-4-5-3 Slender columns in laterally unbraced buildings

a- Additional moments resulted from buckling
In the case of floors in which side sway values for all columns are
almost equal, the effect of buckling can be taken into consideration by
designing the column for additional moments the magnitude of which shall
be computed by the following equation:
M add = P. av (6-40)
Where

av =
n (6-41)
Where: n is the number of columns in a floor and, shall be calculated by

using the equation (6-37). When calculating av, values that exceed twice
the value of av shall be neglected, provided that these moments Madd shall
be taken into account when designing beams or slabs connected
monolithically with columns.
b - Design moments for uniaxially loaded columns (figure 6-24) shall be

equal to the greater value of:
P. emin or M2+Madd
With the additional moments acting at the column ends.
6-57
Chapter 6
End condition of column Initial moment Additional moment Design moment

fromanalysis
Madd
M2 +Madd
M2
+ =
Stiffer end joint Madd

M2 M2 + Madd
+ =
M1 Madd* M1 +Madd
Less stiff end joint
Figure (6-24) Design moments for slender columns in laterally

unbraced buildings
6-58
Chapter 6
6-4-6 Biaxially loaded columns

1 - Columns shall be designed to resist axial forces combined with biaxial
moments calculated around the main and secondary axes of the cross-
section according to section (4-2-1-3) and section (6-4-4-b) for short
columns and section (6-4-5-2) and section (6-4-5-3) for slender
columns.
2 - Either moment affecting the column can be ignored if the eccentricity
resulted from this moment is less than the minimum value given in
section (6-4-3).
3 - In the case of rectangular sections that are equally reinforced in all
faces (figure 6-25-a), equivalent moment can be taken approximately
around one axis, as follows:
a - In the case that (My/b' Mx/a' )
Design moment M'y around the axis (y) can to be taken according
b
M y = M y + M x (6-42)
a
b - In the case that (My/b' < Mx/a' )
Design moment M'x around the axis (x) can to be taken according
a
M x = M x + M y
b (6-43)
Where a', b' are the effective depths of both Mx, My respectively,
and values are to be determined according to table (6-12-a) or
from figure (6-25-b).
Table (6-12-a) Values of

Pu 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
Rb fcu .b.a
=
0.80 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.60
6-59
Chapter 6
C - Four bars shall be placed in the column corners; the remaining

area of reinforcement steel shall be equally distributed on the
four faces.
y
My
Mx
b
b
Figure (6-25-a) Columns biaxially loaded and equally reinforced in all

faces
1 .0
0 .9
0 .8
0 .7
0 .6
0 .5
0 .4
0 .3
Pu
0 .2 Rb =
0 .0 0 .1 0 .2 0 .3 0 .4 0 .5 0 .6 0 .7 f .b .a
cu
Figure (6-25-b) values
4 - In the case of rectangular sections with equally reinforced steel on two

opposite faces in the column section (figure 6-26), provided that the
6-60
Chapter 6
value of Pu / (fcu .b.a) is to be less than or equal to 0.50, the column

can be designed simply to resist the axial force Pu accompanied by
each of the following bending moments separately:
M x = M x . b (6-44-a)
M y = M y . b
(6-44-b)
Where b value shall be determined from table (6-12-b).
Table (6-12-b) b Value

(Mx/a)/(My/b)
3 2 1 0.5 0.33 0
Rb = Pu/(fcu b.a)
Rb 0.1 1 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.25 1.20 1
Rb = 0.2 1 1.35 1.50 1.75 1.50 1.35 1
Rb = 0.3 1 1.25 1.35 1.40 1.35 1.25 1
Rb = 0.4 1 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 1
Rb 0.5 1 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.70 0.65 1
y
A sx / 2
My
Mx
a x
A sy / 2
b
b
Figure (6-26) Biaxially loaded columns with equal reinforcement on

the two opposite faces (Rb0.5)
6-61
Chapter 6
6-4-7 Details and notes

a - The minimum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
1 - In columns with tie reinforcement, the minimum percentage of
longitudinal reinforcement shall be 0.80% of the required
concrete section area (arithmetically), provided that the minimum
shall not less than 0.60% of the actual section area, if the
slenderness ratio b or slenderness coefficient i do not exceed
the values given in table (6-7) and section (6-4-4-a). If the
slenderness ratio and slenderness coefficient exceed that limit,
the minimum percentage of reinforcement shall be:
0.25 + 0.015 i (6-45)

And for columns with rectangular sections:
0.25 + 0.052 b (6-46)

2 - In columns with spiral reinforcement , the minimum longitudinal
reinforcement shall be 1% of the total section area or 1.20% of
the core area defined by spiral stirrups, whichever is greater.
b - The maximum percentage of longitudinal reinforcement in columns
shall not exceed the following percentages of the concrete column
cross -sectional area:
4% for interior columns
5% for exterior (edge) columns
6% for corner columns
Provided that the reinforcement ratio shall not exceed 8% at the
overlapping joint area.
c- The column shall contain a longitudinal bar at each corner.
d - The minimum diameter of the longitudinal bars shall be 12 mm.
e- The minimum side length for columns with rectangular section or the
minimum diameter of the circular column shall not be less than 200
mm.
f- The maximum side length for columns having corner bars only shall
not be more than 300 mm, or otherwise side bars shall be placed at a
maximum distance of 250 mm. These bars shall be tied if the distance
between the untied and tied bars exceeds 150 mm (figure 7-7-a). Also,
6-62
Chapter 6
for columns having circular cross-sections the minimum number of

longitudinal bars shall be 6 bars.
g - The distance between stirrups( ties) in the longitudinal direction of the
column shall not exceed 15 times the diameter of the smallest
longitudinal bar but shall not exceed 200 mm.
h - The minimum diameter of stirrups is 14 the diameter of the greatest
longitudinal bar, provided that it shall not be less than 8 mm, and that
the least volume of the stirrups shall be 0.25% of the concrete volume.
i- Ordinary and spiral reinforcement shall continue inside the joint zones
between columns and beams.
j- The maximum pitch of the spiral reinforcement shall be 80 mm while
the minimum pitch shall not be less than 30 mm. It is recommended
that the pitch be kept constant for the entire length of the column.
Also, spiral reinforcements shall have three turns at each end with a
pitch equals half that of the ordinary pitch, along with bending the
spiral reinforcement end inside the column cross-section a distance
that shall not be less than 100 mm or 10 times the diameter of the
spiral reinforcement.
k - The least diameter of the spiral reinforcement shall not be less than 8
mm.
l- In the case that the characteristic strength of concrete used in the
columns concrete strength is higher by more than 140% of that of the
concrete used in the floor, the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
1 - Floor parts shall be cast around the columns using concrete having
the same characteristic strength as that of the column. Such parts
shall extend at least 600 mm from columns faces. Care shall be
taken to guarantee that concrete used in these parts and concrete
used in the floor shall be well bonded.
2 - The ultimate capacity of columns shall be calculated using the
lower characteristic strength value of the concrete used along
with using vertical dowels and spiral reinforcement if needed,
that may contribute to the increase of the ultimate capacity of
columns
3 - For columns laterally surrounded on four sides by beams with
approximately equal depths or slabs, the ultimate capacity of
columns shall be calculated using assumed values for
compressive strength of the concrete at the joint between the
6-63
Chapter 6
column and the floor that equals to the sum of 75% of the
columns concrete strength and 35% of the floor concrete
strength , provided that the ratio between the concrete strength
of column and that of the floor does not exceed 2.5.
m - All forces and moments at the column base shall be transmitted to the
foundation by means of direct bearing on the concrete, as well as by
reinforcement steel dowels having splices according to section 7-3-2.
For the cases that the loads transmitted from the column to the
foundation are tensile, such tensile forces shall be resisted by the
reinforcement steel only with due consideration of the requirements of
limit state of cracking. Also, the values of bearing stresses resulting
from the column at the foundation shall satisfy the ultimate strength
bearing requirements given in section (4-2-4). The longitudinal steel
reinforcement steel, dowels and splices shall be capable of providing
the required strength in excess to that of the bearing strength for both
the foundation and the column, provided that such steel reinforcement
shall not be less than the column reinforcement. In the case of having
lateral forces acting at the interface between the column and the
foundation, such forces shall to be adequately transmitted by the shear
friction according to section (4-2-2-4) or by any other suitable means.
6-4-8 Composite columns

6-4-8-1 General
1- Composite columns are reinforced concrete columns having I
longitudinally reinforcement in addition to structural steel sections
such as I, pipes or tubes. Figure (6-27) shows typical types of
composite columns .
2 - Forces and loads resisted by the reinforced concrete column of the

composite column shall be resisted by the concrete column through
direct bearing, with due consideration of the bearing strength
requirements according to section (4-2-4-1) or section (5-6). The
remaining forces and loads shall be resisted by the structural steel
sections through bearing by means of properly designed steel joints
capable of resisting such loads
6-64
Chapter 6
b1
t2 t
t1 D
Structural steel tube with Structural steel pipe with

reinforced concrete column having reinforced concrete column having
rectangular section circular section
(a) Composite sections having structural steel sections surrounding

reinforced concrete column
(b) Composite sections having structural steel sections inside

reinforced concrete columns
Figure (6-27) Types of composite columns
3 - The ultimate strength of the composite columns sections subject to

eccentric compression loads shall be calculated using the same way as
that of the reinforced concrete columns according to section (4-2-1-3)
with due consideration of the value of longitudinal reinforcement
yield strength for steel sections according to sections (6-4-8-2) and (6-
4-8-3).
4 - Yield stress value used in calculations for the steel sections shall not
exceed 350 N/mm2.
6-65
Chapter 6
5 - In the case of using spiral reinforcement, the values of the pitch and
diameters of the spiral reinforcements shall be the same as those used
for reinforced concrete columns.
6 - The longitudinal reinforcements shall be taken as the sum of areas of
the structural steel section and the longitudinal reinforcement of the
concrete column according to the relation, At= Asc + Ass
7 - The ratio of longitudinal reinforcement, At shall not be less than 1%
and not more than 6% of the net concrete section area (Ag At).
Where:
Ag = section's total area
At = total steel section area
Asc = area of longitudinal reinforcement
Ass = steel section area
8- The contribution of longitudinal reinforcement in the calculation of
the moment of inertia of the section shall include the sum of the
contributions of both steel reinforcements and the structural steel
section according to the relation It=Isc + Iss
Where:
It= total steel section moment of inertia
Isc= longitudinal reinforcement moment of inertia
Iss= steel section moment of inertia around the neutral axis
9 - In order to calculate the slenderness ratio for the composite section,
the radius of gyration, i of the cross-section shall be taken according
(E c I g /5) + E s I t
i = 0.8 (6-47)
(E c A g /5) + E s A t
Where:
Ec = concrete modulus of elasticity according to the equation
(2-1)
Es = steel section modulus of elasticity
Ig = the gross moment of inertia for the entire concrete
section neglecting the reinforcement
6-66
Chapter 6
6-4-8-2 Composite sections having structural steel sections surrounding

concrete columns
1 - The thickness of the steel covering the concrete core shall not be less
than:
a - Steel cover with rectangular section
fy
t b 3Es (6-48)
min
It is to be calculated for each face separately as shown in figure

(6-27-a).
b - Steel cover with circular section.
fy
t D 8Es (6-49)
min
Figure (6-27) shows some patterns of these sections.

2 - The maximum resistance of the axially loaded sections shall be
calculated, in addition to simple moments with values less than Pu.emin
according to the following equations (6-50) and (6-51):
a - In the case of columns with rectangular sections
Pu = 0.35fcu Ac + 0.67f yssAss + 0.67f yscAsc (6-50)
Where:
fyss= yield stress of the steel section
fysc= yield stress of the reinforcement steel
b - In the case of columns with circular sections and spiral stirrups
Pu = 0.4f cu Ac + 0.67f yssAss + 0.76f yscAsc (6-51)

Considering what was mentioned in section (4-2-1-3-c-2)
6-67
Chapter 6
6-4-8-3 Composite sections having structural steel sections inside

reinforced concrete columns
1 - The ultimate compressive strength of the composite sections subject to
axially loaded forces in addition to simple moments having values less
than Pu.emin, shall be calculated according to the following:
a - In case of using tied stirrups:
Ultimate compressive strength of the composite sections shall be
calculated according to the equation (6-50) with due consideration
of the following:
- Tied stirrups having minimum diameter of 8 mm shall be extended
around steel sections
- The stirrups diameter shall not be less than 150 of the greatest
dimension of the composite section, but shall not exceed 16 mm.
- Distances between stirrups in the longitudinal direction shall not
exceed 16 times the longitudinal bar diameter. A vertical bar shall
be placed at each corner of the section along with other bars at
distances that shall not exceed 12 the smallest dimension of the
concrete section according to the conditions given in section (6-4-
7).
b - The case of using spiral reinforcement:
The ultimate compressive strength of the composite sections
shall be calculated according to the following equation:
Pu = 0.35fcu A + 0.67f yssAss + 0.67f yscAsc + 1.38f ypVsp (6- 52)

k
With due consideration of section (4-2-1-3-2)

Where:
fyp = yield stress of the spiral reinforcement
Vsp = Ratio of spiral reinforcement steel volume for the
single turn of the stirrups according to the
equation (4-12-d).
6-68
Chapter 6
6-5 Walls
6-5-1 General
1- Walls are flat elements, usually vertical, having length of cross-
section greater than five times the width. Thickness of wall shall not
be less than 120 mm.
2- Reinforced walls are divided into:-
a - Bearing walls: subjected mainly to compression forces
accompanied or unaccompanied by lateral forces.
b - Stiffening walls: to support bearing walls against buckling as
well as bearing walls.
c - Non bearing walls: subjected to lateral forces in addition to their
own weight.
3- Walls shall be considered laterally braced if the building is laterally
braced according to section (6-4-2).
4- Walls used as part of the earthquake resistant structural system shall
meet the requirements of section (6-7-3).
6-5-2 Reinforced concrete walls

a. Vertical walls contributing to building bracing shall be constructed
and connected rigidly to the bearing walls. The total resistance of
multi-storey building having higher than 4 storeys shall not depend on
walls laterally unbraced.
b. Reinforced concrete walls subjected to axial forces with or without
bending moments shall be designed according to section (6-5-2-1).
c. Walls shall be designed to resist shear forces according to section
(4-2-2-1) or section (5-4-1). The horizontal reinforcement ratio shall
not be less than that specified in section (6-5-2-2-2).
d - The effective depth, d for wall section may be considered equal to 0.8
times that of wall length for calculating wall shear strength.
6-5-2-1 Design of reinforced concrete walls

Reinforced concrete walls may be designed by any of the two methods
described in sections (6-5-2-1-1) and (6-5-2-1-2)
6-69
Chapter 6
6-5-2-1-1 Design of walls as column section subject to Bending

Moments accompanied by axial compressive forces.
a. Reinforced concrete wall section subject to concentric or eccentric
compressive force may be designed as a column section according to
sections (6-4-2) to (6-4-6). The wall slenderness shall be determined
according to sections (6-5-2-1-1-b) and (6-5-2-1-1-c). Reinforcement
ratio of wall shall be determined according to section (6-5-2-2).
b. For walls without lateral stiffeners, effective length and slenderness
ratios shall be determined according to sections (6-4-4), and (6-4-5).
c. For walls with lateral stiffeners shown in figure (6-28), the reinforced
wall shall be considered slender if the slenderness ratio (t = He/t) of
the wall is equal to or greater than the values in table (6-13-a), where,
t is the wall thickness. The slenderness ratio shall not exceed the
values given in table (6-13-b).
B
t
Lf2
t
W a ll Lf1
S tiffn e rs
B
t
Lf1 B > 3 t
Fig. 6-28 Walls with lateral stiffeners
6-70
Chapter 6
Table( 6-13-A) Slenderness Ratio for Short Walls

t Wall Condition
15 Braced
10 Unbraced
Table( 6-13-A) Slenderness Ratio for Slender Walls

t Wall Condition
40 Braced
30 Unbraced
The effective height (He = KH) shall be determined as follows:

1. For walls with more than one lateral stiffener, the value of, k
H
k =1.0 < 0.5 (6-53-a)
L f2
H H
k = 1.5 - 0.5 1.0 (6-53-b)
L L f2
f2
1 H
k = 2
> 1.0 (6-53-c)
H L f2
1+
L f2
Where:
H = clear height of wall
Lf2 = the average horizontal distance between lateral stiffeners.
2. For walls with one stiffener, the value of, k is taken as follows:
H
k =1.0 < 1.0 (6-54-a)
L f1
6-71
Chapter 6
H H
k = 1.0 - 0.423 1 1.0 2.0 (6-54-b)
L Lf1
f1
1 H
k= > 2.0 (6-54-c)
2 Lf 1
H
1 + 0.5
L f1
Where :
H = clear height of wall
Lf1 = the horizontal distance between lateral stiffener and free
edge of wall.
6-5-2-1-2 Simplified design method for design of reinforced concrete

walls with solid rectangular sections
The following simplified method may be used for design of solid
rectangular section of reinforced concrete walls if all following
requirements are satisfied:-
a. The resultant of all ultimate loads including effect of lateral forces
shall not be outside middle third of rectangular section.
b. Reinforcement ratio of wall shall not be less than that specified in
section (6-5-2-2).
c. Wall thickness shall not be less than 0.04 of effective wall height or
wall length whichever is shorter. In any case, wall thickness shall not
be less than 120 mm.
Ultimate load of section, in this case, shall be evaluated from
following equation
k.H 2
Pu = 0.8 0.35 f cu A c 1 - (6- 55)
32 t

Where :
Ac = Concrete wall sectional area

H = Clear height of wall between stiffeners
6-72
Chapter 6
K = Coefficient of effective height of braced wall against lateral

movement at top and bottom of wall.
= 0.80 for wall prevented from rotation at any end or both (top
and / or bottom)
= 1.00 for wall free to rotate at both top and bottom ends
= 2.00 for wall free to move laterally perpendicular to wall
plane.
t = wall thickness
6-5-2-2 Minimum and maximum reinforcement ratios

Steel reinforcement consisting of two meshes at the two wall faces
shall be placed in the wall. Vertical and horizontal reinforcement ratios
shall be determined according to sections (6-5-2-2-1) and (6-5-2-2-2)>
6-5-2-2-1 Vertical reinforcement:

- Total vertical reinforcement ratio is used for the control cracks. Table (6-
14) specifies minimum reinforcement ratios. Reinforcement ratio shall
not be less than 0.5 % of concrete cross section required from design
(Acreq) and shall not be greater than 4 % of actual concrete cross section.
Bar diameter shall not be less than 10 mm, and the distance between bars
shall not exceed 250 mm. If welded wire fabric in used, bar diameter
shall not be less than 5 mm.
- When all cross section is subjected to tensile stresses, minimum total
vertical reinforcement ratio shall not be less than 0.8 % for normal
mild steel and 0.45 % for high grade steel.
- When all cross section is subjected to compressive stresses, minimum
total vertical reinforcement ratio shall not be less than 0.4 %.
- For sections subjected to bending moments, minimum main
reinforcement ratio in tension side is 0.25 % for normal mild steel and
0.15 % for high grade steel, while total vertical reinforcement ratio shall
not be less than 0.4 %.
6-73
Chapter 6
Minimum Percentage of Steel

Reinforcement Condition
fy = 240
fy = 400 N/mm2
N/mm2
Entire cross - section is
0.45 0.80
subjected to Tension
Entire cross - section is
0.40 0.40
subjected to Compression
0.15 0.25 Section subjected to flexure
Table 6-14 Minimum Percentage of Vertical Steel Reinforcement
6-5-2-2-2 Horizontal reinforcement

For walls subjected to compression, horizontal reinforcement encloses
vertical steel and the minimum area of total horizontal shall not be less than
the following:
- 0.3% of actual area of concrete section in case of steel with yield stress
(fy = 240 / N/mm2 ) .
- 0.25% of actual area of concrete section in case of steel with yield stress
( fy = 400 / N/mm2 ).
- Diameter of horizontal rebar shall not be less than 0.25 of vertical rebar
and shall not be less than 8mm except for the case of using wire mesh
reinforcement where minimum diameter shall not be less than 5mm.
- When area of vertical reinforcement exceeds 1% of cross sectional area,
1
additional single closed stirrups (with minimum diameter 6 mm or of
4
vertical steel diameter whichever is larger) shall be provided to tie
vertical and horizontal reinforcement with each other across wall
thickness at 4 points in meter square at least .
- The distance between horizontal reinforcement shall not exceed 15 times
vertical steel diameter or 200 mm whichever is less.
6-5-2-3 Horizontal displacement of walls

When height of wall exceeds 12 times its length, the horizontal
displacement under service loads shall not exceed (1/500) of wall height.
6-74
Chapter 6
6-5-2-4 Concrete cover of steel reinforcement

Minimum concrete cover of steel reinforcement shall be specified
according to section (2-4) and section (4-3-2-3-b) .
6-5-2-5 Calculation of effect of forces on lateral stiffeners
Horizontal stiffeners shall be able to transfer all following horizontal
forces to foundations:
a. Static reaction of the sum of all ultimate horizontal forces at the
locations of lateral stiffeners.
b. 1% of summation of ultimate vertical forces at stiffener
6-5-2-6 Concentrated loads on walls

In calculating bearing strength under concentrated loads, the effective
horizontal dimension shall not exceed the distance between points of
application of loads or width of bearing plus four times of wall thickness
whichever is less. Additional reinforcement shall be placed equally at two
wall faces in vertical distance under concentrated load not exceeding
double wall thickness, as shown in figure (6-29).
6-5-3 Concrete walls considered as unreinforced.

Concrete walls with reinforcement percentages that do not satisfy
requirements of previous sections of this chapter shall be considered in the
design as unreinforced walls. However, reinforcement percentage of these
walls shall not be less than those of section (6-5-3-7) and this thickness
shall not be less than 120mm.
6-5-3-1 Design
- For design of walls considered as unreinforced, no tensile stresses on
concrete section, or shear stresses exceeding allowable working stresses
given in table (5-1) for concrete section without shear reinforcement
under any case of loading shall be permitted.
- Walls considered as unreinforced may be designed using simplified
method in section (6-5-2-1-2). However, ultimate strength of wall
section shall be reduced by 20% of that calculated by equation (6-55).
6-75
Chapter 6
6-5-3-2 Slenderness limits

In all cases, maximum slenderness of concrete wall considered as un-
reinforced ( t = He / t ) shall not exceed 30, where t is the smaller
dimension of wall horizontal cross section, and He is the wall effective
height according to section (6-4-5-1).
6-5-3-3 Minimum eccentricity of loads

Eccentricity of loads not less than 0.05 t or 20mm whichever is greater
shall be considered in design.
6-5-3-4 Eccentricity of loads from slabs and floors

For walls connected to slab from one side only, it may be assumed
that loads are applied at 13 of wall thickness measured from face of wall
connected to slab.
6-5-3-5 Load eccentricity in wall plane

This eccentricity shall be calculated using principles of statics.
6-5-3-6 Shear strength

For walls considered as un-reinforced, shear strength may not be
calculated if one of the following two conditions shall be satisfied:
a. If design horizontal shear force is less than 0.25 of design axial force.
b. If average working shear stress is less than 0.4 N/mm2.
6-5-3-7 Minimum reinforcement ratio in concrete walls considered as

un-reinforced
Internal or external concrete walls considered as un-reinforced shall
be supplied with reinforcement to control cracking due to flexure,
shrinkage and temperature gradient. The total steel reinforcement area in
both vertical and horizontal directions shall not be less than 0.3% of
concrete section for mild steel, and 0.2% of concrete section for high grade
steel or mesh reinforcement. However, the concrete cover shall not be less
than the values specified in section (4-3-2-3-b).
For walls with openings, steel reinforcement at each opening side
shall not be less than half of steel cut by opening in that direction.
6-76
Chapter 6
However, this steel shall not be less than 2 bars 16mm diameter for mild
steel and 2 bars 12mm for high grade steel. This steel shall be placed on the
two wall faces if thickness exceeds 150mm .
6 6 Monolithic beam-column connections (Joints)

6-6-1 Types of beam-column connections
Monolithic beam-column connections (joints) shall be
classified, depending on the nature of applied loads, by the
following two types:
Joints Type (I): These are monolithic beam-column connections that transfer
bending moments and shear forces produced by vertical loads and lateral forces
caused by wind or any other loads excluding earthquakes. The design of
connections Type (I) shall conform to section (6-6-2) or by the strut-and-tie
method given in section ( 6-11).
Joints Type (II): These are monolithic beam-column connections that transfer
bending moments and shear forces produced by vertical loads and lateral forces
caused by earthquakes. The design of connections Type (II) shall conform to
sections (6-6-2) and (6-8-2-3-3).
6-6-2 Design of connections
1 - Forces acting on connections are those produced by various load
combinations and causing the largest stresses at column faces as
shown in Figure (6-30).
2 - Strength of beam-column connections (joints) shall be determined
using the appropriate strength reduction factors given in section (3-2-
1-2).
3- Longitudinal reinforcement, terminated in a column, shall be
extended beyond the column centerline a distance equal to the full
development length according to section (4-2-5-1).
4 - Ultimate design shear force acting on the joint (Qju) shall be calculated
assuming that moments of opposite sign shall be formed at opposite
joint faces (i.e. ends of columns and beams) as shown in Figure (6-30).
5 - Ultimate design shear force acting on a beam-column joint (Qju) shall
satisfy the following relation:
6-77
Chapter 6
f cu
Q ju k j A j (6-56-a)
c
Value of the shear force (Qju) shall be calculated from:
Asu f y 0.67 b f cu a t
Qju = + +Asu fst - Qucol (6-56-b)
s c
Where:
Aj = the effective cross-sectional area within the joint. It shall be
equal to the shear-resisting area for the loading in the direction
under consideration. The joint depth shall be equal to the
overall depth of the column while the effective joint width shall
be taken equal to the smaller value of the following ,as shown in
Figure (6-31),:
beam width plus joint depth (b+c2), or
twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the
longitudinal axis of beam to column side (b+2x).
But the effective joint width shall not be taken greater than the
overall width of the column.
kj = the joint confinement parameter depending on the condition of
beams connected to the joint as given in Table (6-15). A beam
shall be assumed to confine the joint if at least three-quarters of
the face of the joint shall be covered by that beam, as shown in
Figure (6-31).
fst = stress in compression steel.
= 1.00 for joints Type (I)
= 1.25 for joints Type (II).
6 - Effects of shear forces on beam-column joints shall be determined for
each direction separately (Figure 6-31).
7 - Column stirrups shall continue inside the beam-column joints with a
stirrup cross- sectional area of not less than the larger of the following
two values:
s.y (f / ) A g
A st = 0.313 1 cu c 1 (6-57-a)
(f / ) A
yst s k
6-78
Chapter 6
s.y (f / )
A st = 0.1 1 cu c (6-57-b)
(f / )
yst s
where:
Aj = element gross cross-sectional area.
Ak= element cross-sectional area enclosed by the exterior stirrup.
fst= yield strength of stirrup steel.
s = stirrup spacing along the column longitudinal axis.
y1= cross-sectional dimension of column core, measured center-to-
center of outer legs of stirrups, perpendicular to the considered
direction.
Ast= total area of stirrups cross-section including cross ties within
a distance s and perpendicular to the distance y1.
Column
Qucol
C s = A su f st
Asu fy /s
C=(0.67fcu /c)atb Beam top steel
Qju
Typical Horizontal
Plane of Maximum
Beam Horizontal Shear
(0.67fcu /c)abb
Beam bottom steel A s f sb
As fy /s
Fig. (6-30) Forces acting on beam-column joints
6-79
Chapter 6
Table (6-15): Parameter of joint confinement

Types of Connections with Surrounding Structural Type of Joint
Elements (I) (II)
Joints of Continuing Columns ( at intermediate floors)
1- Joints confined on four faces 2.0 1.6
2- Joints confined on three faces 1.6 1.2
3- All other types of joint 1.2 0.9
Joints of Terminating Columns ( at Roof floors)
1- Joints confined on four faces 1.6 1.2
2- Joints confined on three faces 1.2 0.9
3- All other types of joint 0.9 0.6
Fig. (6-31) Effective area of beam-column joints, Aj
6-80
Chapter 6
6-7 Foundations
- Base area of footings or number and arrangement of piles shall be
determined using the working loads. The design shall ensure that
permissible soil pressure or permissible pile capacity, as well as the
effects of differential settlement calculated according to the Egyptian
Code for Soil Mechanics and Foundations, ECP 202, shall not be
exceeded.
- The area of main tension reinforcement in foundations shall not be less
than 0.25% of the gross concrete cross section area for milled steel
reinforcement with fy=240 MPa. When a high-grade steel reinforcement
is used, this value shall be reduced in proportion to the ratio between the
two yield stress values but in no case shall a value of less than 0.15% be
used.
- The minimum amount of the area of shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement (which is perpendicular to the tension reinforcement) is
20% of the area of the main reinforcement.
- Moments and shear forces in pile foundations shall be computed
assuming that the reaction from each pile is concentrated at the pile
center.
- The thickness of reinforced concrete footings shall not be taken less than
300mm for footings on soil or 400mm for footings on piles, but it shall
not be taken less than the smaller dimension of the column cross section.
In addition, this thickness shall satisfy the provisions of shear and
punching shear strengths of sections (4-2-2-1) and (4-2-2-3) respectively.
6-7-1 Isolated footings and pile caps

6-7-1-1 General
It shall be permitted to assume uniform distribution for the soil
bearing pressure for shallow and pile foundations when the vertical
load acts at the foundation center. For eccentric loads, a linear
distribution shall be permitted for both the soil bearing pressure and
the loads on piles.
6-7-1-2 Design of footings and pile caps for flexure
6-7-1-2-1 The design for flexure of foundation sections shall follow the
requirements of either the limit states design method of section (4-2-1) or
the working stress design method of section (5-3-2).
6-81
Chapter 6
6-7-1-2-2 For bending moments in foundations, the critical sections shall

be determined by passing a vertical plane through the footing as follows:
- At the face of the reinforced concrete column or wall that is
monolithic with the footing, as shown in Figure (6-32-a).
- Halfway between the column face and the edge of the steel base plate
beneath the column, as shown in Figure (6-32-b).
- Halfway between the middle and edge of a masonry wall, as shown in
Figure (6-32-c).
a a
a /2
S te e l p late C o n c re te c o lu m n
o r w a ll
A x is o f w a ll S te e l c o lu m n
a a
M a so n ry w a ll
C ritic a l se c tio n fo r C ritic a l se c tio n fo r
m o m en t m o m en t
C ritic a l se c tio n fo r
m om ent
Fig. (6-32) Critical sections for bending moments in foundations
6-7-1-2-3 Bending moment on a critical section shall be determined by

computing the moment of all forces acting on one side of the critical
section.
6-7-1-2-4 In square footings, the reinforcement shall be distributed
uniformly across entire width of footing in both directions; the
reinforcement may also be distributed according to the bending moment
diagram.
6-7-1-2-5 In rectangular footings, the reinforcement shall be distributed
according to the bending moment diagram; the reinforcement may also be
distributed following Figure (6-33) as follows:
- Reinforcement in long direction shall be distributed uniformly across
entire width of footing.
- For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total
reinforcement, Asm, shall be closely distributed within a width
centered with the column equals to the larger of:
(a) Footing short side or,
6-82
Chapter 6
(b) Length of column side parallel to footing long side plus thickness
of footing, as shown in Figure (6-33). The ratio of the closely
distributed reinforcement, Asm, to the total reinforcement required in
short direction, As, shall be determined from the following equation:
Asm 2
= = 2B / (A+B) (6-58)
As A
+ 1
B
where,
A = length of long side of footing.
B = length of short side of footing.
B = larger of the length of short side of footing, or the length of
column side parallel to footing long side plus thickness of
footing.
Long direction of footing, A
Uniformly distributed
reinforcement
B<A
B' / 2 B' / 2
Reinforcement area =Asm, shall be

unifirmly distributed within a band
Remaining reinforcement width=B', (centered on center line of column)
shall be uniformly distributed
Fig. (6-33) Reinforcement distribution in rectangular foundations
6-7-1-3 Design of Footings and Pile Caps for Shear and Punching Shear
6-7-1-3-1 Shear strength and punching shear strength of footings shall be
determined in accordance with section (4-2-2-2) and section(4-2-2-3),
respectively.
6-7-1-3-2 Location of critical section for shear shall be taken in
accordance with section (4-2-2-1-1) and Figure (6-34-a).
6-7-1-3-3 Location of critical section for punching shear shall be taken
in accordance with section (4-2-2-3) and Figure (6-34-b). When a steel
base plate is used to fasten a column to a reinforced concrete base, the
6-83
Chapter 6
location of critical section for punching shear shall be at a distance of (d/2)

outside the critical section for flexure determined by section (6-7-1-2-2).
6-7-1-3-4 Computation of shear on pile caps shall be in accordance with
the following:
- For any pile whose center is located a distance of pile radius or more
outside the critical section, the full pile reaction shall be considered
as producing shear on that section- case (a) in Figure (6-35).
- For any pile whose center is located a distance of pile radius or more
inside the critical section, the pile reaction shall be considered as
producing no shear on that section- case (b) in Figure (6-35).
- For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion of the pile
reaction to be considered as producing shear on the section shall be
based on straight-line interpolation between the above-mentioned
two cases- case (c) in Figure (6-35).
Critical section
for shear
d/2 d/2
d/2
d/2
d/2
a) Critical section for shear in b) Critical section for

shallow foundations punching shear
Fig. (6-34) Critical section for shear and punching shear
Section
Critical
C o lu m n d / 2
/ 2 / 2
C a se (B ) C a se (C ) C a se (A )
P ile D ia m e te r-
100%
a b
% o f e ffe c tiv e
p ile lo a d fo r s h e a r
Fig. (6-35) Effective pile load in computation of shear in pile caps

cases (a), (b), and (c)- Article (6-7-1-3)
6-84
Chapter 6
6-7-1-4 Space-truss method for design of pile caps (strut-tie model)

6-7-1-4-1 For design of pile caps, it shall be permitted to use the plane-
truss or space-truss method. In this case, compression members shall
extend from the center of load bearing area to points of intersection of
piles axes with tension members which are formed by the reinforcement
located in directions of the lines connecting piles centers.
6-7-1-4-2 When pile spacing is larger than triple the pile diameter, the main
reinforcement of ties shall be distributed in a band width equal to 1.5 pile
diameter and centered on piles axes.
6-7-1-4-3 It shall be permitted to use the strut-and-tie model section (6-
11) for design of footings and pile caps.
6-7-1-5 Development of reinforcement
Development length, anchorage length, and splice length of reinforcement
in footings shall be determined in accordance with section (4-2-5). Critical
sections for development of reinforcement shall be assumed at the same
locations of critical sections for flexure as defined in section (6-7-1-2-2).
6-7-1-6 Column loads shall be transferred to footings in accordance with
section (6-4-7-n).
6-7-1-7 Any pile cap that is supported by a single pile shall be connected to
other foundations by grade beams in at least two directions. Besides, pile
caps supported by two or more piles lying in one vertical plane shall be
connected to other foundations by grade beams in the direction
perpendicular to this vertical plane. In addition, design of grade beams shall
consider the largest probable offsets of pile centers and actual loads on
piles. Furthermore, design of grade beams shall be rechecked using the as-
built offsets in pile centers after pile construction.
6-7-2 Combined footings and raft foundations
6-7-2-1 combined footings and raft foundations shall be designed
considering the relative stiffness between foundation and soil. It shall not
be permitted to analyze combined footings and raft foundations using the
methods recommended for solid slabs (Article 6-2) and beams (Article 6-
3).
6-7-2-2 Combined footings and raft foundations may be considered as
rigid and, thus, having linearly-variable soil bearing pressure
distribution when either of the following two conditions is satisfied:
6-85
Chapter 6
a - The relative stiffness, Kr, given by Equation (6-59-a) is larger than

0.5.
b - The average distance between any column and its adjacent
1.75
columns in both directions is less than where is a

parameter determined by Equation (6-59-b).
E .I
Kr = c B (6-59-a)
E soil . b 3
K.b
= 4 (6-59-b)
4E c . I
where,
Ec= elastic modulus of concrete.
IB= moment of inertia for foundation (or foundation together with
frames and/or shear walls) per unit strip width.
Es= elastic modulus of soil.
b= foundation strip width.
K= Winklers modulus of soil subgrade reaction.
Ec.I= flexural rigidity of foundation strip.
6-7-2-3 Combined footings and raft foundations that do not satisfy the
conditions stated in section (6-7-2-2) shall be treated as flexible and
shall be analyzed as an elastic slab on a Winkler foundation or on a
semi-infinite elastic medium. This analysis shall be based on actual
soil properties determined by field or laboratory tests and shall
satisfy equilibrium and compatibility conditions.
6-7-3 Concrete slabs on grade
6-7-3-1 General
- Slabs on grade are defined as rigid concrete slabs which are
continuously supported by well-compacted soil, these slabs transfer
to the soil vertical and/or lateral loads that act on the slabs either
directly or through other structural members.
- Concrete slabs on grade can be classified as follows:
a - Plain concrete isolated slabs.
b -Concrete slabs, isolated or continuous, such as those in item a.
but provided with reinforcement to resist tensile stresses due to
shrinkage and temperature only.
6-86
Chapter 6
c - Structural reinforced concrete slabs, isolated or continuous,

provided with effective reinforcement to resist bending moments
and tensile forces produced by the loads acting on the slabs.
d - Reinforced concrete slabs provided with effective continuous
reinforcement to resist bending moments and tensile forces
produced by the loads acting on the slabs as well as the tensile
stresses caused by shrinkage and temperature.
- In isolated slabs on grade, joints shall be arranged in accordance
with the requirements of section (9-5-7).
- In all cases, the strength and serviceability requirements shall be
satisfied including surface protection against cracks that may affect
its use, if required.
6-7-3-2 Plain Concrete Slabs - Type a
The thickness of these plain concrete slabs, Typea shall be determined to
ensure that the tensile stresses produced by loads that act on the slabs either
directly or through other structural members do not exceed the cracking
strength limit in accordance with section (4-3-2-7).
6-7-3-3 Concrete slabs provided with shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement only, Type b
- The thickness of these concrete slabs Type b shall be determined to
ensure that the tensile stresses produced by loads that act on the slabs
either directly or through other structural members do not exceed the
cracking strength limit in accordance with section (4-3-2-7).
- To resist the tensile stresses due to shrinkage and temperature in slabs
of Type b, these slabs shall be provided with distributed steel
reinforcement- transverse and longitudinal- placed at slab midplane
level or near its top surface. The required reinforcement ratio is
determined following the subgrade drag method as:
= fL/2fs (6-60a)
where:
L = distance between joints.
fs = permissible working stress for steel reinforcement.
f = coefficient of friction between concrete and soil according to
type of soil (ranges from 1.5 to 2.5).
= unit weight of slab concrete
= ratio of area of required steel reinforcement to gross concrete
area, As/Ac, and shall not be taken less than 0.15% for high-
6-87
Chapter 6
grade steel or 0.25% for normal milled steel, with a minimum

amount of 5 10mm per meter width of slab in both directions.
6-7-3-4 Reinforced Concrete Slabs -Types c and d
- These slabs shall be designed assuming sections to be cracked under
the effect of loads acting on the slabs in accordance with section (4-
3-2-7), steel reinforcement shall be provided on the tension side to
resist the tensile stresses produced by bending moments and axial
tensile forces.
- The design shall follow the limit states design method and satisfy the
serviceability limit states. The reinforcement ratio shall not be less
than:
f (6-60b)
= 0.3 ctr
fy
where:
= ratio of area of required steel reinforcement to gross concrete
area, As/Ac.
fct r= cracking strength limit state for concrete in tension in
accordance with Equation (4-61b).
fy = yield or proof stress for steel reinforcement.
- The ratio of steel reinforcement, =As/Ac, shall not be taken less
than 0.15% for high-grade steel or 0.25% for normal milled steel,
with a minimum amount of 5 10mm per meter width of slab in both
directions.
- Requirements related to casting and treatment of slab-on-grade
concrete as well as proper arrangement of joints shall be fulfilled in
all cases.
6-7-4 Foundations subject to seismic loads
6-7-4-1 Footings, raft foundations and pile caps
6-7-4-1-1 Longitudinal reinforcement of reinforced concrete columns
and walls shall be extended inside footings, raft foundations, or pile caps
for a distance of not less than the development length of tension bars below
the contact surface between foundation and column or wall. The
reinforcement shall also be extended till the foundation bottom steel
reinforcement and shall be provided with a right-angle leg
6-7-4-1-2 Longitudinal reinforcement of piles shall be extended inside
pile caps for a distance of not less than the development length of tension
bars above the contact surface between piles and pile cap.
6-88
Chapter 6
6-7-4-1-3 Footings and pile caps supporting columns that are subject to
axial tensile forces due to seismic loads shall be provided with top
foundation reinforcement, sufficient to resist the bending moments
produced by these column tensile forces.
6-7-4-2 Grade beams and slabs on grade
6-7-4-2-1 Grade beams shall be designed as part of the seismic, lateral-
load resisting-system in accordance with section (6-8). They shall be design
to act as horizontal ties between pile caps or footings and shall have
continuous longitudinal reinforcement along the entire length of grade
beams. The grade beam longitudinal reinforcement shall have a full
developed length beyond the centerline of supported column. The structural
design drawings shall clearly state that grade beams are parts of the
seismic lateral-load resisting system.
6-7-4-2-2 Requirements of section (6.7.4.2.1) shall also apply for slabs
on grade when such slabs are considered as part of the seismic, lateral-load
resisting-system.
6-7-4-2-3 The smallest cross-sectional dimension of grade beams shall
not be taken less than 1 of the clear spacing between connected columns,
20
but need not be greater than 450mm, provided that it will satisfy the
slenderness limit stated in section (6-3-1-8).
6-7-4-3 Piles
6-7-4-3-1 Piles shall be provided with adequate longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement to resist the moments and forces resulting from
earthquakes. These moments and forces shall be computed considering the
actual soil properties. Requirements related to area of stirrups and stirrups
spacing shall be satisfied.
6-7-4-3-2 Piles stirrups shall be increased in accordance with section (6-
8) at the following locations:
a -At the top of the pile for a length of at least 5 times the pile diameter, but
shall not be less than 2m below the bottom surface of the pile cap.
b - For the portion of piles in soil that shall not be capable of providing
lateral support and for portions with abrupt changes in soil properties.
The ratio of spiral stirrups shall not be taken less than that required by
sections (4-2-1-3) and (6-4-7).
6-89
Chapter 6
6-8 Special provisions for seismic design

6-8-1 General
This section contains special requirements for design of structural
members for which the seismic design forces have been determined in
accordance with the Egyptian Code for Loads on Structures (ECP 201).
6-8-1-1 Definition of structural members
- Beam: a structural member that shall be mainly subjected to bending
moments accompanied by axial compressive force having a value not
exceeding 0.04Agfcu.
- Column: a structural member that shall be subjected to axial
compression combined with bending moments and for which the axial
compressive force shall be more than 0.04Agfcu.
- Frame: a spatial structure composed of beams, columns, and joints which
shall be capable of resisting bending moments, axial forces, and shear
forces. The frame shall be classified as either ductile; having adequate
ductility or ordinary; having limited ductility in accordance with section
(6-8-2).
- Shear Walls: structural members having cross-section length to
thickness ratio more than five. Walls resisting the forces induced by
earthquakes shall be classified as follows:
Ductile shear walls: reinforced concrete structural walls resisting
forces induced by earthquakes having a height to length ratio, hw/Lw,
equal to or more than 2 and fixed at the foundation level. The walls
shall be capable of dissipating energy through the formation of a
plastic hinge at location of maximum bending moment.
Low-rise shear walls: reinforced concrete structural walls resisting
forces induced by earthquakes having a height to length ratio, hw/Lw,
of less than 2, and fixed at the foundation level, but shall be incapable
of dissipating energy as they have limited inelastic deformation
capacity . Their deformations are mainly caused by sliding shear.
Coupled shear walls: reinforced concrete structural walls consisting of
two or more single walls connected together by ductile beams in a
regular pattern and in which the beams shall be capable of reducing
the sum of the base bending moments of the individual walls if
working separately by at least 25%.
6-90
Chapter 6
6-8-1-2 Seismic-load resisting structural systems

- Wall system: is a structural system in which the primary structural
members that resist lateral and vertical loads shall be reinforced concrete
walls- either coupled or uncoupled- and whose shear strength at building
base shall be more than two thirds of the total building shear strength.
- Frame system: is a structural system in which the primary structural
members that resist lateral and vertical loads shall be spatial frames
whose shear strength, at building base shall be more than two thirds of
the total building shear strength.
- Dual system: is a structural system in which the primary structural
members that resist vertical loads shall be spatial frames while spatial
frames and walls shall act together as a combined system for resisting
lateral loads. Dual system shall be classified as one of the following two
types:
Frame-equivalent dual system: dual system in which the shear
resistance of the frame system at the building base shall be higher than
50% of the total shear resistance of the whole structural system.
Wall-equivalent dual system: dual system in which the shear
resistance of the walls at the building base shall be higher than 50% of
the total shear resistance of the whole structural system.
6-8-1-3 Design concepts

a - The design of earthquake resistant concrete buildings shall provide an
adequate energy dissipation capacity to the structure without
substantial reduction of its overall resistance against horizontal and
vertical loading in conformance with the requirements of sections (6-
8-2) and (6-8-3).
b - Concrete structures shall be analyzed, designed and detailed in
accordance with the requirements of Chapters 3 to 7 and sections (6-8-
2) and (6-8-3). The design shall be based on energy dissipation and
shall ensure structural ductility so that the ductile flexural failure
mode precedes the brittle shear failure mode.
c - Based on the structure capability to dissipate energy when subjected to
reversed loading, two ductility classes are defined: limited ductility
and adequate ductility. Each ductility class corresponds to structures
designed and detailed according to specific provisions, enabling the
structure to develop stable mechanisms associated with large
6-91
Chapter 6
dissipation of hysteretic energy under repeated reversed loading,

without suffering brittle failures.
d - A ductility class having either limited or adequate ductility shall be
assigned to each structural member in accordance with the
requirements of sections (6-8-2) and (6-8-3) for frames and walls,
respectively.
e - Adequate ductility shall be ensured for the structure by implementing
the structural details described in this chapter which permits non-
linear deformations in the critical regions defined in the following
item.
f- Critical region or energy dissipative zone: it is a region, in a main
seismic-load-resisting member, where the dissipative capabilities shall
be mainly located and where plastic hinges may be formed due to
inelastic deformations caused by bending moments when subjected to
the worst load combination (i.e.bending moments, axial forces, shear
forces, and/or torsion). The length of critical region for each one of the
main seismic-load resisting members shall be determined as follows:
- For beams: it is a distance equal to twice the beam depth measured
from face of support as shown in Figure (6-36).
- For columns: it is a distance, Lo, measured from the column-beam
intersection surface at each column end (Figures 6-36 and 7-6-b),
where Lo is equal to the larger of:
One sixth of the column clear height
The longer side of column cross section
500 mm
- For ductile shear walls: it is a distance of not less than the larger of:
One sixth of the entire wall height
The length of wall cross section
- But it shall not be taken more than twice the wall length (Figure 6-
36).
g- The requirements of the Egyptian Code for Loads on Structures (ECP
201), related to seismic joints and interstory drift values and the
requirements of section (9-5-9) of this Code shall be fulfilled.
h - Special requirements for the reinforcing steel and concrete of seismic-
load resisting members:
6-92
Chapter 6
- It shall not be allowed to use smooth bars for the longitudinal

reinforcement. Only deformed bars shall be permitted for both
milled and high-grade steel reinforcement.
- The ratio of ultimate strength to yield strength of reinforcing steel
shall not be less than 1.25.
- The concrete characteristic strength shall not be taken less than
25N/mm2.
i- For seismic-load resisting members, the effective moment of inertia
- Ieff = 0.70 Ig for columns
- Ieff = 0.35 Ig for shear walls
- Ieff = 0.50 Ig for beams (including slab contribution)
- Ieff = 0.25 Ig for flat slabs
2d 2d
Beam
Lo
Column
Shear W all
hw Lo
or L w
6
>I 2L w
Lw
Figure (6-36) Critical regions in beams, columns, and walls
6-8-2 Requirements for frames resisting earthquake-induced forces

6-8-2-1 General
- Structural members of frames resisting earthquake-induced forces shall
satisfy the following:
a - Distance between column center and beam centerline shall not be
greater than 25% of the column dimension perpendicular to the
beam centerline (Figure 6-37).
6-93
Chapter 6
b - Beam width shall not be taken greater than the smaller of:
Column dimension (parallel to beam width) plus beam depth
Twice the column dimension parallel to beam width
Frames resisting earthquake-induced forces shall be classified
as being either ductile having adequate ductility or ordinary
having limited ductility in accordance with the reinforcement
details used. Each frame class shall be assigned an appropriate
value of the response modification factor, R, in accordance
with the Egyptian Code for Loads on Structures (ECP 201).
Column Dimension Perpendicular to Beam Axis
Column
Beam
I bc
> 4
bc
Figure (6-37) In-plan relationship between beam axis and column axis
6-8-2-2 Requirements for ordinary frames having limited ductility

This section sets up the requirements for flat slabs, frame beams, and
frame columns.
6-8-2-2-1 Flat slabs

a - Bending moments related to earthquake effect transferred from slab to
column shall be resisted by the column strip alone.
b - The negative bending moments, f M f , determined by section (6-2-5-8)
shall be resisted by the effective slab width, c2+3t, where t is the slab
thickness (Figure 6-38).
6-94
Chapter 6
c - Not less than 50% of the column strip total reinforcement shall be
placed in the effective slab width.
d - Not less than 25% of the total top reinforcement in column strip shall
be extended over the entire span length (Figure 6-39).
within column strip

reinforcement
Column Strip
Place All top

C2 + 3 t
C2
Reinforcement to resist M
f f
but not less than half of reinforcement in column strip
Figure (6-38) Effective width in flat slab constructions
e - Not less than 50% of the total bottom reinforcement in column and
field strips shall be extended over the entire span length; the bottom
reinforcement shall be adequately developed at support regions in
accordance with section (4-2-5-3).
f- The amount of continuous bottom reinforcement in column strip shall
not be taken less than 33% of the column strip top reinforcement at
support regions.
g - At slab discontinuous edges, both its top and bottom reinforcement
shall be adequately developed inside the edge support region in
accordance with section (4-2-5-3).
6-95
Chapter 6
Figure (6-39) Reinforcement Arrangement in Flat Slabs
6-8-2-2-2 Beams in ordinary frames having limited ductility

a- The beam positive moment strength at the face of the support shall not
be less than one-third the negative moment strength provided at that
face of the support.
b - Neither the negative nor the positive moment strength at any section
along the length of the beam shall be less than one-fifth the maximum
moment strength provided at the face of either column.
c - Stirrups shall be provided over the critical regions such that the first
stirrup shall be located at not more than 50 mm from the face of the
support. Stirrup spacing shall not exceed the smallest of:
- One quarter of beam depth;
- Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed;
- 24 times the stirrup diameter;
- 200 mm.
d - Stirrups throughout the rest of beam length shall be placed at not more
than one half of beam depth or 200mm, whichever is smaller.
6-96
Chapter 6
6-8-2-2-3 Columns in ordinary frames having limited ductility

a - Stirrups shall be provided over the critical regions with spacing, so,
that shall not exceed the smallest of:
- Eight times the diameter of the smallest longitudinal bar enclosed;
- 24 times the stirrup diameter;
- One-half of the smallest column cross-sectional dimension;
- 150 mm.
b - The first stirrup shall be located at not more than 50 mm from the
column-beam intersection surface. The stirrups spacing, throughout
the rest of column length, shall not be more than 2so or 200mm,
whichever is smaller.
6-8-2-3 Requirements for ductile frames having adequate ductility

This section outlines the requirements for frame beams and columns.
It shall not be permitted to consider flat slabs as parts of ductile frames.
6-8-2-3-1 Beams in ductile frames having adequate ductility

Beams shall be designed in accordance with section (6-8-2-2-2) in
addition to the following requirements:
a - Beam width shall not be less than the larger of 30% of its depth or 250
mm.
b - Positive moment strength at support face shall be not less than one-
half of the negative moment strength provided at that face of the
support. Neither the negative nor the positive moment strength at any
section along beam length shall be less than one-fourth the maximum
moment strength provided at face of either support.
b - All lap splices shall be designed as tension lap splices. The following
requirements shall also be fulfilled:
- Transverse reinforcement provided over the lap length shall be
composed of closed stirrups or spiral reinforcement.
- Spacing of the transverse reinforcement enclosing the lapped bars
shall not exceed the smaller of d/4 and 100 mm.
- Lap splices shall not be used in critical regions and within the beam
column joint.
c - The ultimate design shear force shall be computed assuming that
moments of opposite sign, corresponding to probable flexural moment
strength, act at the support faces (Figure 6-40) and that the beam shall
be loaded with the factored tributary gravity load along its span.
6-97
Chapter 6
Transverse reinforcement in critical regions shall be proportioned to

resist the ultimate design shear force ignoring the concrete shear
strength.
ho
Lc
w u*
r1 M p r2
Lc
Q e1 Qe2
Beam Shear
M p r1 + M p r w u* L c
Qe = 2
Lc 2
Nu
p r3 Q e3
C o lu m n S h e a r
Q e4
M p r4 Q e 3 ,4 M p r3 + M p r
4
=
Nu ho
Figure (6-40) Calculation of ultimate design shears for girders and

columns
6-98
Chapter 6
6-8-2-3-2 Columns in ductile frames (having adequate ductility)

Reinforced concrete columns shall be designed in accordance with
section (6-8-2-2-3) in addition to the following requirements:
a - The shortest dimension of column cross-section shall not be less than
300 mm; the ratio of column shortest cross-sectional dimension to the
perpendicular dimension shall preferably be not less than 0.4.
b - The column dimension parallel to the beam reinforcement shall not be
less than 20 times the diameter of the largest longitudinal beam bar.
c - For columns that are connected to frame beams and resist axial
compressive forces exceeding 0.04Agfcu, the ultimate flexural strength
shall satisfy the following relation:
Mc 1.2 Mg (6 61)
M c = sum of flexural strengths of columns framing into the joint

in the analysis plane, evaluated at the faces of the beam.
Column flexural strength shall be calculated for the factored
axial force, consistent with the direction of the lateral forces
considered, resulting in the lowest flexural strength.
M g = sum of flexural strengths of the beams framing into the joint
in the analysis plane, evaluated at the faces of the column.
In T-beam construction, where the slab is in tension under
moments at the face of the support, slab reinforcement
within three slab thickness in each side of the beam shall be
assumed to contribute to Mg if the slab reinforcement is
developed at the critical section for flexure.
For computing M c and M g , flexural strengths shall be summed
such that the column moments oppose the beam moments.
Lateral strength and stiffness of columns not satisfying Equation (6-61)
shall be ignored when determining the calculated strength and
stiffness of the structure, but such columns shall conform to section
(6-8-2-2-3).
Equation (6-61) shall be satisfied for beam moments acting in both
directions in the vertical plane of the frame considered.
d - The ratio of longitudinal reinforcement area to gross concrete cross-
section area shall not be less than 0.01.
e - Lap splices shall be permitted only within the center half of column
length (Figure 7-6-b).
f - All lap splices shall be designed as a tension lap splice.
6-99
Chapter 6
g - Mechanical and welded splices shall be permitted outside the critical

regions provided that the requirements of section (4-2-5-4-3) shall be
fulfilled and that welded splices conform to the standard specifications.
h - Column stirrups shall continue through the beam-column joint. The
cross-section area of these stirrups shall be determined in accordance
with Equations (6-57a) and (6-57b).
i - The ultimate design shear force shall be computed assuming that
moments of opposite sign, corresponding to probable flexural moment
strength, act at column ends (Figure 6-40).
6-8-2-3-3 Beam to column connection

Forces in the beam longitudinal reinforcement at faces of supports
shall be determined using a tensile stress of at least 1.25fy. Requirements of
section (6-6-2) shall also be fulfilled.
6-8-3 Requirements for shear walls
6-8-3-1 Scope
a - Requirements of section (6-8-3) shall apply to ductile structural or
shear walls used as part of the seismic load resisting system.
b - Requirements of section (6-5) shall not be permitted except within the
limits stated in section (6-8-3).
6-8-3-2 Concrete dimensions
Concrete dimensions of shear walls shall be determined in accordance
with Article (6-5-2-1-1), but the wall thickness in critical regions shall not
be less than one tenth of the story clear height as shown in Figures (6-
41a&b)
a) Wall with uniform thickness;
b) Wall strengthened by a boundary element
hu
10
0 .0 0 3 0 .00 3
c c
2 2
c c
L L
w w hu
bw
bw 10
Figure (6-41) Minimum wall thickness in critical regions (plan section)
6-100
Chapter 6
6-8-3-3 Reinforcement of ductile shear walls

Reinforcement of ductile shear walls shall consist of two meshes, one
on each face. Ratios of distributed vertical and horizontal reinforcement
shall conform to sections (6-8-3-3-1) and (6-8-3-3-2), respectively. In
addition, concentrated vertical reinforcement shall be determined in
accordance with section (6-8-3-3-3).
6-8-3-3-1 Distributed vertical reinforcement

a - The ratio of total, distributed, vertical reinforcement shall not be less
than 0.25%.
b - The diameter of selected reinforcement bars shall not be less than 10
mm and the bar spacing shall not exceed 200 mm.
6-8-3-3-2 Distributed horizontal reinforcement

a - The ratio of total, distributed, horizontal reinforcement shall not be
less than 0.25%.
b - The diameter of selected reinforcement bars shall not be less than 10
mm and the bar spacing shall not exceed 200 mm.
c - When the ratio of total distributed vertical reinforcement is more than
1%, additional crossties in the form of closed stirrups, that links the
reinforcement meshes on both sides together and penetrate through the
thickness shall be used. The diameter of these closed stirrups shall not
be less than the larger of one quarter of the diameter of vertical
reinforcement bars or 8 mm. Arrangement of closed stirrups shall
provide least 4 stirrups per each square meter of wall.
6-8-3-3-3 Concentrated vertical reinforcement

a - Concentrated vertical reinforcement shall be used at wall edges, at
wall corners and at intersections of walls as shown in Figure (6-42).
b - The diameter of concentrated reinforcement bars shall not be less than
12 mm.
c - The ratio of concentrated vertical reinforcement area to the total area of
wall concrete section, outsides the critical regions, shall not be less than
0.1%. With the critical regions, this ratio shall not be less than 0.2%.
d - Stirrups, satisfying the requirements of section (6-8-2-3-2), shall be
used to contain the concentrated vertical reinforcement. Concentrated
vertical reinforcement shall preferably be used at all locations where
the concrete compressive strain exceeds 0.0015.
6-101
Chapter 6
Steel
Reinforcement s
Vertical RFT
Horizontal RFT
bw
Stirrups
Reinforcement
Figure (6-42) Distributed
as well as concentrated vertical reinforcement in shear walls (plan
section)
6-8-3-4 Flexural strength of shear walls

a - Flexural strength of shear walls shall be determined using the ultimate
strength limit state method in accordance with section (4-2-1).
b - Both the distributed and the concentrated vertical reinforcement types
shall be considered in determining the flexural strength of shear walls.
c - The ultimate flexural strength of shear walls shall not be less than the
larger of the cracking strength of wall cross-section and the factored
bending moment acting on the wall.
6-8-3-5 Shear strength of shear walls

a - The ultimate shear strength of shear walls shall be determined using
f fy Q
q = 0.9 c cu + = u (6 62 )
umax c st b L
s w w
6-102
Chapter 6
where,
st = ratio of web reinforcement as given by Equation (4-22)
h
c = 0.25 for w 1.5
Lw
h
= 0.17 for w 2
Lw
h
and varies linearly from 0.25 to 0.17 for 1.5 w 2 .
Lw
b - For ductile shear walls, design shear forces shall be determined using
a tensile stress of at least 1.25fy in all reinforcing steel. Consequently,
the design shear forces shall be equal to 125% of the shear forces
produced by the seismic loads.
c - In wall critical regions, the concrete shear strength shall be ignored
and transverse reinforcement shall be proportioned to resist the total
ultimate design shear forces.
6-8-3-6 Structural members not-designated as part of the seismic-load

resisting system
a - Structural members not-designated as part of the seismic-load
resisting system and subject to the same deformation as the resisting
system shall possess sufficient ductility to be able to support gravity
loads while subjected to the design displacement.
b - Structural members not-designated as part of the seismic-load
resisting system shall be designed to resist the ultimate bending
moments that result from the lateral displacements (i.e. drifts) caused
by the seismic loads, or they shall be designed and detailed in a
manner that shall permit the formation of plastic hinges at their critical
sections.
c - Stirrups used in structural members not-designated as part of the
seismic-load resisting system shall conform to section (6-8-2-2-2) or
section (6-8-2-2-3) and shall permit the formation of plastic hinges.
6-8-3-7 Coupling beams
a - Coupling beams with clear-span to depth ratios of not less than 4 shall
conform to the requirements of Article (6-8-2-3-1).
b - Coupling beams with clear-span to depth ratios of not more than 2
shall be reinforced with two intersecting groups of diagonally placed
bars symmetrical about the mid-span in accordance with Figure (6-43).
6-103
Chapter 6
c - Coupling beams with clear-span to depth ratios that are larger than 2
but smaller than 4 shall either be detailed in accordance with the
requirements of section (6-8-2-3-1) or shall be reinforced with two
intersecting groups of diagonally placed bars symmetrical about the
mid-span as shown in Figure (6-43).
d - Coupling beams reinforced with two intersecting groups of diagonally
placed bars symmetrical about the mid-span shall satisfy the following:
- Each group of diagonally placed bars shall consist of a minimum of
four bars;
- Each group of diagonally placed bars shall be enclosed in transverse
reinforcement satisfying section (6-8-2-2-3);
- The diagonally placed bars shall be developed for tension in the wall.
- The ultimate shear strength of coupling beams shall be determined
using the following equation:
2A fy f cu
qu = sd sin 0.7 (6-63)
bd s c
where:
Asd = area of one group diagonally placed bars
= angle between diagonally placed bars and the beam
longitudinal axis
e - The contribution of diagonally placed bars shall be considered in the
determination of the ultimate flexural strength of coupling beams.
f - Coupling beams shall be provided with longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement conforming to the minimum requirements of sections
(4-2-1-2-h) and (4-2-1-2-6), respectively.
Figure (6-43) Reinforcement details for coupling beams
6-104
Chapter 6
6-9 precast concrete:

Precast concrete structural members shall be designed according to
provisions of this section (6-9). All provisions of this code, not in the
conflict with the provisions of section (6-9), shall apply to analysis and
design of precast concrete structural members. The requirements of this
section shall not sufficient for safety requirements for earthquake resistance.
6-9-1 General
1- Precast elements, connections and joints shall be designed to resist all
external loads affecting member during fabrications, storage,
transportation, erection, construction and usage. In addition, stresses
due to end restraint shall be considered.
2 - In analysis of precast structure, connection structural behavior
assumptions shall represent actual behavior.
3 - Design and details shall take into consideration special requirements
for erection and tolerances specified in section (9-8-3) in addition to
stresses resulting from erection.
4 - In addition to requirements of details specified in section (7-2), the
following shall be included in tender or workshop drawings:-
a - Reinforcement details, connections, concrete cover, inserts and
lifting devices required to resist temporary loads during
construction stages.
b - Characteristics strength of concrete during different construction
stages.
c - Surface finishing.
d - Special tolerance (i.e. non-standard) required for element or
structure.
e - Locations of ties and joints with applied forces.
f - Requirements and recommendations for erection and
construction.
6-9-2 Distribution of forces among members

1 - Forces perpendicular to the plane of members shall be distributed
based on structural analysis or tests
2 - In-plane forces shall be transferred between the members of a precast
floor or wall system according to the following requirements:
a - In-plane forces paths shall be continuous through both
connections and members.
6-105
Chapter 6
b - Continuous path of steel shall be provided to resist a resulting

tension force
c - Connections, ties, and bearing areas shall be designed to resist all
transferable forces including any special forces due to tolerance,
elastic deformations, creep, shrinkage and temperature.
6-9-3 Reinforcement of precast elements.

- Elements shall be reinforced according to the requirements of this
section. All code items not in conflict with this section shall be part of
these requirements.
- Horizontal and vertical reinforcement in walls shall not be less than
0.25% of gross concrete section area.
- Slab reinforcement in each direction shall not be less than 0.15% of
gross section area.
6-9-4 Structural integrity
6-9-4-1 For precast concrete structure with height not more than two
stories, the following requirements shall be satisfied.
1 - Longitudinal, transverse, vertical, and around the perimeter of
building ties shall be used to assure integrity of precast elements with
the lateral force resisting structural system.
2 - For floors consisting of precast elements acting as rigid horizontal
diaphragms, the connections between diaphragms and the vertical
members resisting lateral forces and laterally supported on diaphragms
shall have a nominal tensile strength capable of resisting at least
4.5 KN m .
3 - Vertical ties shall be used in all vertical structural elements. This shall
be satisfied by providing connections at horizontal joints according to
the following:
a - Precast columns shall have a nominal ultimate tensile force not
less than 1.4 Ag, (N), when Ag shall be the required concrete
cross sectional area in mm2. for columns with a larger cross
section than required by consideration of loading, a reduced
effective area ( Ag ), based on cross section required but not less
than one-half the actual area, shall be used.
b - Precast wall panels shall be provided with two ties per panel as a
minimum with a nominal tensile strength not less than 45 KN per
tie. These ties shall be symmetric about the vertical axis of the
wall and exist in the external quarter of the wall where possible.
6-106
Chapter 6
c - When no tension at the base exists due to design forces, the ties
required by item (b) above, shall be appropriately anchored into a
reinforced concrete floor slab on grade.
4 - Friction caused by gravity loads shall not be relied on when designing
and detailing of connections.
6-9-4-2 For precast concrete bearing wall structures three or more
stories high, the following provisions shall be applied as a
minimum (figure 6-44):-
1 - Floor structural system shall be provided with longitudinal and
transverse ties assuring nominal strength of 22 KN/m of width or
length. These ties shall be positioned over interior wall supports and
between members and exterior walls. These ties shall be spaced within
0.6 m of the level of the floor or roof system.
2 - Longitudinal ties parallel to floor spans shall be spaced not more than
3.0 ms. Enough precautions shall be taken for transferring of forces
around openings.
3 - Transverse ties perpendicular to floor spans shall be spaced at
distances not exceeding bearing wall spacing.
4 - Ties around the perimeter of each floor, shall be provided within 1.2
m of the floor edge, and shall assure a nominal strength in tension not
less than 70 KN.
5 - Vertical ties shall be provided in all walls and shall be continuous over
the height of the building. They shall provide a nominal tensile
strength not less than 40 KN per horizontal meter of wall. At least,
two ties shall be provided for each wall.
6-9-5 Design of connections and bearing zones
6-9-5-1 Grouted joints, shear keys, mechanical connectors, reinforcing steel
connections, reinforced topping, or a combination of these means allow
transfer of forces between members. Mechanical connectors with grouted
joints or shear keys are preferred to be used for structure with three or more
stories.
6-9-5-2 Analysis or testing shall be used to determine the adequacy of
connections to transfer forces between members.. Where shear is the
primary effective loading, the provisions of section (4-2-2-4) shall be
satisfied.
6-9-5-3 For designing connections with materials having different
structural properties, their relative stiffness, strengths, and ductility shall be
taken into consideration.
6-107
Chapter 6
P/T
L
L P/
L T
L L
L L
L L
L
L
L
L
L
L
T
P/
L
T
P/
V
T = Transverse Tie
V L =Longitudinal Tie
P/ V
T
V =Vertical Tie
L
V
P/
Perimeter Tie
P/
T
Figure (6-44) Typical linear distribution for ties in precast systems
6-9-5-4 Precast floor members bearing on simple supports shall

satisfy the following:-
1 - The allowable bearing stresses at the contact surface between
supported and supporting members shall not exceed the bearing
strength for either surface or the bearing element. Concrete bearing
strength shall be according to section (4-2-4) or (5-6).
2 - Unless shown by structural analysis or test that performance of
connection or bearing zones of precast elements shall not be impaired,
the following requirements shall be satisfied:-
a -The design dimensions for each member and its supporting
elements with due consideration of the allowable tolerances shall
satisfy the condition that the distance between support edge and end of
precast element supported on it shall not be less than 1/180 of the clear
span of the member but not less than 50 mm for slabs and 75 mm for
beams as shown in figure (6-45).
6-108
Chapter 6
b -Bearing pads for unarmored edges shall be provided at

a distance not less than 15 mm from the face of the support, or at least
the chamfer dimension at chamfered edges.
3 - The requirements of (4-2-5-3) shall not apply to the positive bending
moment reinforcement for statically determinate precast members, but
at least one-third of such reinforcement shall extend to the center of
the bearing length.
P re c a st M e m b e r
S u p p o rt
U n a rm o re d E d g e
B e a rin g L e n g th
15 m m m in im u m
L / 180 > 50 m m (S la b s )
L / 180 > 75 m m (B e a m s)
Figure (6-45) Bearing length for precast elements
6-9-6 Items embedded after concrete casting

Embedded items, such as dowels or inserts, that either protrude from
the concrete or remain exposed for inspection may be embedded while the
concrete is in plastic state provided that the following requirements are
satisfied:
1 - Embedded items shall not have hook ends or tied to reinforcement
inside concrete.
2 - Embedded items shall be positioned correctly while concrete in plastic
stage.
3 - The concrete shall be well compacted around the embedded items.
6-9-7 Marking and Identification

1 - Each precast member shall be marked to identify its location and
orientation in the structure and also date of manufacture.
2 - Identification marks shall be identical to the erection drawings.
6-109
Chapter 6
6-9-8 Handling
1 - For design of precast elements, all forces and distortion resulting
during curing, stripping, storage, transportation and erection shall be
considered.
2 - Precast members shall be adequately supported during erection to
ensure stability until permanent connections are cast.
6-9-9 Strength evaluation of precast members
1 - Precast members used with cast-in-place concrete shall be permitted
to be tested in flexure as a precast element alone according to the
following:
a - Test loads shall not be applied except when calculations indicate
that the precast element alone will not be critical in compression
or buckling.
b - The test load is that load which, when applied to the precast
member alone, produces the same total force in the tension
reinforcement as that produced by loading the composite
member with the test load according to section (8-7-7).
2 - The precast member shall be considered acceptable if the
requirements of section (8-9-6) shall be satisfied.
6-9-10 Horizontal shear strength of composite members
1 - This item apply to composite members defined as precast concrete
part and in-situ concrete part cast in later stage but so inter-connected
to act as one member responding to loads as a unit.
2 - Full transfer of horizontal shear forces shall be ensured at contact
surfaces of interconnected elements.
3 - For design of horizontal shear forces, the following shall be satisfied:-
Q u Q uhr (6-64)
Where Q u the factored is shearing force at the section under

consideration and Q uhr is the nominal horizontal shear
strength.
3-a when contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, and intentionally
roughened with 5mm minimum full amplitude horizontal shear
strength shall not be taken greater than 0.4 bv d (Newton) where bv
6-110
Chapter 6
(mm) is the contact width between precast and cast-in-situ parts, and d
(mm) is the depth of the composite member.
3-b when minimum vertical ties between composite member parts are
provided in accordance with section (4-2-2-1-6) , and contact surfaces
are clear and free of laitance , but not intentionally roughened (as per 3-
a) , horizontal shear strength shall not be taken greater than 0.45 N / mm 2
3-c when minimum vertical ties are provided between composite member
parts in accordance with (4-2-2-1-6), and contact surfaces are clean,
free of laitance, and intentionally roughened according to (3-a) shear
fy
strength shall be taken equal to (1.35 + 0.5 v ) in N but not greater
s
than 3.0 N / mm 2 where v in the reinforcement ratio for vertical ties.
3-d when factored horizontal shear strength exceeds 3.0 N / mm 2 , design
for horizontal shear shall be in accordance with section
(4-2-2-4).
4 - As an alternative to item 3 above, horizontal shear shall be permitted
to be determined by computing the actual change in compressive or
tensile force in any segment, and provisions shall be made to transfer
that force as horizontal shear to supporting elements. The factored
horizontal shear force shall not exceed horizontal shear strength as
given in (3-a), (3-b), (3-c) and (3-d) where area of contact surface Ac
shall be substituted for bv d .
- When vertical ties are provided to resist horizontal shear, the
distribution of these ties shall approximately reflect the
distribution of shear forces in the member.
5 - When tension exists across the contact surface between interconnected
elements, horizontal shear forces shall be transferred by vertical ties
with area exceeding minimum area as specified in (3-b) above and in
accordance with (4-2-2-1-6).
6-10 Mathematical modeling and validation of computer-aided

structural models
6-10-1 Requirements of the mathematical model
It shall be permitted to use numerical methods, such as the finite
element method, for the determination of internal forces in structures
provided that these methods shall satisfy the equilibrium and strain-
compatibility conditions, in addition to the following requirements:
6-111
Chapter 6
6-10-1-1 Geometry requirements

1 - The mathematical model shall simulate the true behavior of the
structure with respect to geometry, supports (size and stiffness
of supporting elements), loads and end restraint/constraint
conditions.
2 - When the finite element method is used, it shall be assured that
the selected sizes and aspect ratios of these elements shall not
have any adverse effects on solution accuracy.
3 - When numerical methods are used in the analysis, the mesh
gridlines shall preferably pass by column locations. This may
require the use of elements with variable sizes.
4 - Structure discretization at stress-concentration zones (e.g. at
locations of columns, structural walls, openings, sudden
changes of element sizes, and concentrated loads) shall be made
in a manner that shall satisfy the requirements of section (6-10-
2).
6-10-1-2 Structural requirements
1 - The transfer of various loads from one structure element to the
other (load paths), starting from their place of application to the
foundations, shall be checked.
2 - Secondary load effects, if any, shall be appropriately included
in the model.
3 - When the floor beams are modeled as a two-way grid system,
all produced internal forces,( i.e. bending moments, axial forces,
shear forces and torsion moments), shall be considered in the
design of these beams.
4 - Various, possible load patterns that may act on the structure
shall be considered in the analysis to ensure that critical values
for the internal forces are checked at every section.
5 - Generally, in the analysis of structures- and in particular for
floor slabs, the flexural stiffness of columns in two planes shall
be included in the mathematical model.
6 - The effects of section cracking may be accounted for in the
structural analysis. However, for cases where including the
effects of cracking shall be difficult, it shall be permitted to
redistribute the internal forces obtained from analysis
considering the anticipated effects of cracking on the structure
behavior and the determination of steel reinforcement amounts
and directions.
6-112
Chapter 6
6-10-2 Review of input data and output results

6-10-2-1 Review of input data
1 - The input related to the structure geometry shall be checked
with respect to:
- Boundaries of the structure.
- Section properties for different elements.
- Axes (or planes) of symmetry.
- Locations of supports.
- Openings.
2 - Restraint and constraint conditions shall conform to the actual
behavior of the structure. The structure model shall have
sufficient restraints and/or constraints to satisfy its statical
stability.
3 - Load data shall be verified with respect to load values,
directions, points of application, and units of measure.
4 - Material properties shall be checked including the numerical
values of Youngs modulus, Poissons ratio, and material
strength, as well as interface (i.e. bond) strength between
different materials.
6-10-2-2 Review of output results
1 - The general equilibrium of the structure shall be verified by
comparing the total sum of applied loads with the
corresponding support reactions.
2 - The structure deformed shape shall be checked in terms of
overall mode of deformation and deflection direction.
3 - Deflection values at support locations shall be confirmed and
program-calculated deflection values shall either be compared
with values obtained using closed-form solutions or with
simplified methods for few structure elements.
4 - It shall be ensured that the computer program adopted for
analysis shall give results that shall practically be consistent to a
reasonable degree with the results of traditional methods of
analysis.
6-10-3 Slabs
In addition to the requirements of sections (6-10-1) and (6-10-2),
the following provisions shall be considered:
1 - Slabs may be represented by general shell elements or plate-
bending elements.
6-113
Chapter 6
2 - In modeling of floors containing slabs and beams using shell or

plate-bending elements for slabs while using frame elements for
beams, the model shall account for the vertical shift between the
levels of slab and beam centers of gravity. It shall be permitted
to indirectly account for this shift by taking the beam cross
section as a T- or L-shaped in the analysis; the flange protrusion
(overhangs) shall be taken equal to half that given in section (6-
3-1-9).
3 - When the steel reinforcement is uniformly-distributed and is
placed in two perpendicular strips, the bending moment acting
in each strip shall be given by:
m x = m x + m xy (6-65)
m = m y + m xy (6-66)
y
where, m
x and m y are the maximum bending moments, per unit
strip width, acting in the x- and y- directions, respectively. Values of
m x and m y need not exceed 1.5 times the mean bending moment in
the strip. In Equations (6-65) and (6-66), mx and mx shall be the
absolute values of bending moments, per unit strip width, while mxy
shall be the absolute value of torsion moments, per unit strip width.
4 - The column in-plan restraining effects may be represented by a
point at its center or over its full cross-section area. The bending
moments for floor elements shall be taken as those acting at
column faces in both cases.
5- It shall be permitted to position the main steel reinforcement in
direction of the principal tensile stresses with a deviation
tolerance of 15o or, alternatively, the steel reinforcement may
be placed in two perpendicular directions as stated above.
6-10-4 Rafts
In addition to the requirements of sections (6-10-1) and (6-10-2),
the following provisions shall be considered:
1 - Column loads transferred to the raft may be distributed- in plan-
over the column full cross-section area. The bending moments
for raft shall be taken as those acting at column faces.
6-114
Chapter 6
2 - The model adopted for soil modeling as well as the numerical

values of its coefficients shall be conforming to the Egyptian
Code for Soil Mechanics and Foundation (ECP202).
Requirements concerning the soil bearing pressures and
allowable settlements and differential settlements shall be
satisfied.
3 - Rafts satisfying the conditions of section (6-7-2-2) shall be
considered as rigid.
4 - In the analysis of soil-raft systems, the tensile stresses between
raft and soil shall not be permitted. The bearing pressure shall
not exceed the allowable bearing capacity of the soil.
6-10-5 Beams, columns, and frames

1 - In the analysis of columns, it shall be permitted to include the
second order (P-) effects but in no case shall the column
design bending moments be taken less than that given in section
(6-4).
2 - For structures analyzed as space frames, the design of sections
shall be based on all internal forces produced at the section
resulting from the same load conditions.
6-10-6 Deep beams, short cantilevers, and structural walls

It shall be permitted to use numerical methods to evaluate the
stresses and strains in deep beams, short cantilevers, and structural
walls provided that the obtained results shall not less than those
given by other sections of this code.
6-11 Strut-and tie model

6-11-1 Introduction
Strut-and-Tie Model shall be used in designing D-regions of
elements of concrete structures. Such regions results from
concentrated loads, abrupt changes in dimensions or both as outlined
in Section (6-11-2).
Strut-and-Tie Model follows the load paths in structural
elements to model the internal forces as a truss in equilibrium under
the effect of the external forces. Such a model contains elements in
compression (struts), elements in tension (Ties) and connecting
nodes (Nodes), as shown in Fig. (6-46). The designed shall be based
6-115
Chapter 6
on the satisfaction of conditions of equilibrium and compatibility of

strains given in Section (6-11-3).
6-11-2 Definitions
Strut-and-Tie Model: Truss model consisting of a system of struts and
ties connected together at regions called nodes to simulate the flow of
forces at Bernouli regions (B-regions) and discontinuity regions (D-
Regions), as shown in Fig. (6-46).
B-Region: A part of a structural element in which Bernouli hypothesis
(i.e. plane sections before bending remain plane after bending) can be
applied. In general any part of the element located outside the
discontinuity region shall be considered a Bernouli region.
Discontinuity region (D-region): a part of the element in which an
abrupt change in dimensions or loads occur. Such a region shall be
determined based on St. Venant principle by a distance equals to the
thickness of the element measured from the region of discontinuity (Fig.
6-47)
Strut: It is the compression element in the Strut-and-Tie Model and
modeled as the resultant of prismatic or a bottle-shaped field (Fig. 4-48).
The strut can be either reinforced or un-reinforced.
Tie: It is the tension element in the Strut-and-Tie Model and it models
the tension field.
Node: it is the point in the Strut-and-Tie Model at which the axes of the
struts and ties meet (Fig. 6-53). The Nodal Zone is the concrete mass
around the node where the forces of the Model equilibrate (Fig. 6-54).
Fig. (6-46) Description of the strut-and-tie model
6-116
Chapter 6
Fig. (6-47) Examples of D-regions

6-11-3 Design of the elements of the strut-and-tie model
6-11-3-1 General
This section includes the design of the elements of the Strut-and-Tie
Model according to the limit states design method.
The elements of the Strut-and-Tie Model shall be designed to resist the
acting ultimate forces and loads with due consideration of the
requirements of the serviceability limit state.
6-11-3-2 Design of strut
6-11-3-2-1 Types of stress fields in struts
The value of the concrete strength in struts depends on the state of the
surrounding stresses and their intersection with the cracks or the
reinforcing steel according to Section (6-11-3-2-2).
6-117
Chapter 6
According to the stress fields, the types of struts can be classified as

follows;
Prismatic strut
Prismatic strut models a parallel path of stresses (Fig. 6-48-a) as for
the case of the compression zone in beams subjected to bending moments.
In such case, the thickness of the prismatic strut can be considered equal
to the depth of the compression stress block (a) according to sections (4-2-
1-10 and (4-2-1-2).
Fig. (6-48) Compression stress fields

Bottle strut
The bottle strut represents the general case of most of the struts in the
Strut-and-Tie Model (Fig. 6-48-c). The internal lateral spread of
compression forces leads to the development of lateral tensile stresses as
shown in Fig. (6-49) . Such stresses shall be considered in design by
providing reinforcement for controlling the developed of cracks, to increase
the strength of the strut in the direction long its axis and to permit the
redistribution of forces.
Fig. (6-49) Bottle-shaped strut
6-118
Chapter 6
6-11-3-2-2 Ultimate strength of the strut

a - The ultimate strength of an un-reinforced strut at any end shall not be
more than the following value:
Fc =fcd . Ac (6-67)
Where:
Fcd = the smaller value of the effective concrete compression
strength in the strut given by Equation (6-96) and the effective
concrete compression strength in the node given by Equation
6-72).
Ac = Cross sectional area of the strut at one end. It is equal to
(Ws. B ), where;
b - is the beam width
Ws - is the strut width . It is equal to the smallest dimension
normal to the axis of the strut at the node.
b - The ultimate strength of the strut can be increased through adding
reinforcing steel in a direction parallel to the axis of the strut. Such
reinforcing steel shall have sufficient development length and shall be
tied with stirrups satisfying the requirements of Section (6-4-7). The
ultimate strength of a reinforced strut shall be calculated according to
f
y
Fc = f cd A c + A s (6-68)

s
Where the value of s shall be taken equal to 1.3.
c - The effective concrete compression strength shall be taken according
f
fcd = 0.67 S cu (6-69)
c
Where the value of c is taken equal to 1.6. The value of s shall be
taken as follows:
s = 1.0 for prismatic strut as given in Section (6-11-3-2-1)
s = 0.70 for bottle-shape strut that is parallel to the cracks shown
in Fig. (6-50-a). The value of s given in this section requires
the use of reinforcing steel in a direction normal to the
direction of the axis of the strut in order to resist the transverse
tension force resulting from the spread of the compression
6-119
Chapter 6
force in the strut with an inclination to axis of the strut of (2)

longitudinal to (1) transversal.
s = 0.6 for bottle-shape strut that is inclined to the angle of the
cracks as shown in Fig. (6-50-b).
s = 0.4 for struts in tension elements or elements with tension flanges.
s = 0.60 for all other cases.
Strut
Crack Strut
A- Strut Parallel to cracks
Strut
Crack
B- Strut Crossed by Skew Crack
Fig. (6-50) Types of struts: (a) strut parallel to the cracks, (b) strut
inclined to the cracks
d - In case of using confining stirrups, the concrete compression strength

can be increased by taking the confining effect into consideration
similar to the end zones of prestressed concrete members.
e - The angle of inclination of the compression strut to the axis of the
structural element shall not be less than 26 deg.
6-11-3-3 Design of ties
The ultimate strength of the tie shall be calculated from the following
equation:
f
fcd = 0.67 S cu (6-69)
c
Where:
Tud =Design tension force for the case of ultimate limit state
As = cross sectional area of reinforcing bars.
6-120
Chapter 6
The value of s shall be taken equal to 1.5.

The requirements of section (4-3-2) for the cracking limit for members
subjected to axial tension forces shall be satisfied.
At the ends of a tension tie, the satisfaction of the required development
length (Ld) (Fig. 6-51) shall be verified. Other options are to use anchors
or mechanical connections at the ends of Section (4-2-5).
Fig. (6-51) Calculation of required development length at the nodal zone
6-11-3-4 Design of nodes

The width of the reinforced tie (Wt) shall be designed to satisfy the
safety requirements of compression stresses at the nodal zone for struts
and ties meeting at the node (Section 6-11-3-4). An approximate tie
thickness can be taken not more than 70% of the thickness of the largest
strut connected to that tie at the nodal zone.
The development length (Ld) shall be calculated according to section 4-2-5.
The node is defined as the region where the forces of the Strut-and-Tie
Model meet. At least three forces shall be in equilibrium at the node.
6-11-3-4-1 Types of nodes

Nodes are classified as Singular and Smeared. Singular nodes are
those having well-defined locations at the locations of concentrated loads
such as nodes (I, III) in fig. (6-52). Smeared nodes are those having
6-121
Chapter 6
locations determined according to the equilibrium of forces in the Strut-

and-Tie Model, such as node (II) in Fig. (6-52). Calculation of stresses in
smeared nodes can be neglected since their locations are hypothetical.
III
II
II
I I
L
Fig. (6-52) Types of Nodes
6-11-3-4-2 Design of singular nodes

Singular nodes shall be designed to satisfy the requirements of ultimate
compressive strength of concrete, as well as satisfying the required
development length of reinforcing steel in tension.
Singular nodes are classified according to the type of forces in
equilibrium at the node (Fig. 6-53) as follows:
o Node C-C-C all members meeting at the node are struts.
o Node C-C-T members meeting at the node are two struts and a
tie
o Node C-T-T members meeting at the node are two ties and a
strut
o Node T-T-T all members meeting at the node are ties.
In order to satisfy the safety requirements for ultimate limit state, the
compression strength of concrete at the node shall conform to the
following equation:
Fcn = Acn .fcd (6-71)
Where:
Acn = cross sectional area at the nodal zone for a section normal
to the direction of the strut (Fig. 6-54).
6-122
Chapter 6
fcd = Effective compressive strength of concrete at the node

calculated from the following equation:
f cu
fcd = 0.67 n (6-72)
c
Where:
c = Strength reduction factor of concrete and is taken equal to
1.6
f cu = Characteristic compressive strength of concrete
n = A coefficient that takes into account the type of the forces
acting at the node. It is taken as follows:
o n = 1.0 for nodes subjected to compression forces only
(C-C-C), (Fig. 6-53-a). In such a case, the node region is
subjected to compression acting in one- or two- or three-
directions.
o n = 0.8 for (C-C-T) nodes, (Fig. 6-53-b). The use of n =
1.0 in this type of nodes shall be permitted if the tie shall
extended through the node and mechanically connected as
o n = 0.6 for (C-T-T) or (T-T-T) nodes shown in Figs. (6-
53-c and 6-53-d)
C C T
C T
C
T T
T
T
C C
(a) C-C-C Node (b) C-C-T Node (c) C-T-T Node (d) T-T-T Node
Fig. (6-53) Types of singular nodes
In case of singular nodes of type (C-C-T), the height Wt shall be

calculated according to the distribution of reinforcing bars as follows
(Fig. 6-54):
o When using one row of reinforcing bars, and not achieving
sufficient development length behind the node region (Fig.6-54-a):
6-123
Chapter 6
Wt = 0 (6-73a)
o When using one row of reinforcing bars, and achieving sufficient
development length behind the node region by a distance not less
than 2c, where c is the concrete cover (Fig. 6-54-b):
Wt = s + 2 c (6-73b)
Where s is the diameter of the used bars
o When using more than one row of reinforcing bars (Fig. 6-54-c):
Wt = s + 2 c + (n-1).s (6-73c)
Where, n is the number of rows and, s is the distance between the
reinforcing bars with due consideration that the distance of the
extended node (s/2)
Fig. (6-54) Typical node of type (C-C-T) subjected to compression and

tension at the support of a shallow or deep beam
6-124
Chapter 7
CHAPTER 7
DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT
7-1 General
Concrete workshop drawings shall be fully detailed and with complete
dimensions. It shall also be prepared according to structural calculations
and in such a way that makes the formworks and concrete casting as easy
as possible.
7-2 Structural drawings and drawing specifications

Structural drawings shall be prepared according to the design made by
specialist engineers and approved by the syndicate of engineers- either by
the design office or by the contractor upon an assignment from the design
office and approved by it - to include all the details necessary to carry out
the project according to the guidelines explained in this chapter.
7-2-1 Scheme drawings

Scheme drawings are made according to the schematic drawings and
requirements of the project. The purpose of these drawings is to show the
column layout and to estimate approximate dimensions of structural
members so that the architect can prepare the final drawings of the project.
Scheme drawings are usually submitted in a scale of 1:100.
7-2-2 Tender and design drawings

Tender drawings are prepared in a suitable scale and all structural
elements shall be shown clearly in a way that allows tendering contractors
to estimate the quantities of concrete, formworks and reinforcing steel.
Tender drawings shall include the following data:
7-2-2-1 Loads
Live loads and additional loads on each part of the building shall be
shown as well as the dynamic effects of machines and apparatuses, if any.
Flooring, cladding loads and allowable formwork loads shall also be
shown. In case of using special forms, approval of design engineer shall be
obtained.
In special structures like factories, power plants, water and sewage
treatment plants, and storage silos etc, where other loads exist, the
7-1
Chapter 7
values of such loads shall be shown on drawings of concrete dimensions, or

reference shall be made to mechanical drawings showing such loads.
7-2-2-2 Properties of materials

These data shall include characteristic strength of concrete for
building members. Type of cement, and minimum cement content, shall
also be specified. The type of admixtures and steel reinforcement as well as
steel grade shall be specified. Different types of steel are as follows:
- Plain mild steel (Grade 240/350) indicated by .
- High tensile steel (Grade 360/520) indicated by .
- High tensile steel (Grade 400/600) indicated by .
- Welded wire mesh steel (Grade 450/520) indicated by # .
- Concrete cover of reinforcing steel, as determined by articles (4-3-2-3-b)
and (9-7), shall be mentioned in drawings, for all elements.
7-2-2-3 Foundations data

Foundation drawings shall include foundation level, allowable stress
on soil, and types of piles (if any) and their working loads. Locations and
specifications of water insulation layers (if any) shall be shown. Number of
floors for which the design is made shall also be indicated on the drawings.
7-2-2-4 Precast concrete

In case of using precast concrete the requirements of art (6-8) shall be
fulfilled together with indicating the following data on drawings:
a) Minimum characteristic compressive strength of concrete before
removal of forms and at time of transferring precast units from casting
yards to storage or erection sites.
b) Positions of hanging precast units and details of additional
reinforcement at these positions. Storage method shall also be
determined to avoid impermissible stresses at any section due to
lifting and storage.
c) Weight of each member to arrange for the suitable equipment for
lifting, transfer, storage and erection.
7-2
Chapter 7
d) Sufficient details, in a scale not less than 1:20, at all joints between
precast units. Positions and methods of supporting these units till
hardening of mortar or joint filling material shall also be determined.
7-2-3 Workshop drawings

Workshop drawings shall include the necessary details for
construction of all structural members of the building. Drawings shall be
made with a suitable scale, preferably not less than 1:50. Drawings shall
include the following:
a - Concrete dimensions data

1) Plans and sufficient sections to show the concrete dimensions of all
structural elements, spacing between axes, levels, slab thickness.
Dimensions of beams, cantilevers and columns shall also be shown. In
case of beams and cantilevers, width is mentioned first followed by
total depth including thickness of slab.
2) Locations and details of openings, anchorage bolts and embedded
parts required for sanitary works, air conditioning, machine
installation etc.
3) Locations and details of expansion, shrinkage, seismic and
construction joints (if any), as well as camber of slabs, beams and
cantilevers in structures with large spans.
b - Reinforcing steel data

Reinforcing steel data shall be correlated to concrete dimensions to
make construction easy. The following shall also be considered:
1 - Showing the layer arrangement in case of using steel mesh like the
one used in slab and wall reinforcement.
2 - Showing the bent and straight bars for slabs on plan with their true
shape. Only one bar of each group of slab reinforcement may be
drawn on plan with the number of bars either per unit length, or total
number in each slab with spacing between bars. Where cantilevers
exist, their cross section with the connected structural elements, with
suitable scale, shall be drawn .
3 - When beam reinforcement details are required, they shall be drawn on
elevations with a scale not less than 1: 50. Reinforcement shall be
drawn in continuous lines giving sufficient cross-sections in each
7-3
Chapter 7
beam with suitable scale. It is preferable to show steel detailing

outside the beams and write the length of each bar.
4 - Sections of column showing reinforcement details shall be drawn to a
suitable scale. An elevation shall be drawn when beam and column
reinforcements are connected. In this case it is better to draw
reinforcement, to a suitable scale, separately outside concrete limits in
the elevation. The same shall be made for the case of changing
column shape along its height. In all cases, any requirements for
locations of splices, anchorage length, bending of lower bars at joints
shall be shown on drawing in a way that permits continuity of steel
reinforcement in its place along the total height of column.
7-2-4 Detail drawings

In some cases it is necessary to make detail drawings with a scale that
suits the accuracy required in construction. For example:
1 - Some connections in concrete structures where reinforcement
intensity is high. In such cases the intersections are drawn to explain
bar arrangement and ensure the existence of spacing between bars
sufficient for casting and compacting concrete.
2 - Making bar lists including bar details, lengths, and numbering to
facilitate placing of bars in forms.
3 - In some cases, it is necessary to make detail drawings for wooden or
steel forms and scaffolds to ensure the accuracy of construction. When
forms and scaffolds are designed, its ability to resist applied loading
and fresh concrete pressure at all casting stages shall be considered.
4 - In some special cases, it is necessary to determine the expected
deflection of concrete members when forms and scaffolds are
removed and to consider them in constructing the forms and scaffolds
so that the operation of their removal and reconstruction becomes
easier.
5 - In case of constructing mechanical and electrical equipment
foundations where high accuracy is needed in determining the
locations of anchorage bolts, detail drawings for methods of installing
bolts in place, inside forms or with reinforcing steel shall be made.
7-4
Chapter 7
7-2-5 Title and drawing information table

Title table shall be placed at a location where it appears on the face
after folding the drawing paper. It shall include the following information:
- Project name, owner's name and address.
- Design office name and address including the name of engineer of record
of the project.
- Name of party or authority responsible for reviewing project (if
necessary).
- Contractor's name, if the drawing is prepared by him.
- Drawing scale(s).
- Date of issuance of drawing
- Drawing number and Title.
- Modifications, their dates and summary of modifications showing their
locations on drawing. Project engineer shall keep a copy of each drawing
before and after modification to refer to it when necessary.
- Issuance number of modified and coordinated drawings.
7-3 Special arrangement for reinforcing steel

Details of reinforcement are necessary and important to ensure perfect
concrete works; taking into consideration that these details shall be
sufficient to produce bending lists of reinforcement for all parts of the
project.
7-3-1 Use of different types of reinforcement in the same structural

element
a- It is preferred to avoid using different types or grades of steel in the
same structural member to avoid mistakes in arranging reinforcement
which may lead to structural risks.
b - It shall be allowed to use two different types of reinforcing steel in the
same structural member if each of them resists stresses of different
type or direction; such as for the cases when using one type of steel
for main reinforcement and another type for secondary reinforcement
of slabs when using one type of steel for longitudinal reinforcement in
columns and beams and another type for stirrups.
7-5
Chapter 7
7-3-2 Stopping of bar ends, development length and splices

The ends of reinforcing steel bars shall be anchored in concrete using
one of the following methods:
a- Straight end bars.
b - Hooked ends like or , or right angled like as
shown in Table (4-7) and section (4-2-5-1), or loops .
c- Using transverse bars or steel plates welded at ends of bars to be fixed
in concrete. It shall not be permitted to end large ratio of bars at the
same concrete section in order to avoid stress concentration in the
section. It shall always be preferable to use large number of bars with
smaller diameter in order to be able to ended bars at different
locations..
d - Development length and splice and welding length shall be calculated
according to section (4-2-5).
7-3-2-1 Lap splices

Location and number of bars in each splice, and spacing between bars
shall be determined according to section (4-2-5-4-2).
7-3-2-2 Mechanical splices

a- Mechanical splices shall be used for bars with diameter not less than
16 mm and shall be made using steel couplers made from a steel with
material properties at least equal to these of the coupled bars. The
tensile strength of coupler section shall not be less than 125% of the
strength the steel bars.
b - It shall not be allowed to have a slippage within the coupler more than
0.1 mm at working loads.
c- The couplers shall be made according to one of the following two
methods:
I- By threading bar ends from outside and coupler from inside as
shown in Fig (7-1-a).
II- By using couplers to be pressed along its outer surface area with
bar ends inside using special jacks so that the stresses can be
transferred between bars by friction between the internal surface of
coupler and external surface of bars, as shown in Fig (7-1-b). This
method shall be used for deformed steel bars
7-6
Chapter 7
d - It is essential when using mechanical splices to make sufficient tests

on specimens to verify the ability of the splice in resisting working
stresses and the fulfillment of the preceding requirements and those
given in section.(4-2-5-4-3). These tests shall be specified by the
engineer of record of the project.
Steel Coupler
L/2 L/2
Figure (7-1-a) Mechanical splices using threaded coupler
Steel Coupler
L/2 L/2
Figure (7-1-b) Mechanical splices for deformed bars
7-3-2-3 Welded splices

Welded splices shall be used for bars with diameter not less than 16
mm and for weldable steel as given in section (4-2-5) and according to
section (4-2-5-4-3) and the details shown in Figs (7-1-c) and (7-1-d).
Welding process shall be made according to the following:
1 - Only electric welding shall be used.
2 - Axes of welded bars shall be aligned in the same line.
3 - Welded splices shall be made staggered with not more than 25% of
the total number of bars welded at the same location. The spacing of
the welds of the rest of the bars shall be spaced not less than 20 times
bar diameter.
7-7
Chapter 7
4 - Length and thickness of weld shall be determined based on the

ultimate tensile force of the welded bars.
5 - It is preferred not to make welded splices in the region of maximum
bending moment.
6 - All welding shall be performed by certified technicians
7 - It shall be essential, when using welded splices, to make sufficient
tests on specimens to ensure their ability to resist working stresses and
fulfill the preceding requirements.
Figure (7-1-c) Details of welded lap splices
Figure (7-1-d) Details of welded splices using additional bars
7-3-3 Minimum and maximum bar spacing

7-3-3-1 Minimum bar spacing
The spacing between reinforcing bars shall be sufficient for casting
and compacting concrete; using either manual or mechanical compaction.
Figure (7-2-a) shows the minimum spacing between individual bars, and
Fig (7-2-b) shows minimum spacing between bundled bars
7-8
Chapter 7
b
b b
c
Figure (7-2-a) Minimum spacing between individual bars
a a
b
c b
b
a a a
c
Figure (7-2-b) Minimum spacing between bundled bars
Where,
a = Concrete cover of bars determined according to the values given in

Table (4-13) and section (4-3-2-3-b) with due consideration of section
(9-7).
b = the largest bar diameter max or 1.5 times the maximum nominal size
of concrete aggregate, whichever is larger.
c = the largest bar diameter max or 1.5 times the maximum nominal size
of concrete aggregate or (maximum nominal aggregate size+15 mm)
whichever is larger.
7-3-3-2 Maximum bar spacing

The following sections shall be referred to when determining the
maximum bar spacing:
7-9
Chapter 7
Section (6-2-1-4) and section (6-2-7-8) for solid and flat slabs,
respectively.
Section (6-3-1-10) for beams.
Section (6-4-7) for columns.
Section (6-5-2-2) for reinforced concrete walls
7-3-4 Bundled bars
7-3-4-1 General
For structural elements that have high steel reinforcement ratio, steel bars
can be gathered in bundles of two or three bars subject to fulfilling the
following:
a- Bundled bars shall be allowed only when deformed bars are used.
b - Maximum bar diameter used in bundle shall be 28 mm.
c- Different bar diameters are allowed in the same bundle where the
differences of bar diameters are not more than 4 mm.
c- Sufficient measures shall be made to keep contact between bars in the
bundle during steel arrangement and concrete casting. This shall
usually be done by using steel wires of suitable diameter at distances
not more than 20 times the smallest diameter of the bars in the bundle.
7-3-4-2 Lap splices and stopping locations of bundled bars

a- Development length (Ld) and lengths of lap splices are calculated
according to sections (4-2-5-1), (4-2-5-3) and (4-2-5-4). The
correction factors shown in Table (4-8) for bundles shall be applied
when calculating development and splice lengths.
b - It shall be allowed to end all bars in the bundle at the same section if
the bundle equivalent diameter (e) is not more than 28 mm.
Bundle equivalent diameter (e) is calculated as follows:
- For two-bar bundle e = 1.50
- For three-bar bundle e = 1.75
Where is the largest diameter in the bundle?
7-10
Chapter 7
c- In cases where equivalent bar diameter of the bundle is more than 28

mm, bundle bars shall be ended as shown in Fig (7-3-a) for the cases
where no overlap occurs in the theoretical locations of influence
region of the bundle, or as shown in Fig (7-3-b) for the cases where
overlap occurs in the theoretical locations of influence region of the
bundle which is indicated in figures by letter x.
d - In case of lap splices, where bars are staggered having additional bar
as shown in Fig (7-3-c), the value of Ld shall be calculated according
to section (4-2-5-4-2-g).
Ld a
Ld b a
Ld
x
x
x b c
c
Figure (7-3-a): Arrangement of ending bundled bars (in case where

no overlap occurs in the theoretical locations of Influence region of
the bundle)
a
> 0.3 Ld b
x a
> 0.3 Ld
x
x
> 1.3 Ld b c
c
> 1.3 Ld
> 1.3 Ld
Figure (7-3-b) Arrangement of ending bundled bars

(In case where overlap occurs in the theoretical locations of influence
region of the bundle)
7-11
Chapter 7
a b a b
c
d c d
Additional Reinforcement
Ld Ld Ld Ld
Figure (7-3-c) Arrangement of lap spliced bundled bars
7-4 Joints in concrete

7-4-1 Construction joints
These are the joints used for casting concrete on stages suitable to the
capability of producing and casting concrete in the site. Locations of these
joints shall be determined by the design engineer or contractor. Locations
shall be chosen where minimum stresses, particularly shear stresses, exist.
Measures stated in section (9-5-6) shall also be followed.
7-4-2 Shrinkage joints
These joints are made to avoid cracks due to concrete shrinkage in
large areas such as walls, floors of water tanks and basements. In such
cases, concrete shall be cast in distant parts or a shrinkage strip shall be left
without concrete between the cast parts. It is preferable to provide keys in
the sides of concrete. After hardening and curing of cast parts, the parts left
between consecutive parts, (the shrinkage strips) shall be cast with die
consideration of the measures specified for construction joints and given in
section (7-4-1).
7-4-3 Movement joints

These joints are made to allow for any volumetric changes in concrete
due to change in temperature or concrete shrinkage or vertical movement
due to difference in values of loading in parts of the same building or due
to change in foundation type.
These joints shall allow the movement of various parts of the
structure and avoid unfavorable deformations or stresses resulting from
restraining the movement.
7-12
Chapter 7
Special care shall be taken when constructing these joints in order to

avoid leakage of sub-soil water during the differential movement of parts of
the structure. Locations of such joints are chosen by the design engineer of
record and indicated on the detail drawings and specifications of the
project. Measures stated in section (9-5-8) shall also be followed when
making such joints.
7-5 Typical details of reinforcement for structural members
Typical details of reinforcement for structural elements are presented,
as follows:
1 - Typical details of reinforcement of flat slabs are shown in Fig (7-4).
Figure (6-29) shall be referred to for the case of flat slabs resisting
seismic loads.
2- Typical details of reinforcement of beam and slab joints are shown in
Fig (7-5)
3- Typical details of column reinforcement are shown in Fig (7-6)
7-13
Chapter 7
Field Strip
Without Drop Panel
Column Strip
Field Strip
With Drop Panel
Column Strip
Minimum Distances B: Bottom Reinforcement
b c d e T: Top Reinforcement
0.20 Ln 0.22 Ln 0.30 Ln 0.33 Ln L: Distance between Axes of Columns
Ln : Clear Distance between Axes of Columns
Figure (7-4-a) Typical details of reinforcement of flat slabs
7-14
Chapter 7
Field Strip
Without Drop Panel
Column Strip
Field Strip
With Drop Panel
Column Strip
Length of Bars From Face of Column

Minimum Length
Maximum Length
a b c d e f g
0.14 Ln 0.20 Ln 0.22 Ln 0.30 Ln 0.33 Ln 0.20 Ln 0.24 Ln
* Minimum Length of Reinforcement for Flat Slabs
* Top and Bottom Reinforcement of End Panels Shall be Extended to
Figure (7-4-b) Alternative reinforcement details of flat slabs

using Bent-up Steel Reinforcement
7-15
Chapter 7
(C) (C)
(D) (D)
(A) (A)
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C) (C)
(D) (D)
A Top Reinforcement Mesh

B BottomReinforcement Mesh L or L':Distance Between Axes of Columns
C Additional Top Column Strip RFT L n or L n ': Clear Distance Between

Axes of Columns
D Additional BottomCol. Strip RFT
Figure (7-4-c) Alternative reinforcement details of flat slabs

using steel meshes combined with additional reinforcing bars
7-16
Chapter 7
Tension Steel
Tension Steel
For Slabs For Beams
Figure(7-5) Details of Reinforcement of Beam and Slab Corner
7-17
Chapter 7
Figure (7-6) Details Of Reinforcement Of Waffle Slabs
7-18
Chapter 7
Splice (B) Splice (B) Splice (B)
Less Than
1: 6
Less Than 150 mm
Less Than 250 mm

Less Than 250 mm
Less Than 250 mm
Less Than 300 mm
Column Reinforcement
Splices
Figure (7-7-a) Typical details of reinforcement of columns for limited

ductility cases
7-19
Chapter 7
Lo
So
Upper Floor Level
Lo
So
Clear Height of Column
Bar Splices at different Locations

At Mid-Height of Column
Lo
So
Lower Floor Level
Lo
So
Lo & So Shall be in accordance with

Section ( 6-8-2-3-2)
Figure (7-7-b) Reinforcement of columns having adequate ductility

and subjected to large horizontal forces
7-20
Chapter 8
CHAPTER 8
QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE OF
REINFORCED AND PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE
WORKS

This chapter considers the quality control procedures for reinforced
and pre-stressed concrete works. These procedures guarantee the good
quality and utilization of the materials as well as the attainment of the
requirements and specifications of design codes, construction requirements
and practices in order to meet the necessary targeted level of performance.
The quality control of the project could be achieved through the
following:
- The internal quality control measures within the executing institute.
- The external quality control measures dictated by owner.
For pre-stressed concrete, in particular; the additional provisions
according to section (10.6) shall be adopted.
8-2 Definitions
8-2-1 Quality target
It is the quality that achieves the targeted serviceability for which the
building has been designed and constructed.
8-2-2 Quality assurance

It is the management tool which guarantee the satisfaction of the
owner and users. It is composed of the systems, plans and programs
necessary to assure the compliance of the constructed building with its
targeted services as well as the compliance of all constructions works with
the requirements of specifications and contract documents.
8-2-3 Quality control

It may be defined as the production tool composed of the group of
adopted procedures/tests that assure the compliance of materials (concrete
constituents) properties and concrete manufacturing to standard
specifications and project requirements.
8-1
Chapter 8
8-2-4 Quality manual

It is the document that elucidates the policy of all the participating
parties, and explains the quality system.
8-2-5 Quality plan

It is a specific plan, approved by owner or consultant engineer,
prepared for a specific project. The plan comprises the quality objectives
and requirements as well as a detailed explanation for the work procedures
and the organizing relationships between the different parties involved in
the project.
8-2-6 Quality system

It is the organizational structure of the participating parties in the
project. It comprises the responsibilities, procedures, operations and
required resources to achieve quality objectives.
The owner is at the top of the quality system where the system comprises
the internal policy of the owner, contracting procedures, quality plan (for the
specific project) and quality manual attested by the project working team.
8-2-7 Elements and requirements of a quality system

Table (8-1) shows the elements of the quality system, while table (8-2)
shows its requirements and the responsibilities during the phases of the project.
Table 8-1 Elements of Quality System

Document Content The party
responsible for the
document & its
development
Quality plan - Owner policy All participating
- Quality objectives parties identified by
- Scope of work the owner are
- Organizational relationships required to prepare
- Responsibilities & role of all a quality manual.
involved parties
Quality manual - Elements pertaining scope of
work of participating parties.
- Work programs
- Action steps of work
8-2
Chapter 8
Table 8-2 : Requirements of quality control and quality assurance

during all stages of the project
Ser. Project stages Requirements The responsible for the Notes
No. quality system stage
1 Concept & To focus & define The owner * should check How far the project
feasibility quality target the quality plan and attest it is needed. How the
studies for the project is meeting
project the owner needs &
identifying the
performance
requirements.
2 Design Specify quality Designer provides his quality Technical solutions
manual to the owner to be
attested
3 Planning for Quality assurance The owner * should check Preparation of bid
construction quality plan and bid documents which
documents which guarantee should include the
achieving the quality requirements of
requirements achieving the target
quality
4 Accreditation Checking the The owner attests lab (or Identifying the
of material compliance of accredited labs for project) standard
resources material and its quality manual specifications and
sources to the project the
standard acceptance/rejection
specifications limits for the used
materials
5 Construction Production and The owner * attests the Planning of
quality control quality manual of contractors activities for
or the sub-contractors construction and the
involved in the project follow-up
6 Delivery Verification of The owner * confirms the Quality of the
Quality compliance of the executed building & quality
work to the requested quality of the building
documentation
7 Operation Maintain quality The owner * attests the Periodical
& use periodical maintenance plan inspection and
of the project maintenance
* The owner or project director or the engineer whom he assigns
8-2-8 Quality assurance system

It is a management control system that organizes obligations, policies,
responsibilities and owner requirements specified by the Quality Assurance
Plan and which is included in Quality Assurance Program. It presents
8-3
Chapter 8
quality control processes affecting the pre-mentioned activities and

requirements.
8-2-9 Quality assurance plan

It is a project plan prepared and specified by the owner and his
consultant or a quality control engineer. It comprise the owner's policies
and objectives of quality objectives as well as a detailed description for the
work plan and organizational relationships which guarantee the owner the
start of his project according to a planned system to which the participating
parties will abide .
8-2-10 Quality assurance program

It is a document that determines policies, practices, and work
procedures which agree with quality requirements and contracting
documentations.
8-2-11 Internal quality control

Internal quality control is continuously implemented in order to
guarantee the achievement of the required specifications for the concrete
and its constituents. It should be carried out by knowledgeable specialists
usually employed by the executing institute. In case of unavailability of
experienced personal at the executing institute, help from experts not
affiliated to the executing institute is sought to perform the internal quality
control tasks.
8-2-12 External quality control

The external quality control is carried out by parties affiliated to the
owner and do not have any contractual form with the executing institute.
The external quality control tasks comprise design review, special tests on
materials (if necessary) and unannounced periodical inspection during all
stages of the project.
8-2-13 Quality control requirements

Quality control and quality assurance is an integrated process that
starts with the early investigation of the projects feasibility and continues
through the preliminary project, the design, construction and turn in
stages as well as the operational period of the project. Table (8-2) shows
briefly the quality control and assurance requirements during the different
stages of the project's life span.
8-4
Chapter 8
8-3 Technical Inspection
8-3-1 General
Technical inspection is the design and preparation of a program that
assures the fulfillment of materials and concrete structure to the
requirements specified in the contract documentations. The technical
inspection covers mainly the following items:
- Concrete stockage, sources and tests.
- Site, inventory, equipment, scaffolds.
- Concrete mix design, constituents proportions, control, acceptance and
testing.
- External factors and operating environment.
- Technical team necessary to run the site.
8-3-2 Inspector
8-3-2-1 External technical Inspector

The external technical aud inspector is affiliated to the owner or the
supervision consultant office or the certified bodies or governmental
organizations responsible for quality control in the construction industry.
He should not be affiliated to the contractor or the internal auditor in any
form, hence , his fees are bared by the organization he is representing .
Subsequently the external technical auditor is chosen from among
unbiased experts that posses independent opinions.
8-3-2-2 Internal technical Inspector

Internal auditing must be performed by qualified personnel other than
those directly supervising the audited activities. Qualifications of the
internal inspector shall be approved by the consultant of the project and
must fulfill the requirements of the special organization that issue
certificates in that regards.
8-5
Chapter 8
8-3-3 Material technical inspection
8-3-3-1 Phases of technical inspection
A Outside the site

For major projects of special nature, production sites or supply
sources must be inspected where samples are to be taken and periodically
tested within the scope of technical inspection. Such inspection and its tests
are insufficient and must be complemented with the periodical material
inspection at delivery to project site. Contracts for inspection outside the
project site with the producer or supplier must consider testing of materials
at the same form and conditions it is delivered to the project site.
B Primary inspection
The primary inspection is conducted in order to evaluate the efficiency
and appropriateness of equipment, site facilities and testing laboratory for
internal quality control (Human resources laboratory capabilities). Such
evaluation is according to the requirements identified in the project
specifications, standard specifications for materials and concrete code.
C Periodic technical inspection

The periodic technical inspection is conducted in order to fulfill the
production and delivery requirements as well as internal and external
quality control requirements. Hence, the periodic inspection does not start
unless the results of primary inspection are acceptable. The periodic
inspection is implemented without any notification at time intervals in
accordance with the nature and program schedule of the project. Also
periodic inspection is conducted on materials at site or at specialized
laboratories outside the site. In all cases, the internal inspection revisions or
modifications should be promptly accepted by the internal quality control
inspector.
D Additional tests for technical inspection

Additional tests are conducted in any of the following cases:
1 - Incompliance of materials with specifications limits of routine test.
2 - Cease of use of materials or operation at site for durations that exceed
allowable storage periods.
8-6
Chapter 8
3 - The contractor's violation to storage specification and conditions for

material preservation at site.
At each case, the technical inspector determines the nature and limits
of additional tests according to the targeted objective.
8-3-3-2 Attesting of concrete materials
A Accreditation of sources
The external technical inspector accredits the suggested sources for
materials and its capacity for fulfilling the project requirements. Based
upon such accreditation, the responsible contractor shall contract the
suppliers and producers. The accreditation should be supported by other
information of which the most important are producer certificates, results
of material testing at specialized laboratories and supply conditions.
However, the accreditation of sources in any form does not exempt the
contractor from being responsible for delivery of materials to the site with
specifications less than those necessary for the accreditation of source since
the contractor is responsible for the compliance of supplied materials
delivered from the accredit sources or from other sources that may need to
be accredited.
B Acceptance based on certificate of origin

Sometimes the delivered materials are from suppliers of known
outstanding experience in producing these materials. In such cases,
materials may be accepted based on the certificate of origin to which all
necessary information for attesting must be appended. The necessary
information comprises results of quality control tests at production site, test
results in specialized labs and information regarding date , size of sales and
utilization record .
The acceptance based on certificate of origin will not limit the
periodic or additional testing at any stage according to the opinion of the
technical inspector.
C Rejection of materials
In cases where materials do not comply with requirements of standard
specifications (referred to some of these specifications in appendix three of
the manual of laboratory tests for concrete materials ) and/or project
specifications, the materials must not be used. Rejected batches of
materials must be disposed from stockage areas or at least isolated. The site
8-7
Chapter 8
engineer or quality inspector must provide the technical inspector with their
affirmation of the reasons based upon which the material was rejected.
Tests may be repeated where test results are doubtful and hence material
was rejected. In such cases, the test must be conducted on two separate
samples taken at the same time; both samples must pass the test separately.
Eventually, the acceptance report must comprise the unaccepted results that
rendered the material unacceptable and led to the retesting.
8-4 Test laboratory

Establishment of site laboratories depend on the size and nature of the
project as well as on the degree of targeted quality. The consultant engineer
will determine the level of lab facilities which should be specified in the
project documents. It is also possible to conduct some tests at other
specialized laboratories. In all cases the laboratory equipment must be
calibrated otherwise we limit the testing to certified laboratories.
8-5 Structural design review

Construction works shall not be started until the compliance of the
structural design with this code and other construction works (architectural,
electromechanical ..etc) is verified and attested by the authorized party
according to the applied relevant legislations and regulations. The design
will not be modified without the approval of the designer or the consultant
engineer and attesting party.
8-6 Quality control procedure

After the achievement of the technical inspection to structural design
requirements, construction monitoring and quality control of execution
shall be adopted to achieve necessary requirements regarding preparation
and handling of samples and materials incorporated in concrete production
at its three stages; before casting, at casting and after casting.
8-6-1 Preparation and handling of materials
A Sampling requirements
Sampling of each material shall be in accordance with Egyptian
Standards, ES, in order to completely represent stocks out of which the
samples have been drawn.
8-8
Chapter 8
B Sampling sources
Samples are collected from the following sources according to its use,
site status and the point of view of the responsible for the samples:
- Material batches at delivery to site.
- Material stocks at site.
- Suppliers storing locations.
- Producers storing locations.
C Samples handling
In handling the samples, one shall consider the following :
1 - Adoption of all necessary provisions that secure the delivery of the
samples to the laboratories without subjecting the samples to changes
such as partial loss of sample , subjecting samples to abnormal
climatic conditions , damage of sample containers , loss of cover ,
intermixture of different samples , seepage of fluid materials .etc.
2 - Use of clear undoubtful marking of samples as well as obtaining the
signature of technical inspector and either the responsible for quality
control or site engineers (whoever represents either of them).
3 - Registering the samples in the relevant special record which shall
comprise :
- Producer or construction site.
- Location from which samples were drawn.
- Inventory volume if possible.
- Number and/or size of samples.
- Distinguishing marks for material source (local or imported).
- Distinguishing mark or code by sample collector.
- Tests required to be conducted and name of laboratory.
- Location and date at which samples were collected and tested.
- Production date and/or expiration date.
- Other information regarded by sample collector.
- Signatures of all of the above.
8-9
Chapter 8
8-6-2 Monitoring and quality control for concrete constituents

materials
8-6-2-1 Cement
Site engineer is not allowed to receive on site and store cement
batches until he confirms its compliance with the requirements of the
project specification and the Egyptian Standards, ES. The engineer has the
right to run tests on similar samples at the site laboratory or any specialized
laboratory (tests are to be conducted according to relevant standard
specification depending on the cement type). Cement shall be stored
according to the Section (9-2-1) after making sure that the cement delivered
first shall be used first and that torn, opened or hardened cement packages
shall not be used with due consideration of Section (2-2-1)
8-6-2-2 Aggregates
Aggregates samples must be monitored and undergo the quality
control procedures before storage and stockage at site. Aggregates samples
are not approved until their compliance with the requirements of the project
and Egyptian Standards are confirmed (type wise and quality wise)
For major projects, vists to aggregates supply sources and their
validity is considered part of the inspection scheme.
During construction, aggregate batches are not to be unloaded before
confirming the compliance of the batches with the certified samples
through visual inspection and some lab tests conducted at site laboratory. In
cases where doubts that delivered batches show acceptable differences
from certified samples, such acceptable differences must be recorded and
reported to the engineer responsible for concrete mix design so that he may
change proportions of concrete constituents if necessary.
8-6-2-3 Water used in concrete manufacturing

Water used in concrete manufacturing must be tested for validation as
stated in Section (2-2-3). In cases where non-potable water will be used,
tests on both setting time and concrete strength using the unpotable water
shall be conducted. These tests shall be conducted in accordance with
Section (2-2-3) where each test is conducted twice (at the same time, using
the same attested cement type for the project and under the same
conditions). In one of these two tests the intended type of water shall be
used while in the second test potable or distilled water is used.
8-10
Chapter 8
8-6-2-4 Admixtures
The properties of the admixtures shall agree with the limits specified
in its standard specifications or in the specifications agreed upon. The use
of admixtures follows to a great extent- the brochures issued by the
producers. In addition, the concrete constituent proportions shall be
investigated through testing confirmative mixes where the effectiveness of
the admixtures on fresh and hardened concrete properties is confirmed.
Also, Section (2-2-4) shall be considered.
8-6-2-5 Concrete curing materials

Concrete shall be cured using water previously identified in Section
(8-6-2-3). Also, concrete may be cured by surface sealing materials which
are considered one of the main factors controlling the retention of mixing
water inside the concrete rather than evaporating through the concrete
surface. However, before allowing the use of such materials, one must test
it and confirm its compliance to the specified limits in the specifications.
8-6-2-6 Reinforcing steel bars

It is recommendable to check the quality of reinforcing steel bars and
grids and their compliance with the relevant Egyptian Standards at the
factory. The reinforcing steel bars and grides must be delivered to site
showing the distinguishing marks and shall be accompanied by the batch
information card issued by the factory or from supply storage locations or
from the institutes supervising the testing process. For pre-stressed concrete
steels, one shall refer to Section (10-6-3).
The site engineer shall check the delivered batches of reinforcing steel
bars or grids and record any visible rust, oil, grease and damage inflicted
during loading and unloading as well as necessary corrective actions before
use. etc. Samples are taken for testing from batches supplied to the site at
the rates indicated in table (8-4-A). The samples are collected and tested
according to the testing guide appended to this code, and its modification.
The site engineer shall also consider that quality control for
reinforcing steel bars and grids is not only based on compliance with limits
in the Egyptian Standards, but also on necessary provisions during handling
at the stages of storage , cleaning , cutting , forming , distinguishing ,
collecting , forming of frames and welding if applicable . These stages
must be carefully planned and executed according to the requirements of
detailing and shop drawing or its appendices shown in Section (9-6).
8-11
Chapter 8
8-6-3 Monitoring and quality control before concrete casting

The internal inspector for quality control shall not allow concrete
casting until he confirms the fulfillment of the requirements of the
preparation phase which include the following:
- Survey works
- Efficiency & appropriateness of equipment
- Approval of materials and their sources
- Stocking
- Concrete mix design
- Fill & excavation works
- Foundation works
- Form works & scaffolding
- Reinforcement
- Joints
- Openings and embedded items
- Cleaning of form works surface just before casting
- Determination of tests dictated by monitoring and quality control of
materials.
8-6-4 Monitoring and quality control during concrete casting

Monitoring and quality control during casting of concrete comprises:
- Proportioning of concrete mix constituents
- Taking necessary provisions for unusual conditions such as casting in
hot or cold weather, casting below water surface, pumping concrete
- Homogeneity of concrete mixes
- Handling and casting of concrete
- Concrete compaction
- Concrete finish
- Preparation and casting of fresh and hard concrete test samples at site.
8-12
Chapter 8
- Monitoring and recording the working conditions at site, equipment

performance, atmospheric conditions as well as unusual conditions that
led to stoppage of work.
8-6-5 Monitoring and quality control after concrete casting

Monitoring and quality control after concrete casting comprises:
- Concrete curing and taking necessary protection measures
- Dismantling of forms and scaffolding at determined time
- Visual inspection of concrete structure after dismantling of forms and
scaffoldings.
8-6-6 Levels of quality control

The level of quality control is determined based upon the coefficient
of variation (v) as shown in table (8-3)
Table (8-3) : The value of coefficient of variation corresponding to the

level of Quality control
Level of quality Excellent Good Acceptable Poor
control
Coefficient of Less than 10-15 15-20 Greater
variation (V) % 10 than 20
8-7 Traceability and Non-Conformity
8-7-1 Traceability
In determining the main reason for a problem at construction, one shall
determine the range and elements affected by the problem. Hence, a
traceability system must exist through which one traces each of the following:
1 - The use of materials in concrete manufacture.
2 - Individuals responsible for work, inspection and quality control.
3 - Equipment used in a specific task.
4 - Determination of the method used in a specific task.
8-13
Chapter 8
8-7-2 Controlling Non-Conforming cases

The control of non-conformity is divided into:
8-7-2-1 Determination of non-conformity as well as isolation and

distinction of non conforming materials
This is applied to materials used in concrete manufacture or any other
activity not fulfilling project requirements or its specification. The
contractor shall isolate non conforming materials and distinguish them
from conforming materials.
8-7-2-2 Determination of the required corrective actions

Upon the approval of the project supervisor or the owner
representative, the corrective action is one of the following:
- Repair of defected element to an acceptable status (this status might not
be of the same project conditions and requirements).
- Rework which is the resumption of the main requirements through re-
operation.
- Acceptance as is, in a way that does not affect the performance
requirements or fitness for use or safety.
- Down grading which is the use in a different item possessing lower level
of requirements as compared to the original item.
- Rejection which is an unacceptable non-conformity which does not
fulfill project requirements even after repair or rework.
8-7-2-3 Determination of the possible reasons for non-conformity

Under the supervision of the owner or his representative, the
contractor shall investigate the reasons that led to the non-conformity and
take the necessary provisions to limit or discontinue future non
conformity.
8-7-2-4 Re-inspection
Repaired elements shall be re-inspected according to its new status.
New rejection/acceptance criteria are determined by the party conducting
the retesting where the original requirements were deviated from.
Reworked elements shall be re-inspected according to the original
requirements where no deviations are allowed.
8-14
Chapter 8
8-8 Records
The quality control system for concrete works shall comprise methods
of recording documentation, its preservation as well as the kept period. The
contractor shall guarantee the endorsements and signatures by the
responsible parties of all records or reports or documents. All kept items
must be indexed to facilitate its future access.
The following represents the list of documents which shall be kept by
the contractor within the quality control system for concrete works:
8-8-1 General documents

- Contract documents
- Purchase documents
- Issued instructions regarding quality (quality plans, provisions, etc)
- Detailed drawings
- Design drawings
- As Built drawings
- Project specifications
- Applications and requests for changes
8-8-2 Documents regarding quality control and assurance

- Laboratory test reports
- Reports on repair of equipment and machinery
- Forms for inspection and approval of works
- Codes and standard specifications used in the project
- Documents for inspection of project materials
- Certificates of origin
- Non-conformity cases and methods of handling.
- Records for training and qualifications of quality control team.
- Reports on concrete mix designs.
- Results of statistical evaluation.
- Photographs for the important phases of the project.
- Calibration reports for equipment and machinery.
8-15
Chapter 8
8-9 Concrete tests
8-9-1 Test bases

Fresh concrete samples are drawn form mixes at arrival to site or at
the location of site mixers. Each sample shall be composed of a mix of
different portions drawn during unloading). Fresh concrete tests shall be
conducted according to the specified fresh concrete requirements in the
projects specifications. In cases where it is possible to run tests other than
those specified in projects specifications, the equivalent properties
correlations shall be considered. The hardened concrete specimens for
compressive strength are prepared according to the Egyptian standards
number 1658/1991 and its modifications. The hardened specimens shall be
prepared just after testing the fresh concrete and assuring its compliance to
the requirements indicated in project specifications.
In cases where moulds of different shape and/or size than those
specified in the specifications are used, results must be adjusted to the
standard specimens. In such cases, correction factors of section (2-3-2)
shall be used as guide.
In all cases, specimens must be prepared according to provisions
specified in the Egyptian standards number1658/1991 at all stages; mould
filling, number of layers of filling, concrete vibration and compaction
concrete surfacing, preservation of moulds in first stages of hardening,
concrete curing and transportation of moulds to laboratory for testing.
8-9-2 Primary tests on concrete

Before construction of concrete works, concrete, whether mixed at site
or central, shall undergo primary testing at its fresh and hardened forms.
Construction works shall not be permitted before confirming the
compliance of concrete with mix requirements of section (2-6-3-2). If the
concrete will not fulfill the requirements, the mix designer shall be notified
of the test results so that he modifies the mix design. This cycle shall be
repeated until the confirmative mix after its latest modification fulfill the
requirements of both the fresh and hardened forms.
8-9-3 Concrete tests during construction

Fulfillment of the concrete for the requirements specified in the
project specifications must be confirmed. The site engineer shall inspect
every mix before casting by conducting tests on fresh concrete samples.
Also, the site engineer shall prepare hardened concrete specimens
8-16
Chapter 8
according to the rate specified in the project specifications or the minimum

rates indicated in the tables 8-4-A, B and C or if necessary, which ever is
higher.
Table (8-4-A) shows the repeatability of quality control tests of
concrete constituents and reinforcing bars and grids. The table provides the
minimum required limit of tests for each material as well as the standard
specifications for the necessary tests.
Table (8-4-B) shows the repeatability of quality control tests for ready
mixed concrete or concrete mixed at site for fresh concrete according to the
test plan indicated in the table which shows the type of test, the standard
specification for conducting the test as well as the minimum limit for the
repeatability and acceptance limits.
Table (8-4-C) shows the repeatability of quality control tests for ready
mixed concrete or concrete mixed at site for hardened concrete according
to the test plan indicated in the table which shows the type of test, the
standard specification for conducting the test as well as the minimum limit
for the repeatability and acceptance limits.
The tests are part of technical inspection of section (8-3). The concrete
will be considered in compliance with the Characteristic Strength (fcu)
during construction if the test results fulfill the hardened concrete
evaluation requirements of section (2-6-5-2).
8-9-4 Non destructive tests

As guidance, one may revert to non-destructive tests such as rebound
hammer, ultrasonic or any other non-destructive test. Where the
compressive test results do not fulfill the strength requirements or where
concrete strength in an element for which test results are not available or
will be doubtful. The use of calibration equipment shall be considered in
addition to fulfilling the requirements of all provisions related to the use
equipment as well as section (8-2) and (8-3) of the manual of Laboratory
Tests for Concrete Materials.
8-9-5 Concrete core test

Concrete Cores may be taken in cases where the compressive strength do
not fulfill the strength requirements or where concrete strength in an element
for which test results are not available will be doubtful. Cores shall be taken,
prepared, tested and test results shall be evaluated according to Egyptian
Standards number 1658/1995 with due consideration of test (8-1) of the
8-17
Chapter 8
manual for Laboratory Tests for Concrete Materials. The core results shall be
considered acceptable if the calculated average strength for three cores will be
greater than or equal to 75% of the required strength and if the calculated
strength of any of the three cores will not less than 65% of the required
strength.
Table 8-4-A : Repeatability of Q/C tests of concrete reinforced

concrete
Material Test The number in the Minimum limit of repeating the
Guide for Laboratory test
Tests for Concrete
Materials Issued 2003
Third appendix for
code
Physical & mechanical At the beginning of delivery,
Cement properties whenever the source is
Setting time 1-6 changed, every one month
Compressive strength of 1-16 stockage & whenever necessary
cement mortar
Soundness 1-7
Aggregate Wear resistance 2-17 At accreditation of the source,
Crushing coefficient 2-16 at the beginning of delivery,
Impact factor 2-19 and when source is changed
Alkali activity of 2-26 Whenever necessary
carbonate rocks
Visual inspection Every batch
Grain size distribution 2-2 Every 100 m3 delivered
Clay and fine material 2-11, 2-12 Every 100 m3 delivered
Organic impurities for 2-14 At the beginning of delivery
fine aggregate and every 500 m3 of each
Sulphate content SO3 2-22-2 batch.
Chlorides content Cl 2-22-1
Soundness 2-24
Mixing water Determination of 3-6 At the beginning of use for the
suspended materials first time (except the potable
Chlorides CI 3-2 water) and when changing the
Sulphate SO3 3-3 source.
Total dissolved salts 3-1
Additives Homogeneity 4-1 Before contracting & at
requirements Delivery of each batch
Performance 4-2
requirements
Reinforcing Number of Number of
steel and grids samples for a samples for a
batch of 50 batch more
tons & less than 50 tons
Dimensions & weights 5-1 2 3
Tension 5-2 2 3
Cold bend 5-3 2 3
Special tests 1 1
8-18
Chapter 8
For carbonate aggregate, a certificate shall be provided by supplier.

The certificate shall show that the above tests had been carried out on
aggregate at quarries in addition to dispersed X-Ray analysis and
petrographic analysis. Also the certificate shall report the percentage of
dolomite in the lime-rock.
Table # 8-4-B : Repeatability of quality control tests for fresh concrete

Test Test Procedure Min. limit of repeating the test Limit of
Ready-mix Concrete mixed at acceptance and
concrete site rejection
Confirmative Second Before delivering to Before execution Check the validity
mix Chapter of this site for every grade for every grade of the mix
Code
Slump E.S.S Required slump
Evaluation 1658/1989 When taking strength samples less than 50 mm
and tolerance + or
10 mm
Required slump
50-100 mm and
tolerance + or -20
mm
Slump greater than
100 mm, tolerance
+ or -30 mm.
Trapped Tests guide, When conducting When conducting the Item 2
air The two test the confirmative confirmative mix, once 3%, 2%
6-6, 6-7 mix, once every every month in case of
month, and when using additives, when
changing the type changing the type of
of additives additives and once
every three months in
case where additives are
not used
Concrete Test guide. When conducting When conducting the
density the confirmative confirmative mix
Test 6-9 mix and once
daily
Temperature ----- Temperature is Not more than 35
measured for degree centigrade
every sample on
which the slump
test is conducted
Special tests As per project According to the Achieving the
specification project requirements of
specifications project
specifications
Note : For ready mixed concrete, the sample is drawn from the middle or
after discharging 15% of batch, while for concrete mixed at side the
sample is drawn from the middle third of the mixed quantity at site.
8-19
Chapter 8
Table 8-4-C : Quality control tests of hardened concrete.

Test Specification Minimum Limit for repetition Limits of
of test acceptance &
rejection
Ready Concrete Mixed
mix at site
concrete
Compressive E.S.S At different concrete grade or Fulfilling the
Strength 1658/1989 structural elements requirements of
Half the number (foundations, walls, columns, article
of samples tested beams, slabs). Six cubes are 2-6-5-2
at the age of one drawn from the first 50 m3 and
week, and the six cubes for every extra
other half after 28 100m3 on the same casting day
days.
Test after 56
or 90 days can be
conducted
according to the
wish of the
consultant
engineer
Special tests Specifications As specified in project Achievement of
followed in the specification requirements of
project project
specification.
Note : For ready mixed concrete, the sample is drawn from the middle or
after discharging 15% of batch, while for concrete mixed at side the
sample is drawn from the middle third of the mixed quantity at site.
8-9-6 Load tests of concrete structures and elements thereof

The test shall be conducted on beams, slabs and ceilings of reinforced
concrete structures. The test shall also be conducted on the structure after
completion if it is specified in the project specifications or in cases of
doubtful structural integrity. In all cases, the test shall not be conducted
before the elapse of six weeks from the last concrete casting date. The
vertical deflection shall be recorded before and after loading of the tested
part of the structure with an equivalent load equal to 0.85 (1.4 permanent
Load + 1.6 Life Load).
The equivalent load shall be applied on four almost equal increments
where impact is completely prohibited during application of load.
8-20
Chapter 8
The permanent load comprises the weight of the element and any
other permanent load such as flooring and partitions. Hence, the actual
existing permanent load at testing is deducted from the equivalent load.
Sufficient vertical supports shall be provided to sustain the total load.
It shall be arranged to allow ample space for the expected deflections of the
tested elements.
The tested structural elements and the neighbouring elements shall be
loaded in such a way as to provide the most critical loading case. Spaces
shall also be provided between the materials providing the load.
The deflections as well as crack widths shall be recorded after 24
hours of total load application. The loads shall then removed and after 24
hours the deflections as well as crack widths shall once again recorded.
The structure shall be considered safe if the following will be fulfilled:
a- If the maximum deflection max in the test element will be less than
or equal to
2
Lt
max (8-1)
2000t
where:
L t : is the span of the tested element in mm. The span in the
case of Flat Slab or two way slabs is the smaller span. As
for cantilevers the span is twice the distance from the
support faces to the end of the cantilever.
T : the element thickness in mm.
b - If the max deflection of the tested element exceeds the value given by
the Equation. 8-1, then the retrieved part of max deflection after 24 hrs
from the removal of the load shall not be less than 75% of the max
deflection. Cracks width shall also be within the allowable range.
c If 75% - at least of the maximum deflection that was recorded
during 24 hrs of loading was not retrieved during 24 hrs after the
removal of the load equivalent to the live load, the test shall be
repeated as previously.
Part of the structure shall be considered unacceptable if at least 75% -
at least of the maximum deflection that was recorded during the second
test was not retrieved or if the cracks width will be wider than allowable.
The load test shall not be repeated before 72 hrs elapse from the moment of
8-21
Chapter 8
removing the load of first test. The test may be conducted on pre-stressed
concrete elements.
If part of the tested structure shows during testing or after removal of
load any undesirable reaction or construction defects, the designer shall
adopt one of the following solutions:
- Use additional supports if possible.
- Possible reduction of the live loads, improve the load distribution, and
rearrange the concentrated loads.
- Possible reduction of the dead loads.
- Possible reduction of the dynamic effect if applicable
The structure shall be considered unacceptable for its purpose of use if
all of the preceding measures could not be implemented
Load tests shall not be conducted on elements not subjected mainly to
bending. The safety of such elements shall be determined through structural
analysis.
8-22
Chapter 9
CHAPTER 9
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
This chapter is concerned with the construction of concrete structures
including the production of good quality concrete satisfying the design
requirements of the project in accordance with the code requirements.
9-1 Handing over and preparation of project site
Site preparation and organization shall be followed according to the
subsequent steps for handing over the project site:
9-1-1 Confirm the acquisition of all permits and approvals before the
commencement of work, also the geological suitability of the site shall be
verified. Special precautions shall be taken in case of the presence of faults,
collapsible areas, or flood pathways, especially in new cities and areas.
9-1-2 Specify the project site according to the general project layout which
indicates the location, dimensions, axes for each structure and its relationship
to other structures. The site shall be cleared from obstacles, including
buildings, trees and foundations which might obstruct the construction of the
structures. The type and quantities of these obstacles shall be specified. In case
of the existence of underground utilities, the site engineer shall contact
appropriate authorities for proper action.
9-1-3 Prepare the leveling grid of the site to determine natural land elevations,
compute cut and fill quantities, and leveling operations. A starting reference
point for surveying shall be specified and maintained intact and clear during
the project construction.
9-1-4 Take security precautions and follow the instructions of industrial
safety.
9-1-5 Site planning and specifying locations of structures, storage areas, and
knowledge of surrounding areas to prepare pathways which shall facilitate
arrival of supplies, equipment, and materials. Identify and secure site
entrances and exits. Supply the site with electricity, water, necessary
maintenance workshops, communication facilities (wired and/or wireless),
fences, closed and open storage facilities and offices for engineers and
workers.
9-1
Chapter 9
9-1-6 After establishing the structures' locations in site, boring holes shall be
performed and soil specimens extracted from different depths according to the
Egyptian code for soil mechanics and foundations, ECP202 and the project
specifications and requirements to confirm the foundation level and soil stress
stated in the structural drawings. The ground water table elevation and
movement and different soil layers shall be evaluated in order to determine the
necessary precautions for dewatering during construction. Special precautions
shall be taken to maintain the safety of neighboring structures during
foundation construction. Proper design shall be made for the lateral earth
support systems before foundation work starts.
9-1-7 The locations of experiments performed before work commencement
shall be located. These experiments include; pumping experiments to test
ground water reservoirs and the appropriate means of ground water disposal,
by constructing a pipe network to divert the ground water away from the
equipment pathways and storage areas sensitive to humidity. Another type of
experiments includes load tests on non-working piles outside of the specified
construction area.
9-2 Materials storage
Materials shall be stored on-site in the storage places in the specified
sites in such a way as to guarantee its safety and to avoid any probable
damages. All materials shall be subjected to quality control measures upon
arrival on-site according to the frequency specified in Table (8-4-a) for quality
control to ensure there conformity to the Egyptian Standards, ES.
9-2-1 Cement
1 - Cement shall be delivered on-site either in tight bags or closed containers
that shall be stored in away to protect cement from moisture and direct
sunlight. Different types of cement shall be stored separately.
2 - In case of storing bagged cement, the bags shall not be in direct contact
with the ground. Bags shall be staked to permit continuous ventilation.
The maximum number of stacked bags shall not exceed 10. The
production date shall be written on each stack allowing the use of earlier
produced cement first in accordance with section (8-6-2-1).
3 - In case of delivering cement in containers, the cement shall not be used
until its temperature is lower than 75oC.
9-2
Chapter 9
4 - Cement shall be tested upon delivery to the site before use, and if stored
at site for a period exceeding one month, even if properly stored, to
ensure that its properties conforms with the Egyptian Standards, ES
according to Table (8-4-a).
9-2-2 Aggregate
Small and large aggregates shall be stored separately in a manner to
avoid its pollution and mixing with other materials and according to the
gradation pre-specified in the project mixtures design for projects that require
special or high grade concrete, hard well-drained flooring shall be
manufactured to store the aggregate according to the different sizes and in
agreement with the required grading.
The aggregate shall be visually inspected before storage. The acceptance
certificate issued from the quarry for use in concrete works must be revised.
The aggregate shall be insured to be free from organic materials such as grass,
plants, and roots. Also, the aggregate shall be checked not to be mixed with
foreign materials or silt blocks ether big or small. It shall also be verified that
the aggregate surface shall not be covered by fine layer of silt. The suitability
of bottom layers of stored aggregate and accumulation of fine materials shall
be checked.
9-2-3 Reinforcing steel
The reinforcing steel shall be stored such that it is protected from
exposure to corrosion by covering it to prevent its exposure to humidity or
water. The reinforcing steel shall not be in direct contact with the floor so it
shall not be exposed to any materials that affect its bond with the concrete. It
is preferable to provide the reinforcing steel directly before use.
The integrity of the reinforcing steel shall be visually corroborated before
storage on-site. The surface of the reinforcing steel shall be free from oil or
fats or organic materials as well as corrosion.
9-2-4 Admixtures
The admixtures shall be stored in their original containers labeled with all
admixtures information. Storage shall be in accordance with the conditions
listed in the product datasheet, taking special precautions for the maximum
storage temperature. Admixtures shall not be stored in open air, taking into
consideration items stated in section (8-6-2-4) .
9-3
Chapter 9
Any special usage instructions or necessary safety precautions (e.g. if

additives are caustic, poisonous or corrosive), shall be stated on the label.
Any recommendations or steps to be followed before use shall be
reported especially in the case of long storage periods (e.g. stirring or rolling
the barrelsect.).
9-2-5 Water
Potable water shall be used in concrete mixes. In case there is no
continuous source of water on-site, water can be stored in closed containers
that do not permit the water to be polluted with harmful materials such as oil,
acids, organic materials, or any materials that could have a deteriorative effect
on concrete components or reinforcing steel.
9 - 3 Materials measurements
The degree of accuracy of measurement devices for concrete materials
depends on several factors according to the project size, production rate, and
the concrete specifications. These devices are periodically calibrated. The
allowable tolerances shall be considered as reported in section (9-8).
9-3-1 Cement
Cement calibration by volume shall not be permitted. It is preferable that
concrete mixing container accommodate whole number of cement bags. In
case of using loose cement it shall be measured by weight using calibrated
accurate scales.
9-3-2 Aggregate
Aggregate shall be measured by weight as it yields more accurate results.
It shall be permitted to measure aggregate by volume using measuring boxes
with specific capacity. These boxes shall be filled without compaction. The
top and bottom of the surface of the aggregate (inside the box) shall be leveled
with the box sides.
9-3-3 Water
Water shall be accurately measured according to required values. The
amount of aggregate moisture shall be considered.
9-4
Chapter 9
9-3-4 Admixtures
Additives shall be mixed according to the quantities specified in the
design mix. Additives shall be measured accurately.
9 4 Scaffolds and forms

The following requirements shall be fulfilled when executing scaffolding
and form works:
a - Knowledge of the types of forms and scaffolds used by both the designer
and the contractor.
b - Providing sufficient safety for all the concrete structure components
during preparation, lying reinforcing steel, pouring, and hardening period
till the time of scaffolds removal.
c - In case of openings in ceilings, beams, and walls for air conditioning
pathways or pipes or otherwise, these openings shall be accounted for in
the scaffolds before laying the reinforcing steel or pouring the concrete.
d - Following instructions of industrial safety for all the workers and
supervisors during the execution with the availability of inspection and
monitoring by easely and safely.
9-4-1 Design, preparation and setup of forms and scaffolds
All forms and scaffolds shall be designed and prepared to satisfy the
following:
9-4-1-1 Scaffolds, supports, and ties shall be stable to maintain the position of
the concrete components in their proper place
9-4-1-2 Forms shall be rugged, and tight to prevent the leakage of cement and
water mixture (Laitance) from the concrete during different work stages.
9-4-1-3 If forms were exposed to sun and weathering conditions for prolonged
periods before concrete is poured, it shall be checked to ensure there are no
distortions or changes in its dimensions.
9-4-1-4 Tying the supports especially the vertical ones so they shall not be
affected by horizontal shocks caused by the movement of workers or
equipment or the thrust force resulting from pumping the concrete or wind
load and vibrations from the equipment used at work.
9-5
Chapter 9
9-4-1-5 Vertical supports rest on stable ground having a bearing capacity

proportional to the applied load.
9-4-1-6 In case of using scaffolds or forms of a special nature, they have to be
implemented according to design drawings and specifications for scaffolds
type. They shall also be inspected before laying the reinforcing steel.
9-4-1-7 Cambering the bottom surface of beams and slabs forms according to
the information in the project documents. In case this information is not
available, the forms shall be cambered for spans equal or greater than 8 meter
by (1/300) to (1/500) of the span length. For cantilevers with an unsupported
length that exceeds 1.5 meter, the camber is approximately (1/150) of the
cantilever length.
9-4-1-8 The tolerances for the inside dimensions of the forms i.e. dimensions
of the concrete cross sections - shall not exceed the values stated in section (9-
8-3).
9-4-1-9 Forms shall be carefully cleaned from inside i.e. surface in contact
with the concrete- before the reinforcing steel is laid and directly before
pouring concrete. Cleaning shall be performed by removing the dust and
garbage using water or compressed air. In case of columns, walls, and deep
beams, openings shall be made at the lowest level in the forms to make
cleaning easier. These openings shall be closed after finishing cleaning
process and directly before pouring concrete.
9-4-1-10 In case of wooden forms, surfaces in contact with concrete shall be
sprayed with water before pouring to prevent the wood from absorbing water
from the concrete mix.
9-4-1-11 It is preferable to paint or spray the surface of the forms that are in
contact with concrete using special materials that prevent the concrete from
sticking to the forms. This shall take place before laying reinforcing steel. This
makes dismantling the form easier and protects the concrete surface from
sticking to the form.
9-4-1-12 Pathways shall be made for the workers such that their movement
does not affect the dimensions and shapes of the reinforcing steel.
9-6
Chapter 9
9-4-2 Dismantling scaffolds and forms

The time between pouring concrete and dismantling forms and scaffolds
is influenced by: temperature, span length, type of cement used, grade of
concrete, type of curing, and the load applied to the structure after
dismantling. Before dismantling, it shall be confirmed that the concrete
strength reached a level that provides sufficient safety with condition that
dismantling shall not cause unacceptable instability or deflection or cracks. If
there were no results from testing concrete cubes before dismantling and no
structural computations regarding deflections and cracks, the forms shall not
be dismantled till a minimum period of time from pouring has passed
according to the following rules:
1 -When using ordinary Portland cement
- It shall not be permitted to dismantle the form sides that only work as a
cover for the concrete before 48 hours from pouring beams, columns and
walls. For special cases such as tunnel or sliding forms, refer to the
design engineer of record.
- It shall not be permitted to dismantle the forms and scaffolds before a
waiting period (in days) equal to twice the span in meters plus 2 days.
When computing the dismantling time for slabs, the span shall be taken
as the shorter length, noting that the waiting period shall not be less than
one week.
- In case of cantilevers, the waiting period before dismantling the form (in
days) shall be equal to four times the cantilever length (in meters) plus
two days, such that the period shall not be less than one week for
cantilevers with an unsupported span of 1.50 meter.
2 -When using rapid hardening Portland cement
- The scaffolds and forms carrying beams and slabs can be dismantled
after half the duration needed when using ordinary Portland cement but
not less than three days. Upon dismantling, concrete shall be capable of
withstanding the stress resulting from the actual acting loads. It is
preferable to conduct compressive strength tests on cubes from the used
concrete before dismantling the scaffolds to make sure that concrete
reached the required strength.
- In case of temperature drop below 15Co and especially when using
rapid hardening Portland cement, caution shall be taken and dismantling
9-7
Chapter 9
forms and scaffolds shall be delayed a suitable period of time, in

addition to the periods mentioned before.
9-4-3 Special precautions for dismantling scaffolds and forms
9-4-3-1 When forms and scaffolds are carrying additional loads as the case of
a floor carrying the weight of a newly poured floor, it shall not be permitted to
dismantle the vertical supports before twenty eight days. All necessary
precautions shall be taken to ensure that the vertical supports rest on ground
that can safely withstand the loads after confirming that the strength of the
concrete meets the project specifications. This duration may be reduced if the
structural safety of all structural components holding forms was confirmed
and after the approval of the design engineer of record.
In special cases such as inverted beams and slabs hanging by tension
columns, the computed duration to dismantle the scaffolds shall start from the
date of pouring the inverted beam or the slab carrying the hanging slab.
9-4-3-2 In all cases when dismantling forms, care shall be taken to ensure the
stability of the structure and avoid the occurrence of any opposing stresses in
its components.
9-4-4 Dismantling tunnel and half tunnel forms
For tunnel and half-tunnel forms, compressive strength tests shall be
conducted before dismantling scaffolds and confirming the conditions
presented in section (9-4-2) are met.
9-4-5 Concrete breaking after form removal
It is completely impermissible to break or make cavities in columns or
make openings in beams or slabs after pouring, or cutting reinforcing steel for
any reason without referring to the design engineer.
9 5 Production, manufacturing, and curing of concrete
9-5-1 Preparation for pouring
9-5-1-1 All mixing and transportation equipment shall be clean. All measuring
equipment shall be calibrated before work commencement. Calibrations shall
be repeated periodically as determined by the supervising engineer every two
months, and after fixing the equipment, or according to the project quality
plan.
9-8
Chapter 9
9-5-1-2 The surface of all wooden forms shall be sprayed with water before
pouring. Hollow blocks shall also be sprayed with water before pouring. In
case of pouring concrete directly on the foundation layer, soil shall be well
sprayed with water after compaction, ensuring there is no water accumulation.
9-5-1-3 Before pouring new concrete onto old one, it is necessary to remove
all broken parts of the old concrete and all materials attached to it. Then the
surface shall be treated to ensure bonding between the old and new concrete.
9-5-1-4 The reinforcement steel shall be clean of harmful materials and free
from corrosion, and the following shall be considered:
- The reinforcement steel bars shall be laid on plastic spacer or pieces of
mortar to maintain the concrete cover during pouring.
- It shall not be permitted to bend the reinforcement steel while pouring.
- Walking shall be completely forbidden on reinforcement steel bars after
fabrication and placing.
9-5-1-5 Before pouring concrete, water shall be removed. In case of
neighboring structures or foundations, consideration shall be taken to the
proper engineering methods and design. If it is necessary to pour concrete
under water level, underwater pouring shall be used after the approval of the
consulting engineer and considering section (9-5-3-6).
9-5-1-6 Pouring, compaction, finishing and backup equipment shall be
prepared. Labor specialized in pouring, leveling surface, compaction, and
finishing concrete shall be arranged in numbers proportional with the rate of
pouring to avoid the occurrence of pouring joints in locations that were not
previously pre-determined.
9-5-2 Mixing concrete ingredients
9-5-2-1 Mechanical mixers shall be used in mixing concrete ingredients.
Mixers capacity shall be proportional to pouring rate so that the ingredient
distribution is homogeneous. The mixer shall be emptied completely before
refilling. The concrete mix shall be transported from the mixer to the pouring
location via conveying belt, or crane or sliding channel or concrete pump. It
shall also be permitted to empty the mixture on a solid table till it is manually
transported. No new concrete shall be poured on the table till the previous mix
is completely moved.
9-9
Chapter 9
9-5-2-2 If it is extremely necessary to manually mix the concrete, it shall be

permitted with the approval of the project consulting engineer of record. In
this case, mixing is performed by stirring the materials using the required
ratios on a flat solid table. Cement shall be mixed with dry aggregate and shall
be stirred a minimum of three times before the water is gradually added in the
amount needed for the mix. Stirring and mixing shall continue till the mix is
homogenous in color and consistency such that the design requirements are
met.
9-5-2-3 When using pre-mixed, self compacting and hot weather concrete, it
shall be necessary to refer to their respective technical specifications, and
approve them from the project consulting engineer of record before usage.
9-5-2-4 The following information shall be written in the field notebook:
- The concrete grade, type and percentages of mix ingredients.
- Number and volume of mixes used in pouring different parts of the
structure.
- Locations of pouring concrete.
- Time and date of mixing.
- Quality control procedures.
9-5-3 Pouring concrete
When pouring concrete, care shall be taken to maintain the stability of
the form. The following precautions shall be taken:
9-5-3-1 The concrete shall be poured after thorough mixing avoiding
segregation. The time between adding water and pouring concrete shall not
exceed 30 minutes at a temperature not exceeding 30oC in the shade or 20
minutes in hot weather. If these times are to be exceeded, it shall be permitted
to use suitable additives while mixing, as approved by the project consulting
engineer of record. The additives shall be added using the predetermined
dosage. These percentages shall be experimentally verified before pouring
starts.
9-5-3-2 Concrete that has set or partially solidified or polluted with foreign
materials shall not be used.
9-5-3-3 The locations of the construction joints (i.e. places of stopping
pouring) shall be determined before pouring starts. Pouring shall continue
9-10
Chapter 9
regularly until finishing the pre-determined section taking into consideration

section (9-5-6).
9-5-3-4 In case of pouring concrete with large thicknesses, care shall be taken
to pour concrete on layers with thicknesses between 300-500 mm. A
mechanical vibrator shall be used to compact concrete. Care shall be taken so
the duration between pouring different layers does not exceed 30 minutes in
normal temperature or 20 minutes in hot temperature, so that the lower layer
does not solidify when pouring the next layer. This duration can be exceeded
if there is enough reinforcement to connect the consecutive layers, or using
temperature lowering additives to decrease the heat generated from the
hydration process. Care shall be taken to keep the amount of water minimal
taking into consideration the requirements in sections (4-2-2-4) and (9-5-1-4).
9-5-3-5 For columns with heights exceeding 3.0 meters, it shall not be
permitted to pour concrete through the full height. One side of the form shall
be divided into parts with height not exceeding 3.0 meters, which shall be
closed periodically so pouring continues. It shall be necessary to compact the
concrete using mechanical vibrator.
9-5-3-6 If it is necessary to pour concrete underwater without removing the
water, care shall be taken to have cement rich and high workability concrete
mix with the minimum possible water content. The concrete shall be poured
through a pipe with an approximate diameter of 200 mm that reaches the
bottom where concrete is to be poured. The pipe shall be lifted while pouring
by a rate that shall not allow the pipe moving out of the mix such that the
water shall not leak inside.
9-5-3-7 If the air temperature exceeds 35oC in the shade during mixing and
pouring concrete, refer to the technical specification with regards to pouring
concrete in hot weather. The following precautions shall be considered:
- Using shades for aggregate (coarse and fine) storage areas. Coarse
aggregate can be cooled using water sprinklers.
- For loose cement stored in silos, the silos shall be painted from outside
with a sunlight reflective material. If the cement is in bags, it shall be
arranged under a ventilated shade.
- Cooling water before usage in mixing concrete.
- Painting mixers with materials that reflect sunlight and/or covering the pan
with a layer or more of burlap and spraying with water.
9-11
Chapter 9
- Spraying the forms with water before pouring. In case of producing precast
concrete elements, pouring shall take place in shaded areas.
9-5-4 Concrete compaction
Compaction and vibration processes shall take place to guarantee the mix
is flowable around the reinforcement steel. Compaction shall continue till
pouring ends.
Mechanical compaction shall be performed using submerged vibrators
inside the mix or vibrators fixed on the forms and scaffolds. For special cases,
manual compaction can be used with the approval of the consulting engineer.
Mechanical compaction is to be performed by a specialist trained such that
compaction is stopped after the appearance of air bubbles. The submerged
vibrator shall be kept away from the reinforcement steel while vibrating.
During compaction, care shall be taken to avoid disturbing previously poured
concrete or displacing reinforcement steel or changing form sizes.
9-5-5 Concrete treatment and protection
9-5-5-1 Concrete shall be treated such that it shall be maintained
completely wet for a minimum duration of seven days from the time the
surface solidifies when using ordinary Portland cement. When using rapid
hardening Portland cement or accelerating additives, the minimum treatment
duration shall be four days from the time the surface solidifies. Treatment
shall be performed by thoroughly spraying the surface with water free from
salts or harmful materials or covering its surface with burlap or sand or hay or
mats or any suitable coverage while keeping it wet by continuous spraying. If
not using wet treatment, it shall be permitted to use certified treatment
compounds that shall be homogeneously sprayed to guarantee the complete
coverage of the concrete surface to protect it from losing mixing water. Steam
or other treatment methods can be used. Treatment by wetting shall be
continued to guarantee that the concrete reaches the required strength
according to the project specifications.
9-5-5-2 Steam treatment shall be used for precast concrete elements after two
hours from pouring time. This shall be accomplished by raising the
temperature of the concrete elements to 60oC within duration of four to six
hours according to the thickness and width of the concrete element followed
by decrees to the normal temperature within three hours. Treatment by wetting
9-12
Chapter 9
shall continue to guarantee reaching the required concrete strength after 28

days.
9-5-5-3 Newly poured concrete shall be protected from rain, quick drying
from hot or dry weather or storms. This shall be achieved by covering the
concrete using suitable covers from the time of pouring till the surface
adequately hardens so it can be treated using different methods.
9-5-5-4 During curing, reinforced concrete shall not be exposed to water
containing harmful salts that exceed the allowable values according to section
(2-2-3).
9-5-5-5 Concrete shall not be subjected to any loads such as ground water
pressure or earth fill especially saturated with water until the concrete
compressive strength reaches the required strength by the project
specifications.
9-5-5-6 If concrete will be subjected to loads from natural disasters such as
earthquakes, and floods within seven days from pouring, the homogeneity
integrity of the concrete and structural joints as well as the non-existence of
cracks shall be confirmed.
9-5-6 Construction Joints
The following conditions and precautions shall be considered when
preparing construction joints:
9-5-6-1 The joint shall be perpendicular to the internal effective forces.
9-5-6-2 The joints shall be located at bending moment inflection points for
beams and slabs or at sections of minimum values of shear forces next to the
supports. If necessary, it is preferable to have the joint location at the end of
one third of span next to the supports.
9-5-6-3 The site engineer shall specify the pouring joints locations on the
construction drawings. The reinforcement steel required to transfer the
shearing forces, and main tensile forces shall be clarified according to section
(4-2-2-4) provided the approval of the design engineer prior to construction.
9-5-6-4 The minimum distance between the location of the joint in the main
beams and the support of secondary beams shall not be less than twice the
width of the secondary beam.
9-13
Chapter 9
9-5-6-5 The joints between deep or inverted beams and the slabs connected to
it shall be constructed at connection locations. The sloping edge borders of the
slabs (haunches) or below the drop level around columns (drop panels) if
existing with the slabs.
9-5-6-6 When pouring the joints is resumed after the concrete hardens, the
surface of the concrete is roughened well to show the coarse aggregate. The
surface is cleaned to remove the residuals and loose materials using
compressed air and washed with water, then a layer of a mixture of cement
and water slurry or any other material certified to ensure the bonding between
the old and new concrete, fulfilling specifications regarding the prevention of
water permeability in case it is requested by the design engineer of record.
9-5-7 Shrinkage joints
9-5-7-1 In case of pouring large areas of unreinforced concrete slabs that
necessitate using shrinkage joints to avoid the occurrence of cracks such as
floorings of airports, factories, garages and others, these surfaces shall be
divided into longitudinal strips with widths not exceeding 30 times the slab
thickness with a maximum limit of 5 meters. The longest dimension shall not
exceed 25 meters. Pouring of odd or even numbered strips shall start provided
the rest of the strips are poured alternately. Vertical pouring joints shall be
constructed between these longitudinal strips with a minimum thickness of 20
mm. After pouring, these joints shall be filled with mastic or any other similar
material according to the instructions of the design engineer. Special
precautions shall be taken to prevent the relative settlement between the strips.
9-5-7-2 The longitudinal strips shall be divided using secondary shrinkage
joints located not more than 1.25 times the strip width. The minimum strip
width is 20 mm with a minimum depth equal to one third the slab thickness.
These joints shall be filled with mastic or any other similar material. These
joints shall be executed using a mechanical saw cutter after the final setting
time but not exceeding three days from the pouring date.
9-5-7-3 It shall be permitted to pour large surfaces and floorings at the same
time on the condition of executing the joints in both directions after pouring,
according to section (9-5-7-2).
9-5-7-4 The spacing between the shrinkage joints can be increased in case of
using an upper reinforcement mesh in the concrete slab to resist stresses due to
concrete shrinkage.
9-14
Chapter 9
9-5-8 Expansion joints

For regular structures, the maximum spacing between expansion joints
shall be:
- From 40 to 45 meter in normal weather regions.
- From 30 to 35 meters in hot weather regions.
The spacing can be increased if temperature differences and the influence
of expansion shrinkage and creep shall be accounted for in the design.
In case of mass concrete works such as retaining walls and frames, the
spacing between the joints shall be reduced. Adequate precautions shall be
taken to prevent water leakage from these joints.
9-5-9 Seismic joints
When choosing the seismic joints, the following requirements must be
satisfied:
- Horizontal and vertical uniformity of the structure and joint locations
- Relative displacements between structure floors.
- Compute the width of the seismic joint between the different parts of the
structure and neighboring structures according to the requirements of the
Egyptian Code for calculating loads and forces, ECP 201
9 6 Fabrication of steel reinforcement
9-6-1 All types of steel reinforcement shall be cold fabricated according to
the reinforcement steel bar list.
9-6-2 In case that steel reinforcement is subjected to corrosion or is delivered
to the site with the manufacturing scales, it shall be permitted to use this steel
if it is possible to remove the surface corroded layer or manufacturing scales
using wire brushes or sand blast. The loss in the weight of the reinforcement
steel shall not exceed 2%. The decrease in bar diameter shall not exceed:
- 0. 20 mm for bar diameters up to 10 mm
- 0.30 mm for bar diameters between 10-mm and 20-mm.
- 0.50 mm for bars with diameters larger than 20-mm
9-15
Chapter 9
9-6-3 The steel reinforcement shall be carefully placed in its locations

according to the structural construction drawings. Steel bars shall be properly
fixed so they shall not be dislocated during pouring and compaction. A
distance shall be kept between the reinforcement steel and forms to be filled
with concrete during pouring. It shall not be permitted to expose steel
reinforcement on the surface of the concrete to avoid weathering conditions
which will help to initiate corrosion.
9-6-4 The supervising engineer shall check the reinforcing steel after
placement with respect to the structural drawings. All remarks shall be
implemented before giving permission to pour concrete.
9-6-5 If there is a high percentage of steel reinforcement in the concrete

sections, it shall be permitted to use bundles according to sections (4-2-5) and
(7-3-4).
9 7 Minimum concrete cover for steel reinforcement
9-7-1 The minimum concrete cover for steel reinforcement shall not be less
than the values given in section (4-3-2-3-B).
9-7-2 For buildings that may be subjected to fires; the dimensions of the concrete
cover shall not less than the values in Tables (2-14-A) and (2-14-B).
9-8 Allowable tolerances in concrete works
This section specifies the allowable tolerances in concrete works after
approving its components in the laboratory and calibrating the measuring
devices with the rates of mixing and preparing of concrete. For special
structures, the design can specify tolerances more stringent than those
specified in this section.
9-8-1 Allowable tolerances in the measurement of quantities of concrete
ingredients
When using bagged cement, the negative allowable tolerance in the
weight of each bag of cement shall be 1% from the weight stated on the bag. If
the average weight of the bags in any load delivered to the site computed from
the weights of fifty randomly chosen bags was found to be less than the
weight stated on the bag, it shall be permitted to reject the whole consignment
or replace the difference in weights in case of using the cement in the mix.
9-16
Chapter 9
Table (9-1) shows the allowable tolerances in the weights of the materials
used in each mix.
Table (9-1) Allowable tolerances in concrete ingredients

Ingredients Allowable tolerances
Aggregate +/- 3%
Added Water(1) +/- 1%
Cement +/- 1%
Additives Tolerance is not desirable
(1)
Tolerance shown in table includes all the water added to the mix including
the moisture of the aggregate
9-8-2 Tolerances in slump test measuring concrete consistency
1 - The allowable tolerances for the slump test shall be specified for the
samples taken from the mix directly before pouring.
2 - For concrete consistency, refer to the project specifications with the
maximum allowable tolerances in accordance with Table (8-4-B), on
condition of achieving the required characteristic strength and the
approval of the project consultant.
9-8-3 Allowable tolerances in dimensions
The tolerances stated in this article shall be the references to abide with
when there shall be no special tolerances in the contract requirements or
drawings. These tolerances are subjective and shall be used for validity and
acceptability range rather than as a refusal limit.
These tolerances shall not be used to exceed the property limit or land
dimensions or increase in permissible extensions or heights in accordance with
the building laws and regulations.
1 - Maximum tolerances in horizontal dimensions (columns, beams and wall
axes)
For any span or for every 6.0 meter in any direction +/- 5 mm
Total structure dimension +/- 25 mm
9-17
Chapter 9
2 - Tolerances for vertical plumb

a - Columns and wall surfaces and intersection lines between surfaces
For each 6.0 meter in height +/- 5 mm
Total structure dimension (30 meter maximum) +/- 25 mm
b - Corner column surfaces and vertical expansion joints
For each 6.0 meter in height +/- 5 mm
Total structure dimension (30 meter maximum) +/- 25 mm
c - Walls and columns executed using sliding forms
For each 1.5 meter in height 3 mm
For each 15 meter in height 25 mm
Maximum for total structure dimension (180 meter) 75 mm
For buildings with heights exceeding the preceding maximum limit, the
allowable tolerances shall be specified by the design engineer.
3 - Allowable tolerances in levels
The tolerances given in this article are limited compared to the
information given in the contract documents and before dismantling the
forms.
a - Beam and slab bottoms
For each 3.0 meter horizontal dimension +/- 5 mm
For each span or 6.0 meter horizontal dimension +/- 10 mm
Complete structure width or length +/- 20 mm
b - Lintels, window sills, parapets and architectural cornices in facade
For each span or 6.0 meter horizontal dimension +/- 5 mm
c - Points used for determining slabs and inclined beams levels
For each span of 6.0 meter length +/- 10 mm
4 - Locations and sizes of connection bolts and openings
For locations of opening axes +/- 15 mm
For opening sizes +/- 5 mm
5 - Sizes of columns, beams, smells and thicknesses of slabs and walls
For sizes up to 400 mm + 10 mm or 5 mm
For sizes larger than 400 mm + 15 mm or 10mm
9-18
Chapter 9
6 - Reinforced footings
Horizontal footing dimensions +50 mm or -15 mm
Dimensions between axes +/- 50 mm
Footing thickness without maximum limit or -2%
Top footing level +/- 15 mm or -5 mm
7 - Stairs
For a step
Height +/- 3 mm
Horizontal distance +/- 6 mm
For each one flight or summation of flights for one floor
Height +/- 5 mm
Horizontal distance +/- 10 mm
9-8-4 Allowable tolerances in the dimensions of ordinary and high
strength steel reinforcement
1 - Allowable tolerances in forming the reinforcement steel shown in Figure
(9-1) are given in Table (9-2) for bar diameters between 8 mm and
32mm.
Figure (9-1) Dimensions and deforming of reinforcing bars
9-19
Chapter 9
Table (9-2) Allowable tolerances in steel reinforcement

For sections with thickness For sections with thickness
Dimension less than 250 mm more than 250 mm
a +/- 15 mm +/- 25 mm
b +/- 10 mm +/- 15 mm
c +/- 8 mm +/- 12 mm
d +/- 8 mm +/- 12 mm
e It is permissible to have the tolerance for this dimension
the same as the one across it with an additional
tolerance of +/- 10 mm
2 - Allowable tolerance in arrangement of reinforcing steel bars

a - Allowable tolerance in depth d
The depth d is the distance between the outside compressive surface
and the center of steel reinforcement in tension
Depth d less than 250 mm +/- 10 mm
Depth d greater than 250 mm +/- 15 mm
b - Allowable tolerance to reduce the steel reinforcement concrete cover
Depth d less than 250 mm - 6 mm
Depth d greater than 250 mm - 8 mm
(These values shall not exceed one-third the concrete thickness
specified on drawings).
c- Allowable tolerance in reducing the spacing between bars in beams
The tolerance in the spacing between bars in beams must not exceed
- 5 mm
d - Allowable tolerance in the spacing between bars
Slabs and walls +/- 20 mm
Stirrups +/- 20 mm
Welded mesh +/- 5 mm
Total number of reinforcing bars per meter must not be less than
those given in the construction drawings.
f - Allowable tolerances in bending locations and bar ends in the
longitudinal direction
9-20
Chapter 9
In continuous beams and slabs +/- 25 mm

Bar ends in beams and slabs on outer edges +/- 15 mm
g - Allowable tolerance in reducing the length of splices
Tolerance in the length of the splice does not exceed - 25 mm
h - Allowable tolerance in reducing the length of reinforcement bond length
inside the concrete
For bars of diameter from 10 mm to 32 mm -25 mm
For bars of diameter greater than 32 mm -50 mm
9-8-5 Allowable tolerance in precast concrete element dimensions
9-8-5-1 Tolerances in the horizontal element length dimensions
Element length up to 3.00 meter +/- 3mm
Element length from 3.00 meter to 4.5 meter +/- 5 mm
Element length every additional 6.00 meter +/- 6 mm
Element length exceeding 18.00 meter +/- 20 mm
9-8-5-2 Tolerances in the dimensions of the element cross section
Element thickness up to 150 mm +/- 3 mm
Element thickness from 150 mm to 450 mm +/- 5 mm
Element thickness from 450 mm to 900 mm +/- 6 mm
Element thickness greater than 900 mm +/- 10 mm
9-8-5-3 Allowable tolerances in straightness relative to the element
length
Element length up to 6.00 meter +/- 3 mm
Element length greater than 18.00 meter +/- 12 mm
9-8-5-4 Allowable tolerances in element convexity camber
Element length up to 3.00 meter +/- 3 mm
Element length greater than 6.00 meter +/- 6 mm
9-21
Chapter 9
9 - 9 Project management
9-9-1 General
Project management based on knowledge and acquired experiences are
considered main element in the project success and in fulfilling the purpose
from establishing the project. Project management is highly needed as an
independent element in projects involving various jobs or specializations
required to execute the project.
One of the important functions of project management is fulfilling the
project aims. This shall be achieved by studying and determining the most
suitable means to reach these goals starting from tendering means, type of
contract used, determination of the construction methods to attain the targeted
quality; to match the site, project timetable and estimated cost; in order to
coordinate these tasks to suit the cash flow to be determined with the project
owner.
9-9-2 Project management tasks
The tasks of project management in its different stages are summarized
as follows:
9-9-2-1 Design and tender documents preparation stage
At this stage, the project management unit shall be responsible for:
a - Revising architectural, structural, electromechanical and other designs in
light of the preliminary project and design recommendations in order to
ensure compatibility and suitability of the design for construction. In
addition to follow up with completing and updating these designs, (if
needed).
b - Revising quantities and specifications and ensuring their compatibility
with the drawings.
c - Preparing timetable, cash inflow table according to the quantities and the
method of construction proposed by the designer. Specifying work
packages to be offered and the most suitable means for contracting
according to this test (main contractor, or itemized work contract or fixed
value contract, etc.)
d - Projects with special nature that demand contractors with special
qualifications, the project management unit shall prepare a pre-
qualification list for the contractors to determine a short list of
contractors to be called for bidding.
9-22
Chapter 9
e - Preparing the bidding instructions documents to assist the contractors for

preparing the bid in an acceptable form and to simplify the job of the
evaluation committees.
f - Preparation of the general and specific requirements documents that
show the rights and obligations of both parties of the contract during
construction, testing and delivery stages.
9-9-2-2 Bidding Stage
In this stage, the project management department shall participate in:
a - Specifying the bidding method (general or limited bidding).
b - Specifying bases and elements for evaluating companies proposed for
bidding.
c - Offering the bid and responding to inquiries.
d - Bid evaluations and negotiating the contractors with the best bids to
reach the bid that is most suitable technically and financially.
9-9-2-3 Construction stage :working method for project management
In this stage, the project management unit shall perform the following:
a - Setting the method, foundations, and models for quality assurance and
ensuring its applications. This shall guarantee the control of the
timetable, data and document flow with preparing the forms and
specifying the procedures to be followed when giving instructions to the
contractors and suppliers.
b - Revising organizational hierarchy of contractors participating in the
project. Also revising the authority and responsibilities of the key
personnel of the different parties to avoid an authority conflict or lack of
responsibility or its vagueness.
c - Preparing the document cycle and determining the communication
channels.
d - Revising the general timetable for execution presented by the contractor
that shows the following:
1 - Type of activity, its duration, dates of early starts and ends and the
dates of late start and ends.
2 - Curves showing the distribution of workers and main equipment in
the project over the duration of execution.
e - Revising the timetable presented by the contractor regarding: workshop
drawing preparation and their approval; endorsement programs;
9-23
Chapter 9
equipment and material delivery to the project in accordance with the

general timetable for the project execution.
f - Preparation/revision of the project general site planning drawing that
shows the locations of the workshops, storage, temporary roads, tower
winches, equipment movement, fences, management offices, security,
etc.
g - Checking security and safety precautions according to section (9-10).
h - Studying modifications and changes requested by the owner or suggested
by contractors or the design engineer or supervision team personnel. Also
investigating the abilities to execute these changes and their impact on
the different project contracts, its cost and timetable. Making change
orders after discussions with the design engineer and getting the owners
approval.
i - Investigating the effect of change orders on the project duration and cost.
j - If there is a claim from the executing company, the project management
department shall analyze it and respond to it in coordination with the
owner. The project management department shall also be responsible for
putting a follow up system for invoice that guarantees checking them in
an accurate and efficient manner.
k - Arrange coordination meetings with the project parties to guarantee full
coordination and solving problems (if any) as soon as possible and to
follow up with all project correspondence between the different parties.
The report shall include the project financial status, important issues to
be solved, and problems hindering the execution, ways of solution and how
the consultant dealt with these issues. The report shall also include
photographs illustrating the work progress, information regarding periodical
meetings with all the contractor companies and unresolved issues that have
not been resolved. The report shall include the percentage executed to date
from the different project tasks compared to the timetable; approval of
workshop drawings, material samples, technical publications for equipment
and otherwise; equipment delivery program; and updating the anticipated cash
flow. The following shall be appended with the report:
1 - Percentage executed from the different project tasks.
2 - Approval of workshop drawings.
3 - Equipment delivery program.
4 - Updating the cash flow.
5 - Anticipated tasks to be executed.
6 - Tables for checking documents.
9-24
Chapter 9
Remarks:
a - From practical experience, the execution of large projects is probably
accompanied with modifications in the planned timetable at the start of
work. This is attributed to many reasons including delays in the delivery
of some equipment or because the actual rates of execution do not agree
with the proposed ones, which requires re-inputting these variables again
in the execution timetable and studying their influence during the project
execution and taking the necessary correctional procedures.
b - In large projects, project management department establishes a complete
information system to control time, documents, and guarantee the
contractor meets the timetable and consequently controlling the project
cash flow. This shall be achieved by utilizing the available software
packages and computers. The project management department shall also
concerned with following the critical tasks and providing early warning
about any foreseen obstacles or delays.
9-9-2-4 Testing, preliminary and final delivery services
In these stages, the project management shall be responsible for:
a - Obtaining from the contractor and suppliers all operational and
maintenance documents of equipment and systems to be delivered to the
owner.
b - Preparing a list of defects and incomplete works (Punch List) and
specifying the repair times.
c - Preparing a complete set of as-built drawings approved by the engineer
of record.
d - Issuing certificate for preliminary delivery after fulfilling all the previous
requirements.
e - Final re-evaluation of final cost of modifications, changes, and bills
approved by the owner.
f - Issuing final invoice for contractors and consultants after referring to
their contracts.
g - Ensuring the repair of all defects that may appear during the guarantee
period before issuing the certificate of final delivery and returning the
final letter of guarantee to the contractor.
9 10 Security and safety for construction of concrete structures
The project environmental impact evaluation shall be prepared as part of
the procedures of obtaining different permits. A record of the project
9-25
Chapter 9
environmental status shall be kept in accordance with addendum (3) to the

Environment law number (4) issued 1994, completing all the information and
measurements. The environmental precautions for dealing with materials and
basic services such as using electricity, water, equipment and handling solid
waste shall be considered. The safety and professional health requirements
shall be verified in concrete work execution. These include receiving,
preparing and equipping the site; material storage; and the design and
construction of scaffolds and forms.
9-26
Chapter 10
CHAPTER 10
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
10-1 General
10-1-1 Prestressed concrete elements shall be designed in accordance with
the provisions of this chapter.
10-1-2 Many systems are used for concrete prestressing. Concrete may be
pre-tensioned or post-tensioned. For post-tensioning, prestressing tendons
may be bonded or unbonded. Tendons used for unbonded system may be
internal or external. For circular or cylindrical elements, circular
prestressing is used. For all cases, prestressing may be either full or partial.
10-1-3 Prestressed members shall be designed to resist applied loads and
straining actions in accordance with the requirements of ultimate and
serviceability limit states at all stages during the life of the structure from
the time prestress is first applied.
10-1-4 Prestressed members shall be designed taking into account effect of
adjoining structural members and effect of elastic and plastic deformations,
deflections, changes in length or loads due to prestressing. Effects of
temperature and shrinkage shall also be included.
10-1-5 Safety against buckling of prestressed member or parts thereof such
as thin webs and flanges shall be checked.
10-1-6 In calculating section properties, effect of reduction of area due to

open ducts of prestressing cables shall be considered.
10-1-7 Refer to section (1-1 scope of code) for structures for which
provisions of this chapter could be applied.
10-2 Prestressed concrete materials

10-2-1 Concrete
10-2-1-1 General
Concrete of prestressed concrete structures is characterized by high
compressive strength that makes the concrete section less susceptible to
volumetric changes due to shrinkage and creep and hence reduces prestress
losses in prestressing steel. Use of high strength concrete allows reduction
of member weight which, in most cases, represents high percentage of
design load in addition to satisfaction of design limit states.
10-1
Chapter 10
10-2-1-2 Properties of prestressed concrete constituents

Refer to section (2-2) for the properties of the constituents materials of the
prestressed concrete.
10-2-1-3 Characteristic strength
The definition and requirements shall comply with the provisions of section
(2-3-2-1). In addition, number of tests less than characteristic strength by a
maximum of 4 N/mm shall not exceed 1%. Table (2-6) gives characteristic
strength used for prestressed concrete.
10-2-1-4 Compressive strength of standard concrete cube at
prestress transfer
Compressive strength of standard concrete cube at prestress transfer shall
not be less than the values given in table (10-10).
10-2-2 Reinforcing steel
Different types of steel are used in prestressed concrete structures. Type
used shall satisfy all requirements of relevant standard, and shall be
evaluated based on required tests performed by a certified laboratory.
10-2-2-1 Prestressing steel
Steel used (such as high strength steel wires (cold drawn),high strength
strands and bars and cables) is produced in different shapes in international
market. Cables are formed by grouping wires or strands in one path.
10-2-2-2 Mechanical properties of prestressing steel
Mechanical properties of steel such as tensile strength, proof stress,
elongation Percentage, and modulus of elasticity shall be verified in
accordance with standard limits. Table (10-1) specifies lower limits of
proof stress and Elongation percentage.
Reference values of mechanical properties of prestressing steel in some
international standards are given in Appendix (2) in this code.
10-2-3 Cement grout

Cement specifications shall conform to Egyptian standards Normal and
early hardened Portland cement E.S 373/1991.Sand shall conform to
Egyptian standard Sand for building mortar E.S 1108 and shall pass from
sieve 1.18mm. Admixtures shall conform to adopted Standard Egyptian
and international specifications and may be used if confirmed by tests that
it enhances grouting quality provided that it does not contain any chlorides,
Nitrates or Sulfates.
10-2
Chapter 10
The strength of the cubes of cement grout shall not be less than 30N/mm at
28 days.
The constituents and their percentages are chosen to satisfy specific
requirements such as consistency and compressive strength at different
ages (or stages).
10-3 Design of prestressed concrete members

10-3-1 Design fundamentals
10-3-1-1 Prestressed members are designed for acting loads according
to limit state method based on effects on member. Material strength
reduction factors shall be taken as given in chapter three of this code;
However s is replaced by ps for prestressing steel.
10-3-1-2 Main loads and general considerations for design of
prestressed concrete members subjected to bending or eccentric forces shall
be taken as specified in section (4-2-1) with due consideration of the stress-
strain relationship of prestressing steel according to section (10-3-1-3).
10-3-1-3 Stress strain relationship for prestressing steel shall be
according to the idealized curve shown in figure (10-1).
Fig. (10-1) Idealized stress-strain curve for prestressing steel
10-3-1-4 Relationship between ultimate stress (fpu) and yield stress in

tension (fpy) for prestressing steel shall be taken based on steel type and
according to the following relationships:
10-3
Chapter 10
fpy / fpu = 0.80 for deformed bars (10-1)

fpy / fpu = 0.85 for normal relaxation stress relieved strands,
wires and smooth bars (10-2 )
fpy / fpu = 0.90 for low relaxation stress-relieved strands and wires (10-3)
10-3-2 Serviceability limit state requirements

10-3-2-1 Allowable stresses in concrete
10-3-2-1-1 Elastic analysis of section shall be used to check stresses at
transfer of prestressing forces to concrete, at service loads, and at cracking
load.
10-3-2-1-2 Prestressed concrete members are classified according to the
following:
Case (A): Full prestressing: uncracked members with no tensile stress.
The following members shall be designed accordingly;
Sections subjected to repeated or dynamic loads.
Sections with tension surface subjected to injurious oxidizing
effects causing steel rusting (section four according to table 4-11).
Case (B): Uncracked sections with tensile stresses under the effect of all
loads less than the values specified in table (10-2).The following members
shall be designed accordingly:
Solid and flat slabs
Members with unbonded prestressing steel.
Members with tension surface subjected to injurious effects(section
3 according to table 4-11)
Case (C): Transient state cracked and uncracked sections in which the
tensile stresses shall be less than cracking limit state according to equation
(4-61-b) and less than 4N/mm but shall be higher than maximum
permissible tensile stress in case (b).
Case (D): "Partial prestressing" with cracked sections for members with
maximum nominal tensile stress under all acting loads higher than cracking
limit state but less than 0.85 f cu Nominal tensile stresses shall be
calculated using full section properties, without considering cracking
effects, and neglecting steel reinforcement. Tensile stresses in concrete
under permanent loads that include dead loads and sustainable live loads
shall be checked to be less than cracking limit state.
10-4
Chapter 10
For cases (C) and (D), deformed high strength steel reinforcement shall be
added to resist tension in concrete section due to service loads.
10-3-2-1-3 Allowable stresses in concrete for sections subjected to flexure
and axial compression are as in table (10-2).
Table (10-2) Allowable stresses in concrete ( N / mm 2 )

Item Cases
1 Allowable stresses in concrete due to bending moments immediately
after transfer of forces to concrete (and before time-dependant losses)
shall not be higher than the following values:-
- maximum stress in compression 0.45f cui
- maximum tensile stress except at end of 0.22 f cui
simple beams
- maximum tensile stress at end of simple 0.44 f cui
beams
2 Allowable stress in concrete due to bending moments at service loads
(after time-dependant losses) shall not be higher than the following
values:-
Maximum compression due to prestressing 0.35f cu
and dead loads
Maximum compression due to prestressing 0.40f cu
and all loads
Maximum tension in pre-compressed tensile Case (A): zero
zone due to prestressing and all loads Case (B): 0.44 f cu
Case
(C): 0.6 f cu but
not higher than
4 N / mm 2
Case (D): 0.85 f cu
3 Maximum stresses in concrete due to axial compression
Maximum compression 0.25f cu
Where;
f cui = Characteristic compressive strength of concrete at transfer
of prestressing
f cu = Characteristic compressive strength of concrete at service
10-5
Chapter 10
10-3-2-2 Allowable stress in prestressing steel

Allowable stresses in prestressing steel shall be taken according to table
(10-3)
Table (10-3) Allowable Stresses in prestressing steel

a- Due to jacking force* 0.9 f py 0.75 f pu
b- In case of rebars at tensioning 0.7 f pu
c- Immediately after prestress transfer 0.8f py 0.7f pu
d- Post-tensioning tendons, at anchorage 0.8 f py 0.7 f pu
devices and couplers
* shall not exceed recommended design values by manufacturer of cables

or anchorages.
10-3-2-3 Limit state of deflection

10-3-2-3-1 In calculating immediate deflection of structural elements:-
1 - Elastic theory with gross moment of inertia Ig shall be used for cases
(a), (b), and (c) in section 10-3-2-1
2 - For case (d) in section 10-3-2-1 effective moment of inertia I e
according to equation (4-60) shall be used taking into account effect of
prestressing in calculating cracking moment( M cr ) according to
equation (10-7b).
10-3-2-3-2 Long term deflection shall be calculated taking into account

stresses in concrete and prestressing steel (after calculating all losses) under
all permanent loads in addition to effects of shrinkage, concrete creep and
relaxation of prestressing steel.
10-3-2-3-3 calculated deflections shall not exceed the limits specified in
section (4-3-1-2).
10-3-2-3-4 Elastic theory with gross moment of inertia (Ig) shall be used
in calculating critical camber. Calculated camber shall not exceed values
affecting negatively building usage or its structural or non-structural
elements.
10-6
Chapter 10
10-3-3 Requirements of ultimate limit state

10-3-3-1 Sections subjected to flexure
10-3-3-1-1 Limit state method in section (10-3-1) shall be used to

determine ultimate moment limit state for prestressed concrete sections
taking into account the distribution of stress on section as shown in figure
(10-2).
Ultimate Strain Ultimate Stress Equivalent rectangular

Distribution Distribution stress Block
Fig. (10-2) Ultimate Flexural Strength
10-3-3-1-2 Total strain in bonded prestressing steel ps shall be calculated

from the following equation:
ps = pe + ce + pc (10-4)
Where:
ps = strain in prestressing steel due to prestressing after
considering all losses.
ce = strain in concrete at level of prestressing after considering all
losses.
pc = strain in prestressing steel due to strain compatibility at
ultimate moment limit state.
10-3-3-1-3 Stress in prestressing steel f ps at ultimate moment limit state

of section shall be calculated based on total strain given by equation (10-4)
and idealized curve of prestressing steel given in figure (10-1).
10-7
Chapter 10
10-3-3-1-4 Section with tension prestressing steel reinforcement only:

Ultimate moment limit state for rectangular section with tension
prestressing steel reinforcement only shall be calculated using the
following equation:-
f ps
M u = A ps d p - a (10-5-a)
2
ps
Where d p is the distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of

prestressing steel.
When using additional normal steel reinforcement in tension side, the
ultimate limit moment of section shall be calculated using the following
equation:
f a f a
M u = A ps ps d p - + A s y d - (10-5-b)

ps 2 s 2
Effect of steel reinforcement on ultimate moment limit of section shall be

considered after determining its stress using equilibrium and strain
compatibility.
10-3-3-1-5 Stress in prestressing steel f ps can be calculated using the

following approximate equations:
10-3-3-1-5-a As an alternative to the method stated in section (10-3-3-1-

2,3), stress in prestressing steel f ps shall be calculated on condition that
f
stress in prestressing steel after considering all losses( pe ) shall not be
less than half ultimate stress of prestressing steel ( 0.5f pu ).
1 - For sections with bonded prestressing tendons that contains both
compression and tension steel reinforcement
f pu d
f ps = f pu 1 -
p

p 0.8f
+ (w - w )

(10-6)

cu dp
Where:
p = coefficient depending on steel type and shall be taken as
follows:
0.68 for ( f py f pu not less than 0.8)
10-8
Chapter 10

Aps
p = percentage of prestressing steel in concrete section= .
b.dp
= tension steel reinforcement ratio in concrete section
multiplied by ratio of yield stress of steel reinforcement
over characteristic compressive strength of
fy
concrete=
0.8f cu
=
/
compression steel reinforcement ratio in concrete
section multiplied by ratio of yield stress of steel
reinforcement over characteristic compressive strength of
As /
concrete = \
0.8 f cu
As As
Where: = , =
b.d b.d
b = width of section in rectangular sections.
2 - To take into account effect of compression reinforcement in

calculating ultimate limit moment M u , the value calculated from
equation (10-7) shall not be less than 0.17 when substituting in
equation (10-6). In addition, d' shall not exceed 0.15dp as it shall
be assumed that strain in compression steel shall be equal to or
exceed yield strain.
p .f pu d
+ (w - w ) 0.17 (10-7)
0.8f cu dp

10-3-3-1-5-b For prestressed members with unbonded prestressing

tendons where the span to effective depth ratio shall not exceed 35,
stress in pre stressing steel at ultimate limit moment of the section
M u shall be calculated from the following equation:-
0.8f cu
f ps = f pe + 70 + N / mm2 (10-8)
100 p

f ps Shall not exceed f py or ( f pe +420) whichever is less; stress is in

N / mm 2
10-9
Chapter 10
10-3-3-1-5-c For prestressed members with unbonded prestressing

tendons where span to effective depth ratio is greater than 35, stress in
pre stressing steel at ultimate limit moment shall be calculated from the
following equation:
0.80f
f ps = f pe + 70 + cu N / mm2 (10-9)
300 p

f ps Shall not exceed f py or ( f pe +200) whichever is less; stress is

in N / mm 2
10-3-3-1-6 Upper limit of areas of prestressing steel and normal steel

reinforcement.
10-3-3-1-6-a prestressing steel ratio p and normal steel reinforcement ratio

in the section are taken to satisfy equation (10-10) unless ultimate
strength shall be calculated according to section (10-3-3-1-6-b)
wp 0.28 (10-10a)
d
w p + (w - w ) 0.28 (10-10b)
dp

d
w + (w - w ) 0.28 (10-10c)
w w
pw d p
Where for rectangular section with width b
f ps A sp .f ps
p = p =
0.8f eu b.dp.0.8f cu
ww/ , ww , wwp are reinforcement coefficients for sections with
compression flange similar to w / , w , w p for rectangular sections;
with the use of rib width b and reinforcement area sufficient to
develop total compression strength of rib.
10-10
Chapter 10
10-3-3-1-6b when using steel ratios higher than that specified in

section (10-3-3-1-6 a), ultimate strength of concrete section shall be
calculated using strain compatibility analysis
10-3-3-1-6c Minimum prestressing steel and normal steel

reinforcement ratios shall be calculated to insure ultimate strength of
section higher than 1.2 the cracking limit calculated using concrete
tensile strength f ctr according to section (4-3-1-4). This condition shall
not be applyed for the following cases:-
a - Slabs with unbounded post-tensioning tendons
b - Elements subjected to bending moments with shear and moment
strengths greater than double the required values.
10-3-3-1-7 Minimum bonded non-prestressed reinforced ratio in members

with unbonded prestressing steel.
Bonded non-prestressed steel shall be provided in structural members with
unbonded prestressing steel as specified in (10-3-3-1-7 a)and (10-3-3-1-7
b).
10-3-3-1-7a Bonded non-prestressed reinforcement ratio in members

with unbonded prestressing steel shall not be less than.
As = 0.004 A (10-11a)
Where;
A = cross sectional area of the part between tension face and center
of gravity of gross section. The bonded steel is uniformly
distributed as close as possible to the concrete parts subjected to
maximum tension due to external loads
10-3-3-1-7-b For two-way slabs and flat slabs with constant depth, the
minimum bounded non-prestressed steel is as follows:
1 -In positive moment area, minimum bonded non-prestressed steel in
section shall satisfy the following equation
Nc
As = (10-11b)
0.5 f y
Where;
10-11
Chapter 10
Nc is the tension force resulting from service loads (dead and

live). Steel reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed in pre-
compressed tensile zone and to be as close as possible to the parts
subjected to maximum tensile stresses. f y shall not exceed 400
N/mm2.
2 - In negative moment area at columns, bonded steel reinforcement shall

be provided not less than:
A s = 0.00075 t s L (10-11c)
Where;
t s = slab thickness
L = span in direction parallel to required steel reinforcement.
These steel reinforcement shall be distributed on slab width equal to

(c + 3ts ) where c is the column width. At least 4 bars are provided in
each direction. The distance between bars shall not exceed 300 mm.
10-3-3-1-8 In prestressed beams, side bars shall be provided with

maximum spacing not exceeding 300 mm.
10-3-3-2 Development length and transfer length for prestressing

steel.
The development length ( L d ) for (three or seven wire prestressing strands)
shall be calculated using the following equation:
2
L d = L t + L a = f ps - f pe mm (10-12)
3 7
Where;
Lt is the transfer length and shall be calculated as follows:
f pe
L t = mm (10-13-a)
3 7
Where;
La is the length beyond critical section and is given by:
10-12
Chapter 10
(
L a = f ps - f pe ) 7 mm (10-13-b)
Where;
is the tendons diameter in mm, f ps and f pe in N/ mm 2
10-3-3-3 Shear
10-3-3-3-1 For prestressed beams in case of direct support under beam
where, due to this bearing, compression perpendicular to lower edge of the
beam develops, the effective shear stress shall be permitted to be
calculated at a distance equal to half depth of the beam (t/2) from internal
face of support, or at first change of web width, whichever is more critical.
10-3-3-3-2 Nominal shear strength
a - Ultimate shear stress shall be calculated from the following
relationship:
Qu
qu = (10-14)
bd p
Where;
Q u is the ultimate shear force due to permanent and live loads. The
effective depth d p is the distance from extreme compression fiber
to centroid of prestressing steel or 0.8 t whichever is greater. The
effect of openings in the element shall be considered.
b - The nominal shear stress for prestressed concrete members subjected
to shear forces with or without torsional moment shall not exceed the
following value:
f cu
q u max* = 0.75 (10-15)
c
With upper limit 4.50 N/ mm 2 .
10-3-3-3-3 Nominal shear strength provided by concrete

a - In members with effective prestressing force exceeding 40% of
strength of flexural reinforcement, and when no more detailed
10-13
Chapter 10
calculations according to item (b) are performed, qcu can be

approximately calculated as follows:
f cu 3.6 Q u .d p
q cu = 0.045 + N/mm2 (10-16)
c Mu

The value of qcu shall not be less than 0.24 f cu c and shall not be
greater than 0.375 f cu c ; also the value of Q u .d p M u shall not
exceed one where M u is the ultimate moment at critical section in
shear.
b - Nominal shear strength provided by concrete qcu shall be calculated
according to items (b-1), (b-2). The value of qcu is the lower of the two
values q ci , q c .
b-1 Shear strength q ci shall be calculated from the following
equation:
f cu M cr
qci = 0.045 + 0.80 q d + q i N/mm2 (10-17a)
c M max
q ci Shall not be less than 0.24 f cu c where f cu in N/ mm 2 .
Where:
M max = ultimate moment at section due to externally applied loads.
q i = stress due to ultimate shear force at section due to
externally applied loads occurring simultaneously
with M max .
q d = shear stress due to service dead loads i.e. without using
load factors.
M cr = the bending moment causing first cracking in concrete and
shall be determined from following relation:
I
M cr = ( ) (0.45 f cu + f pce f cd ) (10-17b)
yt
Where:
10-14
Chapter 10
f cd =stress due to un-factored dead loads at extreme fiber of

section where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads.
f pce =compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress
forces only (after allowance for all prestress losses) at extreme fiber
of section where tensile stress is caused by externally applied loads.
y t =distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting
normal steel and prestressing steel reinforcement, to extreme
fiber in tension.
I =moment of inertia of full concrete section, neglecting effect of
normal steel and prestressing steel reinforcement
b-2 Shear strength q cw shall be calculated from the following

equation:
f cu
q cw = 0.24 + f pcc + q pv N/mm2 (10-18)
c

Where;
q pv = shear stress due to vertical component of pre-stress
force after allowance for all pre-stress losses =
f pe A p sin
ps A c
f pcc = compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at centroid of section or at the junction of
web and flange when the centroid lies inside the flange.
= angle of inclination of tendon along longitudinal axis of the
beam.
As an alternative, qcw can be taken equal to the stress due to
shearing force due to dead and live loads causing principal tensile
stresses equal to 0.25 f cu at axis of element or at junction of web
and flange when centroid of element lies inside flange.
b-3 For pre-tensioned members, in which, distance t/2 from face of

support is less than transfer length calculated from equations (10-
13), the corresponding prestressing force when
calculating q cw shall be taken on the basis that prestressing force
10-15
Chapter 10
increases linearly from zero at tendon end to maximum force at

distance equal to l t .
b-4 In pre-tensioned members where bonding of cables does not

extend to end of member, reduced value of prestressing force
shall be considered when calculating shear stress according to
equation (10-16a), (10-18). The prestressing force shall be
assumed to vary linearly from zero at cable end to maximum
value at distance equal to transfer length l t .
b-5 For calculating shear strength of webs containing grouted ducts

bw
with diameter exceeding where bw is the web width, the
8
effective web width shall be assumed equal to (b w - 0.5 ) where
is the sum of duct diameters at the level with maximum
number of ducts.
10-3-3-3-4 Shear strength provided by shear reinforcement

If calculated ultimate shear stress qu due to applied shear force on section
due to section (10-3-3-3-2) exceeds the nominal concrete strength q cu , then
web reinforcement shall be used according to section (4-2-2-1-4). The
contribution of web reinforcement shall be calculated according to equation
(10-19)
qsu = qu - 0.50 qcu (10-19)
10-3-3-4 Torsion
10-3-3-4-1 Critical sections for torsion shall be specified according to
section (4-2-3-1)
10-3-3-4-2 Ultimate shear stress due to torsional moment q tu shall be

specified according to section (4-2-3-2).
10-3-3-4-3 Effect of torsion may be neglected if shear stress due to
torsion is less than that calculated from the following equation:
f cu f pcc
q tu = 0.06 1 + ( ) N/mm2 (10-20a)
c 0.25 f
cu

10-16
Chapter 10
10-3-3-4-4 Concrete dimensions of prestressed concrete sections

subjected to shear and torsion and reinforced with longitudinal steel shall
satisfy the following relation:
In solid sections (q u )2 + (q tu )2 qu max* (10-20b)
In box sections qu + qtu qu max* (10-20c)
Where qu max is the permissible ultimate shear stress in

prestressed concrete sections calculated from equation (10-15)
10-3-3-4-5 Reinforcement required to resist shear stresses due to torsion
and shear.
a. If stresses qtu calculated from section(10-3-3-4-2) exceed the value
calculated from equation (10-20) section (10-3-3-4-3) and the
concrete dimensions of the section satisfy the requirements of
section (10-3-3-4-4), then reinforcement to resist torsion consisting
of closed stirrups and longitudinal steel shall be used in addition to
any reinforcement required for bending moments, axial forces and
shear forces according to table (4-5).
b. Lateral reinforcement steel area shall be required to resist torsion in
the form of closed stirrups or welded mesh. The area of the stirrup
leg in section shall be calculated as follows:
M tu . s
A str = (10-21)
f yst
2 Ao cot
s

In rectangular section, equation (10-21) becomes:
M tu . s
A str = (10-22)
f yst
1.7 (x 1 y1 ) cot
s

All remarks in section (4-2-3-5) shall be considered.

The angle is as follows:
10-17
Chapter 10
= 45 for cases where effective prestressing force is less than 40 % of

the tensile strength of flexural reinforcement.
= 37.5 for cases where effective prestressing force exceeds 40 % of the
tensile strength of flexural reinforcement.
c. Additional longitudinal steel A sl
Area of additional longitudinal steel shall be determined from:
Astr . p f yst
Asl = h

cot 2 (10-23)

s f y

Area of additional longitudinal steel shall not be less

than:
f cu
0.4 A cp
c A f yst
A sl min = str p (10-24)
f y / s s h f
y
A str 1 b
The value of shall not be less than
s 6 fy st
Where f cu , fy, fy st in N/ mm 2 .
And A cp , p h as in section (4-2-3-6). In addition, all requirements of
section (4-2-3-5) shall be considered.
10-3-3-4-6 In statistically indeterminate structures where torsion is not
necessary for equilibrium and is due to compatibility, the ultimate torsional
moments in prestressed beams can be reduced to the following value:
A 2 cp f cu f pcc
M tu = 0.316 ( ) 1 +

(10-25)
p cp c
0.25 f cu
Where Pcp as in section (4-2-3-6)
10-3-3-5 Design of anchorage zone

10-3-3-5-1 Anchorage zone
Anchorage zone consists of two zones:
10-18
Chapter 10
a. Local zone: is the rectangular prism (or equivalent rectangular prism for
circular or elliptical anchorage) for concrete surrounding anchorage and
any confining anchorage (figure 10-3)
b. General zone: is part of the element through which concentrated prestressing
forces are transferred to concrete with more uniform distribution and its
length is longer than the greatest cross sectional dimension (figure 10-3).
A- Tension Zones
B- Local and General Zones
C- General Anchorage Zones away from Beam Ends

Fig. (10-3) Anchorage Zones
10-19
Chapter 10
10-3-3-5-2 Design requirements

a. Design shall be performed using prestressing force equal 1.2 the
jacking force and capacity reduction factor according to section (10-3-
1-1).
b. Characteristic compressive concrete strength at tensioning ( f cui ) shall
not be less than the values specified in table (10-2)
10-3-3-5-3 Design methods

10-3-3-5-3-1 Local zone
Local zone shall be designed for bearing strength according to section (4-2-
4)
10-3-3-5-3-2 General zone
1. Ultimate near uniform compressive stresses at end of general zone at
tensioning shall not exceed ( 0.56 f cui c )
2. General zone can be designed by any of the two following methods:
a. Elastic theory using finite element method or equivalent
b. Strut and tie model method according to section (6-11)
3. For developing strut and tie model, all forces acting on general zone
shall be considered. In cases where vertical forces can be neglected,
strut and tie model can be developed for prestressing forces only,
provided that shear requirements of section (10-3-3-3) shall be
satisfied. Figure (10-4) shows illustrative strut and tie models for
different cases, from which lateral tensile force ( Tburst ) due to
prestressing and its location ( d burst ) can be calculated. Steel
reinforcement to resist Tburst shall be used. The sufficient anchorage
length as well as steel end bends shall be checked for safe transfer of
force.
10-20
Chapter 10
(A) Rectangular Beams with Eccentric Compressive Force
(B) Rectangular Beams with Eccentric Compressive Force
(C) I- Shaped Beam with Rectangular section at anchorage zone
Fig. (10-4) Typical Cases for Strut -Tie Models for Anchorage Zones
10-21
Chapter 10
Where:
Psu = Sum of the prestressing forces
a = Width of the anchorage plate
e = Eccentricity of the prestressing force
h = Thickness of the section
10-3-3-6 Post-tensioned tendon anchorage zone

a. Dimensions of end plates in post-tensioned elements shall be
determined to satisfy ultimate limit state of bearing according to
section (4-2-4)
b. Steel reinforcement shall be provided in anchorage zones to resist
splitting and spalling forces resulting due to tendons anchorage and
shall be calculated from elastic theory.
c. For calculating forces and reinforcement in anchorage zone, maximum
jacking force shall be considered.
10-3-3-7 Sections subject to concentric forces and bending

moments.
Sections subjected to eccentric forces shall be designed using limit state
method according to section (4-2-1). Design shall satisfy equilibrium and
strain compatibility. Stresses in prestressing steel shall be considered.
10-3-4 Prestress losses
10-3-4-1 General
10-3-4-1-1 Loss of prestress affects the behavior of prestress
members under service loads. The loss of prestress is divided into two
groups.
a. Immediate loss of prestress due to:
1. Anchorage slip at transfer
2. Elastic shortening of concrete
3. Friction
b. Time dependant losses due to:
1. Shrinkage of concrete
2. Creep of concrete
10-22
Chapter 10
Relaxation of prestressing steel stress.
10-3-4-1-2 When prestressing is applied in stages, losses due to

different prestressing stages shall be considered up to final prestressing
stage.
10-3-4-2 Immediate loss of prestress

10-3-4-2-1 Anchorage slip losses
Effect of slip of prestressing steel at end anchorages shall be
considered in calculating prestress loss p . Reference shall be made to
documented data of prestressing system supplier when calculating this loss
or its extended effect ( xo ) along member length (Figure 10-5)
Figure (10-5) Anchorage Slip Losses of Prestressing forces at Anchorage

Ends
10-3-4-2-2 Elastic shortening losses

For calculating pre-tensioning and post-tensioning prestress losses, effect
of elastic shortening of concrete elements shall be considered as follows:
a. In pre-tensioning, loss in prestress shall be calculated from the
following equation:
10-23
Chapter 10
Ep
f pe = f pci (10-26)
E ci
Where
f pe = loss of prestress due to elastic shortening
E p = modulus of elasticity for prestressing steel.
E ci = modulus of elasticity of concrete at prestressing.
f pci = Initial stresses in concrete at level of prestressing steel
before occurrence of time-dependent losses.
b. In post-tensioning when prestressing is performed at once in one stage,
the loss of prestress is equal to zero. For sequential prestressing, Effect
of sequence of prestressing can be taken into consideration,
approximately, by the following equation:-
1 Ep
f pe = f (10-27)
2 E ci pci
10-3-4-2-3 Friction losses

10-3-4-2-3-1 Jack internal frictional losses
Effect of internal friction of the jack used in prestressing shall be
considered in calculating prestress losses. The value of this loss shall be
calculated based on certified data from jack manufacturer.
10-3-4-2-3-2 Wobble friction losses

Prestress loss due to wobble in ducts of prestressing steel shall be
calculated from the following equation.
Px = Po . e - kx (10-28)
Where:
Po = Prestressing force at jacking end.
X = distance from jacking end in meters (figure 10-6)
Px = Tension force in prestressing steel at distance x from jacking
end.
K = Wobble coefficient per meter of prestress; it depends on type,
texture of internal surface of ducts, forms erection method, and
intensity of vibration during casting.
10-24
Chapter 10
It can be assumed as follows:-

0.0033 per meter of cable for normal cases
0.0017 per meter of cable for rigid ducts tightly fixed to the forms.
10-3-4-2-3-3 Curvature friction losses

a. Prestress loss due to friction of prestressing steel with enclosing
ducts due to curvature of ducts shall be calculated from the
- . x
rps
Px = Po . e (10-29)
Where:
rps = radius of curvature of ducts enclosing prestressing steel
= coefficient of friction which can be assumed as follows:-
0.55 for friction of steel with hardened concrete.
0.30 for friction of steel with steel.
0.25 for friction of steel with lead.
b. For cases satisfying the following condition
.x
0.2

ps
Equation (10-29) can be simplified to :
.x
Px = Po 1 - (10-30)
r
ps
c. For cases satisfying the following condition:-

kx + .x 0.2
rps

The loss in prestressing due to wobble and curvature of ducts enclosing

prestressing steel shall be calculated from following simplified equation
10-25
Chapter 10
. x
Px = Po 1 - kx + (10-31)
rps

Friction coefficients ,k assumed in design shall be verified during

tensioning.
Fig. ( 10-6) Friction losses of Prestressing force
10-3-4-3 Time-dependent losses

10-3-4-3-1 Residual shrinkage losses
a. Prestress loss for concrete elements shall be calculated based on
modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel and strain due to concrete
shrinkage sh
b. Strain due to shrinkage of concrete sh shall be determined from
table (2-7). If enough environmental data are not available, strain
values may be taken from table (10-4).
c. For stage construction of prestressed element (when accurate data
is not available), it may be approximately assumed that half of the
strain due to shrinkage occurs in the first month and that three
quarters of that strain occurs in the first six months after casting.
Table ( 10-4) Shrinkage Losses of Concrete , sh
Prestressing System Shrinkage strain , sh

Pre-tensioning (after 3-5 days of concrete pours ) 300 10-6
Post-tensioning (after 7-14 days of pours)) 200 10-6
10-26
Chapter 10
d. For members with pre-tensioning, loss due to shrinkage shall be

calculated from the following relationship:-
f psh = sh . E p (10-32)
For members of post-tensioning, the loss shall be calculated from

equation (10-32) considering only effective shrinkage that occurs after
transfer of prestressing force.
10-3-4-3-2 Creep losses

a. Prestress loss for concrete elements shall be calculated based on
modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel and strain due to concrete
creep cr
b. Values of creep coefficient required to calculate strain due to
concrete creep shall be taken from table (2-8-b). If enough
environmental data are not available, strain due to concrete creep
may be taken from table (10-5)
Table (10-5) Creep Stain of concrete , cr

cr for each N/mm2 of working stresses
Initial strength of concrete at transfer Prestressing System
of prestressing force, fci
N/mm2
fci 40 fci > 40
(Pre-tensioning)
10 (40/fci ) 48
-6
10 48
-6
After 3-5 days of Concrete
casting
(Post-tensioning)
10-6(40/fci ) 36 10-6 36 After 7-14 days of Concrete
casting
c. If working stresses at any section in the concrete element exceed 1/3

of characteristic compressive concrete strength ( f cu ), the strain
values given in table (10-5) shall be increased by multiplying them
by the factor shown in the figure (10-7)
10-27
Chapter 10
Fig. (10-7) Variations of the Values , as a Function of Working

Stresses
d. for stage construction of prestressed element (when accurate data is

not available), it may be assumed that half of the strain due to creep
occurs in the first month and that three quarters of that strain occurs
in the first six months after casting.
e. For elements with bonded prestressing steel, the prestress loss due
to creep shall be taken as follows:-
. E p
f pcr = f cs (10-33)
Ec
Where is the creep coefficient and shall be calculated as follows:-
cr
= (10-34)
el
Where el is the elastic strain. Value of cr shall be taken from table (10-
5) or section 10-3-4-3-2-c. The value of creep
10-28
Chapter 10
coefficient for elements with pre-tensioning may be taken

equal to 2.0 while for elements with post-tensioning, creep
coefficient may be taken equal to 1.6. The value of f cs shall
be calculated from the following equation:
f cs = f cs* - f csd* (10-35)
Where f * cs = stress in concrete at level of prestressing steel due to

prestressing force at transfer.
f * csd = stress in concrete at level of prestressing steel due to
"near" permanent loads at transfer of prestressing
force to concrete.
10-3-4-3-3 Steel relaxation losses

a. Effect of steel relaxation shall be considered. when calculating
prestress loss,
b. Effect of relaxation of prestressing steel may be neglected if this steel
is prestressed to stress exceeding maximum tensile stresses during
prestressing for a period to be determined by design engineer.
c. Loss due to prestress relaxation shall be calculated from the
f pi (log t ) f pi

f PR = - 0.55 (10-36)
k1 f py

Where f PR = prestress loss due to prestressing steel relaxation
t = time from tensioning in hours (with maximum value of 1000

hours).
f pi = initial stresses in prestressing steel after immediate loss in

prestressing and before time-dependent losses.
f py = tensile yield stress of prestressing steel
k 1 = coefficient depends on type of prestressing steel as follows:
k1 = 10 for normal relaxation stress-relieved steel
10-29
Chapter 10
k1 = 45 for low relaxation stress-relieved steel

10-3-5 External prestressing
10-3-5-1 External post-tensioning of cables shall not be permitted

except for necessarily critical cases such as retrofitting, repair or enhancing
serviceability. Necessary precautions for protection of external prestressing
steel and anchorages from rust shall be implemented.
10-3-5-2 All details for protection shall be shown in working drawings.

Proper protection against environmental conditions during member life
shall be applied according to section (10-7-6-3).
10-3-5-3 In calculating flexural strength, prestressing steel cables shall

be considered unbonded.
10-3-5-4 Necessary precautions to ensure required eccentricity of

external prestressing cable to concrete centroid shall be taken for all
expected cases along concrete element. External prestressing cables shall
be fixed to concrete section in many locations along member between
anchorages to balance targeted load and achieve required profile.
10-3-5-5 Accurate structural analysis methods to calculate strength and

deformation at anchorages and deflecting locations of external prestressing
steel shall be used for different load cases. Critical cases for change of
cable eccentricity due to member deformation under load shall be
considered.
10-3-5-6 Effect of fatigue on both concrete section and external

prestressing cables shall be considered with increasing upper limit and
decreasing lower limit of cyclic load by 5 %
10-4 Analysis of Prestress Structures

Structural analysis and design of prestressed concrete elements of statically
determinate and indeterminate structures shall be performed to satisfy
requirements of ultimate limit state and serviceability limit states.
10-4-1 Statically indeterminate structures
10-4-1-1 Theory of elasticity shall be used to evaluate behavior under
service loads considering reactions, bending moments, shearing force,
axial forces due to prestressing forces, creep, shrinkage, thermal change,
10-30
Chapter 10
axial deformation, restraint of attached structural elements, and

foundation settlement.
10-4-1-2 Ultimate moments on section shall be calculated as the sum of
bending moment due to prestressing force multiplied by load factor of
one in addition to bending moments due to other loads multiplied by
load factors according to section (3-2-1)
10-4-1-3 Approximate methods shall not be used in calculating internal

forces.
10-4-2 Moment redistribution

Moments calculated according to theory of elasticity due to proper
arrangement of ultimate loads on spans shall be permitted to be
redistributed on condition that:
For each load case, equilibrium between internal and external forces
shall be maintained
Allowable reduction in bending moments according to theory of
elasticity (for all load cases), shall not exceed 10%
Ductility requirements at sections where moments are redistributed
shall be satisfied.
10-4-3 Prestressed slabs

10-4-3-1 Equivalent frame method may be used to determine bending
moments and shearing forces according to section (6-2-7-4)
10-4-3-2 More elaborate methods may be used to calculate internal
stresses
10-4-3-3 Flexural strength for any section in prestressed slabs shall not
be less than strength required according to section (10-3-3).
10-4-3-4 Punching shear strength in prestressed slabs

10-4-3-4-1 Critical section of punching shear stresses in prestressed slabs
is located at d/2 from perimeter of concentrated load or reaction
10-4-3-4-2 Nominal Strength of Punching Shear in Slabs
10-31
Chapter 10
10-4-3-4-2-a Ultimate punching shear stress shall be calculated

according to section (4-2-2-3) taking into account effect of bending
according to section (6-2-7-7).
10-4-3-4-2-b Nominal punching shear strength in slabs for any
section shall not be less than that specified in section (4-2-2-3)
10-4-3-4-2-c In slabs satisfying requirements a, b, and c in this
section and is prestressed in both directions, nominal punching shear
strength shall be calculated from following equation:-
f cu
q cup = p + 0.1f pcc + q pv (10.37)
c
d
Where p is the lower of 0.275 or 0.8 + 0.15
bo
f ppc = average compressive stress in concrete at perimeter of
critical section (after all prestress losses) at slab section
centerline.
q pv = shear stress due to vertical components of prestressing

forces (after all losses ) of all cables intersecting critical
section perimeter.
f pe (A p SinBi )
q pv = (10-38)
ps b o d
The following conditions shall be satisfied:-

a. Punching shear strength shall be calculated from equation (10-37)
only for internal columns or for cases where critical section
perimeter is closed.
b. f cu used in this section shall not exceed 40 N/ mm 2
c. compressive stress at slab section centerline f ppc shall not be less

than 0.9 N/ mm 2 in both directions and not to exceed 3.5 N/ mm 2
10-4-3-5 Serviceability limit states in slabs shall be satisfied
10-32
Chapter 10
10-4-3-6 Slab reinforcement details

For distributed and normal live loads, the distance between tendons or
tendon groups in one direction shall not exceed six times slab thickness
or 1.5 m or the larger dimension of duct (for non circular ducts)
Tendons are located such that minimum average stress of prestressing
forces in one tendon after all prestress loss shall be higher than 0.9
N/ mm 2 for slab section attributed to one tendon or group of tendons.
Number of tendons in shear section over column shall not be less than
two in each direction.
10-5 Detailing of prestressing systems

10-5-1 General
in addition to the following requirements, reference shall be made to
structural details of reinforced concrete in chapter seven.
10-5-2 Ultimate limit of cable area in concrete section

Refer to section (10-3-3-1-6).
10-5-3 Concrete tendon cover

Concrete tendon cover is generally determined according to requirements
of durability, fire resistance, and design according to chapters two and four
and Egyptian code for fire Protection .
10-5-3-1 Bonded tendons

10-5-3-1-1 General
concrete cover for bonded tendons shall satisfy requirements of sections (4-
3-2-3) and (9-7) in addition to requirements of section (10-5-3-1-2) for
protection of rebars from rusting and sections (10-5-3-1-3) for fire
protection and requirements shown in figure (10-8).
In pretensioning systems, tendon ends do not need concrete cover. They
are, preferably, cut at concrete member end and insulted with anti rust
paint.
10-5-3-1-2 Concrete cover for rust protection

The concrete cover for rust protection shall be determined based on: the
environmental conditions specified in table (4-11), and mix design and
constituents as shown in table (10-6). Recommendations concerning
10-33
Chapter 10
concrete materials and mixtures detailed in chapter two of this code shall
be applied on data of table (10-6) and requirements of prestressed concrete
in section (10-2). The cement content in the mix shall not be less than 350
kg per cubic meter of concrete in addition to satisfying requirements of
table (2-13).
Table ( 10-6) Minimum Thickness of Concrete Cover
Thickness of Concrete Cover ( mm)
Characteristic Strength of
Less
Concrete, fcu ( N/ mm2) 40 45 More than
than 35
50
First 25 25 25 25
Exposure Second - 40 30 30
Class Third - 50 40 40
Fourth - - 60 50
Free water/ cement Ratio 0.5 0.45 0.4 0.35
Minimum cement Contents 350 400 425 450
( Kg/ m3)
10-5-3-1-3 Concrete cover for fire protection

Recommendations of Tables (2-14-a), and (2-14-b) of chapter two for the
protection of structures against fire and those of the Egyptian Code for Fire
Protection of Structures shall be implemented. Values given in Table (10-
7) shall be considered as minimum.
10-5-3-2 Concrete cover of straight ducts (non curved)

Concrete cover measured from external of ducts shall not be less than 50 mm
or concrete cover specified in section (10-5-3-1) and tables (10-6) and (2- 14-
B) plus diameter of stirrup, or those shown in figures (10-9) and (10-10),
whichever is greater and with due consideration to use concrete cover made
of dense concrete. As for curved cables the requirements of section (10-5-5)
shall be observed.
10-34
Chapter 10
Fig. 10-8 Minimum thickness of concrete cover and the distances

between wires and strands for prestressing systems
Where,
a 2.5 b nominal diameter of aggregate + 5 mm
concrete cover + diameter of stirrups 2
20 mm
C > nominal diameter of aggregate
2
10 mm
Distances a, b and c shall not be less than those specified by the cable
suppliers.
Fig. 10-9 Minimum thickness of concrete cover and the distances

between cable ducts for post-tensioning systems ( Separate Cables)
10-35
Chapter 10
Where,
a minimum concrete cover b Diameter of Duct or 40 mm
in accordance with c Diameter of Duct or 50 mm
section (10-5-3-1)+
diameter of stirrups
Diameter of duct, for, 80 mm
0.75 Diameter of duct, for, > 120 mm
50 mm
a 1.5 Duct diameter a 1.5 Duct diameter a shown in Fig( 10-8. )

b4 1.5 Duct diameter b3 1.5 Duct diameter b2 1.5 Duct diameter
c4 1.2 Duct diameter c3 1.2 Duct diameter c2 1.2 Duct diameter
100 mm 50 mm 50 mm
With due consideration of the requirements of Tables (10-9) & (10-10)
Fig. ( 10-10) Minimum concrete cover and the distances between cable
ducts for post-tensioning systems ( Bundled Cables)
10-36
Chapter 10
10-5-3-3 External tendons

In case of protecting external tendons with a concrete cover, dense concrete
with a minimum stress of 40 N/mm2 shall be used. The thickness of the
concrete cover shall not be less than the cover needed if the cables are
inside the structural concrete section under similar circumstances. The
concrete cover shall be tied using steel reinforcement in the pre-stressed
element verifying that cracks are controlled according to the requirements
mentioned in Chapter 4.
10-5-4 Spacing between pre-stressed cables

10-5-4-1 General
The spacing between the cables or group of cables shall satisfy the
following requirements and by any means not less than the specifications of
the producing companies.
10-5-4-2 Cable spacing in pre-tensioning systems

The cable spacing shall be determined according to Figure (10-8). For pre-
tensioned elements where the steel adheres to the concrete by bonded
tendons, the spacing between wires or strands ends shall satisfy sections
(10-3-3-2) and (10-3-3-5). If these cables are placed apart in 2 or more sets,
the occurrence of longitudinal splitting in the structural element shall be
considered. Reinforcement and stirrups should be added to prevent this
splitting.
10-5-4-3 Cable spacing between in post-tensioning system

The minimum net spacing between the ducts or between the ducts and the
other cables, according to Figures (10-9) and (10-10) or not less than the
following values, whichever is greater:
The maximum aggregate nominal size plus 5 mm.
In the vertical direction: the inside vertical dimension of the duct.
In the horizontal direction: the inside horizontal dimension of the
duct.
Precautions shall be taken to allow enough spacing between the ducts to
allow the movement of the internal vibrators if used. If two or more rows of
the ducts are needed, the spacing between the ducts shall be vertically
continuous, as much as possible, to facilitate the construction works. The
additional requirements stated in section (10-5-5) regarding curved cables
10-37
Chapter 10
shall be taken into consideration. For slabs, the requirements of section (10-
4-3-6) shall be considered.
10-5-5 Curved cables

10-5-5-1 General
When using curved cables in the construction of post-tensioning systems,
the three-dimensional coordinates of the ducts of the cables shall be
defined. The sequence of tensioning the cables shall be defined to avoid the
following:
Breakage of the side concrete cover perpendicular to the plane of the
curvature of the ducts.
Breakage of the cover in the plane of the curvature of the ducts.
Break in the concrete separating the ducts in the plane of curvature
or perpendicular to it.
In addition, the specifications mentioned in sections (10-5-5-2) and (10-5-
5-3) shall be considered and the concrete cover and the cable spacing are
not less than those shown in sections (10-5-3) and (10-5-4).
10-5-5-2 Concrete cover

To avoid the breakage of the concrete cover perpendicular to the plane of
curvature of the cables and in their plane, the cover thickness shall be
chosen according to Table (10-7). In this case, the movement of the ducts
that may result in radial forces perpendicular to the visible concrete surface
shall be prevented using stirrups fixed inside the structural element.
10-5-5-3 Spacing between ducts

a. The spacing between the ducts in the cable curvature plane shall not be
less than the spacing shown in Table (10-8) or the spacing specified
according to section (10-5-4-3), whichever is greater.
b. The spacing between the ducts perpendicular to the cable curvature plane
shall not be less than the spacing specified according to section (10-5-4-
3).
10-5-5-4 Decreasing the spacing between ducts

It is possible to decrease the spacing between the ducts than what is stated
in section (10-5-5-3) in some special cases, according to the approval of the
design engineer, if the smaller diameter cable is tensioned and injected
10-38
Chapter 10
followed by the tensioning and injection of the next diameter cable after 48
hours.
10-5-6 Tendon anchorage zone

Figure (10-11) shows the requirements for the spacing between tendon
anchorages.
10-5-7 Ducts and couplers sizes

10-5-7-1 Duct Sizes
The inside duct diameter shall exceed that of the cable diameter by at least 6-
mm when using a single cable inside the duct. The area of the duct void shall
not be less than twice the cross-sectional area of a group of cables inside the
duct (preferably 2.5 times). Table (10-9) shows the minimum allowable inner
dimensions and thickness for the ducts. For the ducts used in post-tensioning
cables, a minimum straight distance of 50 cm shall exist before the curvature
starts inside the duct.
10-39
Chapter 10
Table (10-7) Minimum concrete cover for cables with curved ducts measured from the side of curvature center
( )
170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 19
( )

1320
11248 10338 9424 8640 7200 6019 5183 4320 3360 2640 1920 1337 960 387 296
0

445 320 220 155 55 50 2
420 350 265 205 145 100 70 50 4
460 375 310 265 220 165 125 90 65 50 6
395 360 330 270 220 185 150 115 95 75 55 8
330 300 275 250 205 165 140 120 100 85 65 50 10
315 260 240 215 200 165 145 125 110 90 75 60 12
260 215 200 185 170 150 130 115 100 85 70 55 14
225 205 190 175 160 140 125 110 95 80 65 55 16
215 190 180 165 150 135 115 105 90 75 65 50 18
205 180 170 155 145 125 110 100 85 70 60 20
195 175 160 150 140 120 105 95 80 70 55 22
185 165 155 145 130 115 100 90 80 65 55 24
180 160 150 135 125 110 100 85 75 65 50 26
170 155 145 130 120 105 95 85 75 60 28
165 150 140 130 120 105 90 80 70 60 30
160 145 135 125 115 100 90 80 70 55 32
155 140 130 120 110 100 85 75 65 55 34
150 140 125 115 105 95 85 75 65 55 36
150 135 125 115 105 90 80 70 60 50 38
145 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 40
Notes
(1) The cable force mentioned in table is the maximum force existing in cables placed in ducts with the sizes shown in table (taken as 75% of the cable characteristic strength).
(2) If the duct contains profilers or spacers between the cables and the use of these profilers or spacers will cause the concentration of the radial forces, the values shown in table
shall be increased.
(3) It is possible to decrease the given cover versus the inside diameter of the duct and the radius of curvature shown in Table by the ratio of the square root of the cable force if it
is less than the value given in Table on condition of satisfying clauses (10-5-3-1-2) and (10-5-3-1-3).
10-40
Chapter 10
Table (10-8) Minimum Spacing Between The Ducts Axes In The Plane Of The Curved Ducts
( )

170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 19
( )
13200 11248 10336 9424 8640 7200 6019 5183 4320 3360 2640 1920 1337 960 387 296

960 700 485 350 140 110 2
940 785 610 480 350 245 175 70 55 4
1045 870 730 630 525 410 320 235 165 120 60 38 6
940 855 785 655 545 470 395 305 240 175 125 90 8
815 750 685 630 525 440 375 315 245 195 140 100 80 10
800 680 625 570 525 435 365 315 265 205 160 12
785 585 535 490 450 375 315 270 225 175 140 14
600 510 470 430 395 330 275 235 195 160 16
535 455 420 380 350 290 245 210 180 18
480 410 375 345 315 265 220 200 20
435 370 340 310 285 240 22
400 340 315 285 265 24
370 320 300 280 260 26
345 28
340 30
32
34
36
38
340 320 300 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 140 140 100 80 60 38 40
Notes:
(1) The cable force mentioned in table is the maximum force existing in cables placed in ducts with the sizes shown in table (taken as 75% of the cable characteristic cable strength).
(2) Spacing between ducts must not be less than double the inside diameter of the duct.
(3) If the duct contains profilers or spacers between the cables and the use of these profilers or spacers will cause the concentration of the radial forces, the values shown in table
should be increased and if necessary use steel reinforcement between the ducts. Steel reinforcement may be used between ducts, if necessary.
(4) It is possible to decrease the shown spacing versus the inside diameter of the duct and the radius shown in Table by the ratio of the forces in the cable if it is less than the values
shown in Table on condition of satisfying clause (10-5-4-3).
10-41
Chapter 10
10-5-7-2 Couplers
Couplers shall only be used in the locations shown in the drawings or as
approved by the design engineer of record. It shall not be permitted to have
couplers in more than 50% of the cables at the same section. In addition, no
other couplers shall be allowed (for uncoupled cables) except for distance
greater than 1.5 meters measured in the longitudinal direction of the cables
relative to beams less than 2-meters height or 3.0 meters for beams more
than 2-meters height. The couplers shall be chosen to satisfy the ultimate
resistance stated for pre-tensioning steel without exceeding the expected
deformation of the coupler or for pre-tensioning steel. The couplers shall
not reduce the extensibility of the cables and shall be placed in ducts that
allow movement during tensioning and be provided with the means that
allow complete injection for all the coupler components.
10-5-8 Construction documents
10-5-8-1 Presentation of the construction documents

The contractor shall present the construction documents to be used during
the work to the design engineer before the work begins by sufficient time
for revision and approval. It should be noted that the approval of the design
or checking engineer on these drawings does not alleviate the contractor
from the responsibility of preparing them.
10-5-8-2 Documents including the construction documents

The execution documents referred to in the previous item include the
following:
a. Complete details of the system used including the specifications of the
used cables, anchors, ducts, used equipment, cable tensioning method,
working stresses, anchoring stresses and cable elongation under loads
due to tension.
Symbols:
E = smaller dimension of the tendon anchorage from the manufacturers
catalogue.
D = larger dimension of the tendon anchorage from the manufacturers
catalogue.
ao = minimum allowable spacing between tendon anchorage axes (taken from
the manufacturers catalogue).
ao > (D or E) + 30 millimeter
10-43
Chapter 10
bo = minimum allowable spacing between the axis of the tendon

anchorage and the edge of the concrete (taken from the manufacturers
catalogue).
a = actual horizontal spacing between the tendon anchorage axes.
b = actual horizontal spacing between the tendon anchorage axis and
the edge of the concrete.
a = actual vertical spacing between the tendon anchorage axes.
b = actual vertical spacing between the tendon anchorage axis and the
edge of the concrete.
c = spacing between the tendon anchorage and the edge of the concrete
(according to the following table):
10-44
Chapter 10
Anchorage tendons distributed over Anchorage tendons distributed on a single

several horizontal and vertical lines vertical line
Consider the following: Consider the following
a > ao, a > ao b > 1.5 bo
b > bo, b > bo 2ba>original tensile force/fcu
ba > 1.6 bo2 ba > 1.6 bo2
ba > 1.6 bo2
aa>1.5 original tensile force/fcu
Original 500 500-1000 1500-3000 3000-4000 > 4000

tensile
force (kN)
Spacing c 30 50 70 80 100
(mm)
Figure (10-11) Spacing between anchorage tendons
10-45
Chapter 10
Table (10-9) Minimum inside dimensions and minimum allowable thickness for
ducts*
Type of Number Corrugated Corrugated Rigid Steel Rigid Steel

pre-stressed of wires steel thin steel thin ducts***,**** ducts***,****
steel or ducts** ducts**
braids
forming
the
cable
Internal Thickness Internal Thickness

Diameter (mm) Diameter (mm)
(mm) (mm)
7 mm 9 40 0.4 --- ---

diameter 14 46 0.4 --- ---
Wires 18 50 0.4 --- ---
22 60 0.4 --- ---
30 65 0.4 76 2
54 90 0.6 89 2
84 110 0.6 108 2
Braids: 7 50 0.4 55 2
nominal 12 65 0.4 76 2
diameter 18 80 0.6 84 2
12.5 mm or 31 105 0.6 108 2
12.9 mm 55 140 0.6 139 2
Braids: 5 50 0.4 55 2
nominal 8 65 0.4 76 2
diameter 12 80 0.6 84 2
15.2 mm or 19 95 0.6 101 2
15.7 mm 37 130 0.6 139 2
* In cases not mentioned in the table, use the nearest equivalent value
** The duct curvature diameter is not less than 100 times the inner diameter or
the value specified by the manufacturer, whichever is bigger
*** The minimum curvature diameter for the duct is not less than 3 meters - used
under special conditions for cables with small radii or for external tendon ducts
**** In case of using plastic ducts, the duct internal diameter should be according to
the table and the minimum duct thickness is 3 mm.
10-46
Chapter 10
b. The structural calculations prepared by the contractor based on the

system he shall follow, illustrating the differences between the
preliminary design done by the design engineer and the contractor
design regarding the dimensions of the concrete sections, number and
location of cables as well as the steel reinforcement. The calculations
shall be clearly written showing the items of the code of practice on
which the design was based.
c. The executive drawings shall be drawn to a suitable scale, sufficient to
show all the details needed for construction, clearly showing all cables,
their types, locations, and three-dimensional coordinates (relative to the
center of the cables section). Additionally, the locations and
specifications of the anchorage and tying tendons. Comprehensive
details about the steel reinforcement and the concrete section shall be
shown illustrating the locations of any other parts that may be in the
concrete section along the complete length of the element and at the
fixation areas such as supports or anchorages such that these drawings
guarantee there is no conflict between the pathways and locations of
these parts. The values of the design friction coefficients u, k shall be
shown on the drawings.
10-6 Inspection and quality control

The provisions of Chapter 8 shall be applied to pre-stressed concrete
works. Attention shall be given to the quality of the concrete including its
strength when transferring the pre-stressed force and the quality of the steel
reinforcement. Assurance the pre-stressing force, injection quality, vapor
treatment quality (if found) and safety during the construction such as the
process of cable tensioning. The following additional items shall be
considered.
10-6-1 Concrete quality

a. A sufficient number of concrete cubes shall be poured for compressive
strength testing during the transfer of the pre-stressing force. This is to
ensure the characteristic strength at the times required by the
consulting engineer. Samples shall be taken on each pouring day or
when the element differs such that it shall not exceed 100 m3 of
concrete in continuous working durations.
b. The concrete compressive strength shall be tested before applying
tension to the cables. The compressive strength test results shall satisfy
the required compressive strength during the transfer of the pre-
stressing force. Any test result shall not be less than 85% of the
10-47
Chapter 10
required compressive strength. If the required strength shall not be

satisfied, the compressive strength shall be tested at a later time.
c. If the requirements in items (8-9-3) and (10-2-1-3) are satisfied, the
concrete shall be considered to meet the characteristic strength grade
required while loading during construction.
10-6-2 Supervision and quality control of the injection mortar
a. The quality control steps and requirements shall be applied on the
materials of the injection mortar including the cement, filler materials,
admixtures, and water. The consistency slump test shall be performed
on fresh mortar over suitable durations, not less than 3 times each day.
Continuous visual inspection shall be maintained during the day.
b. The compressive strength of mortar shall be carried out according to the
standard specifications. Samples shall be taken at suitable intervals
during the day and for different injected elements.
c. The mortar compressive strength shall satisfy the required strength
such that the result of any test is not less than 85% of the required
strength.
10-6-3 Inspection and quality control of pre-stressed steel
In addition to the testing and inspection certificates accompanying the pre-
stressed steel, quality control tests shall be performed. The pre-stressed
steel shall meet the requirements of the international standard specifications
according to which it was manufactured. The wires and braids shall be
inspected after unfolding from the rolls it was brought on to ensure that
they are straight and free from deformation and bending. All steel must be
free from pits, adhering materials such as dust or oils. If the pre-stressed
steel is left in ducts without stressing for more than 5 weeks, the steel shall
be inspected again for rust.
10-6-4 Inspection of ducts and cables
a. The ducts shall be inspected upon receipt. Any ducts with constrictions
or holes shall be excluded. Ducts shall be inspected after installation
according to drawings and the strength and rigidity of the duct supports
shall be checked. Inspection of the quality of the insulation of the ducts
at the edges and couplers so mortar would not get inside and affect
tensioning the cables shall be made. Compressed air - with maximum
pressure of 2 N/mm2 and 1 N/mm2 for horizontal and vertical ducts,
respectively, while monitoring the air pressure - shall be used to ensure
the ducts are not clogged.
10-48
Chapter 10
b. Tension shall be gradually applied to each cable using the required

design force. This shall be achieved by defining the actual elongation of
cable in site and comparing it with the computed elongation. Any
displacement in the cable end connectors shall be considered. The
minimum accuracy for elongation readings shall be 2 mm. The tensile
force shall be measured from one end using a calibrated device (reading
accuracy not more than 1.5%).
c. For short elements or when using braids with 19 or more wires, it is
preferable to check the tensile force in the cables using a force meter.
10-6-5 Calibration of equipment for tensioning cables
Elongation measurement and cable tensile force measuring devices are
calibrated before use and every 6 months thereafter under normal
conditions or more frequent according to the consulting Engineer. The error
in the accuracy of these devices shall not exceed the allowable limits stated
in the Egyptian Standards for equipment calibration.
10-6-6 Inspection of concrete elements after load and element transfer
a. Ensure that the concrete element shall be free from deformations or
cracks after the load transfer. The maximum element camber shall be
measured and compared with the allowable limits.
b. For pre-cast units, ensure the element shall be free from deformations
or cracks after transfer to its location in the structure. Inspections of
the connectors between the pre-stressed elements to attached and/or
carrying elements shall be made.
10-6-7 Concrete tests

Refer to sections (8-9-4) and (8-9-5).
10-6-8 Durability tests for elements and concrete structures
Section (8-9-6) shall apply to pre-stressed structures and concrete elements.
10-7 Construction
10-7-1 General
10-7-1-1 Reference shall be made to Chapter Nine in addition to the
requirements mentioned in this chapter.
10-7-1-2 Construction shall be carried by contractor well experienced with
the prestressing system used, and his experience shall be approved by the
consultant and the designer before commissioning. The contractor shall
10-49
Chapter 10
insure that all personnel dealing with prestressing, grouting and anchoring
the tendons are highly skilled professionals in their areas and upon to the
approval of the consultant based on their training and experience
certificates.
10-7-1-3 Contractor shall submit all documents mentioned in section
(10-5-8) and the quality assurance plan according to section (10-7-9).
Construction shall follow these documentations after receiving the approval
from the consultant and the designer of record.
10-7-1-4 Materials used shall comply with the specifications and
requirements given in Chapter Two, and shall be tested before construction
and periodically according to requirements stated in Chapter Eight.
10-7-1-5 The following documents shall be submitted before
construction for the approval of the consultant and the designer:
a -Prestressing system assurance certificate approved from authorized
parties (original certificate).
b -Experience certificate for working personnel.
10-7-2 Prestressing program

10-7-2-1 Prestressing shall not be applied until the concrete achieves
suitable compressive strength capable of safely withstanding the acting
forces, taking into consideration locations of force application. Table (10-
10) gives the allowable minimum compressive strength for concrete at the
time of prestressing application. Compressive and tensile stresses in
concrete shall be calculated and shall not be more than the limit values
given in section (10-3).
Table (10-10) Minimum allowable compressive strength for

prestressing application
Minimum Compressive
Concrete Grade
Strength (N/mm2)
30 26
35 30
40 32
45 36
50 40
55 44
60 48
10-50
Chapter 10
10-7-2-2 Prestressing shall be conducted according to a schedule which

shows the sequence of prestressing the tendons in addition to the value of
the prestressing force, direction and location. The values of friction factors,
slipping values, the time for form removal as well as stresses induced due
to prestressing shall be verified in the schedule. Contractor shall submit this
schedule prior to the commencement of prestressing.
10-7-2-3 Prestressing might be applied earlier in stages in special cases

with the condition that the compressive strength of the concrete is not less
than 75% of the values given in section (10-7-2-1). The compressive
strength of the concrete shall be verified through standard compressive
strength testing. The prestressing force acting on the tendons for each stage
shall not exceed 35% from the allowable stresses. Also, the stresses on
concrete shall not exceed the values stated in table (10-2), where, fcui is the
characteristic strength of concrete at the stage of transferring the
prestressing force to the concrete measured through standard testing of
specimens at the time of prestressing application. If the compressive
strength is higher than the expected values, the prestressing force might be
proportional by increased.
10-7-2-4 If prestressing shall be applied in stages, losses that occur in
each stage shall be accounted for until the final prestressing.
10-7-3 Tendons
10-7-3-1 All precautions shall be exercised during storage and handling
of tendons to prevent any damage. As a minimum requirement tendons
shall be stored above the ground with protection against humidity, weather,
and any materials that might react with the tendons and from welding
sparks. The materials used in covering and protecting the tendons shall be
chemically stable with the tendons, and provide full protection.
10-7-3-2 Welding and heat treatment such as galvanization shall not be

performed on tendons and without violating section (10-7-3-5) with respect
to cutting.
10-7-3-3 The outer surface of the tendons and the interior surface of the
ducts shall be clean from rust, dust, oil, grease, paintings and or any
harmful materials.
10-51
Chapter 10
10-7-3-4 Wires and strands shall be delivered in such a way to ensure

its straightness during unrolling. Minor straightening might be used on site
if required and under full supervision. Also, bars shall be straight and in
case of minor twisting they might be manually straightened on site under
full supervision. Bars with twisted screwed ends shall not be used and shall
be cold straightened.
10-7-3-5 Cutting tendons to required length and finishing their ends

shall be conducted using high speed rotating discs or friction saw or any
other mechanical method that shall not negatively affect tendon properties.
10-7-4 Fixing tendons and ducts

10-7-4-1 Prestressing tendons and ducts are to be accurately fixed in
locations specified in drawings. The tolerance in position for tendons, ducts
and duct former shall not exceed 5mm. In case of slabs and sections with
thickness less than or equal to 300mm the tolerance shall not exceed +2
mm.
10-7-4-2 Tendons and ducts and their components shall be fixed in a
way to prevent their movement due to prolonged or over vibration or
concrete weight during casting or worker and construction movements.
Fixation shall be in such a way as not to increase friction between tendons
during tensioning process.
10-7-4-3 Ducts splices (or couplers) shall be securely locked to prevent

mortar or concrete leakage inside. Also, the ducts ends shall be closed and
protected after prestressing and injection. Splices (or couplers) in adjacent
ducts shall be apart by more than 300mm.
10-7-4-4 Ducts shall be equipped with ventilation openings at all high

points, and grouting openings at all lower positions, unless the duct
curvature is small or the duct is horizontal. Table (10-11) gives the
minimum inner diameter for grouting and ventilation pipes.
Table (10-11) Minimum inner diameter for grouting and ventilation*

pipes
Number of Wires Minimum Diameter for Grouting Pipe

Prestressing Steel
or Strands in (mm)
Type
Tendon Grouting Pipes Ventilation Pipes
7mm wires 9-30 20 20
54 26 20
10-52
Chapter 10
84 33 26
Strands with 7 20 20
nominal diameter 12 20 20
12.5mm or 12.9mm 18 26 20
31 33 26
55 40 33
Strands with nominal 5 20 20
diameter 15.2mm or 8 20 20
15.7mm 12 26 20
19 33 26
37 40 33
* Values in the table shall be used if the duct length is equal to or less than 1200 times
its inner diameter. In case the duct is longer, the inner diameter for the grouting and
ventilation pipes shall be taken the next following value (corresponding to the bigger
number).
10-7-5 Tensioning Process

10-7-5-1 General
10-7-5-1-1 Wires and strands which shall be used in a single process and
shall be taken from the same consignment. The tendon shall be labeled at
its end with the consignment number type and number of wires in the
tendon. Twisted tendons or loose strands shall not be permitted.
10-7-5-1-2 All necessary precautions shall be taken to protect personnel,
property, and equipment from sudden energy release from the prestressed
tendons in case of any damage.
10-7-5-1-3 The following requirements shall be applied at the time of
prestressing the tendons:
1 -Tendons shall be securely fixed in the tensioning jack.
2 -In case of prestressing more than one tendon at the same time they shall
be equal in length measured from the fixation point to the elongation
gauge.
10-7-5-1-4 Personnel in charge of tensioning shall confirm that tensioning
process is designed and executed in such a way it is securely fixed and
tension force is applied gradually without any secondary stresses in
tendons, anchorage or concrete.
10-7-5-1-5 Force in tendons shall be measured during tensioning wither
directly by load measuring devices, or indirectly by measuring the
compression in jacks Elongation measuring devices shall be available to
measure elongation in tendons or any movement of tendons in the gripping
10-53
Chapter 10
devices. Calibration of load and elongation measuring devices shall be

carried out according to section (10-6-5).
10-7-5-2 Pre-tensioning
10-7-5-2-1 In pre-tensioning process, necessary methods shall be used to
completely hold the tension force in the tendons during the period of
tensioning and transferring the force. Transfer of stress shall be gradually
done.
10-7-5-2-2 In case of straight tendons and using longitudinal lines to
apply pre-tensioning force, special pieces shall be distributed through the
tendon path to prevent tendon movement during casting. These pieces shall
permit longitudinal movement of tendons to allow force transfer to
concrete through the whole length. In case of using single mould, the
mould shall be rigid enough to transfer pre-tensioning force without any
torsion to the mould.
10-7-5-2-3 In case of using deflected tendons and single tendons, the
fixing pieces shall have a diameter more than five times the wire tendon
diameter, and more than ten times the strand tendon diameter, and the angle
of curvature shall not exceed 15 degrees.
10-7-5-3 Post-tensioning
10-7-5-3-1 Tendons arrangement
1 - Tendons shall be arranged in such a way not be sharply bent or curved
which will result in breaking the tendons, or the concrete or the tendon
ducts.
2 - In case it shall not be possible to apply post-tensioning to wires and
strands at the same time, consideration shall be taken that spacing
elements are stiff enough not to be moved during simultaneous post-
tensioning.
10-7-5-3-2 Anchorages
1 - Anchorages shall comply with international standards for prestressing
system. Their design and fixation shall allow uniform stress
distribution over the concrete at the end of the concrete element and to
preserve the prestressing force acting under permanent and changing
loadings and impacts.
10-54
Chapter 10
2 - Anchorages shall be of the split wedge and barrel type. They shall be
manufactured from materials which shall not allow the strain in the
barrel to move the wedge until these wedges yield sufficient lateral
force to strongly hold the tendons, or the wedges will cause extra force
on the tendons at or before it reaches its maximum path.
3 - Anchorages suitable to the prestressing system shall be used taking
into consideration full compliance with regulations and
recommendations of the manufacturer with respect to installation in
concrete elements and the necessity to maintain the cleanliness of the
anchorage holding surfaces before applying tension force. Tension
force shall be applied evenly and gradually to avoid sudden stress to
tendons or anchorage.
4 - Tendons slippage during gripping shall be in accordance to the
instructions of the supervising party. The actual slip for each tendon
shall be recorded, and after gripping the tendon the tension force
acting by the loading device shall be reduced gradually.
5 - Anchorages shall be protected from rust by all necessary means.
10-7-5-3-3 Deflected tendons for external prestressing

The radius of the deflector connected to tendons shall not be less than 50
times the tendon diameter. The angle of shaping the tendon shall not
exceed 15 degrees. If the radius of the deflector is less than 50 times the
tendon diameter or the shaping angle is more than 15 degree, a test shall be
conducted to calculate the loss in the force and the necessary correction
shall be applied accordingly.
10-7-5-3-4 Tendons tensioning

1 - Load shall be applied to tendons until the required elongation and/or
load is reached. Slipping of tendons at the non-jacking end shall be
taken into consideration. Measurement shall not start until no sagging
in the tendons is confirmed. Force in tendons calculated from the
measured elongation and that measured from the loading jack gauge
shall not differ by more than 6% of the lower value. If the difference is
more than 6% all precautions shall be considered to reduce the
difference.
2 - In pre-tensioning process all measurements shall be recorded in a log
book which will at least include value of pre-tensioning force, its
direction and location. Irregular measurements shall also be recorded
10-55
Chapter 10
and brought to the attention of the designer engineer and the

supervising team to make necessary corrections. If deviation is more
than the required theoretical stress by 5%, all necessary precautions
shall be considered to keep the deviation from increasing.
3 - In case of applying tension or construction at several stages, the
designer engineer shall determine the tension stages and the value of
load for each stage.
10-7-6 Protection and bonding of tendons using injection

10-7-6-1 General
Tendons shall be protected from damage, corrosion and fire and in addition
they shall be tied to the structure using injection.
10-7-6-2 Protection of inner tendons
Inner tendons shall be tied to the concrete element by injection of cement
grout or cement mortar (cement and sand) according to injection
precautions stated in section (10-7-8).
10-7-6-3 Protection of external tendons
External tendons shall be protected from mechanical damage and corrosion
by encasing the tendons with dense concrete or dense mortar with sufficient
cover. Other corrosion resistant materials and with sufficient hardness
might be used for protecting the tendons. Relative movement between the
concrete element and the protective casing shall be taken into consideration
in choosing the protection system. This movement shall be due to change in
forces, stresses, creep, relaxation, drying shrinkage and thermal shrinkage.
10-7-7 Protection of anchorage
All necessary precautions for protecting anchorage shall be applied. High
strength mortar shall be cast between the anchorage and the concrete
element.
10-7-8 Grouting
10-7-8-1 General
In post-tension prestressing systems, injection is used to protect tendons
from corrosion and ensure the transfer of stresses between tendons and
concrete element.
10-56
Chapter 10
10-7-8-2 Inspection of ducts

Ducts shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials. Ducts shall
be strong enough to resist stresses and concrete weight. Sudden change in
diameter and path of ducts shall not be allowed. Ducts shall be equipped
with openings for ventilation and grouting with the minimum dimensions
stated in table (10-11), and spacing between openings shall not exceed
15m. Before casting, ducts shall be inspected to check the couplers
integrity especially those at the anchorages. Any inspection method might
be used after the approval of the supervising engineer.
10-7-8-3 Injection process

Ducts shall be injected as soon as the tensioning process is complete to
prevent the corrosion of the tendons. Injecting mortar shall be used within
30 minutes after its mixing, except in case of using retarding admixtures.
Injection shall be performed in such a way to ensure complete filling of the
ducts. Injecting pumps with adequate power shall be used with an injection
rate of 6 cubic meters to 12 cubic meters per minute for horizontal ducts so
that the injection shall be steady, slow and continuous to avoid segregation
especially in congested cross sections. Ventilation openings shall be closed
simultaneously during the filling of the duct while maintaining a pressure
of 0.5 N/mm2 for five minutes after the closure of the last ventilation
opening. For vertical ducts an injection pump with an injection rate of 2
meters to 3 meters per minute with a pressure not more than 2N/mm2 shall
be used.
10-7-9 Quality assurance for prestressing works

The contractor shall submit in writing a detailed quality assurance plan
including all the previously stated sections in addition to the following:
1 -Execution steps to all works included in the scope of the contractor job
in the project in the area of prestressing or supplementary works.
2 - In case of executing the structure or tendons tensioning in stages, the
contractor shall submit plan and detailed drawings to show the structure
segment to be cast, the tendons to be tensioned, the tensioning force and
the elongation for each stage, as well as the calculations to ensure that
the structure did not de-bond from the forms during the tensioning
process.
3 - A list of equipment including its accuracy and the system and
calibration certificate for the equipments used in calibration.
10-57
Chapter 10
4 - Test results on materials used from certified laboratories approved by

supervising party.
5 -Site safety regulations especially during tendons tensioning process.
6 - Storage of materials on site to protect them from moisture or damage
or corrosion.
7 - Detailed plan for testing concrete and mortar during casting and
regulations to be followed in case results did not comply with
requirements.
8 - Detailed plan of regulations to be followed to ensure the concrete
cover of the ducts, and the ducts position before and during casting.
Also, checking the fixation of ducts and tendons in position during
installation of reinforcing steel and casting of concrete or form
erecting shall be included in the detailed plan.
9 - Non destructive test on duct path shall be conducted by the contractor to
confirm the full injection of the duct with grout.
10 - Detailed plan on casting procedure, timing, equipment, precautions to
protect plastic concrete from cracking, and precautions during casting
highly congested reinforcement sections, as well as alternate power
sources to use on site.
11 - Detailed plan on concrete curing including procedures that will be
used to protect anchorage from curing water.
10-58
Egyptian Code for Design and Construction of Concrete Structures ECP 203 -2007
Appendix I
APPENDIX (I)
(SI) SYSTEM METRIC SYSTEM (KG.CM) CONVERSIONS
A) UNITS OF (SI) SYSTEM.
B) CONVERSION FROM METRIC TO (SI) SYSTEM.
C) CODE EQUATIONS IN METRIC SYSTEM (KG.CM).
Appendix I
( A)
UNITS OF (SI) SYSTEM
Quantity Unit International System

Meter m
Centimeter cm
Length
Millimeter mm
kilometer km
Gram g
Kilogram kg
Mass
Ton t
Milligram mg
Second s
Minute min
Time
Hour h
day d
Degree o
/
Planar Angle Minute
//
Second
Liter L
Volume Milliliter mL
Meter cube m3
Meter square m2
Area
Millimeter square mm2
Newton N
Force
Kilo Newton KN
Newton / Millimeter square N/mm2
Stress (Mega Pascal Mpa)
Kilo Newton / meter square KN/m2
Temperature Degree co
B) CONVERSION COEFFICIENTS FROM METRIC SYSTEM TO (SI)
SYSTEM:
metric System SI system

kilogram force = 9.81 Newton
kilogram force . meter = 9.81 Newton / meter
kilogram force / meter = 9.81 Newton / meter
kilogram force / centimeter square = 0.098 Newton / millimeter square
kilogram force / meter square = 9.81 Newton / meter square
kilogram force / meter cube = 9.81 Newton / meter cube
0.102 kilogram force = 1.00 Newton
0.102 kilogram force . meter = 1.00 Newton . meter
0.102 kilogram force / meter = 1.00 Newton / meter
10.2 kilogram force / centimeter Square = 1.00 Newton / millimeter square
0.102 kilogram force / meter Square = 1.0 Newton / meter square
0.102 kilogram force / meter cube = 1.0 Newton / meter cube
Note:
For simplicity:
(1.0 kilogram force = 10 Newton) is considered when converting equations in
the Code.
Appendix I
C) CODE EQUATIONS BY METRIC SYSTEM (KG.CM):
Table (4-5)
Lateral reinforcement for tension and shear resistance
q tu 0.19
f cu
(kg / cm )
2
q tu > 0.19
f cu
c
(kg / cm )
2
qu<qcu Minimum shear reinforcement Reinforcement to resist qtu.

according to item (4-2-2-1-6)
qu>qcu reinforcement to resist reinforcement to resist both qtu,
(qu qcu/2) (qu- qcu/2)
Appendix I
Table (5-1)
Allowable (working) stresses in concrete and steel
Working stress based on

Stress Type Symbol characteristic strength of
concrete (kg/cm2)
Characteristic strength of concrete fcu 200 250 300
Axial compression (e = emin) f co* 50 60 70
Flexure or compression with large

f c** 80 95 105
eccentricity.
Shear ***
Concrete shear resistance
without reinforcement in slabs and footings qc 8 9 9
without reinforcement in other members qc 6 7 7
With web reinforcement in all members
(shear and torsion). q2 17 19 21
Punching shear q cp 8 9 10
Steel ****
1. mild steel 2400/3500 1400 1400 1400
2. steel 2800/4500 1600 1600 1600
3. steel 3600/5200 fs 2000 2000 2000
4. steel 4000/6000 2200 2200 2200
5. welded 4500/5200 plain 1600 1600 1600
or deformed 2200 2200 2200
* Represents the maximum axial compressive stress on section under

working loads.
** The stresses are for beams and slabs deeper than 20 cm. Allowab
stresses shall be reduced than the given values by 15, 20, 25 and
30 kg/cm2 for slabs with thickness 20, 12, 10 and 8 cm respectively.
*** Items (4-5) and (5-5) shall be taken into account.
**** Steel stresses shall be reduce to fulfill cracking limit state
(item 4-3-2) if applicable.
Appendix I
Table (5-2)
Lateral reinforcement for torsion and shear resistance
qt 0.13
f cu
c
(kg / cm )
2
qt > 0.13
f cu
c
(kg / cm ) 2
q qc min. shear reinforcement ratio Reinforcement to resist qt

(item 4-2-2-1-6)
q > qc Reinforcement to resist (q q c/2) Reinforcement to resist both qt, (q q c/2)
Table (10-2)
Allowable chesses in concrete (kg/cm2)
Item Case
1 Allowable stresses in concrete due to bending moments immediately after transfer of
prestressing to concrete (before occurrence of time dependent losses).
Maximum compressive stress 0.45 fcui
Maximum tensile stresses except at ends of 0.7 f cui
simply supported beams.
Maximum tensile stresses at end of simply 1.4 f cui
supported beams.
2 Allowable stresses in concrete due to bending moments under working loads (after all
time dependent losses).
Maximum compressive stresses due to 0.35 fcu
prestressing plus permanent loads.
Maximum compressive stresses due to 0.40 fcu
prestressing plus all loads.
Maximum tensile stresses in precompassed Case a Zero
tensile zone due to prestressing plus all loads. Case b 1.4 f cu
Case c 1.9 f cu >/ 40 kg/cm2
Case d 2.7 f cu
3 Allowable stresses in concrete due to axial compressive stress

Maximum compressive stress 0.25 fcu
Appendix II
APPENDIX II
VALUES OF MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF PRESTRESSING

STEEL IN ACCORDANCE WITH INTERNATIONAL CODES
Appendix II
Table (1)
Mechanical properties of stress relived Wires in American standard
ASTM A 421
Nominal Tensile Strength Yield strength

diameter N/mm2 (N/mm2) **
(mm) WA type BA type WA type BA type
4.88 1725 - 1465 -
4.98 1725 1655 1465 1407
6.35 1655 1655 1407 1407
7.01 1620 1620 1377 1377
Table (2)
Mechanical properties of stress relived 7-Wires standards *
in American Standard ASTM A 416
Nominal Tensile Strength Yield strength

Nominal
diameter (KN) (KN)
area (mm2
(mm Grade 250 Grade 270 Grade 250 Grade 270
6.35 23.22 40.0 - 34.0 -
7.94 37.42 64.5 - 54.7 -
9.53 51.61 89.0 102.3 75.6 87.6
11.11 69.68 120.1 137.9 102.3 117.2
12.70 92.90 160.1 183.7 136.2 156.1
15.24 139.35 240.2 260.7 204.2 221.5
* Relaxation percentage is determined after 1000 hour in wires and

low relaxation strands.
** Yield strength shall not be less than 90 % of tensile strength in
case of wires and low relaxation strands.
Appendix II
Table (3)
Mechanical Properties Of Prestressing Cold drawn Wires in British
Standards* Bs 5896
nominal diameter Tensile strength Yield strength (N/mm2)

(mm (N/mm2 (proof stress 0.10%)
4.0 1670 1386
4.0 1770 1469
4.5 1620 1345
5.0 1670 1386
5.0 1770 1469
6.0 1670 1386
6.0 1770 1469
7.0 1570 1303
7.0 1670 1386
Relaxation percentage in determined after 1000 hour for both normal and low
relaxation wires .
Appendix II
Table (4)
Mechanical Properties of Prestressing strands in British Standards*
nominal nominal tensile proof strength

Strand
diameter Area strength 0.10% Standard
type
(mm) (mm2) (KN) (KN)
9.3 52.3 92.0 78.0 Bs 5896
Standard
11.0 71.0 125.0 106.0
7-wire
12.5 94.2 164.0 139.0
strands
15.2 138.2 232.0 197.0
8.0 38.0 70.0 59.0 Bs 5896
Super 9.6 55.0 102.0 89.0
7-wire 11.3 75.0 139.0 118.0
strands 12.9 100.0 186.0 158.0
15.7 150.0 265.0 225.0
Drawn 12.7 112.0 209.0 178.0 Bs 5896
7-wire 15.2 165.0 300.0 255.0
strands 18.0 223.0 380.0 323.0
18.0 210.0 370.0 319.5 Bs 4757
19 wires 25.4 423.0 659.0 560.15
strand 28.6 535.0 823.0 699.55
31.8 660.0 979.0 832.15
Relaxation percentage in determined after 1000 hour for both normal and low
relaxation strands .
Table (5)
Allowable stresses for different cases of prestressed concrete
Maximum allowable stresses on

Case section after all based due to Classification Comments
prestressing plus all loads
fc t = 0
Maximum allowable
all elements subjected to repeated or dynamic loads and
Cracking limit
stresses in tension
a Full prestressing elements of section four according to table (4-11)
fct 0.44 f cu 4.0 Mpa

solid and flat slabs.
b Uncracked section Elements of section three table (4-11)
Prestressed elements with unbounded reinforcement
0.44 f cu < f ct 0.60 f cu < 4.0 MPa

section (4-3-1-3), Equation 4-64 fct =
c Transition
0.6 f cu for f cu = 40 MPA fct = 3.79 Mpa
d Partial Prestressing 0.6 f ct < f ct 0.85 f cu

NOTATIONS
APPENDIX III
NOTATION
NOTATION
a
NOTATIONS
rectangular stress Depth of the equivalent

a block
a Short side of rectangular bearing surface
concentrated load Distance between the
a and face of the support
a Shorter effective span of slab
Nominal max. Diameter of bars max or one
and .half max. nominal size of aggregates
a or ( max size of aggregates + 15 mm )
Which is bigger
a height of Fixing plate in the considered
direction
a Actual horizontal distance between axes of
Fixing plats
A Long length of footing
A Area of that part of cross section between
flexural tension face and center of
gravity of gross section
a Effective depth of cross-section
corresponding to bending moment Mx
As Area of Secondary reinforcement
a,b,c Distance as shown in fig.(10-8)
a Actual vertical distance between axes of
Fixing plates.
a1 -Suspended short span of slab
A1 -Loaded bearing area
the Maximum area of the portion of
supporting surface that is geometrically
A2 similar to and concentric with the loaded
area
Ac concrete -Cross- sectional area of
Ac -connection surface area
Acef Effective concrete area in tension
Area enclosed by outside
Acp perimeter of concrete cross section
including area of openings
Acreq Area of concrete section required by
calculation
reinforcement Area of main flexural steel
Af in corbels
Ag Gross area of concrete section
Horizontal reinforcement in corbels and
Ah deep beams
b
NOTATIONS
- Area of effective section in splice sector

Aj in a plane parallel to the Steel plane
perpendicular to Shear plane
Area of concrete core enclosed by the
Ak spiral stirrups
Maximum depth of the equivalent
amax rectangular stress block
Area of tensile force reinforcement
An
required
Ao area enclosed by shear flow path
ao Min. allowable distance between Fixing
plates axes.
Area enclosed by centerline of the
Aoh outermost closed transverse torsion
reinforcement
Aps Area of prestressing reinforcement in
tension zone
Area of non-prestressed tension
As
reinforcement
As Area of non prestressed bonded Steel in
members where unbonded prestressed
Steel is used.
Required area of longitudinal
As1
reinforcement for torsion resistance
Asb Area of bent bars
Asb Cross section area of Stirrup or bent bars
-Area of longitudinal steel bars in section
Asc
subject to compressive forces
- Area of reinforcing Steel perpendicular
Asf
to Shear plane.
Asf -Area of shear- friction reinforcement
Asl -Additional, longitudinal reinforcement
area
Aslmin -Minimum amount of additional
longitudinal reinforcement area
- Area of reinforcement in the zone with
Asm
concentrated reinforcement of footing
- Max. allowable reinforcing area in
Asmax
reinforced Sections in tension Side only.
- Man. allowable reinforcement ratio in
Asmin
sections Subjected to bending moments.
Asp - Cross section area of Spiral reinforcing
c
NOTATIONS
Stirrup.
Asprovie - Area of actual existing reinforcing Steel.
d
Asrequir - Calculated required area of reinforcing
ed Steel.
Ass - Area of Steel profile cross Section.
Ast -Area of stirrups resisting shearing forces
Ast - Cross section area of Stirrups branches
- Total cross section area of Stirrups
including perpendicular branches Within
Ast
the distance S and perpendicular to
dimension y1.
- Min. area of web reinforcement in
Astmin
beams.
-Area of one leg of stirrups resisting
Astr
torsion moments
At - Area of Steel section.
-Vertical web reinforcement in deep
Av
beams
B Nominal section dimension
-Width of a rectangular section , web, ribs,
b or box section or width of web section in
form of T or L.
B -Width of compression flange of T-section
b -long side of rectangular bearing surface
b - Sum of breadths of webs in box Section.
B - Breadth of flange
B - Breadth of web
b - Max. Slab dimension.
b - Effective long span
b - Breadth of webs.
b - Min dimension of torsion element.
b - Dimension of rectangle column.
B - Breadth of horizontal wall support
Short dimension of footing or length of
B
column Section
b - Width of strip
d
NOTATIONS
- Max. Diameter of bars max or

b one and half max. Nominal Size of
gravel, which is bigger
B -Bottom reinforcement
b - Breadth of Section in case of
rectangular Section.
b - Actual Horizontal distance
between axis of Fixing plate and
concrete edge.
b - Actual vertical distance between
axis of Fixing plate and concrete
edge.
b1 -Suspended long span
-Length of punching shear critical
b1 section measured in the loaded
span direction
b1 - One of the dimensions of the
rectangle Steel column.
-Length of punching shear critical
b2 section measured perpendicular to
the loaded span direction
b2 - One of the dimensions of the
rectangle Steel column.
-Width of compression face of
bc
beam
- Dimension of the column
bc measured perpendicular to the
beam.
- Effective width of flat slab
be transferring negative bending
moments
- Breadth of Strip transferring
be
bending moment.
bo - Perimeter of critical Section.
-Perimeter of critical section for
bo
punching shear
e
NOTATIONS
bo - Min. allowable distance between axis of Fixing

plate and concrete edge.
- limit bond Stress between concrete and
f bu
reinforcing Steel.
- Breadth of connection between precast part
bv
and the part casted in Site.
bw - Breadth of effective Section of connection
bw - Breadth of web.
-Distance from extreme compression fiber to
c
neutral axis
C - torsion constant
c -Thickness of solid floor cover
c - Concrete cover for bars.
c - Distance between fixing plate edge and
concrete edge
-Dimension of rectangular, or equivalent
rectangular column measured in the direction
c1
of the span of flat slabs for which moments are
being determined
-Dimension of column Section in analysis
c1
direction.
-Dimension of column Section in direction
c2
perpendicular to analysis direction.
c2 - Connection depth
CAB - Dimension defined in Figure ( 6-15 )
- Depth of the part applied to compressive
cbalanced stresses equivalent to balanced reinforcement
of the Section.
CCB - Dimension defined in Figure ( 6-15 )
-Maximum allowable distance from extreme
cmax compression surface to neutral axis in singly
reinforced sections subject to flexure
D -Dead loads
d -Effective depth of cross-section
-Diameter of the largest circle that can be drawn
D
inside column cross section
d - Effective depth of slab
D -Diameter of circular column
D -Diameter of Steel circular column
d - Effective depth of wall cross- section
f
NOTATIONS
d - Thickness of footing
d - Depth of beam
d - Total depth of composite element
d -Distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of compression reinforcement
D - Max dimension of fixing plate
-Diameter of the concrete core enclosed by the
Dk
centerline of spiral stirrups
dp -Distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of prestressed reinforcement
dp - Effective depth of prestressing Steel
- Nominal value of loads due to lateral pressures
E
or internal Forces due to them.
e -Eccentricity of compression force
e -Eccentricity of axial load
e -Clear distance between webs
E -Modulus of elasticity
e -Eccentricity of prestressed force
E - Min. dimension of Fixing plate
Ec -Modulus of elasticity of concrete
Ec.I -Flexural stiffness
Eci -Modulus of elasticity of concrete at time of
initial prestress
- Modulus of elasticity of concrete at beginning
Ect
of loading
- Min limit for the value of eccentricity of axial
emin
load
emin -Minimum eccentricity
Ep -Modulus of elasticity of prestressed
reinforcement
Es -Modulus of elasticity of steel reinforcement
Esoil -Modulus of elasticity of soil
fc - Compression stress
-Allowable working stress in compression of
concrete sections subject to bending moments,
fc or eccentric compressive forces with large
eccentricity
fcd -Stresses due to permanent loads without using
load factors at the section edge where tensile
stresses exist under the action of external loads
g
NOTATIONS
fci -Strength of concrete at time of initial prestress

-Allowable axial compressive working stresses
fco for e < 0.05t.
-Allowable working stresses in axial
fco
compression of little eccentricity
fcs* -Stress in concrete at the level of prestressing
steel at time of transfer
fcsd* -Stress in concrete at level of prestressing steel
due to permanent loads at time of transfer
fct(M) -Tensile stresses due to bending moment
-Tensile stresses in concrete due to axial -----
fct(N)
tensile forces
fctr -Cracking-limit tensile - stresses of concrete
fctr -Cracking-limit tensile - stresses of concrete
fcu -Characteristic strength of concrete
fcui - Characteristic strength of concrete at time of
initial prestress
fm -Target mean strength
fo Axial stress
fpcc -Compressive stress in concrete at section
centroid or at the flange bottom face when the
section centroid lies inside the flange
fpce -Compressive stresses in concrete due to
effective prestressing force only at the section
face where tensile stresses exist under the
action of external loads
fpci - Initial Stresses in concrete which is contact to
prestrssing Steel before occurs of losses
depending on time
fpe -Effective stress in prestressed reinforcement
(after allowance for all prestress losses)
fpi - Initial Stresses in prestrssing Steel after occurs
of immediate losses in prestressing
immediately and before occurs of losses
depending on time.
fppc - Average compressive strength in concrete on
circumference of critical Section (after occurs
of all prestressing losses) at middle of Slab
Section.
fps -Stress in prestressing reinforcement
h
NOTATIONS
fpu -Specified tensile strength of prestressing

reinforcement
fpy -Specified yield strength of prestressing

reinforcement
-Stress in prestressing in the Tension Side of the
Section after cracking and which is calculated
fs
according to a cracked Section under effect of
working loads.
fs - Allowable working Stresses in Steel.
- Allowable working Stresses in Steel used in
fs
Stirrups
- Allowable working stress of steel
fs
reinforcement
-The stress in the tension reinforcement
calculated on the basis of a cracked section
fsr
under the loading conditions causing first
cracking
ft - Allowable direct Tension Stress in concrete
- yield strength or proof strength of
fy
reinforcement.
fy - Yield Strength of reinforcing Steel
fyp -Yield strength of spiral stirrups.
fysc - Yield Strength of reinforcing Steel
fyss - Yield Strength of Steel Section
fyst -Yield strength of stirrups
- Yield Strength of Steel Stirrups carrying
f yst
torsion moment not exceeding 400 N/mm2
-Effective depth or span of a deep beam,
g
whichever is smaller
G - Shear modules of rigidity
g -Uniformly distributed working dead loads
-Uniformly distributed working dead load in unit
g
area
g - Uniformly distributed dead load in unit length
GC - Torsion rigidity of rectangular Section
gu -Ultimate uniformly distributed dead loads
h -Height of column
H -Clear height of wall
H - Clear wall height between Supports
h - Total thickness of section in the considered
i
NOTATIONS
direction
Hb - Total height of the building over Foundation
Surface
He -Buckling length or effective height of column
in the considered direction
He effective height of wall
hL -Height of lower column
Ho -Clear height of column
hu -Height of upper column
hw height of wall
I Moment of inertia (Rigidity)
i -Radius of gyration of column cross section
I -Moment of inertia of gross concrete section
about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
Ib -Moment of inertia of beam cross- section
-Moment of inertia of foundation or foundation
IB
frames and shear walls per unit strip width
Icr -Moment of inertia of cracked concrete section
Ie -Effective moment of inertia
Iec -Equivalent moment of inertia of column
-Moment of inertia of gross concrete section
Ig
-Moment of inertia of gross concrete section
Ig
IL Moment of inertia of lower column cross
section
Isc -Moment of inertia for longitudinal
reinforcement
Iss -Moment of inertia of Steel Section
It -Moment of inertia of Steel Section
Iu -Moment of inertia of upper column cross
section
JcyJcx -Property of the assumed punching shear critical
section analogous to polar moment of inertia
K -Coefficient for bending moment calculation
K -Dynamic loads
k - Value to be From Fig. ( 6-2)
K -Effective length factor for wall
- Modulus of sub grade reaction (Winkler
K
coefficient)
K -Wobble friction coefficient of prestressing
j
NOTATIONS
tendons per meter length

-A coefficient which takes into account bond
K1
properties of the reinforcing bars
k1 -Coefficient depending on kind of prestressing
Steel
-A coefficient which takes into account the
K2
strain distribution
Kb -Stiffness of beam
Kec - Bending Stiffness of equivalent column
-Coefficient of grade of confinement depending
Kj
on Surrounding beams
KL -Stiffness of lower column
Km -Bending Coefficients in continuous beams
Kq -Coefficient for shear force for beams
Kr -Relative rigidity coefficient
Ku -Stiffness of upper column
L -Live loads
-Distance between point of Inflection for beams
L
and slabs or Length of cantilever
L -effective Span for one way slabs
L -Longest Span dimension of slab
-effective length in simple Span slabs or
L distance between point of Inflection in
continuous slabs
L -Length of beam Span between axes of supports
L -Distance between joints
L - Longitudinal anchorage
-Length of mechanical joint or Length of welded
L
joint
L -Distance between axes of supports
L - span Length in the direction parallel to the
required calculated Steel reinforcement
-Breadth of rectangle reinforcing Stirrup
xl
measured between the two axes of the Stirrup
L1 - span used for calculating moment M1
-Length of span in the direction where moments
L1 are being determined, measured center to
center of supports
-Average length of the two spans adjacent to the
L1a
column in the analysis plane
k
NOTATIONS
L2 - span used for calculating moment M2

-Breadth of the span in the direction
L2 perpendicular to the considered Span direction
measured between axes of columns
-length of Span in direction perpendicular to
L2
direction of analysis
L2 -Distance between two points of Inflection
-Average length of the two spans adjacent to the
L2a
column perpendicular to the analysis plane
-Additional length of reinforcing bars at
La
supports or at points of inflection
La -Length after critical Section
Lb -Span of beam
Lc -As defined in Fig. ( 6-41 )
Ld -Development length
Lf1 -Horizontal distance between lateral support and
free end
Lf2 -Average horizontal distance between lateral
supports
Ln -Clear span of beam
Ln -Clear span
Ln -Clear span between faces of supports
-Distance with heavy stirrups in columns of
Lo
seismic- resistant frames
-Distance with heavy stirrups in columns of
Lo
seismic- resistant frames
Lo - Distance having more Stirrups
Lt -Transfer length in prestressed concrete
Lw -Wall Length
-Shorter Length of Span measured From
Lx
Columns axes
-Longer Length of Span measured From
Ly
Columns axes
-Sum of ultimate bending moments of columns
Mc in plane of analysis in the area of beam
column connection
-Sum of ultimate bending moments of beams in
Mg the plane of analysis in the area of beam
column connection
M -Safety margin of concrete mix design
M cr -Minimum cracking moment of concrete
l
NOTATIONS
- negative bending moment resistance for

Mu
section
Mx -Effective uniaxial design moment about the x-x
axis for the case of biaxial bending
My -Effective uniaxial design moment about the y-y
axis for the case of biaxial bending
-Negative moment calculated for one of the two
M1
Slabs
M1 -Min. edge bending moment in the column.
-Difference between bending moments at axis of
M Support and at Face of Support for Slabs
Supported on Walls or beams poured
M2 -Negative moment of adjacent Slab
M2 -Max. edge bending moment in the column
M1 , M2 -Bending moments at column ends resulting
from structural analysis
-Maximum value of bending moment in member
Ma
at the stage of computing deflection
-Ratio of length between points of inflection in a
ma strip of the Slab Loaded in span direction a to
total span length a
Ma -Bending moments in Slabs in both directions
Madd -Additional bending moment induced by
buckling of column which accounts for the
slenderness of column
-Ratio of effective length between inflection
mb points of loaded span to total span length in
direction b
Mb -Bending moments in Slabs in both directions
-Bending moments between two adjacent Slabs
Mc in case of different values of negative bending
moments on two Sides of contact line
Mcr - Min. bending moment causing cracks in
concrete
Mf -Total moments transferred to column
Mf -Edge bending moment in beam at its framed
connection with exterior column assuming the
beam to be totally fixed at both ends
Mi -Primary moment
Mmax -Max bending moment in Section due to
external Loads
m
NOTATIONS
-Min negative bending moments at mid Span of

Mmin
continuous beams loaded with heavy live loads
Mmin -Negative middle moments in internal Spans
-Maximum bending moment in simply
Mo
supported beam
Mpr -Probable moment when plastic hinge is Formed
Mt -Torsion moments
Mtu -Ultimate torsion moment
Mtu -Torsion moment on edge beam
-Max. limit bending moment for Section
Mu
Strength
-Resisting strength of Section for positive
Mu
bending moments
Mu -Ultimate bending moment
Mu -value of max moment at the critical Section in
shear
-Maximum admissible value of ultimate bending
Mumax
moments in singly reinforced sections
M-ve -Negative bending moments
Mx -Bending moment about the x-x axis
My -Bending moment about the y-y axis
n - Modular ratio
N -Summation of vertical loads
n -Number of stories
n -Number of column per floor
Nc -Value of tension Forces resulting From
Working loads ( Dead and live )
Nu -Ultimate tensile force
p -Pitch of spiral stirrups
P -Centric working load
P -Distributed live load
P Concentrated load
P -Uniformly distributed live load per unit area
p - Uniformly distributed live load per unit length
P -anchorage on perimeter
Pa1, Pb1 -Loads in directions a and b, respectively
pb -Load of balancing compression of Section
Pc -Perimeter of concrete section exposed to drying
pcp -Outside perimeter of concrete cross section
PH
n
NOTATIONS
-Perimeter of the center line of outermost closed

Ph
transverse torsion reinforcement
Po -Prestressing tendon force at jacking end
psu
ps -Coefficient of reducing max Strength of
prestressing Steel
-Max Strength of column Section in
Pu
compression
Pu -Max centric force applied on the Section
Pu -Uniformly distributed live load
Px -Prestressing tendon force at a distance x from
jacking end.
q - Nominal shear stress in beams
Q -Shear force
-Design Shear force transfer to column when the
Q adjacent spans are loaded with the total design
Load
q*u max -Max allowable shear stresses in pestressed
concrete sections
qc - Allowable working concrete shear strength
-Allowable Working Stresses in concrete for
qcp punching shear
qcu -Concrete ultimate shear strength
qcu -Max concrete strength in shear
qcup -Concrete ultimate punching shear strength
qd -Shear Strength resulting from working
permanent loads without using coefficient of
increasing Loads
Qe
qi Stresses resulting from max shearing forces due
to external loads accompanying max bending
moment - Mmax
qp -Punching Shear Stress
qpv -Shear stress due to vertical components of
prestressing forces after all losses of
prestressing
qst -Nominal shear stress provided by stirrups
-Nominal shear strength provided by shear
qsu
reinforcement
qsub -Nominal shear strength provided by bent bars
qsuh -Sharing of vertical web reinforcement in max.
o
NOTATIONS
stresses of shear strength in deep beams

qsus -Nominal shear strength provided by stirrups
Sharing of horizontal web Steel rein for cement
qsuv
in max stresses of shear strength in deep beams
-value of Shearing Stresses resulting from
torsion moment on which the effect of max
qtu
torsion moment which causes leases stresses
may be neglected
qtu -Nominal shear stress due to torsion
qu -Nominal ultimate shear stress
Qu -Max shear stresses resulting from dead and live
loads
quc -Shear Strength of concrete section
Quhr -Max horizontal design shear strength
-Max allowable shear stress in reinforced
qumax
concrete sections
qumax * -Nominal shear stresses for prestressed concrete
elements subjected to shear forces
qup
Qup -maximum Punching shear force
-Maximum shear force for beams with variable
Qur
depth
-Punching shear strength resulting from moment
qx Mx and considering qx coefficient of moments
transferred by torsion
-Punching shear strength resulting from moment
qy My and considering qy coefficient of moments
transferred by torsion
-Aspect ratio for rectangular (rectangulartity
r
coefficient)
Rb -Non- dimensional value used to calculate as
in figure ( 6-26-b )
-Ultimate flexural strength coefficient for singly
Rmax
reinforced sections in tension
rps -Radius of curvature of ducts containing
prestressing reinforcement
S - Standard deviation
Max value for force resulting from earthquakes
S
or internal forcing resulting from them
s -Spacing between stirrups in axis direction
S -Spacing between stirrups
p
NOTATIONS
-Initial loaded width for the uniform load

equivalent to a concentrated load in the
S1
direction perpendicular to the main
reinforcement
-Initial width uniformly loaded for an
S2 equivalent concentrated load in the direction
parallel to the main reinforcement
-Spacing between horizontal web reinforcement
Sh
in deep beams
so -Spacing between stirrups in distance Lo
so -Spacing between stirrups
so -Maximum stirrups spacing in seismic resisting
columns
-Coefficient used in calculating wk depending on
srm
strain in steel reinforcement and other factors
-Spacing between web vertical reinforcement in
sv
deep beams
- Nominal value of loading due to effect of
temperature, creep, shrinkage differential
T
settlement and internal forces produced from
them
t -Total depth section in eccentricity direction
t -Overall thickness of concrete member
t thickness of slab
t Longer dimension of torsion element
t -Longer dimension of rectangular cross-section
t -Thickness of steel section covering the concrete
section
t thickness of wall
T -Transverse anchorage
T Upper reinforcement
t -Time in hours starting at tensioning of
prestressing reinforcement
tv -Virtual thickness of cross- section
t -Side length in buckling plane
T.D.S -Total dissolved salts
-Loaded width in direction perpendicular to
t1
main reinforcement
-Loaded width in direction parallel to main
t2
reinforcement
te -Thickness of the wall of the box section
q
NOTATIONS
equivalent to rectangular section

tf -Thickness of the flange for T and L Sections
tmin -Minimum thickness of slab
ts Minimum thickness of compression slab
ts thickness of slab
-Ultimate load in case of limit state or internal
U
forces produced from them
uv -Percentage of steel for vertical anchorages
V -Coefficient of variation
V -vertical anchorage
-volume of spiral steel reinforcement for unit
Vsp
length of column
Vsp -Ratio of volume of spiral stirrups to stirrup
pitch
-Nominal value of loads due to wind pressure or
W
internal forces produced from it
w -Uniformly distributed load acting on slabs
w -Total load for unit area of span
w -Uniformly distributed slab load on unit area
w -Mechanical percentage of tension steel
reinforcement in concrete section
w` - Mechanical percentage of compressive steel
reinforcement in concrete section
- Coefficient of assurance of achieving cracking
wk
limit
wkmax -Max allowable value for coefficient Wk
wp -Mechanical percentage of prestressed steel
-Ultimate uniformly distributed load acting on
wu
slabs
wu -Ultimate loads
x -Distance from jacking end along prestressing
tendons
xo -Distance of extension of losses effect on
prestressing
-Distance of column core measured from Stirups
y1
axes
-Length of rectangle reinforcing stirrup
y1
measured between the axes of the stirrup
yct - Lever arm
-Yield strength for steel of stirrups resisting
f yst
torsion moment with maximum limit of 400
r
NOTATIONS
N/mm2
- Distance between extreme fiber in tension to
neutral axis of gross section ignoring the
yt
presence of normal and prestressing
reinforcement
s
Committees
APPENDIX IV
STANDING COMMITTEE
MEMBERS
Prof. Dr. Ali Abdel-Rahman YousefChair
Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Mahfouz Mohamed Ibrahim..Vice-Chair
Prof. Dr. Monier Mohamed Kamal.Director
Eng. Ibrahim Roshdi Mehleb
Prof. Dr. Ahmed Kamal Abdel-Khalek
Prof. Dr. Ashraf Hasan El-Zanaty
Prof. Dr. Omaima Ahmed Salah El-Din
Eng. Hosni Ahmed Omer
Prof. Dr. Hamdi Hamed Shaheen
Prof. Dr. Samir Hasan Okba
Prof. Dr. Salah El-Din El-Said El-Metwally
Prof. Dr. Abdalla Abdel-Motaleb Abo-Zeid
Prof. Dr. Ezzat Hasan Fahmi
Prof. Dr. Ali Sherief Abdel-Fayad
Prof. Dr. Amr Ezzat Salama
Eng. Magdi Rizk Abdo
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ibrahim Soliman
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Saeed Essa
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Sameh Helal
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ali Abdel-Salam Barakat
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Nasser Darweesh
Eng. Mohamed Nabeel Helmi
Prof. Dr. Medhat Ahmed Haroun
Prof. Dr. Mashour Ghoneim Ahmed Ghoneim
Prof. Dr. Moustafa Adham El-Demerdash
Prof. Dr. Hani Mohamed El-Hashemi
CONSULTANTS
Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Gafar (deceased)
Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Koresh
Prof. Dr. Shaker El-Beheiry
Prof. Dr. Sherif Helmi Soliman
Prof. Dr. Abdel Rahman Megahed
Prof. Dr. Abdel Karem Atta (deceased)
Prof. Dr. Abdel-Hadi Hosni
Prof. Dr. Abdel-Wahab Abo-Elenen
Prof. Dr. Fatma El-Zahraa El-Refaie
Prof. Dr. Kamal Naseef Ghali (deceased)
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Adawi Nasef
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Hashmi
Prof. Dr. Mahmoud Helmi
TECHNICAL ASSISTANTS
Dr.Ehab Fouad Ibrahim
Dr. Mohamed Ahmed Khafaga
Eng. Tarek Mohamed El-Zanaty
Committees
TECHNICAL COMMITTEES
EXECUTIVE OFFICE COMMITTEE
DRAFTING, REVIEW AND EDITING COMMITTEE
CONCEPTS AND FUNDAMENTALS COMMITTEE
MATERIALS COMMITTEE
DESIGN COMMITTEE
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS COMMITTEE
STRUCTURAL DETAILING COMMITTEE
QUALITY CONTROL COMMITTEE
CONSTRUCTION COMMITTEE
PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE COMMITTEE
DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS COMMITTEE
EXECUTIVE OFFICE COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ibrahim Soliman .Chair

Prof. Dr. Ali Abdel-Rahman Yousef Director
Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Mahfouz Mohamed Ibrahim
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Hashmi
Prof. Dr. Monier Mohamed Kamal
Dr. Tarek Mohamed Bahaa El-Din Technical Assistant
DRAFTING, REVIEW AND EDITING COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Mahfouz Mohamed Ibrahim..Chair

Prof. Dr. Monier Mohamed KamalDirector
Prof. Dr. Omaima Ahmed Salah-El-Din
Prof. Dr. Osman Mohamed Ramadan
Prof. Dr. Ali Abdel-Rahman Yousef
Technical Assistants
Dr.Mohamed Sayd Sayd
Eng.Tarek Mohamed El-Zanaty
Committees
CONCEPTS AND FUNDAMENTALS COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Hashmi.Chair

Prof. Dr. Ali Abdel-Rahman YousefDirector
Dr. Mohamed Sayd Sayd Technical Assistant
Committees
MATERIALS COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Omaima Ahmed Salah El-Din..Chair

Prof. Dr. Samir Hasan Okba...Director
Prof. Dr. Ahmed Diab
Prof. Dr. El-Sayed Abdel-Raouf
Prof. Dr. Gouda Ghoneim
Prof. Dr. Hossam Hodhod
Prof. Dr. Sanaa El-Desoki
Prof. Dr. Sayd Abdel-Baki
Prof. Dr. Sherief Fakhry
Prof. Dr. Adel Ahmed El-Kordy
Prof. Dr. Asem Abdel-Aleem
Prof. Dr. Abdel-Rahman Megahed
Prof. Dr. Ali El Darwich
Prof. Dr. Amr Salah El-Deib
Prof. Dr. Amr Ezzat Salama
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Nagib Abo-Zeid
Prof. Dr. Heba Hamed Bahnasawi
Dr. Ahmed Fathi Abdel-Aziz
Dr. Mohamed Ramadan
Dr. Nadia Nofal
Dr. Amr El-Hefnawi
Eng.Amr El-Dali
Committees
DESIGN COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Kamal Naseef Ghali (deceased)..Chair

Prof. Dr. Ahmed Kamal Abdel-Khalek .Director
Prof. Dr. Ahmed Ragaie Anis
Prof. Dr. Said Younis El-Debeki
Prof. Dr. Sherief Helmi Soliman
Prof. Dr. Ezz El-Din Ramzi Zagloul
Prof. Dr. Omar Ali El-Nawawy
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Said Essa
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Talat Moustafa
Prof. Dr. Nabeel Abdel-Badie Yehia
Prof. Dr. Hani Mohamed El-Hashmi
Prof. Dr. Wahba El-Tahhan
Prof. Dr. Yousef Hashem Hammad
Dr. Alaa Gamal Sherief
Dr. Fathi Abdel-Rahim Saad
Dr. Mona Kamal Nassef
Dr. Sherief El-Zeini
Eng. Tamer El-Afandi
Committees
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Adawi NasefChair

Prof. Dr. Hani Mohamed El-Hashmi ..Director
Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Koresh
Prof. Dr. Osama Hamdi Abdel-Wahed
Prof. Dr. Akram Torki
Prof. Dr. El-Sayed Ibrahim
Prof. Dr. Hasan Mohamed Allam
Prof. Dr. Sherief Ahmed Mourad
Prof. Dr. Adel El-Attar
Prof. Dr. Ezz El-Din Ramzi Zagloul
Prof. Dr. Magdi El-Sayd Kasem
Prof. Dr. Mohamed El-Said Essa
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Hasan El-Zanaty
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ali Abdel-Salam Barakat
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Helmi
Prof. Dr. Mohie El-Din Salah Shoukry
Prof. Dr. Nabeel Abdel-Badie Yehia
Prof. Dr. Wael El-Degwi
Dr. Ahmed Abdel-Latif El-Nadi
Dr. Ayman Hussein Hosni Khalil
Dr. Bahra Said Lotfy
Dr. Mona Kamal Naseef
Dr. Haddad Said Haddad
Dr. Alaa Ibrahim Arafa
Committees
STRUCTURAL DETAILING COMMITTEE
Eng. Hosni Ahmed OmarChair

Prof. Dr. Hamdi Hamed Shaheen.Director
Prof. Dr. Ahmed Mohamed Farahat
Prof. Dr. Osama Hamdi Abdel-Wahed
Prof. Dr. Hatem Hamdi Gheith
Prof. Dr. Sherief Helmi Soliman
Prof. Dr. Magdi El-Sayed Kasem
Prof. Dr. Mohamed Hasan El-Zanaty
Eng. Mohamed Wagdi Hamada
Prof. Dr. Mohie El-Din Salah Shoukry
Prof. Dr. Moustafa El-Kafrawi
Prof. Dr.Hani Mohamed El-Hashmi
Dr. Ahmed Ali Hasan
Eng. Sayd Hussein Sayd
QUALITY CONTROL COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Abdel-Hadi HosniChair

Prof. Dr. Amr Ezzat Salama ..Director
Prof. Dr. Abdel-Rahman Megahed
Prof. Dr. Amr Salah El-Dieb
Prof. Dr. Farouk El-Hakeem
Prof. Dr. Mounier Mohamed Kamal
Prof. Dr. Heba Hamed Bahnasawi
Dr. Hazem Abdel-Latif
Dr. Fatma Ahmed Shaker
Dr. Hossam El-Karmouty
Eng. Sherief Ahmed Khafaga
Committees
CONSTRUCTION COMMITTEE
Eng. Ibrahim Roshdi Mehleb.....Chair

Prof. Dr. Mohamed Ali Abdel-Salam BarakatDirector
Eng. Hasan Nasef
Eng.Hosni Ahmed Omar
Prof. Dr. Shadia El-Ebiari
Prof. Dr. Sherief Mohamed Helmi
Prof. Dr. Adel El-Samadony
Dr. Osama Hosni
Eng. Ashraf Wageih
Eng. Atef El-Bolok
Eng. Abdel-Latif Moubarak
Technical Assistant
Dr. Khaled Soliman
Eng. Mohamed Fouad
Committees
PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Abdalla Abdel-Motaleb Abo-Zeid Chair

Prof. Dr. Ashraf Hasan El-Zanaty..Director
Prof. Dr. Ahmed Sherief Essawi
Prof. Dr. Ahmed Diab
Prof. Dr. Adel El-Attar
Prof. Dr. Mourad Bakhoum
Dr. Ahmed Saleh
Dr. Salah El-Din Fahmi Taher
Dr. Amr Abdel-Rahman
Dr. Tarek Mohamed Bahaa El-Din
Dr. Mohamed Saad El Said Essa
DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS COMMITTEE
Prof. Dr. Amr Ezzat Salama .Chair

Prof. Dr. Moustafa Adham El-Demerdash.Director
Prof. Dr. Shadia El-Ebiari
Prof. Dr. Mounier Mohamed Kamal
Prof. Dr. Hani Mohamed El-Hashmi
Dr. Tamer El-Rakeeb
Eng. Anwar Mahmoud
Committees
TECHNICAL COMMITTEE FOR TRANSLATION
Prof. Dr. Ali Abd El-Rahman Yousif . Chair

Prof. Dr. Ibrahim Mahfouz Mohamed Ibrahim....Vice-Chair& Editor
Prof. Dr.Monir Mohamed Kamal.Director
Prof. Dr.Amr Salah El-Dieb
Prof. Dr.Ashraf Hassan Elzanaty
Prof. Dr.Hosam Abd El-Ghafour Hodhod
Prof. Dr.Mashhour Ghonim Ahmed Ghonim
Prof. Dr.Mohamed Sameh Hilal
Prof. Dr.Othman Mohamed Ramadan
Prof. Dr.Shadia Abd El-Hadi Naga El-Ebiary
Prof. Dr.Wael Mohamed El-Degwy
Dr.Mohamed Helmy Swellam

Egyptian Code 203 2006 English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egyptian Code 203 2006 English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Egyptian Code 203 2006 English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARAB REPUBLIC OF EGYPT

MINISTRY OF HOUSING, UTILITIES

HOUSING AND BUILDING NATIONAL

DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE

EGYPTIAN CODE STANDING COMMITTEE

This document is an unofficial translation of the formalized Egyptian Code

The original document is written in Arabic language which is considered to

Currently, the English translation of the code was technically reviewed by

Subsequently, the translated version of the code shall be presented to the

CHAPTER 2 : MATERIALS AND MIXTURES FOR REINFORCED

2-3-3-4 Drying shrinkage......................................................................... 2-18

CHAPTER 3: GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS 3-1

3-1-1-2 Stability limit state... 3-1

CHAPTER 4: LIMIT STATES DESIGN METHOD. 4-1

4-2-2-3 Punching shear.. 4-21

CHAPTER 5: WORKING STRESS DESIGN METHOD.. 5-1

CHAPTER 6: ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 6-1

6-2-5 Flat Slabs... 6-19

6-4-8-3 Composite sections having structural steel sections inside

6-8-1-3 Design concepts............................................................................ 6-91

6-11-1 Introduction................................................................................... 6-115

CHAPTER 7 : DETAILS OF REINFORCEMENT.......................................... 7-1

CHAPTER 8: QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE OF

8-7-2-2 Determination of the required corrective actions.......................... 8-14

CHAPTER 9: CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.................................... 9-1

9-8 Allowable tolerances in concrete works....................................... 9-16

CHAPTER 10: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 10-1

10-3-3-3 Shear.............................................................................................. 10-13

10-5-4-3 Cable spacing in post-tensioning systems..................................... 10-37

APPENDIX I (SI) SYSTEM METRIC SYSTEM (KG.CM) CONVERSIONS

1-2 Objectives of the code

1-3 Design fundamentals

1 - Limit states design method

1-4 Limit states design method

1 - Ultimate strength limit state:

2 - Stability limit state:

3 - Serviceability limit states

Standard No Standard Title

ES 16581/ 2006 Testing of Concrete Part 1: Sampling

ES 16582/ 2006 Testing of Concrete Part 2: Properties

Testing of Concrete Part 9:

2-2 Properties of materials

2-2-2-2 Aggregate requirements

Table (2-1) Allowable limits for some physical and mechanical

Maximum Allowable Limit

* Properties according to Egyptian Standard Specification, testing procedure

Maximum Allowable Limit

1- Water soluble chloride ion content (Cl-)** 0.04% 0.06%

2- Total sulfate content as SO3 0.4% 0.4%

3- Soundness (expressed as % loss in weight)

* Properties according to Egyptian Standard Specification and/or testing procedure

2-2-3 Mixing and curing water

4 - Drinking water excluding bacteriological requirements- is accepted

9 - Any admixture consignment shall be accepted by conducting

Table (2-3) ES 1899-1, 2, 3/2006 requirements for concrete admixtures

Table (2-3) ES 1899-1, 2, 3/2006 requirements for concrete admixtures (contd)

2-2-5 Steel reinforcement

2-2-5-1 Reinforcing steel types

2-2-5-2 Nominal bar diameters